Participant Handbook TSCM60 Order Fulfillment I SAP ERP -Sales and Services An SAP course -use it to learn, reference it for work

TSCM60 Order Fulfillment I SAP ERP - Sales and Services

Date Training Center Instructors

Education Website

Participant Handbook Course Version: 92 Course Duration: 10 Day(s) Material Number: 50094945

An SAP course - use it to learn, reference it for work

Copyright Copyright© 2009 SAP AG. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose

without the express pennission of SAP AG. The infonnation contained herein may be changed without prior notice.

Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors.

Trademarks Microsoft®, WINDOWS®, NT®, EXCEL®, Word®, PowcrPoint® and SQL Server® arc registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. IBM®, DB2®, OS/2®, DB2/6000®, Parallel Sysplex®, MVS/ESA®, RS/6000®, AIX®, S/390®, AS/400®, OS/390®, and OS/400® are registered trademarks of IBM Corporation.

ORACLE® is a registered trademark of ORACLE Corporation. INFORMIX®-OnLinc for SAP and INFORMIX® Dynamic ServcrTM are registered trademarks of lnformix Soflware Incorporated. UNIX®, X/Open·®. OSF/1®, and Motif® are registered trademarks of the Open Group. Citrix®, the Citrix logo, ICA®, Program Neighborhood·:@, MetaFrame®, WinFrame®, VideoFrame®, MultiWin® and other Citrix product names referenced herein are trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc. HTML, DHTML, XML, XHTML are trademarks or registered trademarks ofW3C®, World Wide Web Consortium. Massachusetts Institute of Technology. JAVA® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. JAVASCRIP'f':&· is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc .. used under license for technology invented and implemented by Netscape. SAP, SAP Logo, R/2, RIVA, R/3, SAP ArchiveLink, SAP Business Workflow, WebFJow, SAP EarlyWatch, BAPI, SAPPHIRE, Management Cockpit, mySAP.com Logo and mySAP.com are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countries all over the world. All other products mentioned arc trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

Disclaimer THESE MATERIALS ARE PROVIDED BY SAP ON AN "AS IS" BASIS. AND SAP EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR APPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, WITH RESPECT TO THESE MATERIALS AND THE SERVICE, INFORMATION, TEXT, GRAPHICS, LINKS, OR ANY OTHER MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS CONTAINED HEREIN. IN NO EVENT SHALL SAP BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECiAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LOST REVENUES OR LOST PROFITS, WHICH MAY RESULT FROl\! THE USE OF THESE MATERIALS OR INCLUDED SOFTWARE COMPONENTS.

g200962141025

About This Handbook This handbook is intended to complement the instructor-led presentation of this course, and serve as a source of reference. It is not suitable for self-study.

Typographic Conventions American English is the standard used in this handbook. The following typographic conventions are also used. Type Style

Description

Example text

Words or characters that appear on the screen. T)lese include field names, screen titles, pushbuttons as well as menu names, paths, and options.

Also used for cross-references to other documentation both internal and external. Exam pie text

Emphasized words or phrases in body text, titles of graphics, and tables

EXAMPLE TEXT

Names of elements in the system. These include report names, program names, transaction codes, table

names, and individual key words of a programming language, when surrounded by body text, for example SELECT and INCLUDE.

Example text

Screen output. This includes file and directory names and their paths, messages, names of variables and parameters, and passages of the source text of a program.

Example text

Exact user entry. These are words and characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation.

Variable user entry. Pointed brackets indicate that you replace these words and characters with appropriate entries.

2009

© 2009 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

iii~

TSCM60

About This Handbook

Icons in Body Text The following icons are used in this handbook. Icon

Meaning

[J

For more information, tips, or background

..

~iv

Note or further explanation of previous point

.&.

Exception or caution

~

Procedures

0

Indicates that the item is displayed in the instructor's presentation.


2009

Contents Course Overview .......................................................... ix Course Goals ........................................................... ix Course Objectives ...................................................... x Unit 1: Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution .......... 1 General Sales and Distribution Structures ........................... 2 Sales and Distribution Structures in SAP ERP ...................... 6 Sales and Distribution Structures of the Model Company IDES, Inc ................................................................... 14 Unit 2: Overview of Sales Processes ................................ 33 Process Overview ..................................................... 34 Sales Processing ..................................................... 42 Shipping Processing .................................................. 45 Billing Document Processing ........................................ 50 Unit 3: Master Data in Sales and Distribution Processes ...... 79 Customer Master ...................................................... 80 Material Master ....................................................... 102 Customer-Material Info Record .................................... 107 Condition Master Data for Pricing ................................. 126 Additional Master Data .............................................. 130 Unit 4: Sales and Distribution Processes- Data Determination and Collective Processing ............................................ 147 Function of the Sales Document Type ............................ 148 Plant, Shipping Point, and Route Determination ................. 151 Shipment Scheduling ................................................ 157 Collective Processing in Sales and Distribution .................. 175 Unit 5: Availability Checks ............................................ 201 Basics ................................................................. 202 Sample Scenarios ................................................... 209 Transportation Processing .......................................... 233 Unit 6: Sales and Distribution Processes with Make-to-Order Production .•.................•...........•................................ 249 Presales Processing ................................................. 250 Function of the Item Category ...................................... 254

2009


v~

Contents

TSCM60

Assembly Processing ................................................ 268

Unit 7: Complaints Processing ...................................... 289 Credit Memo Requests .............................................. 290 Returns ................................................................ 294 Invoice Correction Requests ....................................... 297 Advanced Returns Management. .................................. 316

Unit 8: Analyses for Sales and Distribution Processes ........ 323 Lists and Reports .................................................... 324 Sales Information System ........................................... 341

Unit 9: Company Structures- Customizing ...................... 359 Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution .................. 360

Unit 10: Sales Order Processing .................................... 387 Information Sources and Data Transfer ........................... 388 Selected Entry Aids and Techniques .............................. 396

Unit 11: Controlling Sales Documents ............................. 415 Basic Principles of Business Process Control .................. .417 Controlling Sales Documents- Sales Document Type ........ .421 Controlling Sales Documents- Item Category .................. .431 Controlling Sales Documents- Schedule Line Categories .... .455

Unit 12: Data Flow ...................................................... 475 Data Flow in the Application ....................................... .4 76 Copying Control ...................................................... 492

Unit 13: Special Business Transactions ........................... 501 Special Business Transactions ..................................... 502

Unit 14: Incompleteness .............................................. 519 Incompletion Log ..................................................... 520 Configuration of the Incompletion Procedure .................... 524

Unit 15: Business Partner ............................................. 537 Function and Significance of Partner Functions ................. 538 Configuration of Partner Functions and Partner Function Determination ..................................................... 544

~vi


2009

TSCM60

Contents

Unit 16: Outline Agreements OOOOOOOOOOOOoooooooooooooooooooooooooo .. o561 Scheduling Agreements and Quantity Contracts ................ 562 Value Contracts ...................................................... 568

Unit 17: Material Determination, Listing and Exclusion 0000000591 Material Determination .............................................. 592 Material Listing and Exclusion ...................................... 605

Unit 18: Free Goods oooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooo613 Free Goods ........................................................... 614

Unit 19: Sales Workshopoooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooo629 Sales Workshop: Sales to Employees Scenario ................ 630 Sales Workshop: Bills of Materials Scenario .................... 653 Sales Workshop: Material Determination Scenario ............. 687

Unit 20: Concept and Function of the Delivery Document 0000717 Idea and Function of the Delivery Document.. ................... 718

Unit 21: Basic Organizational Units for the Delivery Process 733 Basic Organizational Units for the Delivery Process ............ 734

Unit 22: Controlling Deliveries 000000000000000000000000000000000000000745 Controlling Deliveries ................................................ 746 Unit 23: The Goods Issue Process Based on the Delivery oooo769 Prerequisites for Creating Outbound Deliveries ................. 770 Creating and Processing Outbound Deliveries .................. 792

Unit 24: Processes and Functions Based on the Delivery 0000 811 Picking Outbound Deliveries ....................................... 813 Packing Processes .................................................. 837 Goods Issue .......................................................... 856 Special Functions for Processing Deliveries ..................... 873

Unit 25: Navigation 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000oooo883 Logon and Screen Design .......................................... 884 Selecting Functions and Personalizations ........................ 894 Help Options .......................................................... 908

Unit 26: Appendix 000000000000oooooooooooo000000000oooooooooooo0000000ooo921 Appendix: Additional Technical Information ...................... 922

2009


vii~

TSCM60

Contents

Appendix: Additional Topics ........................................ 941

Appendix 1:

........................................................... 951

Appendix 2: Menu Paths

........................................... 953

Index ....................................................................... 961

~viii


2009

Course Overview This course provides you with an overview of how the Sales and Distribution process is represented in the SAP ERP system. It introduces you to the most important organizational structures, the master data, and the business processes of the Sales and Distribution application. The course shows the basic business transactions and the master data used, as well as the function of the organizational structure, from sales processing through shipping to invoicing. It also discusses various options for analyzing the data generated during Sales and Distribution processes. After this overview, this course concentrates on the representation of the sales business transactions and the shipping business transaction in the SAP ERP system. Selected business transactions and functions from these areas, as well as the configuration required in this context, are discussed in detail. The content of the training course is explained using different examples and topic-related exercises that allow you to test what you have learnt. This also familiarizes you with the relevant SAP terminology so that you can use the rest of the documentation effectively.

Target Audience This course is intended for the following audiences: Solution consultants who are responsible for implementing order fulfillment

Course Prerequisites Required Knowledge Business knowledge in the area of Sales and Distribution processing Completion of the following e-learning courses: SAP125 SAP Navigation ERPOO! Management Empowered by SAP ERP TERP61 SAP ERP: Introduction to Processes in Sales Order Management

2009


ix~

TSCM60

Course Overview

e

Course Goals

'

'

This course will prepare you to: Learn about the main business processes in Sales and Distribution processing Execute the most important functions in the process chain from the pre-sales phase to the incoming payment in the system Gain an extensive overview of the Sales and Distribution areas as part of the SD component in the SAP system Obtain a more detailed insight into Sales and Distribution functions using selected examples Build up the knowledge needed to implement these functions and be able to use them Acquire knowledge of how to adapt the system using Cu~tomizing settings to meet your own specific requirements in Sales and Distribution

Course Objectives After completing this course, you will be able to: Maintain the key master data in Sales and Distribution, and name and define the required business structures Work with the various documents in Sales and Distribution. Describe the points of contact between Sales and Distribution and the areas of materials management, production (for example, assembly order), and financial accounting Perform analyses for the Sales and Distribution processes Integrate sales in the Sales and Distribution process chain Configure Customizing so that it represents your specific sales requirements Describe the position of shipping within the supply chain Execute the various functions within shipping processing Adapt the system to your requirements for shipping processing


2009

nit 1 Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution Unit Overview This unit describes how a company's Sales and Distribution structures can be mapped in the system. This is illustrated with the model company IDES.

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: Describe sales and distribution structures IdentifY organizational units in the system that are relevant for sales and distribution Describe the essential characteristics of these organizational units Explain the most important relationships between the organizational structures in sales and distribution Describe the sales and distribution structures of! DES, Inc.

Unit Contents Lesson: General Sales and Distribution Structures ........................... 2 Lesson: Sales and Distribution Structures in SAP ERP ...................... 6 Lesson: Sales and Distribution Structures of the Model Company IDES, Inc.................................................................................. 14 Exercise 1: Organizational Structures .................................... 19

2009


1~

Unit 1: Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution

TSCM60

Lesson: General Sales and Distribution Structures Lesson Overview This lesson introduces general sales and distribution structures. which are

described using the example of IDES, Inc.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe sales and distribution structures

Business Example Your company IDES, Inc. is part of the globally operating IDES group. IDES, Inc. produces and sells motorcycles. Assemblies are delivered from plants in Europe and North America. In addition, your company serves the market with assemblies and spare parts. IDES, Inc. usually uses authorized dealers that only sell IDES, Inc. vehicles.

General Sales and Distribution Structures

.\ ·. IDESAG

J

Figure 1: Organizational Structure of IDES Holding Inc.

An important step is to define the organizational structures. It requires thorough analysis of how your organization wants to run its business.


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: General Sales and Distribution Structures

The system demonstrations provided by the instructor and the exercises for this training course use the model company IDES as an example.

1DES means Internet Demonstration and Evaluation System. The consolidated group, the IDES Holding AG, is divided into several independently operating subsidiaries. The companies that are relevant for this course belong to these subsidiaries: IDES AG in Frankfm1 and IDES US INC in New York.

.···~~.~~ :'~-~::l!,.~'-~·~~L-,:':---:'-·1 i I•

.o.i.s.tribution.

~:~~· .•·gr·~~ ~~,-;.fh~c~H;;·,~L~?S~t~~;:il\ ..

~·.·.···.~.·····

it~l~~r~-2--~J~:-··r ~~,._,.L..~-' 1.~

...:-~gj>:':i-~--1:-. · · .'.·.·.• ·.·.·.·.•·.·.· .......'''v.'.·.·.·.·.•,·. i ,,,,',""'''

'

!i

",,,

Figure 2: Sales and Distribution Structures of IDES AG IDES AG has two branch offices for its sales and distribution activities. Materials for different product lines, such as motorcycles or paints, are distributed from Hamburg and Berlin via different distribution channels.

2009


3~

TSCM60


IDES AG ;~ ~~ ~-~----:-~~-----~,

: i:

Sales Berlin

:

.I

;:

!.. •• -------~---- ---~ ~.!

[,~~·Jr DiStribUtion ctro','

Figure 3: Delivery Structure of IDES AG Note: This illustration shows the delivery structure within IDES AG, independently from the system (using general business terms). Before IDES AG confirms an order for a customer, they check from which warehouse distribution center the material ordered is to be delivered and whether sufficient stock is available. The goods delivery is usually organized at these locations. These facilities are not available at every location where products are manufactured. To fulfill urgent customer requests, the warehouse distribution center in Hamburg can arrange express deliveries.

l(r/)j d

~4


2009

C)

I)_

TSCM60

e .

.

Lesson: General Sales and Distribution Structures

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Describe sales and distribution structures

-2-00_9________________________© __2-00_9__S_A_P_A_G_._A_I_Ir-ig_h_ts_r_e-se_N_e_d-.------------------~5~


TSCM60

Lesson: Sales and Distribution Structures in SAP ERP Lesson Overview This lesson introduces organizational elements available in the system for mapping sales and distribution structures.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: IdentifY organizational units in the system that are relevant for sales and distribution Describe the essential characteristics of these organizational units Explain the most important relationships between the organizational structures in sales and distribution

Business Example Your company IDES, Inc. is part of the globally operating IDES group. IDES, Inc. produces and sells motorcycles. Assemblies are delivered from plants in Europe and North America. In addition, your company serves the market with assemblies and spare parts. IDES, Inc. usually uses authorized dealers that only sell IDES, Inc. vehicles.

Overview •

Company code

•

Sales area -+Sales organization -+ Distribution channel -+Division

•

Plant

•

Storage location

•

Shipping point

Figure 4: Organizational Units in Sales and Distribution

Organizational units in the SAP system represent the structure of an enterprise organization. In other words, organizational units are legal and/or organizational units in an enterprise.


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Sales and Distribution Structures in SAP ERP

SAP ERP uses a range of organizational units designed exclusively for mapping sales and distribution processes, such as the sales organization and distribution channel. Other organizational units, such as the company code or plant, are required in Sales and Distribution and other system areas.

The organizational units outlined here are just some of the ones relevant to sales and distribution processes in the system.

Sales ~

~

Company code

e Legal entity and independent accounting unit e At company code level, you create: 7

balance sheets required by law

7

profit and loss statement

Figure 5: Organizational Unit: Company Code For a company code, a complete independent accounting unit can be represented as the smallest organizational unit of external accounting. This includes the entry of all accountable transactions and the creation of all proofs for a legally required individual account closing, such as the balance sheets and the profit and loss statement. Examples of a company code include a company within a corporate group, or a subsidiary.

-2-00_9________________________© __2_0_09__S_A_P_A_G___A_I_Ir-ig-h-ts__ ffi_s_eN--ed-.------------------~7~


Sales organization

TSCM60

I

____ _ j

Responsible for • distributing goods and services •

negotiating sales conditions

•

product liability and rights of recourse

Figure 6: Organizational Unit: Sales Organization The sales organization is an organizational unit in Logistics which groups the enterprise according to the requirements of sales and distribution. A sales organization is responsible for sales and distribution of materials and services. Therefore, it is also liable for the sold products and responsible for the customers' rights of recourse. The sales organization is also used to take, for example, a regional, national or

international subdivision of the market into account. A sales organization is uniquely assigned to a company code. More than one sales organization can be assigned to a company code. To use the sales and distribution functions in the system, you need at least one sales organization. In the sales statistics, the sales organization is the highest summation level. All sales and distribution documents, that is, all orders, outbound deliveries, and billing documents, are assigned to a sales organization.

~8


2009

TSCM60


Sales organization ---==~~-=------·--""""·-·---'

Distribution channel 1

Distribution channel 2

e is a means through which sales materials reach the customer •

represents your strategies to distribute goods and/or services to your customers

•

Examples: wholesale trade, retail trade, internet trade, and so on

Figure 7: Organizational Unit: Distribution Channel

The distribution channel characterizes the way in which goods and services are distributed. Several distribution channels can be assigned to sales organizations. To use the sales and distribution functions in the system, you need at least one distribution channel. For example, you can:

Det1ne responsibilities Carry out flexible price structuring Differentiate sales statistics

Salesorga~

-------Division 1

Division 2

---

Represents a product line Examples: motorcycles, spare parts, services, and so on

Figure 8: Organizational Unit: Division

2009


9~


TSCM60

You can group materials and services with the division. Several divisions can be assigned to a sales organization. To use the sales and distribution functions in the system, you need at least one division. A division can represent a certain product group, for example. Therefore, you can. for example, restrict price agreements with a customer to a certain division. In addition, you can conduct statistical analysis by division.

Sales

organization Distribution

channel Division

Sales areas

Figure 9: Sales Area

A sales area is a combination of the sales organization, distribution channel, and division. It defines the distribution channel a sales organization uses to sell products from a certain division. Each sales and distribution document is assigned to exactly one sales area. This assignment cannot be changed. A sales area can belong to only one company code. This relationship is created by assigning the sales organization. When processing sales and distribution documents, the system accesses various master data depending on the sales area. This master data includes, for example, customer master data, material master data, prices, and discounts. The system also carries out a number of checks concerning the validity of certain entries according to the sales area.

Hint: A simple organizational structure often has more advantages than a complex structure. It simplifies the master data maintenance, for example. You should not define complex organizational structures in order to have detailed reporting options. You are advised to use the fields in the master data screen and documents for this purpose.

~10


2009

TSCM60


Shipping

(Delivering) plant

6{~,1J Plant 3

Storage location

Figure 10: Organizational Units: Plantand,Storage Location

PI w..~l · i '"'-1~]'<::.~/; (JV\ g t:) 1 M vt,

The pla~tis a location where material stock is kept and could, for example, represent a production facility in the system. The plant and storage location are organizational units that can be used by all logistic areas of the system. Materials management is primarily concerned with the material flow. From a materials management point of view, a plant is, above all, a location where material stock is kept. In production, a plant can represent a manufacturing facility. In sales and distribution, a plant represents the location from which materials are distributed and services are provided and corresponds to a distribution C."Jl~r. The relevant stocks are kept here. The plant has a central function in sales and distribution: To use the sales and distribution functions in the system, you need at least one plant. Each plant is uniquely assigned to a company code. ~~

-··--~"·~.~,~--

A plant can be assigned to several combinations of sales organizations/distribution channels, and vice versa.

The plant is essential for determining the shipping point.

2009


11~

TSCM60


Plant 1

Shipping point 1

•

Shipping point

Figure 11: Organizational Unit: Shipping Point

Shipping is an integrated module of sales and distribution processing. The shipping point is the highest-level organizational unit of shipping that controls your shipping activities. Each outbound delivery is processed by exactly one shipping point. The shipping point can be a loading ramp, a mail depot, or a rail depot. It can also be, for example, a group of employees responsible (only) for organizing very urgent deliveries. The organizational assignment of the shipping point is carried out at plant level. More than one shipping point can be assigned to a plant. More than one plant can als()__b~ assigned to a ship.Eill_!LIJ.()illl,..although_~~isis only rec_otnmended for - ······~····· plants that are close to each oth
~12


2009

TSCM60


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: IdentifY organizational units in the system that are relevant for sales and distribution Describe the essential characteristics of these organizational units Explain the most important relationships between the organizational structures in sales and distribution

-20_0_9________________________© __2_00-9--SA_P__A_G_._A_II_r-ig_h_ts_r_e-se_N_e_d-.------------------A1~3~

TSCM60


Lesson: Sales and Distribution Structures of the Model Company IDES, Inc. Lesson Overview This lesson introduces the organizational elements of sales and distribution using IDES, Inc. as an example.

~ ~

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe the sales and"distribution structures of !DES, Inc.

Business Example The use of sales-and-distribution-specific organizational elements is illustrated using IDES, Inc. as an example.

Sales and Distribution Structures of IDES, Inc.

~ ~

Company code 3000 IDES US INC

Sales organization 1000 Frankfurt

Sales organization 1020 Berlin

Sales organization 3000 Philadelphia

Figure 12: IDES Holding AG in the System

IDES Holding AG is a globally operating group. The subsidiaries of IDES Holding AG are organized according to country-specific situations and laws. Two of these subsidiaries are IDES AG in Frankfurt, Germany, and IDES, Inc. in New York.

~14


2009

TSCMSO

Lesson: Sales and Distribution Structures of the Model Company IDES, Inc.

Representation in the system: Company code 1000 IDES US INC Company code 3000 IDES US INC Sales and distribution of IDES AG in Germany is organized at two different sales facilities, each of which has its clearly defined areas of responsibility. Representation in the system: Sales organization 1000 Frankfurt Sales organization I 020 Berlin

~ ~ ' ' ' •

~ .:.·~ .:.~

i

·'·

'' ' .:.~

M-

- - ' ' - - _ , _ - - - ,_ _ -

i:'

1020 Berlin '

'

;··:~.· .· ··~.-:-- ~--: /

.·.· ',•

_,.

'

.,.--;--,...;----------:-' .c. __ , ' ''

.-=7L-~-, r~-"-~--, ;·.::.~~-i~·i.:'.:.~.:--- ·.·,;,-'...:...;_.:-_""'.,.----:___ ~

L

. :: .: .::.20 C!Jain ; 1 22/ndust. .;

,

'

"-~T-''-'-.J L'-'-"'f_,:-'-'1; J:.,.:-.~.:~t~;~~-.--1 L. .,.~~~~l~:~~-j •. •

I

1

I

I

1

r==c,L.,=-, r..,.,-,t-..,.,-,--------'-------.. ,______ J______ "'

. l·· 05Food

! 1 03Pafnt l "--=--'.,...:..J L.:..c.==cc..J' t_:-:__~ ________ j_ !.:~-------.,.-.,.--L Figure 13: IDES AG Sales Areas in the System

Sales and distribution processes in the system are always uniquely assigned to a sales area.

To represent the different ways through which goods reach the customer, the appropriate distribution channels were set up. In this course, those IDES AG sales areas that contain the following distribution channels are used: 12 Resale 14 Service

-20_0_9------------------------©--20_0_9_S_A_P__A_G___A_II_r_ig_h_ts-r-es_e_N_e_d-.------------------1~5~


TSCM60

Appropriate divisions were set up to represent the different product lines. In this course, the sales areas that contain the following divisions are used: 00 Cross-division 02 Motorcycles 08 Services Sales areas were set up based on these sales organizations, distribution channels, and divisions. However, only these combinations were considered in which sales

and distributions processes had to be represented. This includes: Sales organization 1000, distribution channel 12, division 00 Sales organization 1000, distribution channel 12, division 02 Sales organization 1000, distribution channel I 4, division 08

Figure 14: Shipping at IDES AG in the System

Before IDES AG confirms an order for a customer, they check from which delivering plant the material ordered is to be delivered and whether sufficient stock is available. The IDES AG plants include, for example: Plant I 000 Hamburg Plant 1100 Berlin Plant 1300 Frankfurt Plant 1400 Stuttgart

~ "1'6_------------------©~2-00_9_S~A--P_A_G___ A_II_r_ig-ht_s_r-es-e-~-e-d-.------------------------20_0_9

TSCM60


In addition, delivering plants need to have combinations of sales organizations and distribution channels assigned: Plant lOOO Hamburg and plant 1400 Stuttgart are delivering plants for sales organization I 000 and distribution channel 12. Plant II 00 Berlin is the delivering plant for sales organization I 020 and distribution channel 20. Plant 1300 Frankfurt is not a delivering plant for sales and distribution. The delivery is organized by various shipping points which are assigned to the delivering plants: Shipping point I 000 Hamburg processes outbound deliveries from plant I 000 Shipping point II 00 Berlin processes outbound deliveries from plant II 00

-20_0_9------------------------©--20_0_9_S_A_P__A_G_._A_II_r-ig-h-ts-r-es_e_N_e_d-.----------------~1~7~


~18


TSCM60

2009

TSCM60


Exercise 1: Organizational Structures Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: Explain the organizational units and their relevant relationships for sales and distribution Describe the sales and distribution structures of the case company IDES, Inc.

Business Example The case company IDES, Inc. is a globally operating group. They manufacture products (for example, motorcycles and spare parts) of multiple product lines at various locations. These materials, as well as other materials, that are not produced in-house are distributed by several sales facilities using multiple distribution channels.

Task 1: Organizational Units in Sales and Distribution. I.

Organizational units in the system represent the structure of an enterprise organization. Which organizational units represent sales and distribution?

2.

Which organizational unit can you use in the system to represent a sales facility or a sales subsidiary?

Continued on next page

2009


19~


TSCM60

3.

Which organizational unit can you use in the system to represent a means to ship goods to the customer (for example, factmy sales, whole sale trade, or retail trade)?

4.

Which organizational unit can you use in the system to represent different product lines and to group materials (for example, vehicles, accessories, or spare parts)?

/)(d,s:;o.o

5.

Which organizational unit can you use in the system to organize and process outbound deliveries to different locations (for example, loading ramp or rail depot)?

Task 2: Cross-sales organizational units

I.

A corporate group can be divided up into several companies or subsidiaries. Which organizational unit can you use in financial accounting to represent a legal entity and an independent accounting unit in the system? Cv"'- ·


~20


2009

TSCMSO


2.

In a company, you can manufacture and store materials in different places. Which organizational unit can you use in the system to represent a production facility or a distribution center?

for;/

3.

Within a plant, material storage can be divided up according to various locations or rooms. Which organizational unit can you use in the system to represent such a location or room?

Task 3:

I

Assigning organizational units 1.

Which organizational units does a sales area consist of?

$ql.t.J Cl-;f·

Oi.d· Ci(q"AfLf,

j);c>i&:o..-..·

2.

Can you assign more than one distribution channel to a sales organization?

3.

Can you assign a distribution channel to multiple sales organizations?


2009


21~

TSCMSO


4.

Which organizational unit is a sales organization assigned to in order to represent the connection of sales and distribution processes to financial accounting?

5.

Can you assign a sales organization to multiple company codes?

6.

In a sales organization, can you sell materials from multiple delivering plants?

7.

To which organizational unit do you assign a shipping point?

8.

Can you assign a shipping point to multiple plants?

1 b

01 ·

f c. c-... (

c;: s;.(i J~" ....

"I ,D'

L/o't->c cu::? (

.. {

=~ &. """~\N.d A~/fA

11

$(

::;,f;,,cro_,t'.n:c;·!r

.~u> ~~;:p(c ~-;I

-'

•4.


~22


2009

TSCM60


9.

To which organizational unit are storage locations grouped together?

Task 4: Organizational units oflDES, Inc. I.

The subsidiaries of IDES Holding AG are organized according to country-specific situations and Jaws. In Germany, IDES AG is a subsidiary, in the USA, IDES US INC. is a subsidiary. Which organizational unit and number is used to represent these subsidiaries in the system?

2.

Two sales facilities organize the sales and distribution process for IDES AG in Germany (.for this training course). Which organizational unit and number is used to represent the two sales facilities in the system?

3.

Which distribution channels does sales organization 1000 use (for this training course)?


2009


23~


TSCMSO

4.

Which sales areas were set up for sales organization I 000 (for this training course)?

5.

Which plants are assigned to company code I 000 IDES AG (for this training course)?

6.

Which shipping point processes outbound deliveries from plant I 000 Hamburg (for this training course)?

Task 5: Organizational units in the system Each sales document is always assigned to a sales area (sales organization, distribution channel, division).

I.

In the system, check which sales organizations exist for sales order entry for the USA: Write down three examples. Hint: You enter a sales order using the following menu path: Logislics -r Sales and Dislribution- Sales - Order- Create: Place the cursor on the input field for the sales organization and display the possible input values using the F4 input help.


~24


2009

TSCM60


2.

Check in the system, which distribution channels exist for sales organization 1000: Write down three examples.

Hint: Place the cursor on the input field for the distribution channel and display the possible input values using the F4 input help.

3.

Check in the system, which divisions exist for sales organization 1000 and for distribution channel 12. Write down three examples.

Hint: Place the cursor on the input field for the division and display the possible input values using the F4 input help.

-20_0_9______________________©_c_2_0_09--SA __ P_A_G_._A_II-ri-gh_ffi__ re_s_eN_e_d-.----------------~2~5~

TSCM60


Solution 1: Organizational Structures Task 1: Organizational Units in Sales and Distribution. 1.

Organizational units in the system represent the structure of an enterprise organization. Which organizational units represent sales and distribution? Answer: Sales area

Sales organization Distribution channel Division Shipping point The combination of sales organization, distribution channel, and division form the sales area. Apart from these, there are also other organizational units that are used for sales and distribution. Other organizational units, such as company code, plant, or storage location, are not only used by sales and distribution, but also by other areas (for example, financial accounting, materials management, or production). 2.

Which organizational unit can you use in the system to represent a sales facility or a sales subsidiary? Answer: Sales organization

3.

Which organizational unit can you use in the system to represent a means to ship goods to the customer (for example, factory sales, whole sale trade, or retail trade)? Answer: Distribution channel

4.

Which organizational unit can you use in the system to represent different product lines and to group materials (for example, vehicles, accessories, or spare parts)? Answer: Division

5.

Which organizational unit can you use in the system to organize and process outbound deliveries to different locations (for example, loading ramp or rail depot)? Answer: Shipping point


~26


2009


TSCM60

Task 2: Cross-sales organizational units I.

A corporate group can be divided up into several companies or subsidiaries. Which organizational unit can you use in financial accounting to represent a legal entity and an independent accounting unit in the system? Answer: Company code

2.

In a company, you can manufacture and store materials in different places. Which organizational unit can you use in the system to represent a production facility or a distribution center? Answer: Plant

3.

Within a plant, material storage can be divided up according to various locations or rooms. Which organizational unit can you use.in the system to represent such a location or room? Answer: Storage location

Task 3: Assigning organizational units I.

Which organizational units does a sales area consist of? Answer: The sales organization, distribution channel, and division form the sales area.

2.

Can you assign more than one distribution channel to a sales organization? Answer: Yes. You can assign more than one distribution channel to a sales organization.

3.

Can you assign a distribution channel to multiple sales organizations? Answer: Yes. You can assign a distribution channel to multiple sales organizations.

4.

Which organizational unit is a sales organization assigned to in order to represent the connection of sales and distribution processes to financial accounting? Answer: To the company code.

5.

Can you assign a sales organization to multiple company codes? Answer: No. You can assign a sales organization to only one company code. However, more than one sales organization can be assigned to a company code.

Contiiwed on next page

2009


27~

TSCM60


6.

In a sales organization, can you sell materials from multiple delivering plants? Answer: Yes. In a sales organization, you can sell materials from multiple delivering plants.

7.

To which organizational unit do you assign a shipping point? Answer: The shipping point is assigned to a plant.

8.

Can you assign a shipping point to multiple plants? Answer: Yes. A shipping point can also be assigned to multiple plants. However, this might only be appropriate when the plants are close to each other.

9.

To which organizational unit are storage locations grouped together? Answer: To the plant.

Task 4: Organizational units of IDES, Inc. I.

The subsidiaries of IDES Holding AG are organized according to country-specific situations and laws. In Germany, IDES AG is a subsidiary, in the USA. IDES US INC. is a subsidiary. Which organizational unit and number is used to represent these subsidiaries in the system? Answer: Company code 1000: IDES AG Germany Company code 3000: IDES US INC USA

2.

Two sales facilities organize the sales and distribution process for IDES AG in Gem1any (forth is training course). Which organizational unit and number is used to represent the two sales facilities in ihe system? Answer: Sales organization I 000: Frankfurt Sales organization I 020: Berlin

3.

Which distribution channels does sales organization I 000 use (for this training course)? Answer: Distribution channel I 2: Resale Distribution channel 14: Service

4.

Which sales areas were set up for sales organization I 000 (for this training course)? Answer: Sales organization 1000, distribution channel 12, division 00 Sales organization 1000, distribution channel 12, division 02 Sales organization 1000, distribution channel 14, division 08

.. ,.

~28



2009

TSCM60


5.

Which plants are assigned to company code 1000 JDES AG (for this training course)? Answer: Plant I 000: Hamburg

Plant II 00: Berlin Plant 1300: Frankfurt Plant 1400: Stuttgart 6.

Which shipping point processes outbound deliveries from plant 1000 Hamburg (for this training course)? Answer: Shipping point I 000: Hamburg

Task 5: Organizational units in the system Each sales document is always assigned to a sales area (sales organization, distribution channel, division). I.

In the system, check which sales organizations exist for sales order entry for the USA: Write down three examples.

Hint: You enter a sales order using the following menu path: Logistics -->Sales and Distribution--> Sales --> Order--> Create: Place the cursor on the input field for the sales organization and display the possible input values using the F4 input help.

a)

Logistics--> Sales and Distribution -->Sales--> Order--> Create

Sales organization for the USA: 3000 USA Philadelphia 3020 USA Denver R300 Retail USA S300 Service USA 2.

Check in the system, which distribution channels exist for sales organization I 000: Write down three examples. Hint: Place the cursor on the input field for the distribution channel and display the possible input values using the F4 input help. Continued on next page·

2009


29~


a)

TSCM60

Distribution channels for sales organization I000: 0 I Direct sales I 0 Final customer sales 12 Resale 14 Service 16 Factory sales

3.

Check in the system, which divisions exist for sales organization I 000 and for distribution channel 12. Write down three examples. Hint: Place the cursor on the input field for the division and display the possible input values using the F4 input help.

a)

Divisions for sales organization 1000 and distribution channe112:

00 Cross-division 02 Motorcycles 04 Lighting

07 High Tech 08 Services 10 Vehicles

~30


2009

TSCM60


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Describe the sales and distribution structures of IDES, Inc.

-20_0_9______________________©_c_2_0_09--SA __ P_A_G___A_II_ri-gh_t_s_re_s_eN--ed-.-----------------3~1

~

TSCM60

Unit Summary

e -

'

Unit Summary You should now be able to: Describe sales and distribution structures Identity organizational units in the system that are relevant for sales and distribution Describe the essential characteristics of these organizational units Explain the most important relationships between the organizational structures in sales and distribution Describe the sales and distribution structures of IDES, Inc,

~ ~3~2.------------------©-c_2_0_09 __S_A_P_A_G_,_A_II_r_ig_h_ts_r_e-se-~-.-d-,------------------------2-0--09

it Overview of Sales Processes Unit Overview This unit looks at how a Sales and Distribution process is represented in the system. This takes the form of an initial overview. Additional details are covered in the units that follow.

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: Explain the process chain for sales order processing Create a sales order with reference to a quotation Create an outbound delivery with reference to a sales order Pick and post goods issue Invoice a customer for the delivery Enter an incoming payment in the system

Unit Contents Lesson: Process Overview ..................................................... 34 Lesson: Sales Processing ...................................................... 42 Lesson: Shipping Processing .................................................. 45 Lesson: Billing Document Processing ......................................... 50 Exercise 2: Sales and Distribution Process .............................. 55

2009

© 2009 SAP AG. All

rights reserved.

33~

Unit 2: Overview of Sales Processes

TSCM60

Lesson: Process Overview Lesson Overview This lesson provides an overview of sales and distribution processes.

e

-'

-

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain the process chain for sales order processing

Business Example You want to gain a theoretical overview of sales and distribution processes.

Process Overview e Establishing and maintaining customer relationships e Presales activities include: 11

Entering and tracking customer contacts

11

Mailing campaigns

11

Answering customer telephone queries

11 Inquiries 11 Quotations

Figure 15: Presales Activities Specific marketing measures (direct mailing campaigns, Internet campaigns, trade fair sales activities, or telephone campaigns, for example) can trigger sales processes. · Possible sequences of such campaigns can be a non-binding customer inquiry or a request for a quotation. Inquiries and quotations help you to determine important sales related data and can be saved as documents. lr-the customer then places an order, this data can be accessed.

~34


2009

TSCMSO

Lesson: Process Overview

Use this presales information to plan and evaluate your marketing and sales strategies and as a basis for establishing long-term business relationships with your customers, for example by: tracking lost sales recording presales data to help negotiate large contracts selling goods and services to large organizations that require documentation of the entire process.

e .

'

e The employees in your Customer Service department take orders in writing and over the phone. o Standard orders normally contain: 11 Customer and material information 11 Price information for all financial statement items

11 Information about delivery dates

and delivery quantities 11 Information about shipping processing 11 Information about

billing

Figure 16: Sales Order Processing A sales order is an electronic document that captures and records your customer's request for goods or services.

The sales order contains all pet1inent information to process the customer's request throughout the whole process cycle. The sales component thus automatically suggests data from master records and control tables that you previously put aside. As a result, possible input errors occurring during sales order processing and entering of redundant data is avoided. You can enter a sales order with many items in a single screen.

'"

2009

©

I

2009 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

35~

TSCMSO


o In this process step in Sales and Distribution, you can ., check the availability of the ordered goods and 11 transfer the requirements to materials planning.

e Materials planning (MM) organizes and monitors the actual procurement process. This can include 11

inhouse~produced

and/or

II purchased

products.

Figure 17: Procurement

The way in which a material is obtained for a customer order can depend on the material itself as well as on the sales transaction. The procurement (oan, for example: result from available stock be guaranteed by replenishment (purchase requisition or purchase order, planned order or production order, for example) trigger a make-to-order production order the outbound delivery via external suppliers (third-party business transaction) organize the outbound delivery via another warehouse (stock transfer)

~36


2009

TSCM60


•

Shipping processing supports: 11

Creating outbound deliveries

11 Picking (by creating transfer orders) 11

Packing

11

Posting the goods issue

Figure 18: Shipping

Shipping processing in Sales and Distribution begins when you create the delivery document. The delivery document controls, supports and monitors numerous subprocesses for shipping processing, such as: (Optional) picking and confirming (transfer orders) (Optional) packing (Optional) planning and monitoring of transport (shipment document) Posting the goods issue (goods issue documents) Creating a delivery document includes copying information from the sales order, such as the materials and quantities. onto the delivery document. Creating a transfer order includes copying data from the delivery document to the transfer order for processing within the warehouse. The transfer order is essential for controlling the movement of goods within your warehouse. The transfer order is based on a simple principle: where you are taking goods from and to, within your warehouse.

The posting of the goods issue can bring about a change based on a quantity basis as well as on a value basis in stock. Value-based changes are made to the relevant balance sheet accounts in financial accounting.

2009


37~

TSCM60

Unit 2; Overview of Sales Processes

•

Billing supports: 11 creating Invoices for goods and services 11 Creating credit and debit memos

11 Canceling previously posted billing documents 11 Automatically transferring billing document data to accounting

Figure 19: Billing

Invoice

/::t~ A P. Cr .Q"'-v,

Creating a billing document includes copying information from the sales order and the delivery document onto the billing document As a result, delivery items and order items (services, for example) can be models for the billing document. The billing document serves several important functions: It is the sales and distribution document that acts as the basis for creating

invoices. The billing document serves as a data source for financial accounting to help you to monitor and process customer payments. When you create a billing document, the G/L accounts are nonnally determined automatically and the relevant data is posted. The system carries out the following: a debit,QO~tingon the customers receivables account a cre.QJ!. posting on the revenue account .~

--~.

with

~38


2009

TSCM60


•

Payment is a process that is part of the Financial Accounting application module.

•

Payment supports: 11 Posting payments against invoices 11 Reconciling differences

Figure 20: Payment

When you post an incoming payment, the data on the relevant G/L accounts is posted automatically. The system carries out the following: a debit posting on the cash account a credit memo on the customer's receivables account

with

Figure 21: Master Data in Sales and Distribution

-20_0_9______________________©_c_2_0_09--SA_P__A_G_._A_II-rig-h-ts--re-se_N_e_d-.----------------~3~9~~


TSCM60

This slide represents the link between the subprocesses in Sales Order Processing within the system. The structure of the blocks from top to bottom represents the normal sequence of events in the sales and distribution process. The boxes within the various blocks represent sales and financial accounting documents.

Contacts and actions are documents for sales support within presales. Sales documents are documents that are entered during presales and order processing. Inquiries, quotations, contracts, scheduling agreements and standard orders are examples of sales document types. Outbound deliveries, transfer requests and shipments are documents within shipping processing. The goods issue document contains changes involving stock and is the basis for the relevant accounting documents. The billing document is a document in the Billing area and is the basis for the relevant accounting documents.

The left and right sections of this slide represent key interfaces between Sales and Distribution and the Sales Information System, Materials Management, and Production Planning.

w.- 40


2009


TSCM60

~ ~

2009

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Explain the process chain for sales order processing


41~

TSCM60


Lesson: Sales Processing Lesson Overview This Jesson introduces the sales documents used in standard sales and distribution processes.

Lesson Objectives After completing this Jesson, you will be able to: Create a sales order with reference to a quotEtion

Business Example You will learn how to create a sales order with reference to a quotation.

Sales Processing

Open items? Quotation still

valid?

Figure 22: Creating an Order A sales document is always created within a sales area. Therefore, an order can refer to a business transaction that already exists. For example, one or more inquiries and/or quotations can be reference documents. In this case, the system copies the relevant data to the sales order. Similarly, a quotation can lead to several sales orders.

~42


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Sales Processing

Figure 23: Sales Document Structure

A sales document is divided into three levels: header, item, and schedule line. The data is distributed across these levels as follows: Sales document header The data for the document header is valid for the entire document. This includes, for example, customer-related data. Items of the sales document Each item in the sales document contains its own data. This includes, for example, data about materials and quantities ordered. Each sales document can contain several items whereas the individual items can be controlled differently. Examples include material item, service item, free-of-charge item or text item. Schedule lines of document items Schedule lines contain delivery quantities and delivery dates. They clearly belong to an item. Every item that is to include an outbound delivery in the further sales and distribution process must possess at least a schedule line. The item can have several schedule lines, for example when the quantity ordered is to be delivered in several partial deliveries at different times. To ensure that sales documents are processed efficiently, the data from the sales document can be read and processed in different views. Th
2009


43~


TSCM60

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Create a sales order with reference to a quotation

~44


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Shipping Processing

Lesson: Shipping Processing Lesson Overview This lesson introduces the shipping documents used in standard sales and distribution processes.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Create an outbound delivery with reference to a sales order Pick and post goods issue

Business Example You will be introduced to some of the sub-steps involved in shipping.

Shipping Processing

e .

.

I Shipping point? Delivery date? Ship-to party?

II II !

:

Figure 24: Creating an Outbound Delivery

Outbound deliveries are created for orders that are ready to be shipped. The system copies the relevant data from the order to the outbound delivery.

2009


45~


TSCM60

You can create one or more outbound deliveries from the order. You can also combine items from more than one order in an outbound delivery. To combine

them successfully, the orders must correspond with the characteristics that are essential for the shipping process, for example: Shipping point Due date Ship-to address The system can create deliveries either on-line or as a background job to be executed during off-peak hours.

Figure 25: Structure of Delivery Document

A delivery document is grouped into two levels: header and item. The data is distributed across these levels as follows: Delivery document header The data for the document header is valid for the entire document. This includes, for example, data for the ship-to party and deadlines for shipping processing. Delivery document item Each item in the delivery document contains its own data. This includes, for example, data about the material, quantities, weights, and stock information. Each delivery document can contain several items whereas the individual items can be controlled differently. Examples include material items, free-of-charge items, or text items.

t:'!:.!!" 46


2009

TSCM60


Unlike sales documents, delivery documents do not contain schedule lines. Each schedule line in the sales document can become an item in the delivery document. To ensure that the delivery documents are processed efficiently, the data can be read and processed in different views. The views are grouped into overview, header and item screens.

Warehouse number?

--r-. Figure 26: Picking

You create a transfer order for an outbound delivery. A transfer order is generated for a warehouse number. During this process, only the deliveries that are necessary for picking are taken into account. The system copies the relevant data from the delivery. The system can combine more than one outbound delivery in a group of transfer orders provided that the same warehouse number is used. Selection of outbound deliveries can be further restricted via the picking date and the choice of certain shipping points, for example. To optimize picking, you can create picking lists that contain materials from multiple outbound deliveries. To relieve the work for the picker, you can sort the list according to storage bin and material and also calculate the quantities per material. The system can create transfer orders either on-line or as a background job to be executed during off-peak hours.

2009


47~

TSCM60


Valuated stock

Quotation

G00027

Figure 27: Posting Goods Issue

When the goods issue is posted, the following is carried out automatically: The quantity in inventory management and the delivery requirements in materials planning are updated. The value change in the balance sheet accounts for inventory accounting is posted (the postings from the relevant accounting document are based on the cost of the material). The system creates further documents for Financial Accounting. The billing due list is generated. The status in all associated sales documents is updated.

,

b

/-'.) .,y

1.

~48

lla,,< )

~:c! '··~·· k,S


I

.r

Cro

r

I·

2009

TSCM60


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Create an outbound delivery with reference to a sales order Pick and post goods issue

-2-00_9_______________________©_2_0_0_9_S_A_P_A_G___A_Il_ri-g-ht-s-re_s_e_N_ed-.--------------1--4"'9~

TSCM60


Lesson: Billing Document Processing Lesson Overview This lesson explains the function and use of billing documents within the standard sales and distribution process.

.

..•••.

i

'+>"'"''''

Lesson Objectives '

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Invoice a customer for the delivery Enter an incoming payment in the system

Business Example You will be introduced to the steps involved in billing and processing incoming payments.

Billing Document Processing

Payer? Billing date? Destination country?

Figure 28: Creating a Billing Document You can create an invoice for a single delivery or sales order.

~50


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Billing Document Processing

The system can combine a number of outbound deliveries in one billing document provided that they have the same characteristics, such as: Payer Billing date Destination country The system can create invoices either on-line or as a background job to be executed during off-peak hours.

Figure 29: Billing Document Structure

A billing document is grouped into two levels: header and item. The data is distributed across these levels as follows: Billing document header The data for the document header is valid for the entire document. This includes. for example, data about the payer and billing date. Billing document item Each item in the billing document contains its own data. This includes, for example, details about the material, billing quantities, and net values for the items. Each billing document can have several items. To ensure that the billing documents are processed efficiently, the data can be read and processed in different views. The views are grouped into overview, header and item screens.

2009


51~

TSCM60


SaleS__ O:tder

:--~

-,---':-'11~:~~:--

Figure 30: Effects of Billing Document

When you save the billing document, the system automatically generates all the required documents for accounting. The system carries out a debit posting in accounting on the customer receivables account and a credit posting on the revenue account.

The accounting document identifies all the subsequent postings in financial accounting that refer back to pricing in SD, such as the receivable on customer accounts or the obtained net sales and taxes on the relevant G/L accounts. When you save the billing document, the system can automatically generate further documents for Financial Accounting (for the Controlling components as well as for profitability analysis, for example). The following also occurs when the billing document is posted: The status in all related sales, delivery, and billing documents is updated The sales statistics in the sales information system are updated The data regarding the consumption of the customer's credit limit is updated

~52


2009

TSCM60


Document Flow

e .

..

Document Flow in the R/3 System

. Delivery 80002832 •. WMS transfer order 482 .. GD goods delivery 4900001537 .. Invoice 90005371 •.. Accounting 100001276

Figure 31: Document Flow in the System

The documents within a sales and distribution process are linked to each other via the document now. This enables you to access the history and current status of your sales and distribution processes at any time. You can display the document now as a list with the linked documents. Depending on the document from which you call up the list, all the relevant preceding and subsequent documents are displayed. From this list, you can display the relevant documents or call up status overviews for the documents. This provides a quick overview of the progress of your sales processes at any time and can be used to answer customer questions quickly and reliably.

2009


53~


TSCM60

Figure 32: Document Flow at Item Level

The document flow is updated at the document header and line item level. Schedule lines are only in sales documents. Since each schedule line contains its own delivery date, each deliverable schedule line cecomes an individual item in a delivery document.

~54


2009

TSCM60


Exercise 2: Sales and Distribution Process Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. you will be able to: Create a simple sales order Create an outbound delivery for a sales order Execute picking and post the goods issue to an outbound delivery Create a billing document for outbound delivery Enter an incoming payment for the customer

Business Example As a rule, the sales process begins with the customer ordering materials from you and telling you his requested delivery date. Using this information, you can enter a sales order. You then trigger the shipping activities at the appropriate time so that the customer receives the material in time. To be able to pick the material in stock, you generate a picking list. As soon as the material has left the company, you post the goods issue in order to update stocks and values. You then create a billing document and send the customer the invoice. As soon as the customer has paid for the materials, the incoming payments are posted in Financial Accounting.

2009


55~

TSCM60


Task 1: Describe the pre-sales activities. I.

In what part ofthe process do the pre-sales activities for sales and distribution processing take place?

2.

What tasks are carried out during pre-sales activities? 1) /'-tCoi trCJorrJt....9' 0

I

Task 2: Create a sales order. I.

Create a standard order for the following purchase order (sales document type OR, sales organization 1000, distribution channel 12, division 00). Purchase order:

(·

JOodoliCJ

Customer:

T-SSOA##

Purchase order number:

4-211

Requested delivery date:

in 10 days

Material

Quantity

T-ASI##

10

T-AS2##

20

Hint: Use the transaction Logistics -->Soles and Distribution--> Sales --> Order--> Create Save the order and write down the document number.

(:nq


~56


2009

TSCM60


Task 3: Display the sales order and familiarize yourself with the screen layout. I.

Display the previously entered sales order. Write down the payment terms in the sales order header.

2.

From which plant is item I 0 delivered? Hint: In order to display the plant for item I 0, scroll to the right on the Sales tab page.

3.

What is the net price for item I 0 and item 20? Hint: By scrolling to the right on the Sales tab page. you will find

the net price for an item.

4.

What is the delivery date in the schedule line for item I 0? Hint: In order to display the schedule lines for the item, choose item I 0 and then select Schedule lines for item.

5.

What is the overall processing status for the sales order? Hint: To display the overall processing status, choose Display document flow.


-20_0_9______________________©_c_2_0_09__ S_A_P_A_G_._A_II-ri-gh_t_s_re_s_e~--ed-.-----------------5~7~

TSCM60


Task 4: Create the outbound delivery. I.

Create an outbound delivery for the previous sales order.

Hint: Use the transaction Logistics__, Sales and Distribution --> Shipping and 1l-ansportation --> Outbound De/ive1y --> Create --> Single Document--> With Reference to Sales Order. To be able to enter the outbound delivery at an earlier date, set the selection date 20 days into the future. Use shipping point ZO##.

2.

Switch to the Picking tab page and record the delivery quantity and picking quantity for the two items.

3.

Save the outbound delivery and record the document number.

Task 5: Display the document flow for the outbound delivery. I.

What is the overall processing status for the sales order? Hint: You will find the overall processing status in the outbound delivery document flow. In the transaction Outbound Delivery-> Display, choos"eDocwnent flow.

2.

What is the overall processing status for the outbound delivery?


~58


2009

TSCMGO


Task 6: Display the inventory management for materials. I.

Before the materials leave the plant and the goods issue is being posted, display the stocks for Material T-AS1## in plant 1000.

Hint: Open a new session in order to trace the stocks. Inventory management is carried out in materials management. Use the transaction Logistics ----+ .A1aterials Management ---t Inventory Management----+ Environment----+ Stock----+ Stock Overview. Record how many pieces are in stock and available for use.

Task 7: Pick the outbound delivery. 1.

Create a transfer request as a basis for goods movement in the warehouse and to print the picking list. Enter the transfer order for the outbound delivery from the previous task: Warehouse Number

010

Flam

1000

Foregrowul!Background

Background

Adopt picking quantity

1

Hint: Use the transaction Logistics-+ Sales and Distribution----+ Shipping and Transportation-+ Picking-+ Create 7i·ansfer Order -+ Single Document Record the transfer order number.

Task 8: Once picking has been carried out, you can post the goods issue. I.

Change the outbound delivery. First, note the picking quantities that are in both items in the outbound delivery.


2009


59~

TSCM60


2.

Post the goods issue. Hint: In the Change Outbound Deli1'e1y transaction, choose Post Goods Issue.


Once the materials have left the plant and the goods issue has been posted, display the stocks for Material T-ASl## in plant 1000 again. Hint: Switch to your second session and choose Refresh. If you have deleted the second session, choose Logistics----+ Materials

Jvfanagement----+ InventOJy Management----+ Environment----+ Stock----+ Stock Overview. Record how many pieces are now still in stock.


What is the overall processing status for the outbound delivery? Hint: You will find the overall processing status in the outbound delivery document flow. In the transaction Outbound Delive1y-> Display, chooseDocument flow.

2.

What further documents have been entered for outbound delivery?

3.

Why is the status for the outbound delivery still i_n process?

4.

Why are the transfer order and goods issue already completed?


~60


2009

TSCM60


Task 11: Create the billing document. I.

Create the billing document for the outbound delivery iiOJn the previous task:

Hint: Use the transaction Logistics --+Sales and Distribution --+

Billing----+ Billing Document---+ Create Save the billing document and write down the document number.

Task 12: Display the billing document. I.

Check in the billing document header which company code the data has been posted to in Financial Accounting. Hint: The company code is in the billing document header under the accounting data. In the transaction Billing Document-+ Display, choose Display doc. header details.

2.

Display the accounting document for the billing document and write down which accounts have been posted to. Hint: To display the accounting document. go to Display Billing Document: Accounting overview and choose Accounting document.

3.

Display the document flow for the billing document. What is the overall processing status for the outbound delivery?

4.

What further document has been generated by saving the billing document?

5.

What is the overall processing status for the accounting document?


2009


61~

TSCM60


Task 13: The customer pays the invoice. Enter the incoming payment from the customer for financial accounting. I.

First, display the billing document to check the invoiced amount that the customer has to pay. The customer pays punctually and can, therefore, justifiably claim the deduction of cash discount. Record the final amount and deduction of cash discount. Hint: Display the billing document. Check the pricing conditions in the billing document header. Choose Billing Document--+ Display. Choose Pricing conditions header.

2.

Enter the incoming payments. The customer pays the final amount of the invoice minus the deduction of cash discount. The incoming payment is entered with: Document date:

Today's date

Company code:

1000

Posting date:

Today's date

Cun~~~cy:

EUR

Bank data Account:

100009

Amount:

See previous exercise: Total minus cash discount


~ ~6~2_------------------©~c-2_0_09~S-A~P-A-G~.-A-II-r-ig_h_ts_r_e_se-~-.-d-.------------------------2-00---9

TSCM60


Open Item selection: T-SSOA##

Account:

Hint: In Financial Accounting, you enter incoming payments by choosing: Accounting ~ Financial Accounting ----+Accounts Receivable----+ Document Enlly----+ Incoming Payments Once you have entered the different values, choose Process open items. The posting can only be completed successfully when the values from both fields on the bottom right match: Amount entered and Assigned. If several open items are available, you can deactivate these by double clicking on the amount field. 3.

Finally. display the document flow for the billing document again. What is the overall processing status for the accounting document?

Task 14: Questions about the overview of sales processes. I.

Which steps are carried out in sales and distribution processes? pnu
cv;;f;J<-(;~ , ~ f-es 0

2.

j;;;f'?C.L~4'Jc! cP '

Which function in the system can you use to display the overall processing status and history for documents?


2009


631ED.'

TSCM60


3.

What are the three levels of a sales order?

4.

What are the two levels of an outbound delivery and a billing document?

5.

What are the effects of posting a goods issue? f)

.Sf> c c._ 't-1 Y"

~ ) s:..(~

6.

~64

,...,

Lt

f"'-Af uJ

.s.,.,ru

.h c

u

-~r'~pl

What are the effects of creating a billing document?


2009

TSCM60


Solution 2: Sales and Distribution Process Task 1: Describe the pre-sales activities. I.

In what part of the process do the pre-sales activities for sales and distribution processing take place? Answer: Pre-sales activities such as inquiries and quotations usually come at the start of the sales process, before the sales orders are processed. Customer sales activities, for example visits or telephone calls, can also take place during the entire duration of the customer relationships, be entered into the system, and administered.

2.

What tasks are .carried out during pre-sales activities? Answer: Pre-Sales activities include:

Maintaining customer contacts Mailing lists Processing customer inquiries Processing quotations.


Create a standard order for the following purchase order (sales document type OR, sales organization I 000, distribution channel 12, division 00). Purchase order: Customer:

T-SSOA##


4-211


in 10 days

Material

Quantity

T-ASl##

10

T-AS2##

20

Hint: Use the transaction Logistics~ Sales and Distribution Sales ---> Order ---> Create

-t

Save the order and write down the document number. Continued on next page

2009


65~

TSCMSO


a)

Logistics --->Sales and Distribution---> Sales---> Order--> Create

Choose Save. The document number is assigned internally by the system.

Task 3: Display the sales order and familiarize yourself with the screen layout. I.

Display the previously entered sales order. Write down the payment terms in the sales order header.

a)

Logistics -->Sales and Distribution--> Sales--> Order--> Display Terms ofpayment:

ZBOI. The payment tenns are on the Sales tab page.

~-

2.

From which plant is item I 0 delivered? Hint: In order to display the plant for item I 0, scroll to the right on the Sules tab page.

a)

From plant 1000. For example, by scrolling to the right, you will find the delivery plant for the item on the Procurement or the Sales tab page.

3.

What is the net price for item I 0 and item 20? Hint: By scrolling to the right on the Sales tab page, you will find the net price for an item.

a)

Net price Item I 0: EUR 60 per piece. Net price Item 20: EUR 30 per piece.

By scrolling to the right on the Sales tab page, you will find the net price for an item.


~66


2009

TSCM60


4.

What is the delivery date in the schedule line for item I 0?

Hint: In order to display the schedule lines for the item, choose item I 0 and then select Schedule lines for item.

a)

Delivel)' date: Corresponds to the requested delivery date in I 0 days. In order to display the schedule lines for the item, choose item 10 and then select Schedule lines for item.

5.

What is the overall processing status for the sales order?

Hint: To display the overall processing status, choose Display document flow.

a)

status: open You will find the overall processing status in the sales order document flow. Choose Display document flow.


Create an outbound delivery for the previous sales order.

Hint: Use the transaction Logistics.._,. Sales and DistribUlion........, Shipping and Transportation ....., Outbound Delivel)'--> Create--> Single Document--> With Reference to Sales Order. To be able to enter the outbound delivery at an earlier date, set the selection date 20 da)'S into the future. Use shipping point ZO##.

a)

Logistics--> Sales and Distribution--> Shipping and 1l-ansportation ....., Outbound Delivery--)- Create ----+Single Document--+ With Reference

to Sales Order. To be able to enter the outbound delivery at an earlier date, set the · selection date 20 days into the future. Use shipping point ZO##. ~--

2.

Switch to the Picking tab page and record the delivery quantity and picking quantity for the two items.


2009


67~

TSCM60


a)

3.

Select the Picking tab page.

Delivery quantity

Picket/ quantity

Item 10

10

0

Item 20

20

0

Save the outbound delivery and record the document number.

a)


Task 5: Display the document flow for the outbound delivery. 1.

What is the overall processing status for the sales order?

Hint: You will find the overall processing status in the outbound delivery document flow. In the transaction Outbound Delive1y-> Display, chooseDocumentjlow.

a)

Logistics--> Sales and Distribution--> Shipping and Transportation Outbound De/ive1y --> Display

-->

Choose Display document flow. Standard order: status: completed 2.


a)

Outbound delivery: status: open


~68


2009

TSCM60



Before the materials leave the plant and the goods issue is being posted, display the stocks for MaterialT-ASI## in plant 1000.

Hint: Open a new session in order to trace the stocks. Inventory management is carried out in materials management. Use the transaction Logistics -----+ Materials Management ~ Inventory Management --)' Environment -+ Stock--+ Stock Overview. Record how many pieces are in stock and available for use.

a)

Logistics __,. Nlaterials Management-+ lnventOJy lvfanagernent __,. Environment -+ Stock-+ Stock Overview ( f.A M ~ ~ There are I 00 pieces in stock in plant 1000.

Task 7: Pick the outbound delivery. I.

Create a transfer request as a basis for goods movement in the warehouse and to print the picking list. Enter the transfer order for the outbound delivery from the previous task:

Warehouse Number

OIO

Plant

1000

Foregrozmd/Background

Background

Adopt picking quantity

I

Hint: Use the transaction Logistics -+Sales and Distribwion-+ Shipping and Ti·ansportation-+ Picking-+ Create Ti·ansfer Order _,. Single Document Record the transfer order number.

a)

Logistics-+ Sales and Distribution-+ Shipping and Ti·ansportation ::::+ Picking-+ Create Ti·ansfer Order -+ Single Document ( LT i15? ) The document number is assigned internally by the system.

Contiiwed on next page

-20_0_9______________________©_c_2_00_9_S_A_P__A_G___ A_ll_rig-h-ts--re-se-~-e-d-.----------------~6~9~~

TSCM60


Task 8: Once picking has been carried out, you can post the goods issue. I.

Change the outbound delivery. First, note the picking qualllities that are in both items in the outbound delivery.

a)

Logistics-> Sales and Distribution-> Shipping and 7l·ansportation Outbound De/ive1y-> Change ->Single Document

->

Pick quantity

2.

Item 10

10

Item 20

20

Post the goods issue.

Hint: In the Change Outbound Delivery transaction, choose Post Goods Issue. a)

Choose Post Goods Issue.

Task 9: Display the inventory management for materials. 1.

Once the materials have left the plant and the goods issue has been posted, display the stocks for Material T-ASI## inplantlOOO again.

Hint: Switch to your second session and choose Refresh. If you have deleted the second session, choose Logistics--> Materials .~1anagement_,. lnventoJ)' Jt.1anagemenl-+ Environment---+ Stock---+ Stock Overview. Record how many pieces are now still in stock.

a)

Switch to your second session and choose Refresh. There are 90 pieces in stock in plant 1000.


f:'s.""

70


2009

TSCM60




Hint: You will find the overall processing status in the outbound delivery document flow. In the transaction Outbound De lively-> Display, chooseDocwnent flow.

a)

Logistics ---+Sales and Distribution Outbound Delive1y --> Display

----t

Shipping and Transportation---+

Choose Document flow. Outbound delivery: status: in process 2.

What further documents have been entered for outbound delivery?

a) 3.

Why is the status for the outbound delivery still in process?

a)

4.

WM transfer order and goods delivery for outbound delivery.

The subsequent document billing document has not yet been entered for outbound delivery. The document maintains the status in process until shipping processing is completed by the creation of the billing document.

Why are the transfer order and goods issue already completed?

a)

The transfer order and goods issue are both part of the outbound delivery. Both steps are completed.


2009


71~

TSCM60


Task 11: Create the billing document. I.

Create the billing document for the outbound delivery from the previous task:

Hint: Use the transaction Logistics --+Sales and Distribution Billing-+ Billing Document-+ Create ( v r 16 ( )

--+

Save the billing document and write down the document number.

a)

Logistics --+Sales and Distribution --+Billing--+ Billing Document ---* Create Choose Save. The document number is assigned internally by the system.

Task 12: Display the billing document. I.

Check in the billing document header which company code the data has been posted to in Financial Accounting.

Hint: The company code is in the billing document header under the accounting data. In the transaction Billing Document---* Display, choose Display doc. header details.

a)

Logistics --+Sales and Distribution --+Display

--+

Billing--+ Billing Document

Choose Display doc. header details. Company code I 000 2.

Display the accounting document for the billing document and write down which accounts have been posted to.

Hint: To display the accounting document, go to Display Billing Document: Accounting overview and choose Accounting document.


t::!!' 72


2009

TSCM60


a)

Choose Accounting overview.

Select the accounting document. The following accounts have been posted to: Customer account Motomarket Heidelberg Domestic sales revenue (per item) Output tax 3.

Display the document flow for the billing document. What is the overall processing status for the outbound delivery?

a)

Logistics -->Sales and Distribution--> Billing--> Billing Document -->Display Choose Display document flow. Outbound delivery: status: completed

4.

What further document has been generated by saving the billing document?

a) 5.

The accounting document is automatically generated in the background when the billing document is created.


a)

Accounting document: status: not cleared

Task 13: The customer pays the invoice. Enter the incoming payment from the customer for financial accounting. 1.

First, display the billing document to check the invoiced amount that the customer has to pay. The customer pays punctually and can, therefore, justifiably claim the deduction of cash discount. Record the final amount and deduction of cash discount.

Hint: Display the billing document. Check the pricing conditions in the billing document header. Choose Billing Document--> Display. Choose Pricing conditions header.


2009


73~

TSCM60


a)

Final amount 1320 (corresponds to the total amount of the invoice) Cash discount 39.60

2.

Enter the incoming payments. The customer pays the final amount of the invoice minus the deduction of cash discount. The incoming payment is entered with: Document date:

Today's date

Company code:

1000

Posting date:

Today's date

Currency:

EUR

Bank data Account: Amount:

100009 See previous exercise: Total minus cash

discount

IOpen Item selection: Account:

I

T-SSOA##

Hint: In Financial Accounting, you enter incoming payments by choosing: Accounting - t Financial Accounting - t Accounts Receivable - t Document Ent1y - t Incoming Payments Once you have entered the different values, choose Process open items. The posting can only be completed successfully when the values from both fields on the bottom right match: Amount entered and Assigned. If several open items are available, you can deactivate these by double clicking on the amount field. a)

Amount due (final amount- cash discount): 1320-39.60 ~ 1280.40 Accounting - t Financial Accounting----:- Accozmls Receivable Document Ent1y - t Incoming Payments

3.

-t

Finally, display the document flow for the billing document again. Continued on next page

~74


2009

TSCM60



a)

Logistics ---+Sales and Distribution ---+Billing---+ Billing Document ---+ Display

Choose Display document flow. Accounting document: status: cleared

Task 14: Questions about the overview of sales processes. I.

Which steps are carried out in sales and distribution processes? Answer: Presales Activities Sales Order Processing Procurement

Shipping Billing Payment 2.

Which function in the system can you use to display the overall processing status and history for documents? Answer: With the function Display docume>Jtflow.

3.

What are the three levels of a sales order0 Answer: Order header Item Schedule line

4.

What are the two levels of an outbound delivery and a billing document? Answer: Header Item

5.

What are the effects of posting a goods issue? Answer: Stock quantity is updated Values are updated in inventory accounting Stocks are updated Further accounting documents are generated (in Controlling, for example) The billing index is updated (by doing so, the billing document can be generated for outbound delivery) Status in all relevant sales documents is updated Continued on nexl page

2009


75~


6.

TSCM60

What are the effects of creating a billing document? Answer: Accounting document is created Further documents are created for accounting Status in all relevant sales documents is updated The sales information system is updated The customer credit management account is updated

~76


2009

TSCM60

~ ~


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Invoice a customer for the delivery Enter an incoming payment in the system

2009


TSCM60

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: Explain the process chain for sales order processing Create a sales order with reference to a quotation Create an outbound delivery with reference to a sales order Pick and post goods issue Invoice a customer for the delivery Enter an incoming payment in the system

~78


2009

nit Master Data in Sales and Distribution Processes Unit Overview This unit covers the key Sales and Distribution-relevant master data.

e

.. .

Unit Objectives After completing this unit,. you will be able to:

Maintain customer master data Maintain material master data Maintain the customer-material info record Maintain condition master data and explain pricing functions Issue output for sales documents Work with the incompletion log

Unit Contents Lesson: Customer Master ...................................................... 80 Exercise 3: Customer Master .............................................. 87 Lesson: Material Master ....................................................... 102 Lesson: Customer-Material Info Record ..................................... 107 Exercise 4: Material Master and Customer-Material Info Record .... 109 Lesson: Condition Master Data for Pricing .................................. 126 Lesson: Additional Master Data ............................................... 130 Exercise 5: Additional Master Data ...................................... 135

2009


79~

Unit 3: Master Data in Sales and Distribution Processes

TSCM60

Lesson: Customer Master Lesson Overview This lesson explains the structure and function of the customer master.

Lesson Objectives After completing this Jesson, you will be able to: Maintain customer master data

Business Example IDES, Inc. add& new customers to its existing customer base.

Customer Master Control tables

Control tables Figure 33: Origin of Data in Sales Documents Several sources of data can be copied into a sales order or into another sales and distribution document. Most of them are default values that you can overwrite in the sales and distribution document, if necessary.

~80


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Customer Master

These sources of data include, for example: Customer master data Material master data Condition master data (You create and maintain this master data in the sales and distribution master data for automatic pricing. This could be a material price or a customer discount, for example). Output is information that is sent to the customer via various media, such as mail, EDI, or fax. Examples include the printout of a quotation or an order confirmation, order confirmations via ED I, or invoices by fax. Control tables: You can create and maintain control tables in Customizing. Depending on the table settings, the proposal can be controlled by a variety of data in the sales documents. A previous sales document can serve as a source of data for another sales document. Example: a quotation can serve as a data source for a sales order.

Figure 34:

Custome~

Master

The customer master groups data into categories: general data, sales area data, and company code data. The general data is relevant for sales and distribution and for accounting. It is stored centrally (client-specific) to prevent data redundancy. It is valid for all organizational units within a client.

2009


81~

TSCM60


Sales area data is relevant for sales and distribution. It is valid for the respective sales area (sales organization, distribution channel, and division). Company code data is relevant for accounting. It is valid for the respective company code. The customer master includes all data necessary for processing orders, deliveries, invoices, and customer payments.

classification

Figure 35: Data on the General Data Tab Pages

To maintain the customer master data relevant for sales and distribution and accounting, data fields are grouped on different tab pages. The general data is maintained independently of the organizational units. The following tab pages are used: Address Control data Payment transactions Marketing Unloading points Export data Contact persons By changing the Customizing settings, you can hide certain fields on a tab page or make them required entry fields.

~82


2009

TSCM60


Figure 36: Data on the Sales Area Data Tab Pages

You can maintain the sales area data in various ways, depending on the sales area (sales organization, distribution channel, division). The following tab pages are used: Sales Shipping Billing document Partner function By changing the Customizing settings. you can hide certain fields on a tab page or make them required entry fields.

-20_0_9________________________©--20_0_9_S_A_P__A_G_._A_II_r-ig-ht_s_r-es_e_~_e_d-.----------------~8~3~~


TSCMGO

Figure 37: Partner Functions in the Customer Master

You store the partner functions for the customer master in the customer master sales area data (tab page Pminer function). During sales order processing, they are copied as default values into the documents. For sales order processing, you require the mandatmy partner functions sold-to party, ship-to party, payer, and bill-to party. In the course of processing a sales order, they can differ from each other or can be identical. Sold-to pmiy: places the order. Ship-to party: receives goods or services. Bill-to party: receives the invoice for goods or services. Payer: is responsible for paying the invoice. Other partner functions, such as contact person or forwarding agent, are not absolutely necessary for sales order processing.

~84


2009

TSCM60


Figure 38: Data on the Company Code Data Tab Pages

To maintain the customer master data relevant for accounting, data fields are grouped on different tab pages. You can maintain the company code data in various ways, according to the company code The company code data in the customer master comprises the following tab pages: Account management

Payment transactions Correspondence

Insurance

By changing the Customizing settings, you can hide certain fields on a tab page or make them required entry fields.

2009


85~


TSCM60

Figure 39: Effects of Changes in the Customer Master

Changes that you make to a customer's master data do not affect any sales documents that have already been entered for the customer in the system. If such changes are required, you have to perform them in the documents manually after changing the master data. However, the address of the customer is an exception and this is alwa\·s kept current in each document. ~

[!E."' 86


2009

TSCM60


Exercise 3: Customer Master Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. you will be able to: Maintain a customer master record Understand the effect of customer master data on document processing in sales and distribution Issue output for sales and distribution documents on the screen

Business Example A new customer wants to place an order and intends to order more goods from you in the future. Therefore, you create a master record for the customer. The customer informs you that they would like to have the goods delivered to various addresses. At a later point, the customer informs you of an address change. You therefore change the customer master. After processing the order for the new customer, you want to have a look at the layout of the order confirmation before printing it out and sending it to the customer.

Task 1: Create a customer master record for the new customer. I.

You create the customer master with number 23-1## for sales area I 000. 12, 00 and for company code 1000.

Hint: Since the relevant sales and accounting data is already available, enter the customer master for the sold-to party. Use the transaction Logistics ~Sales and Distribution-+ Master Data-+ Business Partner-+ Customer-+ Create-+ Complete. Enter only the data specified below. During a telephone call with the customer, you write down the following information. Note: Account group: 0001 Sold-to party (use the first entry for the sold-to party in the search help table). Customer: 234##

Address data:


2009


87~

TSCM60


Name: Miller Search term: SCM600-## Street: Venusstr. 12 Postal Code: 20111 City: Hamburg Country: Germany Transportation zone: Region North Language: Language of the course

Control data: VAT registration number: DE##1234567

Company code data, "Account Management" tab page: Reconciliation account: 140000

Sales area data: Sales: Customer group: Trading companies

Shipping: Shipping condition:## Standard (corresponds to group number+ 50) Delivering plant: 1000 Hamburg

Billing document: lncoterms: CFR Hamburg Terms of payment: ZBOO Payable immediately due net Tax classification: Liable for tax

Save the customer master record.


~88


2009

TSCM60


Task 2: Display the previously created customer master record, I,

You are not sure whether you have used the Incoterms fields correctly, How can you get information in the system to make sure that you have used

them con'ectly?

Hint: Display the customer master, Use the field help with F I for the two fields on Jncoterms, The fields can be found in the sales area data on the Billing Document tab page,

La u«CCJ.e

2,

• ~If.(o.y i ~ c;::: "fcc -/ -< ->-! ,

p

nl'ci

In the customer master record, you have maintained a language for communication with your customer. Does this mean that the order confirmation for this customer will be printed using this language?

ol ""f ,

Hint: On the Address tab page in the General data, use the field help (F I) in the language field, },

In the sales area data, check which customer is the bill-to party on the Partner function tab page,

Task 3: Change the customer master record. L

The customer informs you of another ship-to party to which the goods are to be delivered frequently besides the sold-to party, To facilitate order processing. you store the additional ship-to party in the customer master of the sold-to party, A customer master record has already been created for the ship-to party (T-SSOB##,), Change the customer master record of the sold-party from the previous exercise, In the sales area data, create the additional ship-to party on the Partner functions tab page using number T-SSOB##,


2009

© 2009 SAP AG, All rights reserved,

89~

TSCM60


Task 4: The new customer is placing an order for the first time. I.

Create a standard order for the new customer based on the purchase order. Use the F4 search help to find the sold-to party. Purchase order Customer:

Search te•·m: SCM600-##

Ship-to party:

T-SSOB##


5-411


in 10 days

I

Material T-AS2##

2.

I

;aantity

In the sales order, the system proposes the Incoterms as they are maintained in the customer master record. However, for tl1is order, the Incoterms FOB Hamburg should be valid. Change these entries in the order. Hint: In the sales order, the Incoterms can be found in the order header on the Sales tab page. Does the change affect the customer master record?

N" 3.

Save the order and write down the order number.

Task 5: Change the customer master record of the sold-to parry. I.

The customer informs you of an address change. Enter the new street,Enjoystr. 99.

2.

You have agreed on the new terms of payment ZB02 with the customer. Change these entries in the customer master as well. Hint: In the customer master, the terms of payment can be found in the sales area data on the Billing document tab page in Sales Area Data. Continued on next page

~90


2009

TSCM60


Task 6: Display the previously entered sales order (see above). I.

Check the address of the sold-to party in the sales order. Did it change after you changed the customer master?

y

2.

_..G.C;;

Check the terms of payment in the sales order. Did they change after you changed the customer master?

tv"' Task 7: Display the order confirmation on the screen. I.

Before printing and sending the order confirmation, you would like to check the layout of the order confirmation.

p

Hint: Display the sales order and choose Header output preview.

Task 8: Create the outbound delivety. 1.

The outbound delivery for the sales order must be made. Create an outbound delivery for the previous standard order (see above). Check the ship-to party address in the outbound delivery. Write down the customer number of the ship-to party.

Hint: Use the transaction Logistics -->Sales and Distribution--> Shipping and Transportation--> Outbound De/ive1y--> Create--> Single Document--> With Reference to Sales Order. To be able to enter the outbound delivery at an earlier date, set the selection date 20 days into the future. Use shipping point ZO##.

Task 9: Display the previously entered customer master record for customer Miller. 1.

How can you check in the system the sales areas for which the customer record has been maintained?


2009


91~


2.

3.

TSCM60

How can you check in the system when and by whom the customer master was created?

How can you check in the system how, when, and by whom which fields in the customer master were changed?

4.

How can you display a list of orders for the customer from the customer master?

Task 10: Questions on the Customer Master. I.

You have created the new customer master record for sales organization 1000, distribution channell2, and division 00 only. Sales organization 1020· may possibly want to sell goods to this customer using distribution channel 12 and division 00. What would you need to do to make it possible?

2.

Is it possible in the customer master record to .maintain various addresses for the sold-to party in multiple company codes?

rv ,)

~92


2009

TSCM60


Solution 3: Customer Master Task 1: Create a customer master record for the new customer. I.

You create the customer master with number 234## for sales area 1000, 12, 00 and for company code 1000.

Hint: Since the relevant sales and acco\mting data is already available, enter the customer master for the sold-to party. Use the transaction Logistics -->Sales and Distribution -->Master Data-->

Business Partner ----t

Customer~

Create ---)- Complete.

Enter only the data specified below. During a telephone call with the customer, you write down the following information. Note: Account group: 0001 Sold-to party (use the first entry for the sold-to party in the search help table). Customer: 234##

Address data: Name: Miller Search tenn: SCM600-## Street: Venusstr. 12 Postal Code: 20111 City: Hamburg Country: Germany Transportation zone: Region North Language: Language of the course

Control data: VAT registration number: DE##I234567


-20_0_9________________________© __2_00_9__S_A_P_A_G___A_II_r_ig_h_ffi_r_e-se-~-e-d-.------------------ng;;;3~

TSCM60


Company code data, "Account Management" tab page: Reconciliation account: 140000

Sales area data: Sales: Customer group: Trading companies

Shipping: Shipping condition: ##Standard (corresponds to group number+ 50) Delivering plant: I 000 Hamburg

Billing document: lncoterms: CFR Hamburg Terms of payment: ZBOO Payable immediately due net Tax classification: Liable for tax

Save the customer master record. a)

Logistics

-+

Sales and Distribution -+Master Data

-+

Business

Partner----+ Customer----+ Create----+ Complete

Task 2: Display the previously created customer master record. I.

You are not sure whether you have used the lncoterms fields correctly. How can you get information in the system to make sure that you have used them correctly?


~94


2009

TSCM60


Hint: Display the customer master. Use the field help with F 1 for the two fields on Incoterms. The fields can be found in the sales area data on the Billing Documem tab page.

a)

Logistics --)' Sales and Distribution ---+Master Data ---+Business

Partner-+ Customer-+ Display-+ Sales and Distribution , Billing document tab page. lncoterms (part 1) defines rules for shipping. lncoterms (part 2) contains additional information for the first part. 2.

In the customer master record, you have maintained a language for

communication with your customer. Does this mean that the order confirmation for this customer will be printed using this language?

Hint: On the Address tab page in the General data, use the field help (F I) in the language field.

a)

Logistics__,. Sales and Distribution__,. jVJaster Data---+ Business Partner -+

Customer-+ Display-+ Sales and Distribution, Address tab page.

Yes. The language key designates, for example, the language that you use to print documents.

3.

In the sales area data, check which customer is the bill-to pat1y on the Partner function tab page.

a)

Logistics -+ Sales and Distriblllion -+Master Data -+ Business Partner-+ Customer-+ Display-+ Sales and Distribution-+ Sales Area Data, Partner fimction tab page. The bill-to party is the sold-to party. If necessary, you can store further possible bill-to parties in the customer master record.

Task 3: Change the customer master record. I.

2009

The customer informs you of another ship-to party to which the goods are to be delivered frequently besides the sold-to party. To facilitate order processing, you store the additional ship-to party in the customer master of the sold-to party. A customer master record has already been created for the ship-to party (T-SSOB##). Continued on next page


95~

TSCM60


Change the customer master record of the sold-party from the previous exercise. In the sales area data, create the additional ship-to party on the Partner functions tab page using number T-SSOB##.

Logistics

a)

->

Sales and Distribution ->Master Data ->Business

Partner--+ Customer--+ Change--+ Sales and Distribution , Partner fimction tab page.

Task 4: The new customer is placing an order for the first time. Create a standard order for the new customer based on the purchase order. Use the F4 search help to find the sold-to party. Purchase order Customer:

Search term: SCM600-##

Ship-to party:

T-SSOB##


5-4 II


in 10 days

IMaterial

I

;uantity

T-AS2##

a) 2.

Logistics-> Sales and Distribution-> Sales-> Order-> Create

In the sales order, the system proposes the Incoterms as they are maintained in the customer master record. However. for this order, the Incoterms FOB Hamburg should be valid. Change these entries in the order.

Hint: In the sales order, the lncoterms can be found in the order header on the Sales tab page. Does the change affect the customer master record?

a) 3.

No. The data is proposed from the customer master in the order and can be overwritten, if necessary.


a)

The system assigns the order document number.


~96


2009

TSCM60


Task 5: Change the customer master record of the sold-to party. I.

The customer informs you of an address change. Enter the new street,Enjoystr. 99. a)

2.

Logistics_,. Sales and Distribution-7 Alaster Data-)' Business Partner --)- Customer -7 Change ----7 Sales and Distribution for General data, Address tab page.

You have agreed on the new terms of payment ZB02 with the customer. Change these entries in the customer master as well.

Hint: In the customer master, the terms of payment can be found in the sales area data on the Billing document tab page in Sales Area Data.

a)

Logistics --)' Sales and Distribution -;. lvlaster Data ---+Business Partner - 7 Customer--+ Change _,Sales and Distribution , Billing document tab page in Sales Area Data.

Task 6: Display the previously entered sales order (see above). I.

Check the address of the sold-to party in the sales order. Did it chonge after you changed the customer master?

a)

Logislics-> Sales and Distribution-> Sales-> Order-> Display Choose Display doc. header details. Choose the Partners tab page. When the address in the customer master is changed, it is also changed in the order.

2.

Check the terms of payment in the sales order. Did they change after you changed the customer master?


-2-00_9_______________________ ©_2_0_0_9_S_A_P_A_G___A_II_ri-gh_t_s-re_s_e_N_ed-.-----------------n9~7~


a)

TSCM60

Logistics---> Sales and Distribution---> Sales---> Order---> Display

Choose the Sales tab page. The terms of payment have not changed. The new terms of payment in the customer master only become effective when you create new sales orders. If required, you would have to change them manually in the sales order that has already been entered. The only exception to this is the address. Ifit is changed, it becomes immediately effective in sales orders that already exist.

Task 7: Display the order confirmation on the screen. I.

Before printing and sending the order confirmation, you would like to check the layout of the order confirmation.

{J a)

Hint\Display the sales order and choose Header output preview. Logistics---> Sales and Distribution---> Sales---> Order---> Display

Choose Header output preview. (The layout of an output can be changed using the SAPScript functions.)


The outbound delivery for the sales order must be made. Create an outbound delivery for the previous standard order (see above). Check the ship-to party address in the outbound delivery. Write down the customer number of the ship-to party.


__S_A_P_A_G___A_I_Ir-ig-h-ts_r_e-se-~-.-d-.------------------------2-0--09

~ r9~8,_-----------------©-c_2_0_09

TSCM60


Hint: Use the transaction Logistics ---+Sales and Distribution-+ Shipping and 1J·ansportation --> Outbound Delive1y--> Create--> Single Docume111--> With Reference to Sales Order. To be able to enter the outbound delivery at an earlier date, set the selection date 20 days into the future. Use shipping point ZO##.

a)

Logistics--> Sales and Distribution--> Shipping and 1J-ansportation --> Outbound De/ive1y--> Create -->Single Document--> With Reference to Sales Order

Ship-to party: T-SSOB##

Task 9: Display the previously entered customer master record for customer Miller. I.

How can you check in the system the sales areas for which the customer record has been maintained?

a)

Logistics -+ Sales and Distribution -+Master Data Partner-+ Customer-+ Display-+ Complete

-+

Business

Choose the CustomerS sales areas.

2.

How can you check in the system when and by whom the customer master was created?

a)

Logistics ---+ Sales and Distribution -+Master Data -+Business Partner-+ Customer__,. Display-+ Compfele

Extras-+ Administrative Data 3.

How can you check in the system how, when, and by whom which fields in the customer master were changed?


2009


99~

TSCM60


a)

Logistics ~Sales and Distribution ~Master Data Partner-> Customer-> Display-> Complete

~

Business

Environment-> Account Changes ->All Fields Position the cursor on the relevant line and click Choose. 4.

How can you display a list of orders for the customer from the customer master?

a)

Logistics ->Sales and Distribution ->Master Data-> Business Partner-> Customer-> Display-> Complete Environment ~ List Documents

~

Orders

Choose Enter.

Task 10: Questions on the Customer Master. 1.

You have created the new customer master record for sales organization

I 000, distribution channel 12, and division 00 only. Sales organization I 020 may possibly want to sell goods to this customer using distribution channel 12 and division 00. What would you need to do to make it possible?

a) 2.

You would also have to create the sales area data for this customer for the relevant sales area with sales organization I 020.

Is it possible in the customer master record to maintain various addresses

for the sold-to party in multiple company codes?

a)

~100

No. The address of the sold-to party is maintained independently of the organizational units. (It is possible to assign several ship-to parties to a sold-to party).


2009


TSCM60

e .

Lesson Summary

'

You should now be able to:

Maintain customer master data

2009


101

t:!!\"


TSCM60

Lesson: Material Master Lesson Overview This Jesson explains the structure and function of the material master.

~ ~

Lesson Objectives After completing this Jesson, you will be able to: Maintain material master data

Business Example IDES, Inc. is offeriDg a new material that is also to be mapped in the system as a master record.

Material Master

Figure 40: Material Master

The material master comprises the following areas: basic data. sales and distribution data, purchasing data, various other pieces of data for engineering/design, accounting, costing, warehouse management, and so on.

Basic data is relevant to all areas. It is valid for all organizational units within a client.

~102


2009

TSCM60~------------------------------------------------~L~e~s~s~o~n~:~M~at~e~r~,a~I~M~a~s~t~er

The sales organization data is relevant for sales and distribution. It is valid for the respective sales organization and the distribution channel. Sales plant data is also relevant for sales and distribution and is valid for the respective delivering plant. Additional data relevant for different organizational units is available for various other areas.

e

.

.

Material group, bonus group, Product hierarchy, and so on Availability check, transport group, loading group, and so on Export I import group, region of origin, and so on

Figure 41: Data on the Sales Tab Pages There are several tab pages for the material master that are valid for sales and distribution: Basic data is relevant to all areas. It is maintained independently of the organizational units. Data for Sales: Sales Org. I and Sales: Sales Org. 2 and the sales text is valid for the sales organization and distribution channel. Sales: General/Plant data and the Foreign Trade: Export data is valid for the delivering plant. By changing the Customizing settings, you can hide certain fields on a tab page or make them required entry fields.

-20_0_9______________________©_c_2_00_9_S_A_P__ A_G_._A_II-rig_h_ts--re-se_N_e_d-.--------------~1~0~3~~

TSCM60


o Standard material type: OlEN = service No inventory management

e Item category group: LEIS =service without delivery ,. .""" . . . . ~""'"""~'""")-

No delivery

Order-related billing

e Material master views: • Basic data • Classification: optional • Sales and distribution data • Purchasing: only when the service is obtained from a third-party ~~

• Accounting: only for internal valuatiOI) with prices

Figure 42: Service materials Services must exist as material master records in order to be used in sales and distribution processes. The functions in the area of shipping/storage are not used and therefore you do not have to maintain much information. We recommend that you use material type DIEN for service materials (no inventory management).

Division-Specific and Cross-Division Sales Header division

Division 07

Item divisions

Figure 43: Cross-Division Sales You can use this kind of processing to enter multiple materials with various divisions in a sales order. '

~104


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Material Master

V OV&" You can control the following in Customizing, according to the sales document type: Whether it is possible to enter multiple materials with various divisions for an order. --·-The way the system is to respond (with or without warning message). Whether the division on item level is copied from the material master record or whether the division in the document header is also copied into the item. Header division

Item divisions

Figure 44: Division-Specific Sales

You cannot use this kind of processing to enter multiple materials with various divisions in an order. This can be controlled in Customizing, according to the sales document type.

-20_0_9______________________©_c_2_00_9_S_A_P__A_G-.A--II-rig_h_ts_r_e-se_N_e_d-.--------------~10.Q~5~~


TSCM60

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Maintain material master data

~ "1~0~6~-----------------©-2_0_0_9_S_A_P_A_G--.A-I-Ir-ig-h-ts__ re_s_eN--ed-.------------------------2-0--09

TSCMGO

Lesson:

Customer~Material

Info Record

Lesson: Customer-Material Info Record Lesson Overview This lesson explains the structure and function of the customer-material info record.

e .

.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Maintain the customer-material info record

Business Example IDES, Inc. wants to store material-specific data for a customer.

Customer-Material Info Record

Customer/material information Customer Sales organization Distribution channel

2300 1000 12

Material

Description

Customer~specific

1400~100

Scheinwerfer Deluxe

53000 Front light __ R1700 Back light + additional data

1400-200 Taillight

data: Material description

Figure 45: Master Data: Customer-Material Information The customer-material info record is used for storing customer-specific material data. If a customer-material info record has been defined for a customer and a material, the default values take priority over the values in the customer or material master when a document ts processed (order, delivery, and so on).

2009


107~

TSCM60


You can use the customer-material information record to maintain the following data:

Cross-reference from your customer's material number to your material number and the customer's material description. Specific shipping information for this customer and material (such as delivery tolerances, specifying if the customer will accept partial deliveries, or the default delivering plant).

e

.

Purchase order

.

Motomarkt Heidelberg Cust. no.: 2300 PO no.: 12970-B ~--~-

Material Quantity S3000 10 R1700 10

Item 1

2

Order ent')f

-. \

·--~

··-~-~ ustomer/materia information

~~~=:~;--~::.~. . ~ lL:::_::j I f

!

1

1400-100

53000

i

Figure 46: Order Entry using the Customer-Material Information

Sales orders can be placed with the customer's material number by using the Ordering Party tab page. The system finds the associated material master via the customer-material information.

~108


2009

TSCM60

Lesson:

Customer~Material

Info Record

Exercise 4: Material Master and Customer-Material Info Record Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to:

Maintain a customer master record Maintain customer-material information Understand the effects of material master data and customer-material info on the processing of documents in sales and distribution

Business Example You have added a new material to your product rahge. You wish to post goods receipts to the stock for this material, and create sales orders. Some major customers usually order materials using their own material numbers. In order to facilitate sales order processing, you use the customer-material information.

Task 1: Create a materia] master record for the new material. I.

The new material is a headlight, similar to the existing material T-ASl""· In order to facilitate the entry of the material master record, you can use the relevant reference data. You enter the material master for plant 1000, sales organization 1000, and distribution channel 12. Use these organizational units too when referencing the reference material. Hint: Since the material is "trading goods" that are purchased by the vendor and resold to the customer, use the following transaction to maintain the material master: Logistics~ Sales and Distribwion ~ Master Data _, Products _, Material -> 1/·ading Goods _, Create.

You have the following information on the new headlight: (Apart from this information, the material has the same features as the system proposed for the reference material T-AS 1##.)


2009


109~

TSCM60


Industry:

Retail

Reference material:

T-ASl##

Hint: Using the available information, first maintain the Basic Data

1, Sales:Sales Org. Data I, Sales: General/Plant Data, Sales Text and Accounting I. Material description:

Headlight ''simple"

Weight:

not yet known

Caution: The gross and net weight of the new material are not yet

known. Since you create the material master record with reference to material T-AS I##, the system proposes the weight. Do not forget to delete these proposals on the Basic Data 1 tab page. Maintain the weight entries for the material later. once you have access to them.

Tax classification:

Full tax

Minimum order quantity:

10

Minimum delivery quantity:

5

Price: as of 1 piece:

20 EUR per piece

Hint: You can maintain the material price directly when creating the material master record by choosing Conditions on the Sales: Sales Org. 1 tab page

Loading group:

Crane

Sales text:

"'Material is fragile!"

Accounting data: Price control:

v

Moving average price:

10

Save the material master record and write down the number.


~110

©


2009

TSCM60

Lesson:

Customer~Material

Info Record

Task 2: Enter the goods receipt. I.

You are informed that for the new headlight 200 pieces have already been delivered. Enter the goods receipt for this amount.

Hint: Inventory management is carried out in materials management. Use the transaction Logistics--> Materials Management-> Inventory Management-> Goods Movement-> Goods Receipt-> Other. Enter the goods receipt using movement type 561 in plant 1000, storage location 0001. Save the goods receipt. Document number: _ _ _ _ __

Task 3: You receive the first sales order for the new material. I.

Create a standard order based on the purchase order. Purchase order Customer:

T-SSOA##


5-1311


in 10days

Material

Quantity

Headlight Simple

10

(from the previous exercise) 2.


Hint: Save the order although it is not yet complete. The weight for the material is still missing. You have to complete it once you have the data.

Continued. on next page

-20_0_9_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _©_c_2_0_09-SA_P_A_G___A_II_ri-gh_t_s-re_s_eN-ed-.-------~1AA1A1 ~

TSCM60



The outbound delivery for the sales order should already be made. Create an outbound delivery for the previous standard order. Hint: Use the transaction Logistics--> Sales and Distribution --> Shipping and Transportation--> Outbound De/ive1y--> Create --> Single Document--> With Reference to Sales Order. To be able to enter the outbound delivery at an earlier date, set the selection date 20 days into the future. Use shipping point ZO##.

Why is it not possible to create the outbound delivery?

Task 5: Change the material master record. I.

In the meantime, you have received the details on the weight of the new headlight. Change the material master record and enter the weight. Gross weight:

1 KG

Net weight:

1 KG

{J

Hint: You can enter the weight on the Basic Data 1 tab page.

Task 6: Change the incomplete order. I.

Were there any changes in the previously entered sales order containing the new headlight after you changed the weight in the material master record?

2.

You need to enter the weight in the incomplete order to carry out the shipping activities afterwards. Change the incomplete standard order and enter the weight for the item containing the headlight.


~112


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Customer-Material Info Record

Gross weight:

10 KG

Net weight:

10 KG

Hint: You can find the fields for the gross and the net weight in the item detail on the Shipping tab page.

Task 7: Try to create the outbound delivery again. I.

The outbound delivery for the sales order should already be made. Create an outbound delivery for the previous standard order.

Hint: To be able to enter the outbound delivery at an earlier date, set the selection date 20 days into the future. Use shipping point ZO##. o

Check whether the material sales text. which is maintained in the material master record, also appears in the delivery item. Hint: You can find the texts for the delivery item in the item detail on the Texts tab page.

Task 8: Create a customer-material info record. 1.

One of your major customers orders materials using his own material numbers. To facilitate order entry. you create a customer-material info for sales organization 1000 and distribution channel 12. For the new material (headlight "Simple"), customer T-SSOA## uses customer material number K-4711-## and the description Headlight 4711. You have also agreed with the customer on a minimum delivery quantity of I 0 pieces for this material. Hint: You can find the transaction for creating a customer-material info by choosing Agreements from the Master Data menu. .

Task 9: Create a sales order using a customer material number. I.

Create a standard order based on the existing purchase order. Continued on next page

2009


113~

TSCM60


Purchase order

2.

Customer:

T-SSOA##


5-1911


in 10 days

Item

Customer material number

Quantity

K-4711-##

10


Task 10: Create the outbound delivery. 1.

The outbound delivery for the sales order should already be made. Create an outbound delivery for the previous standard order. Hint: To be able to enter the outbound delivery at an earlier date, set the selection date 20 days into the future. Use shipping point ZO##.

Save the outbound delivery and write down the order number.

2.

To check how the customer material number will be printed on the delivery note, you display the delivery note on the screen. Hint: To display the delivery note, use the transaction Outbound De/ive1y --+ Display and then Outbound De/ive1y -> Issue De/ive1y Output.

Choose Message Type LDOO and then Print Preview.

Task 11: Questions on the material master 1.

~ 114

You want to sell your materials through several sales organizations. Is it possible to maintain multiple sales units in the material master according to the sales organization and the distribution channel? Continued on next page


2009

Lesson: Custorner~Material Info Record

TSCM60

2009

2.

You want to deliver your materials from various plants. Is it possible to maintain multiple loading groups in the material master according to the plant?

3.

Is it possible to maintain multiple minimum order quantities in the material master according to the division?


115~

TSCM60


Solution 4: Material Master and Customer-Material Info Record Task 1: Create a material master record for the new material. I.

The new material is a headlight, similar to the existing material T-AS 1##. In order to facilitate the entry of the material master record, you can use the relevant reference data. You enter the material master for plant 1000, sales organization 1000, and distribution channel 12. Use these organizational units too when referencing the reference material. Hint: Since the material is "trading goods" that are purchased by the vendor and resold to the customer, use the following transaction to maintain the material master: Logistics-;~- Sales and Distribution -;~ Master Data--+ Products--+ Material-+ Ti·ading Goods--+ Create.

You have the following information on the new headlight: (Apart from this information. the material has the same features as the system proposed for the reference material T-ASJ##.) Industry:

Retail

Reference material:

T-ASl##

Hint: Using the available information, first maintain the Basic Data I, Sales:Sales Org. Data 1, Sales: General/Plant Data, Sales Text and Accounting I.

Material description:

Headlight "simple"

Weight:

not yet known

Caution: The gross and net weight of the new material are not yet known. Since you create the material master record with reference to material T-AS I##. the system proposes the weight. Do not forget to delete these proposals on the Basic Data I tab page. Maintain the weight entries for the material later, once you have access to them.


~116


2009

TSCM60


Tax classitication:

Full tax

Minimum order quantity:

10

Minimum delivery quantity:

5

Price: as of I piece:

20 EUR per piece

Hint: You can maintain the material price directly when creating the material master record by choosing Conditions on the Sales: Sales Org. I tab page Loading group:

Crane

Sales text:

"Material is fragile!"

Accounting data: Price control:

v

Moving average price:

10

Save the material master record and write down the number.

a)

Logistics ---+ Sales and Distribution_, .\f::Jstcr Data _,Products ]!.1aterial --? Trading Goods ---+ Create

---+

The material number is assigned internally by the system.


You are informed that for the new headlight 200 pieces have already been delivered. Enter the goods receipt for this amount.

Hint: Inventory management is carried out in materials management. Use the transaction Logistics---> Materials Management---> Inventmy Management ---> Goods Movement-> Goods Receipt-> Other. Enter the goods receipt using movement type 561 in plant 1000, storage location 0001.


-20_0_9______________________©_c_2_0_09--SA __ P_A_G_._A_II-ri-gh_t_s-re-s-eN--ed-.----------------1AA1~7~

TSCM60


Save the goods receipt. Document number: _ _ _ _ __ a)

Logistics --->Materials Management---> Inventmy Management---> Goods Movement ---> Goods Receipt ---> Other

The document number is assigned internally by the system.

Task 3: You receive the first sales order for the new material. I.

Create a standard order based on the purchase order. Purchase order

Customer:

T-SSOA##


5-1311


in 10 days

Material

Quantity

Headlight Simple

10

(from the previous exercise) a)

2.

Logistics---> Sales and Distribution --->Sales ---> Order---> Create


Hint: Save the order although it is not yet complete. The weight for the material is still missing. You have to complete it once you have the data.

a)

Save your entries, although the document is still incomplete. The document number is assigned internally by the system.


f:'!.!!'

118


2009

TSCMSO




Hint: Use the transaction Logistics ~Sales and_ Distribution --+ Shipping and Ti·ansportation ---> Outbound Delive1y---> Create---> Single Document---> With R~ference to Sales Order. To be able to enter the outbound delivery at an earlier date, set the selection date 20 days into the future. Use shipping point ZO##.

Why is it not possible to create the outbound delivery?

a)

LogisEics---> Sales and Distribution---> Shipping and Ti·ansportation---> Outbound DelivelJ'---> Create --->Single Document---> With Reference to Sales Order

You cannot create the outbound delivery because the order to be delivered is still incomplete due to the missing entries for weight.

Task 5: Change the material master record. I.

In the meantime, you have received the details on the weight of the new headlight. Change the material master record and enter the weight. Gross weight:

1 KG

Net weight:

1 KG

[:) a)

Hint: You can enter the weight on the Basic Data I tab page. Logistics---> Sales and Distribution---> Master Data---> Products ---> Material ---> Ti·ading Goods ---> Change

You can maintain the weight on the Basic Data I or on the Sales: General/Plant Data tab page. (The weight data is independent of the organizational units.)


2009


119~

TSCMSO


Task 6: Change the incomplete order. I.

Were there any changes in the previously entered sales order containing the new headlight after you changed the weight in the material master record?

a)

2.

When the material master record is modified, there will be no changes to the sales order that has already been entered in the system. The changes in the material master record only become effective in orders that are entered afterwards.

You need to enter the weight in the incomplete order to carry out the shipping activities afterwards. Change the incomplete standard order and enter the weight for the item containing the headlight. Gross weight:

10 KG

Net weight:

10 KG

Hint: You can find the fields for the gross and the net weight in the item detail on the Shipping tab page.

a)

Logistics-+ Sales and Distribution -+Sales-+ Order-+ Change Choose Display item details and the Shipping tab page.

Task 7: Try to create the outbound delivery again.

I.


Hint: To be able to enter the outbound delivery at an earlier date, set the selection date 20 days into the future. Use shipping point ZO##.

a)

Logistics-+ Sales and Distribution-+ Shipping and Transportation-+ Outbou!'d De/ive1y-+ Create-+ Single Document-+ With Reference to Sales Order The outbound delivery can be created because the order to be delivered is now complete.


~120


2009

TSCM60


2.

Check whelher the material sales text, which is maintained in the material master record, also appears in the delivery item.

Hint: You can find the texts for the delive1y item in the item detail on the Texts tab page.

a)

Choose Display item details and the Texts tab page. First of all, the text was copied from the material master into the sales order. Then it was copied from the sales order into the outbound delivery.

Task 8: Create a customer-material info record. I.

One of your major customers orders materials using his own material numbers. To facilitate order entry, you create a customer-material info for sales organization 1000 and distribution channel 12.

For the new material (headlight "Simple"), customer T-SSOA## uses customer material number K-4711-## and the description Headlight 4711. You have also agreed with the customer on a minimum delivery quantity of 10 pieces for this material.

Hint: You can find the transaction for creating a customer-material info by choosing Agreements from the Master Data menu.

a)

Logistics~

Sales and Distribution ~ A1aster Data~ Agreements~ Customer Material information ~ Create

To enter the customer material description and the minimum delivery quantity, choose Info record details.

Task 9: Create a sales order using a customer material number. I.

Create a standard order based on the existing purchase order.

Purchase order Customer:

T-SSOA##


5-1911


-20_0_9________________________©--20_0_9_S_A __ P_A_G___A_II_r_ig_h_ts_r_e_se-~-e-d-.----------------~1'2~1 ~

TSCMSO



in 10 days

Customer material

Item

Quantity

number

K-4711-##

a)

10


To enter the item using the customer material number, choose the Ordering party tab page. · 2.


a)




()

~


Save the outbound delivery and write down the order number.

a)

Logistics--)> Sales and Distribution--)> Shipping and Transportation--)> Outbound Delive1y--> Create-> Single Document-> With Reference to Sales Order



~122


2009

Lesson: Customer~Material Info Record

TSCM60

2.

To check how the customer material number will be printed on the delivery note, you display the delivery note on the screen.

Hint: To display the delivery note, use the transaction Outbound Deiive1y-> Display and then Outbound De/ive1y -> Issue De/ive1y Output. Choose Message Type LDOO and then Print Preview.

a)

Logistics-> Sales and Distribution-> Shipping and 1J·ansportation Outbound Delive1y-> Display-> Outbound De/ive1y-> Display

->

Choose Outbound DeliveJy->Issue Delive1y Output. Choose Message Type LDOO and then Print Preview. The customer material number is automatically printed on the delivery note. (The layout of an output can be changed using the SAPScript functions.)

Task 11: Questions on the material master I.

You want to sell your materials through several sales organizations. Is it possible to maintain multiple sales units in the material master according to the sales organization and the distribution channel?

a)

2.

You want to deliver your materials from various plants. Is it possible to maintain multiple loading groups in the material master according to the plant?

a) 3.

Yes. In the material master, there are various ways to maintain multiple fields. such as the sales units, depending on the sales organization and on the distribution channel.

Yes. In the material master, there are various ways to maintain multiple fields, such as the loading group, depending on the plant.

Is it possible to maintain multiple minimum order quantities in the material master according to the division?


2009


123~


a)

~124

TSCM60

No. The division in the material master is not an organizational unit that can be used to maintain related fields. It is a field which is used to uniquely assign a material to a division.


2009


TSCM60

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Maintain the customer-material info record

2009


125 r;sr


TSCM60

Lesson: Condition Master Data for Pricing Lesson Overview This lesson explains the condition master data.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Maintain condition master data and explain pricing functions

Business Example You define a price for the new materia\, which will be valid for all customers. For certain major customers, you define special prices and discounts.

Condition master data

Figure 47: Condition Master

The condition master data includes prices, surcharges and discounts, freights, and taxes. You can define condition master data (condition records) to be dependent on various data. You can, for example, maintain a material price customer-specifically or define a discount to be dependent on the customer and the material pricing group.

~126


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Condition Master Data for Pricing

In Customizing, you can define the data on which prices, surcharges and discounts, freights or taxes can be dependent. (You can also make conditions dependent of any document fields). Frequently occurring cases have already been set in the standard system.

KAOO special offer discount

1000 Distribution channel

12

2300 1400-100 Validity

04101 -04/30 As of 1000 EUR: 1-% As of 2000 EUR: 2:% As, of 3000 EUR: 3- %

yaHditY 05/01 ~ 05/31 As of 1000 EUR:

2~%

AS' Of 2boo_ EUR: 3~% As of 3000 EUR: 5-%

Figure 48: Condition Master Records in Pricing

The condition type defines multiple uses of a condition. You can have a percentage, a quantity-dependent, or an amount-dependent surcharge or discount, depending on the condition type. By specifying a validity period. you can restrict a price agreement to a certain period.

You can maintain values within a condition record (price, surcharge, discount) according to a scale. There is no limit to the number of scale levels.

-20_0_9______________________©_c_2_0_09--SA_P__A_G_._A_II-rig_h_ts--re-se-~-.-d-.--------------~1~2~7~


TSCM60

Figure 49: Pricing in Sales Orders

Prices, surcharges, discounts, freight, and taxes (conditions) for a business transaction can be found automatically using the automatic pricing function. You can also change these conditions manually. Pricing is carried out using the condition technique.

~128


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Condition Master Data for Pricing

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Maintain condition master data and explain pricing functions

-20_0_9______________________©_c_2_00_9_S_A_P__A_G_._A_II-rig_h_ts--~-se_N_e_d-.--------------~1~2~9~~

TSCM60


Lesson: Additional Master Data Lesson Overview This lesson introduces other important aspects of master data.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Issue output for sales documents Work with the incompletion log

Business Example IDES, Inc. uses the incompletion log to check the sales documents. The customers of IDES, Inc. receive output from the system (order confirmations. tor example) for the individual process steps.

Output

e .

. .

I ---------· Pr-int

Oi"der confirmation 6177 MotoTJarkt Heidelberg Customer number 2300 We wiU deliver: Item Material Quantity Value 1 S3000 10 650 2 R1700 10 300

Figure 50: Output Output is infonnation that is sent to the customer via various media, such as mail, ED!, or fax. Examples include: the printout of a quotation or an order confirmation, order confirmations via EDI, or invoices by fax_

~130


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Additional Master Data

As with pricing, output determination takes place using the condition technique. Output can be sent for various sales and distribution documents (order, outbound delivery, billing document, and so on). In the output master data, you define the transmission medium, the time, and the partner function for an output type. Output types include, for example: Quotation, order confirmation, invoice. Pm1ner functions include, for example: Sold-to party, ship-to party, and bill-to party. Transmission media include, for example: Printer, telex, fax, mail, ED!. Times at which output is sent include: Immediately when saving, or by using a standard program (RSNASTOO) that is run regularly. The layout of an output is defined by a form in SAPScript. The form is assigned to an output type.

Incompleteness Check

·-·~

,. I

i:

Call up: a)

automatically when you save

b)

using the menu bar

Figure 51: Incompletion Log

Each sales and distribution document contains data required for the document and for further processing. The system determines which tields will be displayed in the incompletion log, if the user does not complete them during sales order processing. You receive the incompletion log either: a) Automatically when the data is saved, or

2009


131~


TSCM60

b) By choosing Edit---> Incompletion Log. In Customizing, you can decide which fields should be part of the incompletion log. The incompletion log functions are available in the sales order and in the delivery.

Common Master Data Customer/material or condition master data for representative distribution channel

Customer/material or condition master data without separate distribution channel

!1J&tt:!XSJW+I~wd0:~fW.•.'~.N .. •

[S:i::V?l I :. ors
: v

•· ''6"!11\·~

••• '

'

Figure 52: Common Master Data -Distribution Channels If you do not need the master data (customer I material and condition master data) to be differentiated according to distribution channels, you have to set up a representative distribution channel. The master data for the representative distribution channel applies to all distribution channels for which you have set up this reference in Customizing.

By doing this, you can minimize the effort of entering and maintaining master data. In addition, you can update statistics for distribution channels without having to create master data for the various distribution channels.

~ 132


2009

TSCM60


Customer or condition master data for representative division

Customer or condition master data without separate division

-· Figure 53: Common Master Data - Divosions If you do not need the master data (customer or condition master data) to be differentiated according to divisions, you have to set up a representative division. The master data in the representative division applies to all divisions for which you have set up this reference. By doing this, you can minimize the effort of entering and maintaining master data. In addition, you can update statistics for divisions without having to create master data for the various divisions.

2009


133~


TSCM60

~ A1'3~4_----------------©~20_0_9_S_A_P_A_G-.-A-II-r-ig-ht_s_re_s_e_N_e_d-.----------------------2-00--9

TSCM60


Exercise 5: Additional Master Data Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: Maintain condition master data Describe the pricing in a sales order

Business Example You have defined certain price agreements for some major customers. As these

customers place orders frequently, they should receive lower prices for some materials, depending on the quantity ordered. In addition, a customer should be granted a percentage discount, depending on the order value. As it is not necessary to enter these agreements each time you create an order, you want to use the automatic pricing function of the system and create the appropriate condition master data.

Task 1: Create a condition master record for prices. I.

You have agreed with customer T-SSOA## that, from now on, they are to receive material T-ASI## at a quantity-dependent lower price. As of I pieces: EUR 29 per I piece As of I 0 pieces: EUR 28 per I piece As of I 00 pieces: EUR 27 per I piece. These agreements should be valid until the end of the year. Enter the condition master record for the customer-specific price for sales organization 1000 and distribution channel 12. Hint: As it is a customer-specific price, you create the condition master record using the following menu path:

Logistics ----+Sales and Distribution----+ Master Data----+ Conditions -+Select Using Condition Type-+ Create Condition type PROO Key combination Customer/material with release status Choose Scales.


-20_0_9_______________________ ©_2_0_09__S_A_P_A_G_._A_II-ri-gh_t_s-re_s_eN--ed-.--------------~1~3~5~

TSCM60


Task 2: After saving the price agreement with the major customer in the system, you receive another order. 1.


2.

Customer:

T-S50A##


5-2311


in 10 days

Material

Quantity

T-AS1##

20

During order entry, you want to make sure that the automatic pricing function has determined the correct prices.

Hint: In order to trace the pricing in the sales order, choose Item conditions. Which price per piece was determined by the system?

3.


Task 3: Create a condition master record for discounts. I.

You have agreed with customer T-S50A## that, from now on, they are to be granted a percentage discount for all materials, depending on the item value. As of EUR 100: -1% As of EUR 500: -2% As of EUR 1000: -3%


~136


2009

TSCM60


These agreements should be valid until the end of the year. Enter the condition master record for the customer-specific discount for sales organization 1000, distribution channel12, division 00.

Hint: Since this is a customer-specific percentage discount, create the condition master record with the following menu path:

Master Data--+ Conditions Create

--+

Select Using Condition Tjpe

--+

Condition type K007

Task 4: After storing the price agreement for the discount for the major customer in the system, you receive another order.

I.


2.

Customer:

T-SSOA##


5-25ll


in 10 days

Material

Quantity

T-AS1##

10

During order entry. you want to make sure that the automatic pricing function has determined the correct prices and discounts.

Hint: To track the pricing in the sales order, you have to branch to the Conditions tab page for the Item detail. Which customer discount was determined by the system?

3.



2009


137~

TSCM60


Task 5: Questions on condition master data in pricing.

1.

Which condition master data categories ( 4) can be used in pricing?

2.

You want to sell your materials through multiple distribution channels. Is it possible to maintain the prices in the condition master in different ways according to the distribution channel?

3.

You have entered a sales order. By doing so, prices were determined by the automatic pricing function. Can you change the prices manually when

entering the order?

4.

During sales order processing, you use various divisions. However, you always want to use the same condition master data for all divisions. In order to avoid unnecessary maintenance of condition master data for multiple divisions. you would like to configure the system in such a way that the condition master data of division 00 are also valid for divisions 0 I and 02. Is this possible?


~138


2009

TSCM60


5.

Is it possible to make these settings for common master data for customer and material master data as well?

-20_0_9______________________©_c_2_00-9--SA_P __A_G_._A_ll_ri-gh_ffi__ re_s_e~-e-d-.--------------~1~3~9~

TSCM60


Solution 5: Additional Master Data Task 1: Create a condition master record for prices. I.

You have agreed with customer T-SSOA## that, from now on, they are to receive material T -AS I## at a quantity-dependent lower price. As of I pieces: EUR 29 per I piece As of I 0 pieces: EUR 28 per I piece As of 100 pieces: EUR 27 per I piece. These agreements should be valid until the end of the year. Enter the condition master record for the customer-specific price for sales organization 1000 and distribution channel 12. Hint: As it is a customer-specific price, you create the condition master record using the following menu path:

Logistics ->Sales and Distribution-> Master Data-> Conditions ->Select Using Condition Type-> Create Condition type PROO Key combination Customer/material with release status Choose Scales. a)

Logistics--+ Sales and Distribution--)' }..Jaster Data --)' Conditions--)' Select Using Condition Type--+ Create

Condition type PROO Key combination Customer/material with release status Enter sales organization 1000, distribution channel 12, customer T-SSOA##, and material T-ASI##.

Choose Scales. Enter Validity Today until End of the year. Enter the values from the exercise. Choose Save.


~140


2009

TSCMSO


Task 2: After saving the price agreement with the major customer in the system, you receive another order.

I.


T-SSOA##


5-2311


in 10 days

a) 2.

Material

Quantity

T-AS1##

20

Logistics--+ Sales and Distribution --+Sales--+ Order--+ Create

During order entry, you want to make sure that the automatic pricing function has determined the correct prices.

Hint: In order to trace the pricing in the sales order, choose Item conditions. Which price per piece was determined by the system?

a)

Choose Item conditions. The system has determined a price of EUR 28 per piece, as in the price condition record from 10 pieces a price ofEUR 28 per piece is stored.

3.


a)


Task 3: Create a condition master record for discounts.

1.

You have agreed with customer T-SSOA## that, from now on, they are to be granted a percentage discount for all materials, depending on the item value. As ofEUR 100: -1% Continued on next page

2009


141~

TSCM60


As of EUR 500: -2% As of EUR I 000: -3% These agreements should be valid until the end of the yea1·. Enter the condition master record for the customer-specific discount for sales organization 1000, distribution channell2, division 00.

Hint: Since this is a customer-specific percentage discount, create the condition master record with the following menu path:

Master Data Create

-->

Conditions

-->

Select Using Condition Type

-->

Condition type K007

a)

Logistics -->Sales and Distribution--> Master Data--> Conditions--> Select Using Condition Type --> Create Condition t)pe K007 Enter sales organization 1000, distribution channell2, division 00, and customer T -S50A##. Choose Scales. Enter Validity Today until End of the year. Enter the values from the exercise. Choose Save.

Task 4: After storing the price agreement for the discount for the major customer in the system, you receive another order. I.


T-S50A##


5-2511

Requested· delivery date:

in 10 days

a)

Material

Quantity

T-ASI##

10

Logistics--> Sales and Distribution--> Sales--> Order--> Create Continued on next page

~142


2009

TSCM60


2.

During order entry, you want to make sure that the automatic pricing function has determined the correct prices and discounts.

Hint: To track the pricing in the sales order, you have to branch to the Conditions tab page for the Item detail. Which customer discount was determined by the system?

a)

Choose Display items details . Choose the Conditions tab page. The system has determined the customer discount K007 (-1 %), because a discount of- I% is stored in the discount condition record for orders over EUR 100.

3.


a)


Task 5: Questions on condition master data in pricing. I.

Which condition master data categories (4) can be used in pricing? Answer: Prices, surcharges/discounts, freights, taxes.

2.

You want to sell your materials through multiple distribution channels. Is it possible to maintain the prices in the condition master in different ways according to the distribution channel? Answer: Yes. Usually, the price is maintained according to the sales organization and the distribution channel. The price can also be maintained according to further criteria (the customer, for example).

3.

You have entered a sales order. By doing so, prices were determined by the automatic pricing function. Can you change the prices manually when entering the order? Answer: Yes. Usually, during order entry you can overwrite the price manually. However, it is possible to restrict this by making the relevant settings in Customizing or in the condition record.


2009


143~


4.

TSCM60

During sales order processing, you use various divisions. However, you always want to use the same condition master data for all divisions. In order to avoid unnecessary maintenance of condition master data for multiple divisions, you would like to configure the system in such a way that the condition master data of division 00 are also valid for divisions 01 and 02. Is this possible? Answer: Yes. In Customizing, you can set up division 00 as a representative

division and set a reference for divisions 01 and 02 to it. In this way, the condition master data of division 00 is also valid for divisions 01 and 02. 5.

Is it possible to make these settings for common master data for customer and material master data as well? Answer: For customer master data, it is possible to configure common

master data for the divisions. For material master data, this is only possible for distribution channels, as the division in the material master is not used as an organizational unit where the dependent material master data would be maintained.

~144


2009

TSCM60


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Issue output for sales documents Work with the incompletion log

2009


145~

TSCM60

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: Maintain customer master data Maintain material master data Maintain the customer-material info record Maintain condition master data and explain pricing functions Issue output for sales documents Work with the incompletion log

~146


2009

nit Sales and Distribution Processes Data Determination and Collective Processing U(lit Overview This unit also explains the function of the sales document type in Sales and Distribution processes and delivery scheduling. The collective processing options are another important topic within the Sales and Distribution processes.

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: Trigger different sales processes by choosing suitable sales document types Explain how the delivering plant, shipping point and route are determined automatically Give the customers delivery dates automatically determined in the system and be able to look at scheduling in detail Combine and collectively process sales orders due for outbound de live!)· in one step Combine and collectively process documents due for billing in one step

Unit Contents Lesson: Function of the Sales Document Type ............................. 148 Lesson: Plant, Shipping Point, and Route Determination ................. 151 Lesson: Shipment Scheduling ................................................ 157 Exercise 6: Shipment Scheduling ........................................ 161 Lesson: Collective Processing in Sales and Distribution .................. 175 Exercise 7: Collective Processing in Sales and Distribution .......... 185

2009


147~

Unit 4: Sales and Distribution Processes - Data Determination and Collective Processing

TSCM60

Lesson: Function of the Sales Document Type Lesson Overview This lesson explains the function of sales document types in sales processes.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Trigger different sales processes by choosing suitable sales document types

Business Example IDES, Inc. uses a variety of sales document types to control sales processes.

Function of the Sales Document Type

Figure 54: Sales Document Types

In Sales, a wide range of different activities are carried out. Different business processes can be identified and controlled by means of the sales document type. The standard system features a wide range of different sales document types for sales processes that are carried out on a regular basis: Standard order for invoiced sales on fixed delivery dates. Rush order and cash sales for sales from the plant (with or without invoice). Free deliveries for sales on fixed delivery dates (without invoice). Returns for return goods (credit memo/replacement delivery). You can implement these processes as they are or use them as a basis for mapping your own processes.

~148


2009

TSCM60

lesson: Function of the Sales Document Type

The sales document type controls the sales documents. Similarly, the delivery type can be used to control the shipping documents and the billing type can be used to control the billing documents.

--~-

·--.,

'·><::· <::-..::-:>:_. ;)' ::\

)"-:£LV ·,· :.": Sale·s·.;::::

h'-lte:wma·tiOO ·

'"'<> ;SYstem· Figure 55: Functions of Sales Documents

Depending on the transaction, certain functions are carried out automatically. These functions are activated or deactivated directly or indirectly through the sales document type. Examples For your normal sales process. you would like the system to automatically determine the time your customer receives the ordered goods. To do so, activate the shipment scheduling and availability check functions. However, these functoons are not necessary for credit memo requests. Pricing does not need to be carried out for free deliveries. Define an output group that can be used for processing sales orders and then create another output group for processing contracts.

Hint: Outputs contain information that is exchanged between business partners (order confirmations, billing forms, electronic message to one of your colleagues, for example).

2009


149~

Unit 4: Sales and Distribution Processes- Data Determination and Collective Processing

e

.

TSCM60

Lesson Summary

.

You should now be able to: Trigger different sales processes by choosing suitable sales document types

!<

50J10e -, jzl( f\?

~150

_,

o~·


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Plant, Shipping Point, and Route Determination

Lesson: Plant, Shipping Point, and Route Determination Lesson Overview This lesson explains how to carry out plant, shipping point, and route determination in sales documents.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain how the delivering plant, shipping point and route are determined automatically

Business Example The content of the Plant, Shipping Point, and Route fields in a sales document can be determined automatically and acts as a basis for delivery scheduling.

Plant Determination

Figure 56: Determining the Delivering Plant Automatically

The plant plays a central role in Logistics. In Sales, it is the delivering plant. When processing an item, the system automatically attempts to determine the associated delivering plant from the master data. The entry can later be changed manually.

2009


151~


TSCM60

The system uses the following search strategy: First, it checks whether a specification exists in a customer-material info

record. Second, it checks whether a specification exists in a customer master record of the ship-to party. Third, it checks whether a specification exists in the material master record. If nothing is found, no delivering plant is set in the sales document item. Without a plant, an item cannot normally be processed further. For example, attempts to automatically determine the shipping point or tax are unsuccessful, the availability cannot be checked, and an outbound delivery cannot be made.

Shipping Point Determination

Shipping point 1

Shipping point 2

Shipping point 3 ~

_,..-,

~,,

:_.)

Figure 57: Shipping Point

The shipping point is the organizational unit in the system that is responsible for processing shipping. To be able to give the customer a delivery date for an ordered item, the system must take into account all the required lead times for the different shipping and transportation subprocesses. For the shipping point, you can define the times required for preparing and packing the goods.

~152


2009

TSCM60


The shipping point is normally determined automatically for each item in the sales document. The automatic default value can be later changed manually if you have planned for a different shipping point.

I

/

oth'er,, :i\1 alt_er,native>,:- ' ;:,1 shipping ?OJ!:lf'

"iH

~= Lowest' 'COStS

..C'!iii Hamburg 1

HambUrg 2

'+1400

,':,~<:;:>~,!Y~t,~~~~,t

,c,i,c,c... ,,

, •

;;

Figure 58: Determining the Shipping Point Automatically

The system tries to determine a shipping point for every item to be delivered. The system uses three fields as search keys for determining the shipping point automatically. This data is normally defined in the following master records: Shipping condition from the sold-to party (view: Shipping) Loading group in the sales-specific material data (view: Sales: General/Plant Data) Delivering plant- see the slide Determining Delivering Plant Automatically Hint: The shipping conditions can be used to define in the system the delivery type requested by the customer.

2009


153~

Unit 4: Sales and Distribution Processes - Data Determination and Collective . Processing

TSCM60

Route Determination

Figure 59: Route

The route is the path an outbound delivery follows from the delivering plant to the ship-to partl:. _____________.,

It can comprise more than one section. It has a start point and an end point. The route can be used to define the actual transit time (length of time for which the goods are "on the road") and the lead time for transportation planning. The route is normally determined automatically for each item in the sales document. This default value can be later changed manually if you have planned a different route.

~154


2009

TSCMGO


e .

.

\I , pepilrture zone ;oqhe,shlpplng point

I...

. .

Q11inl +

\

Shipping

conditions

As soon as possible

I

Tran'Sportation Transportation zone of group the ship4o party

+0 0

ROut.~

Hannover

>·'·'

">'·:"'iJH ' ~-e + ·;·.. ~ ~t~ttgart

Regensburg

WeSt~'~·~·t·i~u~k·'~ij~~\'l • ···< ,.\ •.~">>

Figure 60: Determining the Route Automatically

The system tries to determine a route for every item to be delivered. The system uses four fields as search keys for determining the route automatically. This data is normally defined in master records and in Customizing: Departure zone in Customizing for the shipping point Shipping condition from the sold-to party (view: Shipping) Transportation group in the sales-specific material data (view: Sales: General/Plant Data) Transportation zone in the general data for the ship-to par(y

2009


155~


TSCM60

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Explain how the delivering plant, shipping point and route are determined automatically

~ "1~5~6~----------------©-c_2_0_09 __S_A_P_A_G_._A_I_Ir-ig_h_ts_r_e-se-~--ed-.------------------------2-0-09-

TSCM60

Lesson: Shipment Scheduling

Lesson: Shipment Scheduling Lesson Overview This lesson explains the shipment scheduling process.

~ ~

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Give the customers delivery dates automatically determined in the system and be able to look at scheduling in detail

Business Example Customers order goods with different delivery dates.

Shipment Scheduling

~ ~

rn1~~~~

~r:' ~---';--':..c..J ..:..:.~~-=--'

rn is.s.u_•~ '-o-~-~~r~:_ry--'

_L_o,a,di_n'-g_j __

Figure 61: Shipment Scheduling

In shipment and :ransportation scheduling, you define the time at which the receipt of the goods at the customer can be acknowledged (confirmed delivery date). Different lead times are taken into account: the preparation time, loading time, transportation lead time, and transit time.

2009


157~


TSCM60

The following data is used in shipment scheduling: Order date: date on which the order is placed Material availability date: date by which a sufficient quantity of goods must be available for picking and packing Loading date: date on which the goods picking and packing process is completed (and the mode of transport is available) so that loading can begin on time

Goods issue date: the date on which the goods must leave the delivering plant so that they reach the customer on the agreed date Delivery date: date on which the goods arrive at the customer. A differentiation is made between: Requested delivery date: date on which the customer would like the goods to arrive Confirmed delivery date: date on which the goods receipt is confirmed for the customer

\ I

I -'--'-i

Transit tiine?2days

.. . . . ·.~

Route: 0011

\

, 'Tr~nspcirtation lead time?

.

2 days

\ \

}~-4~i~h_--;::-:--_r Figure 62: Shipment Scheduling

When a delivery date is determined, you can also take into account the times required for delivering goods to a customer via a particular route.

~158


2009

TSCM60


The total time includes:

Transit time: The time required for transporting the goods to the customer Transportation lead time: The time required for preparing the goods for transportation

• Incoming orde-rs Order

date

Material staging

Trans.-

Goods

planning

issue

Material Transportation availability date planning date

Loading date

Delivery

Goods issue date

Required delivery date

~-

. ..

~---~~-1-'--~-.-~~~~p='-"'--""'---'-t

~~

Transit time "" Loading tim __ ' ,_{_4

Pick/pack time

io(~ ~~- ~--· ·~:;;~tation lead time ·.·.··

.. ')

'

The system uses the longer of these two times when scheduling deliveries.

"

if

Figure 63: Backward Scheduling

The goal of shipment and transportation scheduling is to confirm a delivery date for a material requested by a customer. For backwards scheduling, the customer's requested delivery date is used to calculate the material availability date and the transportation lead time. The outbound delivery must be created at the earliest of the two dates (selection date for the outbound delivery). If both dates are after the order date and the material is available on the material availability date, the customer's requested delivery date can be confirmed. A schedule line is created for the sales document item. The date of the schedule line displays the confirmed delivery date that is the same as the customer's requested delivery date. If one of the two dates is before the order date, confirmation of the requested delivery date cannot take place. Therefore, the system attempts to determine the next possible date (forward scheduling).

2009

© 2009 SAP AG, All rights reserved,

159~


e

..

,m .. d{D

.

Incoming orders Order date

Material staging

Trans.

planning

New material Transportation availability date planning date

Loading Loading date

Transportation lead time,

Figure 64: Forward

•

TSCM60

Delivery

Goods issue Goods Issue date

-

I ~/y.

-Confirmed delivery dat~

The confirmed delivery date is determined on the basis of the new material availability date.

sTh~duling

If the result of backward scheduling means that the delivery date required by the customer cannot be confirmed, the system executes forward scheduling. Forward scheduling takes into consideration the time parallels of the work flows for transpm1ation planning and pickinglpacking of materials. The longer of the two periods is relevant for scheduling. The selection date of the outbound delivery is the earlier of the material availability or the transportation planning date. The earliest date at which the material is available in the warehouse is the new material availability date. This is the outgoing point for new delivery scheduling. Two schedule lines are generated for the sales document item: ~

The date of the first schedule line corresponds to the customer's requested delive1y date and has no confirmed guantity.. The date of the second schedule line shows the confirmed delivery date and the confirmed quantity. ----

·--------------

~160


2009

TSCM60


Exercise 6: Shipment Scheduling Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: Start the different sales and distribution processes by choosing the appropriate sales document type Find important information for procurement and outbound delivery in sales documents and identify the sources of this data Provide your customers with detailed information from the sales documents, for example, on the shipping and transpmiation scheduling dates

Business Example A company has a range of sales and distribution processes, Before every sale, one of your employees decides which sales and distribution process will best serve the customer's needs.

When a customer orders a material, there are a range of decisions to be made for the whole sales and distribution processing chain, This includes obtaining relevant information on procurement and outbound delivery, such as the plant from which the goods will be delivered or the location responsible for shipping processing, In order entry, the customer service representative determines whether the agreed

delivery date can be met It is important to consider whether tl1e material is delivered from stock or whether it must be manufactured or procured from an external source.

IDES, Inc, tries 10 meet most of its sales orders using existing stock. If possible, orders are combined into one outbound delivery, If the requested delivery date cannot be confirmed, the customer is offered the first possible delivery date, As a member of the project team for sales order processing, it is your responsibility to test the sales and procurement process in the system, You will enter orders and verify the shipping point for the product, the transportation route to the customer, and the scheduling dates for the items in the sales orders,


Enter a trade fair order for the following purchase order. Use document type Trade fair##-order.


2009


161~


TSCM60

Purchase order Customer:

T-SSOB##


6-lll


in 10 days

£J

Material

Quantity

T-ASI##

7

T-AS2##

8

Hint: Use the F4 help in the order type field.

Save the order and write down the document number.


~162


2009

TSCM60


Task 2: Name other sales document types. I.

Name a sales document type that automatically creates an outbound delivery.

2.

Name a sales document type used for sending free-of-charge goods samples.

Task 3: By choosing the sales document type, you are meeting the basic requirements for the sales and distribution process. I.

Name sales document functions that may be affected by the choice of sales document type.

Task 4: Identify important information for the outbound delivery. I.

Display the previously entered sales order. Which delivering plants are determined for both items? Item 10: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Item 20: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

2.

Which shipping points are detennined for both items? Item 1 0 : - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Item 20: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Continued on next page

2009


163~


3.

TSCM60

Which routes are determined for both items? Item 10: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Item 20: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Hint: In the sales document, you can view (or change) the delivering plant, the shipping point and the route from the Shipping overview screen or the Shipping detail screen fe-r the corresponding document item.

You can use the black arrows on the application tool bar to navigate easily between the Shipping tabs of the two items. . 4.

5.

What is the purpose of the shipping point?

What is the purpose of the route?

Task 5: The system tries to determine the delivering plant automatically for an item in the sales document. I.

The system checks three sources in which the delivering plant can be specified. What are these sources?


~164


2009

TSCM60


2.

Which delivering plant is set for the item, if there is no entry in these sources?

3.

From which master record does the delivering plant in item I0 come?

Task 6: The system tries to determine the shipping point responsible for executing the shipping activities of an item in the sales document. I.

The system uses three pieces of information from the sales order for determining the shipping point. What are they?

2.

Which values were used for automatically determining the shipping point for item 10?

Hint: The shipping conditions come from the customer master record of the sold-to party. They can be viewed or changed in the sales document header by choosing Display doc. header details then choosing the Shipping tab page. The loading group comes from the material master record. They can be checked and maintained on the detail screen Sales: General/Plant. The loading group is not displayed in the sales document.


2009


165~


TSCM60

Task 7: Explain on what dates the individual work stages for shipping and transportation processing must begin, so that the product ordered gets to the customer on time. I.

Enter a standard order for the following purchase order. Purchase order

Customer:

T-SSOA##


6-411


Today

Material

Quantity

Ship-to party

T-ASl##

5

T-SSOA##

T-AS3##

T-SSOB##

Hint: To be able to maintain the differing ship-to-party for the second item, branch to the item details and choose the Partners tab page. Here, ovenvrite the automatically determined partner for the ship-to-party partner function with the ship-to-party specified above.

Shipping point and route are determined with the GR. Save the order and write down the document number.

2.

Display the previously entered sales order. Determine the shipping dates for item I 0. Delivery date: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ Goods issue date:

------------------------

Loading date: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___ Material availability date: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ Transportation planning date: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Hint: You can display a detailed list of shipping deadlines for the confirmed schedule line of a sales document item.

Call up the schedule line for the item and go to the detail for confirmed schedule line. Then choose the Shipping tab page.


~166


2009

TSCM60


3.

When must the responsible shipping point start shipping processing so that the goods arrive at the customer's location on time?

4.

Which of the steps for shipping and transportation processing must be completed so that the goods can be loaded on the correct loading date?

Hint: You can use Fl help to get information on the tasks and use of the different dates in delivety and transpot1ation scheduling.

Task 8: Create an outbound delivery for the first item of the order that you created in the first exercise part (order with purchase order number 6-111) of this unit. I.

Select the shipping point responsible. Use today's date as the selection date. Restrict the selection to the first item of the sales document (by entering item number I 0 in the field From item). Can you deliver the order? Why?

2.

Make the same selection again but use the material availability date as a selection date. Can you deliver the order item? Why?

Do NOT save the outbound delivery.

Hint: If you have accidentally saved the outbound delivery, delete the delivery document with the transaction:

Logistics_, Sales and Distribution-> Shipping and Transportation -> Outbound Delive1y _,Change-> Single Document-> Ow bound De/ive1y-> Delete

2009


167~

Unit 4: Sales and Distribution Processes -Data Determination and Collective Processing

TSCM60

Solution 6: Shipment Scheduling Task 1: Create a sales order. I.

Enter a trade fair order for the following purchase order. Use document type Trade fair##-order. Purchase order Customer:

T-SSOB##


6-111


in 10 days

{J

Material

Quantity

T-ASI##

7

T-AS2##

8

Hint: Use the F4 help in the order type field.


a)

Logistics---+ Sales and Distribution---+ Sales---+ Order---+ Create

Choose

Sa~e.


Task 2: Name other sales document types. I.

Name a sales document type that automatically creates an outbound delivery. Answer: Rush order, cash sale

2.

Name a sales document type used for sending free-of-charge goods samples. Answer: Free delivery


~168


2009

TSCM60


Task 3: By choosing the sales document type, you are meeting the basic requirements for the sales and distribution process. I.

Name sales document functions that may be affected by the choice of sales document type.

Answer: Pricing, delivery scheduling, transfer of requirements, availability check, texts, output, credit check, update in Sales Information System are some functions influenced by the document type

Task 4: Identify important information for the outbound delivery. I.

Display the previously entered sales order. Which delivering plants are determined for both items? Item 10: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ Item 20: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ a)

Item 10: 1000 Item 20: 1000

2.

Which shipping points are detennined for both items? Item 10: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Item 20: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - a)

Item 10: ZO## Item 20: ZO##

3.

Which routes are determined for both items? Item 10: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Item 20: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Hint: In the sales document, you can view (or change) the delivering plant, the shipping point and the route from the Shipping overview screen or the Shipping detail screen for the corresponding document item. You can use the black arrO\vS on the application tool bar to navigate easily between the Shipping tabs of the two items. a)

Item I 0: R00030 Item 20: R00030


2009


169~


4.

TSCM60

What is the purpose of the shipping point? Answer: The shipping point is the organizational unit, whose employees are responsible for the complete shipping processing.

5.

What is the purpose of the route? Answer: The route establishes the path and the method of transportation a delivery item takes to reach the customer location. The route is also an important criteria for the selection of shipping work lists.

Task 5: The system tries to determine the delivering plant automatically for an item in the sales document. I.

The system checks three sources in which the delivering plant can be specified. What are these sources? Answer: The master record in the customer-material info record, the master record of the ship-to party, and the material master record.

2.

Which delivering plant is set for the item, ifthere is no entry in these sources? Answer: No delivering plant Exception: You have specified a default value manually in the Delivering plant field in the header of the sales document.

3.

From which master record does the delivering plant in item I 0 come? Answer: Ship-to party master record determines the delivering plant.

Task 6: The system tries to determine the shipping point responsible for executing the shipping activities of an item in the sales document. I.

The system uses three pieces of infonnation from the sales order for determining the shipping point. What are they? Answer: Delivering plant, shipping conditions, loading group

2.

Which values were used for automatically detennining the shipping point for item 10?


~170


2009

TSCM60


Hint: The shipping conditions come from the customer master record of the sold-to party. They can be viewed or changed in the sales document header by choosing Display doc. header details then choosing the Shipping tab page. The loading group comes from the material master record. They can be checked and maintained on the detail screen Sales: General/Plant. The loading group is not displayed in the sales document. a)

Delivering plant 1000, shipping conditions ##+50 (70 for group 20, for example), and loading group 0003.

Task 7: Explain on what dates the individual work stages for shipping and transportation processing must begin, so that the product ordered gets to the customer on time. I.

Enter a standard order for the following purchase order. Purchase order T-SSOA##

Customer: Purchase order number:

6-411


Today

Material

Quantity

Ship-to party

T-ASI##

5

T-SSOA##

T-AS3##

I

T-SSOB##

Hint: To be able to maintain the differing ship-to-party for the second item, branch to the item details and choose the Partners tab page. Here, overwrite the automatically determined partner for the ship-to-party partner function with the ship-to-party specified above. Shipping point and route are determined with the GR.



2009


171~


a)

TSCM60

Creating an order Logistics~

Sales and Distribution

~Sales~ Order~

Create

Choose Save. The document number is assigned internally by the system. 2.

Display the previously entered sales order. Determine the shipping dates for item I 0. Delivery date: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Goods issue date: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Loading d a t e : - - - - - - - - - - - - - Material availability date: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Transportation planning date: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Hint: You can display a detailed list of shipping deadlines for the confirmed schedule line of a sales document item.

Call up the schedule line for the item and go to the detail for confirmed schedule line. Then choose the Shipping tab page.

3.

a)

Logistics---> Sales and Distribution --->Sales ---> Order---> Change ---> Select item 10---> Schedule lines for item---> Shipping

b)

Select the second schedule line with the Confirmed Qty = 5.

c)

Choose the Shipment det. button at the bottom ofthe screen.

When must the responsible shipping point start shipping processing so that the goods arrive at the customer's location on time? Answer: On the material availability date

4.

Which of the steps for shipping and transportation processing must be completed so that the goods can be loaded on the correct loading date?


~172


2009

TSCM60


Hint: You can use Fl help to get information on the tasks and use of the different dates in delivery and transportation scheduling. a)

Preparation (picking and packing) and transportation planning must be completed so that loading can begin on time.

Task 8: Create an outbound delivery for the first item of the order that you created in the first exercise part (order with purchase order number 6-111) of this unit. I.

Select the shipping point responsible. Use today's date as the selection date. Restrict the selection to the first item of the sales document (by entering item number I 0 in the field From item). Can you deliver the order? Why? Answer: No. The scheduling data in the order shows that you do not have to start processing shipping today (you can start in a few days' time).

2.

Make the same selection again but use the material availability date as a selection date. Can you deliver the order item? Why?

Do NOT save the outbound delivery.

Hint: If you have accidentally saved the outbound delivery, delete the delivery document with the transaction: Logistics~

Sales and Distribution ----l> Shipping and Transportation _, Outbound De/ive1y-> Change-> Single Document-> Outbound De/ive1y -> Delete

a)

Yes. You must begin shipping processing on the material availability date, so that the goods arrive at the customer's location on the confinned delivery date that was determined during delivery and transportation scheduling.

-20_0_9_______________________ ©_2_0-09--SA __ P_A_G_._A_II-ri-gh_t_s-re_s_e~--ed-.--------------~1~7~3~


TSCM60

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Give the customers delivery dates automatically determined in the system and be able to look at scheduling in detail

~ "1~7~4.----------------©~2-00_9_S~A~P~A--G-.A-I-Ir-ig_h_ts-r-es-e-~-e-d-.----------------------2-0--09

TSCM60

Lesson: Collective Processing in Sales and Distribution

Lesson: Collective Processing in Sales and Distribution Lesson Overview This lesson introduces the collective processing options in sales and distribution.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Combine and collectively process sales orders due for outbound delivery in one step Combine and collectively process documents due for billing in one step

Business Example To reduce the number of documents, IDES, Inc. wants to create different documents for collective processing.

Delivery Creation

Delivery due list I

Selection

I !! .

ShiPPin_g _Point:> ,:--"120~:--j--- Sele<:_tioll datE~:,'-!ptil}~'l~~i-1:~::-:-

Figure 65: Collective Processing in Shipping

2009


175~


TSCM60

To make shipping faster and easier, you can use the delivery due list to create more than one outbound delivery simultaneously. The system automatically combines the items in the selected sales orders to minimize the number of outbound deliveries. This function can be used as follows: Online processing of the delivery due list Creating a background job to be executed during off-peak hours The system controls the creation of outbound deliveries via the shipping point, the selection data (picking date) and other criteria grouped on various tab pages. By defining this criteria, you can control which orders due for delivery are selected. The selection options change depending on the delivery scenario and user role. You receive a list of the orders that meet your selection criteria. In this list, you can make your selection more precise using sorting and filtering. From the list, you can create outbound deliveries online or in the background and call up the documents.

Hint: In collective processing, you can use the selection date to define up to which date items due for delivery are taken into account. Shipping processing must begin on this date at the latest so that the goods reach the customer at the agreed time, which is either the material availability date or the transportation planning date.

Figure 66: Outbound Delivery Options

~176


2009

TSCM60


There are fields in master data and in the sales document where you can store customer defaults for processing deliveries. If the customer requires complete delivery, the order should be delivered in one single delivery. All items should be delivered at the same time. When creating an outbound delivery, if all of the order items cannot be shipped with the full order quantity, you receive a warning that the customer requires complete delivery. If the customer does not require complete delivety, you can define a partial delivery agreement with the customer. If the customer allows orders to be combined, orders are combined in outbound deliveries when using the delivery due Jist. Combining items from different sales orders is only possible if the items have several common characteristics, for example: Shipping point (goods issue from the same place in your enterprise) Date that delivery is due (date on which shipping processing should l:iegin, either materials availability date or transportation planning date) Ship-to party (outbound deliveries have the same destination) Route (same method oftransp01t and route) Incoterms ("International Chamber of Commerce" terms of liability for freight in-transit)

Picking

Shipping point

Delivery quty

Figure 67: Picking in Shipping Processing

You can control an item in an outbound delivery in such a way that picking is required.

2009


177~


TSCM60

Picking is carried out when transfer orders for triggering and monitoring stock movements are generated. The items in the transfer orders contain the materials and quantities to be picked, which correspond to the delivery quantities. From the transfer order, you can print the pick list for use in the warehouse. Picking can be confirmed automatically or in a separate processing step.

Figure 68: Collective Processing in Picking

You can also introduce picking via collective processing. To do this, you select a worklist from all the outbound deliveries ready for picking and create several transfer orders at the same time. The system automatically combines the outbound delivery items into as few transfer orders as possible. Collective processing can be executed as follows: Manually (online) Creating a background job (batch) to be executed during off-peak hours The system controls the creation of transfer orders via the shipping point, the selection data (picking date) and other criteria. You receive a list of the deliveries that meet your selection criteria. In this list, you can make your selection more precise using sorting and filtering.

r;'S"'" 178


2009

TSCM60


Delivery

................

I

.. >Ex\ern.al<: •• WMS

Transfer order

Print

sy~ten1

pict~-g list___j

Create new transfer order for deviating quantity

Confirmation

Delivery items complete

Copy picked quantity (partial delivery)

Figure 69: Picking Options

From the transfer order, you can print the picking list(s) for use in the warehouse. This step can be carried out automatically. Instead of printing the picking list, you can also forward the transfer order data to an external Warehouse Management System by means of portable data capture (PDC). If automatic confinnation is not used, you can also monitor picking by acknowledging the picked quantities manually. You can also confinn variances in quantities and specify the cause of these by setting a difference indicator. If the total quantity cannot be picked, you can: Pick the open quantities by means of another transfer order Reduce the delivery quantities in the outbound delivery by coping the picked quantities

2009


179~


TSCM60

Goods Issue

Selection

ShiPpii1g po_int:- ,

1200

Goods ni9~~rfiE!ilt_di)_t~-:_,!Jrltil May 17

Figure 70: Collective Processing for Posting Goods Issue

The goods issue can also be posted via collective processing. To do so, select a work list from all the outbound deliveries for which goods issue is ready to be posted and simultaneously post more than one goods issue. Collective processing can be executed as follows: Manually (online) Creating a background job (batch) to be executed during off-peak hours The system controls the posting of the goods issue via the shipping point, the selection date, and other criteria (forwarding agent or route, for example). You receive a list of the deliveries that meet your selection criteria. If necessary, the list can be drilled down to item level. In this list, you can make your selection more precise using sorting and filtering.

Once you have made your selection, post the goods issue.

~ 180


2009


TSCM60

Billing

Billing due list Selection

Figure 71: Collective Processing in Billing

To speed up the process of creating billing documents, you can use the billing due list to process more than one billing document simultaneously. The system combines items for billing to create as few billing documents as possible. This function can be used as follows: Manual processing of the billing due list (online processing) Collective processing via a background job (batch) at off-peak hours

2009


181~


TSCM60

Figure 72: Billing Options

When processing the billing due list, the system consolidates as many items as possible onto as few billing documents as possible. Depending on the system setting, these can either be order items or outbound delivery items.

To be able to combine successfully. items must have specific common characteristics, for example, the same billing date, the same payer and terms of payment. The list of common characteristics is maintained in Customizing. The standard system contains a range of options for creating billing documents. You can choose the option that best suits your requirements. Here are a few of the most common options:

Invoice split: You have a sales order for which one outbound delivery has been created. Multiple billing documents are created from the outbound delivery. Separate billing document for each outbound delivery: You have a sales order for which two outbound deliveries are created. Two billing documents are created from these. Collective invoice: You have two sales orders for which three outbound deliveries are created (for example, different ship-to party or partial delivery). A single billing document is created from the outbound deliveries.

~182


2009

TSCM60


Invoice

~· tc"~~klng

worklist

Figure 73: Worklists

This slide gives another overview of the options available for collective processing in the sales and distribution process. I.

Use the delivery due list to process sales documents for outbound deliveries.

2.

Use the work list for the outbound deliveries to l:>e posted to create transfer orders.

3.

Use the goods issue worklist of outbound deliveries to be posted to post the goods issue. Operations that need to use picking are only considered after picking has been completed successfully.

4.

Use the billing due list to process outbound deliveries (including orders, if necessary) for billing documents. Outbound deliveries are only taken into consideration if the goods issue has already been posted successfully.

2009


183~


~ 184


TSCM60

2009

TSCM60


Exercise 7: Collective Processing in Sales and Distribution Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: Use worklists to identify documents ready for subsequent processing and to process selected documents collectively Combine outbound deliveries for a customer Create transfer orders Update stock quantities and stock accounts after the outbound delivery is fully processed Create collective or individual invoices Identify receivables and revenues based on billing documents and post to the corresponding accounts in financial accounting

Business Exall)ple Although you enter orders one at a time, work packages can be created that allow you to collectively execute shipping and billing activities for many orders at the same time.

It is more important to have efficient sales and distribution processing so that for these steps in the process, work packages can be combined and processed together.

These work packages often have the same criteria, enabling these steps to be automated and executed at specific times by the system. The following tasks occur during the course of further sales and distribution processing: creating delivery notes, picking, shipping goods to the customer, creating invoices and posting receivables and revenues in financial accounting. You will test the options for processing these work packages.

Task 1: Process the delivery due Jist for your shipping point. I.

From the sales orders due for shipping, select those which meet the following criteria: Shipping point: ZOit# Delivery creation date: From start of this week to today in four weeks


2009


185~


TSCMSO

Ship-to party: T-SSOA## and T-SSOB##

Hint: Use the transaction Logistics---+ Sales and Distribution ---+Shipping and Transportation --> Outbound Delivety---+ Create ---+ Collective Processing of Documents Due for Delivety--> Sales Orders

Hint: Choose MulttiJ!e selection to enter both ship-to parties in the selection screen. 2.

Which sales documents are selected as the worklist?

Hint: The list of transactions for shipping will consist only of orders that you have created yourself. 3.

Why does the last order that you created appear in the list twice?

4.

Via which routes will the outbound deliveries be shipped?

5.

Select only those lines which come from the two orders you created in the previous exercises for this unit (use the CTRL key to select multiple lines). Trigger processing of the selected worklist in the background.

p 6.

Hint: Choose Background.

Display the collective processing log. Record the group number under which the system log is managed. Group number: __________~------------------------

Hint: Choose Back in the "Activities Due for Shipping: Sales Orders, Fast Display" screen then choose Log for delivety creation . 7.

How many outbound deliveries have been created? Continued on next page

~ 186


2009

TSCM60


Number of outbound deliveries: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 8.

Determine the document numbers of the outbound deliveries.

Hint: Choose Documents.

Task 2: Pick the outbound deliveries you just created using collective processing. I.

Select all of the outbound deliveries for picking that meet the following criteria: Shipping point: ZO## Pick date: from start of this week to today in four weeks Route: R00025 and R00030 Hint: Use the transaction Logistics-> Sales and Distribution-> Shipping and 1l-ansportation ->Picking-> Create 1J-amfer Order-> Via Outbound Delive1y lv!onitor Hint: Alternatively. you can enter the group number that has been defined by the system for the collective processing log for this delivery list.

2.

From the Jist, select those outbound deliveries that were created during processing of the delivery list. Pick these outbound deliveries without branching into the transfer orders and allow the system to write the picked quantities into the outbound delivery documents automatically. Adopt picking quantity: 1 (include picking quantities in the delivery)

[J 3.

Hint: Choose Create TO in background.

Check the outbound delivery and determine whether picking has been carried out successfully. Compare the delive1y quantities with the picked quantities in one of your outbound deliveries. Is there a difference between the quantities? Continued on next page

2009


18 7

r!!D."'


4.

TSCM60

Check the overall status of the outbound delivery. Overall picking status: - - - - - - - - - - - Overall status ofWM activities:------------Overall status of goods issue: - - - - - - - - - - - - Hint: Display the outbound delivery and choose ~

Goto

~Header~

Processing

Task 3: Post goods issue for your outbound deliveries using collective processing. I.

Select from the outbound deliveries ready to post that meet the following criteria:

Shipping point: ZO## Planned goods movement date: from start of this week to today in four weeks

Route: R00025 and R00030 Hint: Use the transaction

Logistics--> Sales and Distribution--> Shipping and 1J·ansportation -->Post Goods Issue --> Collective Processing Via Outbound Delil·ery Monitor

2.

From the list, select those outbound deliveries that were created during processing of the delivery list. Post the goods issue.

3.

Check the outbound delivery and determine whether goods issue posting has been carried out successfully. Check the overall status ofthe outbound delivery. Overall status of goods issue: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Hint: Display the outbound delivery and choose--> Goto-> Header Processing.

~


~188


2009

TSCM60


Task 4: Process your billing due list. I.

Select the outbound deliveries due for billing that meet the following criteria: Billing date: from start of this week to today in four weeks Sales organization: 1000 Shipping point: ZO## Sold-to party: T-SSOA## and T-SSOB##

Hint: Use the transaction Logistics -->Sales and Distribution Billing-+ Billing Document-+ Process Billing Due List 2.

-->

From the list, select those outbound deliveries that were created during processing of the delivery list. Test to see what the result of processing the billing due list would be.

Hint: Choose Simulation. 3.

Compare two documents to see why the items from these outbound deliveries cannot be put together into one billing document.

p 4.

Hint: Select two documents and choose Split analysis.

Return to the billing due list and create the billing documents using collective processing.

Hint: Choose Back twice to return to maintenance of the billing due list. 5.

Record the log number for collective processing. Group number: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

6.

Review the log to see how many billing documents have been created. Number: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ Record the billing document numbers:


2009


189~


7.

TSCM60

Check one of the billing documents created to see whether the sales process could be completed as requested. Use the document flow for the billing document. Is the sales process completed?

Why?

Task 5: Issue an invoice on the screen. I.

Review the invoice printout to determine whether the delivery conditions and payment conditions are correct on the form. Choose message type RDOO

Hint: You must be on the initial screen of the Display Billing Document transaction to display the invoice printout.

~190


2009

TSCM60


Solution 7: Collective Processing in Sales and Distribution Task 1: Process the delivery due list for your shipping point. I.

From the sales orders due for shipping, select those which meet the following criteria:

Shipping point: ZO## Delivery creation date: From start of this week to today in four weeks Ship-to party: T-SSOA## and T-SSOB## Hint: Use the transaction Logistics--+ Sales and Distribution--+ Shipping and 1i·ansportation --+ Ow bound De/ive1y --+ Create --+ Collective Processing of Documents Due for Delive1y --+ Sales Orders

Hint: Choose Multiple se/ec1ion to enter both ship-to parties in the selection screen. a)

2.

Logisiics __,.Sales and DisTribwion _,.Shipping and Transponmion ____,. Outbound Delivel}' __,. Create_,. Collective Processing of Documents Due .for De/ive1y --+ Sales Orders

Which sales documents are selected as the worklist? Hint: The list of transactions for shipping will consist only of orders that you have created yourself. a)

3.

All orders due for delivery that match the selection criteria: these are the two orders you have created in this course.

Why does the last order that you created appear in the list twice? Answer: As they have different ship-to parties (and routes), the two items in the order must be processed further using two separate outbound deliveries.

4.

Via which routes will the outbound deliveries be shipped?

a)

R00025 and R00030 Continued on next page

2009


191~


5.

TSCMSO

Select only those lines which come from the two orders you created in the previous exercises for this unit (use the CTRL key to select multiple lines). Trigger processing of the selected worklist in the background.

£J a) 6.

Hint: Choose Background. Select the relevant lines and choose Background.

Display the collective processing log. Record the group number under which the system log is managed. Group n u m b e r : - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Hint: Choose Back in the "Activities Due for Shipping: Sales Orders, Fast Display" screen then choose Log for de/ive1y creation . a)

7.

The group number is displayed in the log. Choose Log for delivery creation .

How many outbound deliveries have been created? Number of outbound deliveries: a)

8.

----------------

Three outbound deliveries were created

Determine the document numbers of the outbound deliveries.

Hint: Choose Documents. a)

Choose Documents and record the document numbers.

Task 2: Pick the outbound deliveries you just created using collective processing. I.

Select all of the outbound deliveries for picking that meet the following criteria: Shipping point: ZO## Pick date: from start of this week to today in four weeks


~ 192


2009

TSCM60


Route: R00025 and R00030 Hint: Use the transaction Logistics~

Sales and Distribution---? Shipping and Transportation -+ Picking -+ Create Transfer Order -+ Via Outbound Delive1y

Monitor Hint: Alternatively, you can enter the group number that has been defined by the system for the collective processing log for this delivety list.

a)

Logistics-+ Sales and Distribution-+ Shipping and 1l·ansportation-+ Picking-+ Cr~ate Transfer Order-+ Via Outbound Delive1y Monitor Routes: R00025 and R00030

2.

From the list, select those outbound deliveries that were created during processing of the delivery list. Pick these outbound deliveries without branching into the transfer orders and allow the system to write the picked quantities into the outbound delivery documents automatically. Adopt picking quantity: I (include picking quantities in the delivery)

p a) 3.

Hint: Choose Create TO in background.

Choose Create TO in background.

Check the outbound delivery and determine whether picking has been carried out successfully. Compare the delivery quantities with the picked quantities in one of your outbound deliveries. Is there a difference between the quantities?

a) 4.

Logistics -+Sales and Distribution -+Shipping and 1l·ansportation -+ Outbound Delive1y -+ Display -+ Picking

Check the overall status of the outbound delivery. Overall picking status: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ Overall status ofWM activities: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __


2009


193~


TSCM60

Overall status of goods issue: _____________

Hint: Display the outbound delivery and choose ~

a)

Goto

~Header~

Processing

Overall picking status: C fully picked Overall status ofWM activities: C WM-TO confirmed Overall status of goods issue: A not yet started

Task 3: Post goods issue for your outbound deliveries using collective processing. I.

Select from the outbound deliveries ready to post that meet the following criteria: Shipping point: ZO## Planned goods movement date: from start of this week to today in four weeks Route: R00025 and R00030 Hint: Use the transaction Logistics--> Sales and Distribution--> Shipping and 7i·ansportation -->Post Goods Issue --> Collective Processing Via Outbound Delivery lvfonitor

a)

2.

Logistics -->Sales and Distribution--> Shipping and 7i·ansportation -->Post Goods Issue--> Collective Processing Via Outbound De live!)' Monitor

From the list , select those outbound deliveries that were created during processing of the delivery list. Post the goods issue. a)

3.

Select the relevant outbound deliveries and choose Post goods issue.

Check the outbound delivery and determine whether goods issue posting has been carried out successfully. Check the overall status of the outbound delivery.


~194


2009

TSCM60


Overall status of goods issue: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Hint: Display the outbound delivery and choose----> Goto----> Header Processing.

----t

a)

Overall status of goods issue: C completed

Task 4: Process your billing due list. I.

Select the outbound deliveries due for billing that meet the following criteria: Billing date: from start of this week to today in four weeks Sales organization: 1000 Shipping point: ZO## Sold-to party: T-SSOA## and T-SSOB## Hint: Use the transaction Logistics-> Sales and Distribution Billing-> Billing Document-> Process Billing Due List a)

2.

->

Logistics---+ Sales and Distriblllion ---+Billing---+ Billing Document ----t Process Billing Due List

From the list, select those outbound deliveries that were created during processing of the delivery list. Test to see what the result of processing the billing due list would be.

Hint: Choose Simulation. a)

Choose Simul11tion.


2009


195~


3.

TSCM60

Compare two documents to see why the items from these outbound deliveries cannot be put together into one billing document.

£J a)

Hint: Select two documents and choose Split analysis.

Select two documents and choose Split analysis. The following document information could affect a billing split: Sold-to party and payer Reference and assignment number Sales tax- identification number Incotenns parts I and 2

4.

Return to the billing due Jist and create the billing documents using collective processing.

Hint: Choose Back twice to return to 1naintenance of the billing due list.

a) 5.

Go back to the "Maintain Billing Due List" screen and choose S11ve.

Record the log number for collective processing. Group number: a)

6.

Record the group number from the log.

Review the log to see how many billing documents have been created. Number: ____________________________________ Record the billing document numbers:

a) 7.

Three billing documents have been created. Choose Documents.

Check one of the billing documents created to see whether the sales process could be completed as requested. Use the document flow for the billing document.

Is the sales process completed?

Why?


~ 196


2009

TSCMSO


a)

Logisiics--+ Sales and Distribution--+ Billing--+ Billing Document --+Display Choose Document flow. The sales process is completed because the accounting documents were created automatically by the system when the billing document was posted. Clearing the accounting documents is part of the process in financial accounting.

Task 5: Issue an invoice on the screen.

I.

Review the invoice printout to determine whether the deliverx conditions and payment conditions are correct on the form. Choose message type RDOO

Hint: You must be on the initial screen of the Display Billing Document transaction to display the invoice printout. a)

Logistics ---t Sales and Distribution --+Display

---t

Billing ---t Billing Document

Billing document--+ Issue Output To Message type: RDOO--+ Print preview Payment conditions and delivery conditions are printed above the items in the invoice.

2009


197~


~.;;·~~•. ·.~

TSCM60

Lesson Summary

\'<+i<''''

You should now be able to: Combine and collectively process sales orders due for outbound delivery in one step Combine and collectively process documents due for billing in one step

~198


2009

TSCM60

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: Trigger different sales processes by choosing suitable sales document types Explain how the delivering plant, shipping point and route are determined automatically Give the customers delivery dates automatically determined in the system and be able to look at scheduling in detail Combine and collectively process sales orders due for outbound delivery in one step Combine and collectively process documents due for billing in one step

-20_0_9_______________________ ©_2_0_09__ S_A_P_A_G_._A_II-ri-gh_t_s-re_s_e~--ed-.--------------~1•9~9~

TSCM60

Unit Summary

~200


2009

nit 5 Availability Checks Unit Overview This unit describes the role of the availability check within Sales and Distribution documents. It also provides a brief overview of"transportation processing".

e . .

.

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: Describe the basic principles and function of the availability check Use the availability check as part of order processing Explain the function of the shipment document Describe how shipment costs are billed to the customer Explain how financial information is transferred from the billing document into the accounting document

Unit Contents Lesson: Basics .................................................................. 202 Lesson: Sample Scenarios .................................................... 209 Exercise 8: Availability Check ............................................ 217 Lesson: Transportation Processing .......................................... 233 Exercise 9: Transportation Processing .................................. 237

2009


201~

TSCM60

Unit 5: Availability Checks

Lesson: Basics Lesson Overview This lesson introduces you to the basic principles of the availability check.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe the basic principles and function of the availability check

Business Example You want to create orders for materials, for which there is insufficient stock To be able to do this, you need to check the available stock and may require information on the earliest possible delivery dates

Basics

Control tables

Figure 74: Availability Check in the Sales Order

On the Sales and Distribution tab page in the material master you can: enter in Gen./Plant in the availability check field, which and/or what type of availability check should be carried out for this material during order processing. There are also various settings in Customizing that influence the process flow of the availability check.

~202


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Basics

e!1~·f..J·~riUJ atiori planning

Figure 75: Material Availability Date Check

The material availability date is determined from delivery scheduling. On this date, enough material has to be available in time for delivery to the customer for their requested delivery date. The system calculates this date, working backwards from the customer's required delivery date. The system calculates the time required for picking, packing, loading and transporting the goods.

2009


203~

TSCM60.


Figure 76: Check at Plant Level

The system accesses information in the following order to propose the standard delivering plant: 1.

Customer-material information

2.

Ship-to pm1y customer master record

3.

Material master record

If you enter the delivering plant manually during order processing, your entry will overwrite the default value. In customer-material info, you can maintain the value proposal for a specific material for a customer. You can find the delivering plant in the material master on the Sales and Distribution tab page: Sales Org. I. Delivering plant You can find the delivering plant in the customer master on the Shipping tab page:

Figure 77: Control of Availability Check

~204


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Basics

In Customizing, you can configure which elements are included in an availability check. In this way, you define which types of stock (for example, safety stock, stock in transfer or stock in quality inspection), which inward movements (for example, purchase or production orders), and which outward movements (for example, sales orders, reservations from Materials Management) should be included in the check.

.

.'

~~··· Figure 78: Requirements transfer

Communication between sales and distribution and procurement is carried out via requirements. The transfer of requirements type can influence the availability check. The employee responsible for materials planning receives information about sales orders in the system and the quantities that SD needs in order to deliver these orders. The material for the order can come from in-house production or external procurement.

If there is insufficient material available, purchase orders can be made via materials planning.

2009


205~

TSCM60


:"·~.-;;'>+'\ ,_. ''\'!,,y{i''

Figure 79: Complete and Partial Deliveries Any agreements you made with the customer about deliveries also affect the result of the availability check. Depending on the agreements for partial/complete delivery in the customer sales order, you can de]i,er an order in one complete delivery or several partial deliveries. In a complete delivery, all items with the order quantities are delive1·ed.

For partial deliveries you can distribute items or quantities of one order on several deliveries.

Figure 80: Partial Delivery Agreement

~206


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Basics

The indicator for controlling complete/partial deliveries is proposed from the customer master record. The proposal for the item level comes from the customer-material info, if a customer and material agreement has been maintained there. These indicators can be manually changed during sales order entry. The customer may require, for example, a complete delivery which means that all the items in the sales order should be delivered together. If the customer agrees to a partial delivery, the order can be met in several deliveries. If you choose "Complete delivery", you can determine that all the items in a whole order must be delivered together. At item level, you can also decide whether you can split the delivery quantities. The following partial delivery agreements exist: _ Partial delivery allowed A Create a delivery with qty greater than zero

B Create only one delivery (also with C Only complete delivery allowed D No limit to subsequent deliveries

2009

quantity~


0)

207~

TSCM60


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Describe the basic principles and function of the availability check

~208


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Sample Scenarios

Lesson: Sample Scenarios Lesson Overview This lesson provides a number of sample scenarios to illustrate how the availability check works. You will also be introduced to backorder processing.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Use the availability check as patt of order processing

Business Example You want to create orders for materials, for which there is insufficient stock. To do this, you need to check the available stock and may require information on the earliest possible delivery dates. In some cases, the customer also allows partial deliveries if the full amount cannot be delivered on the requested date.

Sample Scenarios Inward movement

Time

Figure 81: 1. Case: Conformation on Required Delivery Date

Using delivery scheduling, the system checks whether the goods will be available for the material availability date.

2009


209~

TSCM60


The availability check includes: Current stock Planned inward movements (such as purchase orders, purchase requisitions, planned orders) Forecast outward movements (such as existing sales orders, deliveries). In case I, the situation regarding outward movements is as follows: The existing inward movements are:

Stock: I 00 pieces Existing purchase orders with quantities of 50 and 60 pieces The following future outward movements also already exist: Existing sales orders with quantities of I 00, 40 and 50 units. In this outbound situation, you now enter another sales order for I 0 units. The system carries out delivery scheduling (backward scheduling) based on the customer's requested delivery date and determines the material availability date. It then runs an availability check for this date.

e

.

.

Inward movement

Mateiial avail~bility

I I

Delivery date

Order quantity: 10

i

I Time

Figure 82: Result for Case 1: Confirmation Required Delivery Date

The availability check shows that the system can confirm the I 0 units for the requested delivery date.

r:!.D."

21 0


2009

TSCM60


InWard movement

Material availability

Delivery date

Order qua~titY:_2o

, Time

Figure 83: 2. Case: Confirmation for a Later Date The original situation in Scenario 2 is the same as the first: The existing inward movements are:

Stock: I00 pieces Existing purchase orders with quantities of 50 and 60 pieces The following future outward movements also already exist: Existing sales orders with quantities of I 00, 40 and 50 pieces. In this case, however. the customer requires a "complete delivery". In this outbound situation, you now enter another sales order for 20 units.

The system carries out delivery scheduling (backward scheduling) based on the customer's requested delivery date and determines the material availability date. It then runs an availability check for this date.

2009


211~

TSCM60



DeiJvery date

Order quant~itY: ~ 20

ConfirmatiOn date

Figure 84: Result for Case 2: Confirmation for a Later Date

In case of stock shortage, the system uses the availability check and delivery scheduling to determine the next possible date on which the goods can be confirmed for the customer. Due to the complete delivery agreement, the quantities cannot be split up. You have to contirm the 20 units for a later date. Based on the materials availability date, the system uses delivery scheduling (forward scheduling) to calculate the confirmation date for the 20 units. lnward~movement


De~liy~rY d3_te I

Order quantity: 20

cu:sioriler

~~~~~-~~ ~ :r~mr~:;~ ~~,~~w~ry-'a~l sqo~~;~~~s::po~:sh>fe+ -customer ~'rnlilS ~P~utf~~, -d_eliVeries:,:, ~', ~' ,, ~~

Figure 85: 3. Case: Partial deliveries

~212


2009

TSCM60


If the customer and type of sales document allow it, the required sales order quantity can also be split into several partial deliveries. The situation in case 3 is the same as for I and 2: The existing inward movements are:

Stock: I 00 pieces Existing purchase orders with quantities of 50 and 60 pieces The following future outward movements also already exist: Existing sales orders with quantities of I 00, 40 and 50 pieces. In case 3, however, the customer needs the goods as soon as possible and allows you to split the delivery quantities up in partial deliveries, if necessary. In this outbound situation, you now enter another sales order for 20 units. The system carries out delivety scheduling (backward scheduling) based on the customer's requested delivery date and determines the material availability date. It then runs an availability check for this date.

e

.

.

Inward movement

Delivery date

Material availabilitY

I

Order quantity: 20

I I

I I

Material avait\a7b"ili7ty-:---:C-o-nf"'ir_m_a-=u=-o-n j

'~- 9u_stomer -'-~u_i~~_s_ ~, de~i-~_~rY_ ~s- ~-_?
~Customer permits_ partial _deliverieS

date__

,

J

1

Figure 86: Result for Case 3: Partial deliveries

When there is not enough stock, the system uses the availability situation and delivery scheduling to determine the next possible date for which the goods can be contirmed to the customer. The "partial deliveries permitted" agreement means that the quantity can be split up. You can contirm the 20 units for two later dates, each with I 0 units.

2009


213~

TSCM60


Using the material availability date, the system uses delivery scheduling (forward scheduling) to calculate two patti a! deliveries, each with I 0 units. Receipt


Delivery date I

O'rder Quantity: 20

RLT

Issue RLT=

lead lime

Figure 87: 4. Case: Check with Replenishment Lead Time

You can take into account all inward and outward movements. It is recommended, however. that you only implement an availability check at the end of the replenishment lead time. The

~lenish~,le'!\!Jime

can be specified for each material.

Trading goods: planned delivery time+ goods receipt processing time . . -~---., ·~ -Finished goods: in-house production time. The system assumes that the material will be available at the end of the replenishment lead time by the latest. The availability check is only run until the end of the replenishment lead time. If you check availability in case 4 without including replenishment lead time, the result is the same as for case 2. The customer requires a complete delivery. You cannot make 20 units available until the same date on which the last purchase order for 60 units arrives (inward movement). However, if the system checks availability using the replenishment lead time, you can contirm 20 units for the requested date.

~214


2009

TSCM60


Backorder Processing An order item is backdated if:

Figure 88: Backorder Processing

There are two types of backorder processing: Manual with backorder processing You can use backorder processing to list sales documents for materials and to process them manually with reference to the confirmation. This means that ATP quantities can be reassigned and any shortfall can be cleared. Via rescheduling You can use the delivery priority (proposed from the customer master record for the sales order) as a sorting criteria in automatic rescheduling.

2009


215~

TSCM60


~216


2009

TSCM60


Exercise 8: Availability Check Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: Process orders with a shortage of available stock Check available stock

Business Example You began marketing a new product two months ago. Demand for this product has been greater than originally anticipated, resulting in stock shortages.

Task 1: Is the implementation of an availability check dependent on the material? I.

You want to determine whether an availability check takes place for the material with the number T-ASS## during order entry in plant 1000.

Hint: Display the material master. In the Availability check field on the Sales: generaliplant tab page, you can see whether an availability check should be carried out for this material during order entry. and if so, what type of availability check.

Task 2: You want to determine for which delivering plant the availability check takes place during order entry. I.

Check which delivering plant is proposed during order entry for sales organization 1000, distribution channel 12 and material master T-ASS##.

Hint: Display the material master. In the Delivering plant field on the Sales: sales org. 1 tab page, you can see which delivering plant is proposed from the material master during order entry. 2.

Check which delivering plant is proposed during order entry for sales organization 1000, distribution channel 12, division 00 and customer master

T-SSOB##.


2009


217~

TSCMSO


Hint: Display the customer master. In the Delivering plant field on the Shipping tab page, enter the delivering plant, proposed during order entry from the customer master. 3.

In what sequence is the master data accessed during order processing for the plant proposal?

4.

Can the availability check be carried out in another plant as the one proposed?

Task 3: You receive a purchase order. I.

Create a standard order based on the existing purchase order. Purchase order:

2.

Customer:

T-SSOB##

PO number:

7-311


in 5 days

Material:

T-ASS##

Quantity:

10

As there is not enough material available for the requested delivery date, the system remains on the availability control screen dtuing order entry.

Hint: If you have already left the availability control screen, you can call it up again by selecting Check item availability. For which plant is availability checked?

3.

How many pieces can be confirmed for the requested delivery date?


~218


2009

TSCM60


4.

How long is it until the complete quantity can be confirmed?

5.

Why can the complete quantity be confirmed on this date?

6.

You decide to confirm that a complete delivery will be made to the customer at a later date.

7.

Display the schedule lines for item I 0. Which lines with schedule lines are displayed?

8.


Task 4: You receive another purchase order. I.

Create another standard order based on the purchase order.

Purchase order:

2.

Customer:

T-SSOB##

PO number:

7-411


inS days

Material:

T-ASS##

Quantity:

IS

As there is not enough material available again for the requested delivery date, the system remains on the availability control screen during order entry.

Hint: If you have already left the availability control screen, you can call it up again by selecting Check item availability. You know that the material can also be taken from plant 1400 in Stuttgart. You therefore want to see if the material could be made available earlier there. Check the availability for plant 1400.

Hint: To check availability for another plant, choose Other plants on the availability control screen.


2009


219 f3!i"'

TSCM60


3.

How many pieces can be confirmed from plant 1400 for the requested delivery date ?

4.

Why can the full amount be confirmed from plant 1400 on the requested delivery date?

5.

You decide to deliver the materials to the customer from plant 1400 and make the full delivery from plant 1400. Save the order and write down the number.

Task 5: You want to display the scope of the check from the previous order. I.

You want to know if purchase orders entered in the system were taken into account during the availability check for the previous order. Display the previous order and check the elements for inward/outward movements that have been taken into consideration during the availability check.

Hint: You can display the scope of the check in the sales order from either the availability control screen or the availability overview screen. Choose Scope of check. 2.

You also want to determine whether the replenishment lead time has been taken into account during the availability check.

Task 6: You receive another purchase order for another material. 1.

You want to gain an overview, first of all, of the actual stock and requirements situation for the other material. Display the current stock and requirements list for material T-AS4##. Write down how many pieces are in stock in plant 1000.

Hint: Inventory management is carried out in materials management. Choose Logistics ----+ Jvfaterials JV!anagement ----+ Jnvemmy Jvfanagement----+ Environment----+ Stock----+ Stock/Requirements List. 2.

Create a standard order based on the purchase order.


~220


2009

TSCM60


Purchase order:

Customer:

T-SSOA##

PO number:

7-621


in 10 days

Material:

T-AS4##

Quantity:

25


3.

You want to gain an overview of the actual stock and requirements situation for the this material in plant 1000. Display the current stock and requirements list for material T-AS4##. Record how many units were required in the sales order.

4.

On what date was the requirement transferred? Which date in the sales order corresponds to this date?

Task 7: When are backorders Created? I.

When is a backorder created for an order item?

2.

What are the two different types of backorders?

3.

Which field from the customer master can be used as a sorting criterion for rescheduling?

Task 8: Questions on the availability check I.

Why can the result of an availability check in the sales order dependent on a partial delivery agreement differ from a normal availability check?


2009


221~

TSCM60


~222

2.

Why is the completion of delivery scheduling a prerequisite for the availability check in the sales order.

3.

Why is delivery scheduling carried out after the availability check. if the item cannot be confirmed for the required delivery date.


2009

TSCM60


Solution 8: Availability Check Task 1: Is the implementation of an availability check dependent on the material? I.

You want to determine whether an availability check takes place for the material with the number T-ASS## during order entry in plant 1000.

Hint: Display the material master. In the Availability check field on the Sales: general/plant tab page, you can see whether an availability check should be carried out for this material during order entry, and if so, what type of availability check.

a)

Logistics --)-Sales and Distribution - 4 Master Data --)'Products Material-> Trading Goods-> Display

--)>

Choose Sales: General/Plant Data.

Plant 1000 An availability check takes place for this material (checking group 01 daily requirement).

Task 2: You want to determine for which delivering plant the availability check takes place during order entry. I.

Check which delivering plant is proposed during order entry for sales organization 1000, distribution channel 12 and material master T-ASS##.

Hint: Display the material master. In the Deliveringpla111 field on the Sales: sales org. 1 tab page, you can see which delivering plant is proposed from the material master during order entry.

a)

Logistics ---+Sales and Distribution_,. Jvlaster Data Material -> Trading Goods -> Display

-4

Products --)'

Choose Sales: sales org. 1.

Sales organi=ation 1000 Distribution channel12 Delivering plant 1400 is proposed from the material master for this material. Continued on next page

2009


223~


2.

TSCM60

Check which delivering plant is proposed during order entry for sales organization 1000, distribution channel 12, division 00 and customer master T-SSOB##.

Hint: Display the customer master. In the Delivering plant field on the Shipping tab page, enter the delivering plant, proposed during order entry from the customer master. a)

Logistics

-t


-t

A-faster Data

-t

Business

Partner-+ Customer-+ Display-+ Sales and Distribution Select the Sales Area Data: Shipping tab page. Delivering plant 1000 is proposed from the customer master for this customer.

3.

In what sequence is the master data accessed during order processing for the

plant proposal?

a)

During order entry, the plant proposal accesses the master data in the following sequence: I.

Customer-material information

2.

Customer master

3.

Material master

If different delivering plants have been specified in the master data, the proposal which corresponds to this sequence will be transferred for the sales order items. 4.

Can the availability check be carried out in another plant as the one proposed?

a)

You have the option of overwriting the proposal manually in the customer sales order.

As part of the availability check. you also have the option of checking in other plants.


~224

© 2009

SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2009

TSCMSO

lesson: Sample Scenarios

Task 3: You receive a purchase order. I.

Create a standard order based on the existing purchase order. Purchase order:

Customer:

T-SSOB##

PO number:

7-311


in 5 days

Material:

T-ASS##

Quantity:

10

a)

2.

Logistics--> Sales and Dislribution--> Sales--> Order-> Create

As there is not enough material available for the requested delivery date. the system remains on the availability control screen during order entry.

Hint: If you have already left the availability control screen, you can call it up again by selecting Check item availability.

For which plant is availability checked?

a) 3.

How many pieces can be confirmed for the requested delivery date?

a) 4.

Nothing can be confirmed for the required delivery date.

How long is it until the complete quantity can be confirmed?

a) 5.

Plant 1000

Only at the latest data proposed under Complete deliveiJ,fdeliveiJ' proposal.

Why can the complete quantity be confirmed on this date?

a)

This is the date on which replenishment time ends.

Conlinued on next page

2009


225~

TSCM60


6.

You decide to confirm that a complete delivery will be made to the customer at a later date. a)

7.

Complete

delive~y:

choose Copy.

Display the schedule lines for item 10. Which lines with schedule lines are displayed?

a)

Choose Schedules lines for item. There are two schedule lines. The first has the required delive1y date, the order quantity and the confirmed quantity 0. The second schedule line has the confirmed delivery line and the confirmed quantity.

8.


a)

-+Save The document number is assigned internally by the system.

Task 4: You receive another purchase order. I.

Create another standard order based on the purchase order. Purchase order: Customer:

T-SSOB##

PO number:

7-411


in S days

Material:

T-ASS##

Quantity:

IS

a)

2.

Logistics-+ Sales and Distribution-+ Sales-+ Order-+ Create.

As there is not enough material available again for the requested delivery date, the system remains on the availability control screen during order entry.

Hint: If you have already left the availability control screen, you can call it up again by selecting Check item availability.


~226


2009

TSCM60


You know that the material can also be taken from plant 1400 in Stuttgart. You therefore want to see if the material could be made available earlier there. Check the availability for plant 1400.

Hint: To check availability for another plant, choose Other plallls on the availability control screen. a)

Availability control screen Choose Other plants -->Plant 1400--> Check plant. The complete quantity can be confirmed on the required date from plant 1400.

3.

How many pieces can be confirmed from plant 1400 for the requested delivery date ?

a) 4.

15 pieces

Why can the full amount be confirmed from plant 1400 on the requested delivery date?

a)

There is sutlicient stock in plant 1400 and the replenishment lead time is shorter.

5.

You decide to deliver the materials to the customer from plant 1400 and make the full delivery from plant 1400. Save the order and write down the number.

a)

Select the line and choose Adopt plant. Choose Save. The document number is assigned internally by the system.


2009


227~

TSCM60


Task 5: You want to display the scope of the check from the previous order. I.

You want to know if purchase orders entered in the system were taken into account during the availability check for the previous order. Display the previous order and check the elements for inward/outward movements that have been taken into consideration during the availability check.

Hint: You can display the scope of the check in the sales order from either the availability control screen or the availability overview screen. Choose Scope of check.

a)

Logistics---> Sales and Distribution---> Sales---> Order---> Display.

Choose Display availability Choose Scope of check In this case, purchase orders are also checked alongside other inward and outward movements. 2.

You also want to determine whether the replenishment lead time has been taken into account during the availability check. a)

When you display the Scope of check, the field Check without RLT is not selected. This means that in this case the replenishment lead time has been taken into account.

Task 6: You receive another purchase order for another material. 1.

You want to gain an overview, first of all, of the actual stock and requirements situation for the other material. Display the current stock and requirements Jist for material T-AS4##. Write down how many pieces are in stock in plant 1000.

Hint: Inventory management is carried out in materials management. Choose Logistics ----+Materials Management ----+ lnvent01y

Management ----T Environment ----T Stock----+ Stock/Requirements List. a)

Logistics

----t

Environment

Materials Management ----T

----+

Inventory Management

----T

Stock--+ Stock/Requirements List

You can see the plant stock in the line with the MRP element Stock, in the Available qty column. Continued on next page

~228


2009

TSCM60


2.

Create a standard order based on the purchase order. Purchase order: Customer:

T-SSOA##

PO number:

7-621


in 10 days

Material:

T-AS4##

Quantity:

25


a)

Logistics-> Sales and Distribution-> Sales Save

->

Order-> Create->

The document number is assigned internally by the system. 3.

You want to gain an overview of the actual stock and requirements situation for the this material in plant I 000. Display the current stock and requirements list for material T-AS4##. Record how many units were required in the

sales order.

a)

Logistics _,. Afaterials J\fanagement-'~' Inventory A1anagement _,.

Environment-> Stock-> Stock/Requirements List You can see the requirement from the sales order in the line with the MRP element Order, in the Receipt/Reqmt column. 25 pieces 4.

On what date was the requirement transferred? Which date in the sales order corresponds to this date?

a)

The requirements date (date in the first column) corresponds to the material availability date from the sales order.

Task 7: When are backorders Created? I.

When is a backorder created for an order item? Continued on next page

2009


229~


a)

2.

A backorder can be executed if an order item is backdated. An order item is backdated if the order quantity is not complete or the required delivery date has not been confirmed in time.

What are the two different types of backorders? a)

3.

TSCM60

A backorder can be implemented using manual backorder processing or rescheduling.

Which field from the customer master can be used as a sorting critelion for rescheduling?

a)

The delivery priority is taken from the customer master in the sales order and can be used as a sort criterion tor orders during rescheduling.

Task 8: Questions on the availability check I.

Why can the result of an availability check in the sales order dependent on a partial delivery agreement differ from a normal availability check?

a)

If only part of the required quantity is available on the required delivery date and the customer agrees to a partial delivery, then a delivery split can be carried out and a partial quantity can be confirmed for the required delivery date. If the customer does not allow partial delivery, the complete amount can only be confirmed for a later date.

2.

Why is the completion of delivery scheduling a prerequisite for the availability check in the sales order.

a)

3.

The availability check takes place on the material availability date. The materials are required on this date, so that there is enough time remaining for packing, loading and so on before the required delivery date. This means the material availability date must be determined in the sales order before the availability check is carried out. It is determined using delivery scheduling.

Why is delivery scheduling carried out after the availability check, if the item cannot be confirmed for the required delivery date.


~230


2009

TSCM60


a)

If the item could not be confirmed for the required delivery date, then the system carries out delivery scheduling from the earliest possible date available (forward scheduling), in order to determine the delivery date (confinnation date).

-20_0_9______________________©_c_2_0_09--SA __ P_A_G___A_II_ri-gh_t_s-re_s_e~-.-d-.--------------~2~3~1

~

TSCM60


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Use the availability check as part of order processing

B!!' 232


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Transportation Processing

Lesson: Transportation Processing Lesson Overview This lesson provides a brief overview of transportation processing options.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain the function of the shipment document Describe how shipment costs are billed to the customer Explain how financial information is transferred from the billing document into the accounting document

Business Example You want to transport materials from more than one delivery on one truck. Freight costs are incurred, which you bill to the customer. You want to check which accounts have been posted in the account document belonging to the billing document.

Transportation Processing

Figure 89: Document Flow with Outgoing Shipment

The shipment function is optional.

2009


233~

TSCM60


You can use it to combine deliveries with the same transportation requirements, such as forwarding agent, destination, route or means of transport. Normally, you create a shipment before you post goods issue. The settlement of shipment costs from the shipment is also optional.

Date

Destination Delivery

05/15 05/15 05/15 05/18 05/20

Nashville Chicago Chicago Seattle Nashville

80000311 80000620 80000636 80000639 80000711

Transportation planning status= A (unprocessed) or B {partly processed)

Date

--•;;J 05/15 05/15 05115

Destination Delivery

Nashville 80000311 Chicago 80000620 Chicago 80000636

Transporlalion.pla~ning.·point:.1J until May~~ 1~

Destination: Chicci

o~or NashVille

Figure 90: Creating Shipments

Using the "Create shipment" function, the system detennines the deliveries due

for transpm1ation and creates the shipments required. The individual deliveries can be assigned to the shipments manually. The sequence of the deliveries within a shipment is determined automatically from the sequence in which they are listed.

Figure 91: Loading and Packing Shipments

~234


2009

TSCM60


At the time of shipment, items which were not already packed in the delivery, can be packed in shipping units using shipping materials. The functionality used here is basically the same as for loading in the delivery. However, items cannot be generated or entered manually for inventory management/billing. Packed items are assigned to the required means of transport (trucks, for example). Shipping units from the delivery are copied and can no longer be changed. Unlike packing in the delivery, packing in the shipment can be carried out for several deliveries.

• ;,,',',',"'-C--<-('>'•

shipill~~~l!C'>;

.dOCument·:··· 'lnvolce2·

Figure 92: Billing the Shipment Costs to the Customer

You can invoice the customer for shipment costs, which are based on effective shipment costs, that have been calculated in the transportation and shipment cost processing areas for settlement with the forwarding agent. The freight costs then appear as an additional entry in the customer billing document.

-20_0_9______________________©_c_2_0_09__ S_A_P_A_G_._A_II-ri-gh-m--re_s_e~--ed-.--------------~2~3~5~

TSCM60


(~ .• '~ ''<-
;~~~~r3~~~ili~n~~~w;:,;.' •. §a.les or!!i

.·\. . 1~o...•R;~~·

,-,::8!~~-~!,~.:_c~-6~Hh~'i Division·

10

••o6Et••

Figure 93: Connection to Financial Accounting

The system transfers billing document data in invoices, credit and debit memos to financial accounting and posts this to the determined accounts. You can set account determination to be dependent on various different criteria in Customizing, so that the corresponding accounts can be determined. The following criteria are defined in the standard system: Chart of accounts Sales organization Account assignment group of the payer

(customers can be categorized, for example, according to whether they are domestic or foreign customers) Account assignment group of the material (materials can be categorized, for example, according to whether they are services or retail goods) Account key (it is possible to divide this up into the different price, surplus and discount elements) Setting account determination requires agreement from financial accounting and cost accounting, for the reasons mentioned above.

~236


2009

TSCM60


Exercise 9: Transportation Processing Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: Edit partial deliveries Describe transportation processing Carry out account determination for a billing document in the accounting document.

Business Example Although you are able to deliver the complete quantity on the requested delivery date, the customer only wants to receive part of the delivery at this point. As there are other customer outbound deliveries to make on the day that the delivery is due, which are on route to this particular customer, you can put several outbound deliveries together in one shipment. After the process has been completed and the invoices are created, you want to ensure that the right accounts have been posted in accounting.

Task 1: A sales order should be partially delivered. I.

Display the standard order from the last exercise on the screen. Determine whether the order could be partially delivered. Which agreement referring to a complete delivery can be seen in the order header? Hint: The Complete Delive1y field in the order header is on the Sales overview screen and on the Shipping tab page.

Conlinued on nexl page

2009


237~

TSCM60


2.

What master data is used for proposing the Complete Delive1y flag in the order header?

3.

Do you have the option of distributing individual order items (with the corresponding item order quantity) to different deliveries, if the field Complete Delive1y is not checked in the order header?

4.

Do you have the option of distributing the full amount of order items to different deliveries, if the Complete Delive1y field is not checked in the order header?

5.

What agreements referring to partial deliveries can be found in item I 0 of the order?

Hint: You can find the Part.dlv.!item field for the order item on the Shipping tab page.

6.

What master data is used for proposing the Partial Delivery flag in the order item?


~238


2009

TSCM60


7.

Create an outbound delivery for the previous sales order (from Exercise 8, Task 6 Step 2). In this delivery, only 10 units from the total of25 units should be delivered initially.


Change the quantity to be delivered to 10 pieces. Save the outbound delivery and write down the order number.

Task 2: You want to examine possible methods of transport for the delivery. I.

Check whether the outbound delivery you just created (in Task I) can be processed for transport. What is the transportation planning status of the delivery?

Hint: Display the outbound delivery on the screen. On the Transport tab page, you can see whether this delivery can be processed for transport in the Trns.plan.stat. field. Use F I help to see an explanation of the status.


2009


239~

TSCMSO


2.

You want to load several items from different deliveries, that all have the same ship-to party, into a container. Do you have the option of doing this in the shipment document and entering which items are to be loaded into which container?

3.

You have put together several deliveries for diiferent customers in Hamburg into one shipment document for one lorry load. Do you have the option of dividing the shipping costs to the customer depending on the number of items being delivered to them?

4.

What is the difference between a shipment document and a transfer order?

Task 3: You want to pick your delivery, post goods issue and bill the transaction. You then want to check which accounts have been found in the accounting document. I.

First create the transfer order for picking for the previous delivery for warehouse number 010 in plant 1000. Write down the document number.

2.

Post goods issue for the outbound delivery.

3.

Enter a billing document for the outbound delivery and write the document number.


__ G-.A-I-Ir-ig_h_ts_r_e-se_N_e_d________________________2_0__ 09

~ '2~4~Q~---------------©~2~00~9-S~A-P_A

TSCM60


4.

Display the accounting document for the billing document and write down which accc·unts have been posted for which amounts.

Hint: You can display the accounting document for the billing document with the transaction Display billing document: Choose Accounting overview and select the accounting document.

-2-00_9_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ©_2_0_09_S_A_P_A_G___A_II_ri-gh_t_s_re_s_e_rv-ed-.-------~2~4...-1

~

TSCM60


Solution 9: Transportation Processing Task 1: A sales order should be partially delivered. I.

Display the standard order from the last exercise on the screen. Determine whether the order could be partially delivered. Which agreement referring to a complete delivery can be seen in the order header?

Hint: The Complete Delive1y field in the order header is on the Sales overview screen and on the Shipping tab page.

a)

Logistics-+ Soles and Distribution-+ Sales-+ Order-+ Display

Choose the Shipping tab page. The Complete dlv. field is not selected. This means that individual items can be split up into separate deliveries. 2.

What master data is used for proposing the Complete Delive1y flag in the order header? Answer: The indicator for Comple1e delivery in the order header is proposed from the customer master.

3.

Do you have the option of distributing individual order items (with the corresponding item order quantity) to different deliveries, if the field Complere De/ive1y is not checked in the order header? Answer: Yes. Items can be split up into separate deliveries.

4.

Do you have the option of distributing the full amount of order items to different deliveries, if the Camp/ere De/ive1y field is not checked in the order header? Answer: If the Complete delive1y field is not selected in the order header, then it is still dependent on the partial delivery agreement at item level, whether the amount ordered can be divided up.

5.

What agreements referring to partial deliveries can be found in item I 0 of the order?


~242


2009

TSCM60


Hint: You can find the Part.dlv.litem field for the order item on the Shipping tab page.

a)

6.

What master data is used for proposing the Partial Delivery flag in the order item?

a)

7.

On the Shipping tab page for item I 0, the Part.dlv.litem field is empty (Partial deliveries allowed). This means that partial deliveries are allowed.

The proposal for the Part.dlv.litem field in the order item comes from the customer master. If a customer-material info already exists for the customer and the material, and the proposal here is different to that in the customer master, then this proposal has priority.

Create an outbound delivery for the previous sales order (from Exercise 8, Task 6 Step 2). In this delivery, only 10 units from the total of25 units should be delivered initially. Hint: To be able to enter the outbound delivery at an earlier date, set the selection date 20 days into the future. Use shipping point ZO##.

Change the quantity to be delivered to I 0 pieces. Save the outbound delivery and write down the order number.

a)

Logistics-> Sales and Distribution ->Shipping and Transportation-> Outbound Delivery-> Create-> Single Document-> With Reference to Sales Order Change quantity to be delivered to I 0 units. ~save


Task 2: You want to examine possible methods of transport for the delivery. I.

Check whether the outbound delivery you just created (in Task I) can be processed for transport.

Continued on next jJage

2009


243~

TSCM60


What is the transportation planning status of the delivery? Hint: Display the outbound delivery on the screen. On the 1J·ansport tab page. you can see whether this delivery can be processed for transport in the 1J-ns.p/an.stat. field. Use Fl help to see an explanation of the status.

a)

Logistics-> Sales and Distribution-> Shipping and 1J-ansportation Outbound De/ive1y-> Display

->

Choose the 1J-ansport tab page. A is entered in the 1J·ns.plan.stat. field. This means that the outbound delivery has not yet been processed in a >hipment document. It may also be the case that a delive1y is not relevant for a shipment document (depending on the delivery type). 2.

You want to load several items from different deliveries, that all have the same ship-to party, into a container. Do you have the option of doing this in the shipment document and entering which items are to be loaded into which container? Answer: You can specifY which items are to be loaded together into a container in the shipment document. You can also load itt!ms for different deliveries together into one container.

3.

You have put together several deliveries for different customers in Hamburg into one shipment document for one lorry load. Do you have the option of dividing the shipping costs to the customer depending on the number of items being delivered to them? Answer: Yes You can enter the shipment costs into a shipment cost document and distribute these accordingly amongst customers.

4.

What is the difference between a shipment document and a transfer order? Answer: The shipment document is created and used to group together several deliveries for one shipment to a customer. For example, for one lorry driver. The transfer request acts as a basis for picking. It is created for a delivery. to control internal material movements.


~244


2009

TSCM60


Task 3: You want to pick your delivery, post goods issue and bitt the transaction. You then want to check which accounts have been found in the accounting document. l.

First create the transfer order for picking for the previous delivery for warehouse number OJ 0 in plant 1000. Write down the document number.

a)

Logistics-> Sales and Distribution-> Shipping and Transportation-> Picking-> Create Transfer Order-> Single Document The document number is assigned internally by the system.

2.

Post goods issue for the outbound delivery. a)

Logistics-> Sales and Distribution-> Shipping and Transportation-> Outbound Delive1y-> Change-> Single Document Choose Post Goods Issue.

3.

Enter a billing document for the outbound delivery and write the document number.

a)

Logislics - 7 Sales and Distribution __,. Create

Choose Etecute

-7

--:~-Billing

-7

Billing Document

Save.

The document number is assigned internally by the system. 4.

Display the accounting document for the billing document and write down which accounts have been posted for which amounts.

Hint: You can display the accounting document for the billing document with the transaction Display billing document: Choose Accounting overview and select the accounting document.


2009


245~


a)

TSCM60

Logistics --->Sales and Distribution --->Billing---> Billing Document --->Display

Choose Accounting. Select the accounting document. Debit posting is posted for the customer account and credit posting is booked for the output tax and sales revenue accounts. The debit postings are made on the payer's account. The offsetting postings are made on the revenue accounts, sales deduction accounts

and, in some cases, the output tax accounts.

~246


2009


TSCM60

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Explain the function of the shipment document Describe how shipment costs are billed to the customer Explain how financial information is transferred from the billing document into the accounting document

2009


247~

TSCM60

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: Describe the basic principles and function of the availability check Use the availability check as part of order processing Explain the function of the shipment document Describe how shipment costs are billed to the customer Explain how financial information is transferred from the billing into the accounting document

~248


docum~nt

2009

Unit Sales and Distribution Processes with Make-to-Order Production Unit Overview This unit first explains the function of the item category for Sales and Distribution documents. It then looks at the inquiry/quotation presales documents and provides a sample process illustrating sales order processing.

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: Describe presales activities Use inquiries and quotations Explain key functions of item categories Track the status of assembly orders for make-to-order sales orders Pack items in an outbound delivery

Unit Contents Lesson: Presales Processing ................................................. 250 Lesson: Function of the Item Category ...................................... 254 Exercise 10: Presales Processes and the Item Category ............. 257 Lesson: Assembly Processing ................................................ 268 Exercise 11: Assembly Processing ...................................... 275

2009


249~

Unit 6: Sales and Distribution Processes with Make-to-Order Production

TSCM60

Lesson: Presales Processing Lesson Overview This Jesson covers inquiries and quotations.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe presales activities Use inquiries and quotations

Business Example Before placing an order, the customer wants to find out about material prices and delivery times. You make the customer a quotation for the materials offered. The customer accepts the quotation and places an order.

Presales Processing

employees

Figure 94: Sales Support Tasks

W2so


2009

TSCMSO

Lesson: Presales Processing

Support for the employees in Sales and Distribution and Marketing for all the activities involved in acquiring and taking care of customers. You can implement the following activities in the Sales Support System: Prepare information about customers, prospective customers, contact people, competitors, and their products. Manage sales activities, such as telephone calls and customer visits Carry out direct mailing campaigns Direct access to the Sales Information System (SIS) with a wide range of evaluations for things such as sales volume figures and the number of incoming orders.

•

InqUiries a-r_~ custO_Iner requests tO: the crimr;any fOr_ a quotation or non~',' binding sal~s information.'

e

c.anj processing period.

•

• :e~:=~d~~.:.

er.i .. od ·•

Quotations are offers from 'a saleS area to: a

custOmer fordeliveririQ materials or providing services under specified conditions.

Quotations are legally binding throughout the specified validity period.

Figure 95: Presales Documents

You receive inquiries from your customers about material prices or delivery times. You use a quotation to provide your customers the relevant intormation (referencing the inquiry is optional).

Figure 96: Document Flow in the Presales Phase

In the standard system, the inquiry is taken as being completely referenced as soon as the customer receives a quotation referring to the inquiry.

2009


251~


TSCM60

A quotation can be referenced for as long as it takes for the full amount or the validity date to be reached. The document flow in the presa!es phase can comprise both inquiries and quotations. !fa customer accepts a quotation, the sales order follows.

You can also create quotations without having an inquiry from a customer.

~252


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Presales Processing

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Describe presales activities Use inquiries and quotations

2009


253~


TSCM60

Lesson: Function of the Item Category Lesson Overview This lesson introduces you to the item category, which is a key control instrument.

e .

..

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain key functions of item categories

Business Example The item category is a key instrument for controlling sales and distribution processes.

Function of the Item Category

Figure 97: Item Categories

Item categories provide additional control functions for the sales·documents.

~254


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Function of the Item Category

An item category can influence, for example:

Whether the system runs automatic pricing Whether the item appears on an invoice Which fields are recorded in the incompletion log if they were not entered in the order Which partner functions belong to the item Which text types belong to the item Whether the item appears on a delivery Whether you can create schedule lines for the item

Figure 98: Item Category Determination Normal Item The item category in the sales document is found using the sales document type and the item category group from the material master, for example. The item category group is maintained in the material master on the Sales: sales org. 2 tab page. Another item category from the one in the standard order is found for a material with the item category group NORM.

2009


255~


TSCM60

Item category group

Figure 99: Item Category Determination in the Standard Order

Another item category than that for a material with item category group 000 I is found for a material with the item category group NORM.

~256


2009

TSCM60


Exercise 10: Presales Processes and the Item Category Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to:

Process inquiries and quotations Understand item category determination.

Business Example You receive a customer inquiry about motorbikes. You can use this inquiry to create a quotation. Information defined in the quotations, such as prices and delivery conditions, is binding and valid for a specific period.

Task 1: Create an inquiry. I.

You receive a written inquiry from a customer for a motorbike. You want the inquiry to be processed by the end of the month. Request Customer: T-SSOA## Motomarkt Heidelberg We purchased motorbike T -AS3## from you last year. We are interested in purchasing 3 more. Would you please make a quotation for us?

Hint: To create inquiries, choose Logistics--> Sales and Distribution -->

Sales--> lnqui1y--> Create.

During inquiry creation the field Valid to is entered as a processing deadline and is also used later in quotation processing. Create the inquiry and write down the number.


-20_0_9______________________©_c_2_00-9--SA_P__A_G_._A_II-rig_h_ts--re-se_N_e_d-.--------------~2~5~7~~

TSCM60


Task 2: Create a quotation. I.

The next day you process the inquiries received. First of all you create a list of all inquiries for customer T-SSOA##, that need to be processed by the end of the month. Hint: To create inquiries lists, choose Logistics---+ Sales and Distribution---+ Sales---+ hiformation System --)' Inquiries --)' Inquiries List

2.

Create a quotation for the inquiry. As there is currently a lot of demand for this motorbike, you only want to offer the customer 2 units. The quotation should be valid from today until the end of next month. Create the quotation and write down the number.

Hint: Create the quotation (document type QT) with reference to the

inquil)' using the menu path Logistics---+ Sales and Distribution Sales---+ Quotation ---+ Create Choose Create with Reference.

---+

Task 3: Create an order with reference to the quotation. I.

Customer T-SSOA## orders 1 unit of motorbike T-AS3## as a result of the quotation.

Purchase order from the quotation Customer: T-SSOA## Purchase order number: 8-131 Requested delivery date: in I 0 days

I

Material T-AS3##

I;uantity

Create the standard order and write down the number.


~258


2009

TSCM60


Task 4: Determine the reference status for the items in the inquiry and the quotation from the previous exercises.

Hint: The status overview for the individual documents can be displayed from the document flow.

I.

Display the reference status for the item in the inquiry.

2.

Display the reference status for the item in the quotation.

Task 5: Questions on the presales documents. I.

Name some of the differences between an inquiry and a quotation.

2.

Does an inquiry have to be set up before a quotation can be created?

3.

Does automatic pricing take place during entry of quotations or inquiries?

4.

Do you have the option of carrying out the availability check in an inquiry or a quotation as you do in the sales order?

Task 6: How is the item category found in the sales document? I.

Display the last inquiry processed and write down which item category has been found. Continued on next page

2009


259~


TSCM60

2.

Based on which criteria is the item category in the sales document usually found?

3.

Can different items be created in an order with different item categories?

4.

Can you set an item in an inquiry so that it is not relevant for billing and that an item in a sales order is relevant for billing, depending on the item category?

~ '2~6'-0~---------------©~2~00_9_S_A_P_A_G~.A-I-Ir-ig_h_ts-r-es-e-~-e-d-.----------------------2-0--09

TSCM60


Solution 10: Presales Processes and the Item Category Task 1: Create an inquiry. I.

You receive a written inquiry from a customer for a motorbike. You want the inquiry to be processed by the end of the month. Request Customer: T-SSOA## Motomarkt Heidelberg We purchased motorbike T -AS3## from you last year. We are interested in purchasing 3 more. Would you please make a quotation for us?

Hint: To create inquiries, choose Logistics--+ Sales and Distribution

-->Sales --> Inqui1y--> Create.

During inquiry creation the field Valid to is entered as a processing deadline and is also used later in quotation processing. Create the inqui1y and write down the number.

a)

Logistics--+ Sales and Disrribwion--+ Sales

--+

lnquily--+ Create



2009


261~

TSCM60


Task 2: Create a quotation. I.

The next day you process the inquiries received. First of all you create a list of all inquiries for customer T-SSOA##, that need to be processed by the end of the month. Hint: To create inquiries lists, choose Logistics -->Soles and Distribution -->Sales--> Information System -----+ Inquiries -----+ Inquiries List

a)

Logistics Inquiries

--> -----+

Sales and Distribution Inquiries List

->

Sales

-->

Information System

-->

Sold-to party T-SSOA##

2.

Create a quotation for the inquiry. As there is currently a lot of demand for this motorbike, you only want to offer the customer 2 units. The quotation should be valid from today until the end of next month. Create the quotation and write down the number.

Hint: Create the quotation (document type QT) with reference to the inquiry using the menu path Logistics --> Sales and Distribution --> Sales -----+ Quotation-----+ Create Choose Create with Reference. a)

Logistics-----+ Sales and Distribution-----+ Sales-----+ Quotation -----+Create Choose Create with Reference. Enter the inquiry number. Choose Item Selection. Change the quantity to 2 units. Choose Copy. Enter PO Number. Enter the Requested delivery date in the First date in the line item. Choose Save. The document number is assigned internally by the system.


~262


2009

TSCM60


Task 3: Create an order with reference to the quotation. I.

Customer T-SSOA## orders I unit of motorbike T-AS3## as a result of the quotation.

Purchase order from the quotation Customer: T -SSOA## Purchase order number: 8-131 Requested delivery date: in 10 days

I

IMaterial

;uant)ty

T-AS3##

Create the standard order and write down the number.

a)

Logistics --. Sales and Distribution --. Sales --. Order --. Create Choose Create with Reference. Enter the quotation number. Choose Item Selection. Change the quantity to I unit. Choose Copy. Enter PO Number. Enter the Requested delivery date in the First date on the line item. Choose Save. The document number is assigned internally by the system.

Task 4: Determine the reference status for the items in the inquiry and the quotation from the previous exercises.

Hint: The status overview for the individual documents can be displayed from the document flow.

I.

Display the reference status for the item in the inquiry. Continued on next page

2009


263~

TSCM60


a)

Logistics--> Sales and Distribution--> Sales--> JnquilJ'--> Display--> Environment--> Display document flow

Position the cursor on Inquiry-+ choose Status

O\'eJTiew

Expand Item I 0 Reference status: Fully referenced

The reference status for the inquiry states that it is fully referenced, although only 2 of the 3 units have been copied from the inquiry amount to the quotation. In the standard system an inquiry item is marked as fully referenced as soon as at least a partial quantity of the item has been copied to a quotation. 2.

Display the reference status for the item in the quotation.

a)

Logistics--> Sales and Distriblllion--> Sales--> Quotation--> Display -+ Environment -+ Display document flow

Position the cursor on Quotafion

-+

choose Status overview

Expand Item I 0 Reference status: Partially referenced

The reference status tor the quotation states that it is partially referenced, since only I of the 2 units has been copied from the quotation amount to the sales order. In the standard system a quotation item is marked as fully referenced only when the full quantity has been copied.

Task 5: Questions on the presales documents. 1.

Name some of the differences between an inquiry and a quotation.


~264


2009

TSCM60


a)

Inquiries are customer requests for the sales and distribution conditions of a material (price, delive1y date, etc). You provide your customer with the relevant information using quotations. For inquiries, the validity date is used in the system as a processing deadline for an answer to the inquiry. Quotations are legally binding during the customer validity period.

2.

Does an inquiry have to be set up before a quotation can be created?

a) 3.

Does automatic pricing take place during entry of quotations or inquiries?

a) 4.

No. Quotations without reference to an inquiry can also be created.

Yes. Automatic pricing takes place (dependent on Customizing) during inquiry and quotation creation.

Do you have the option of carrying out the availability check in an inquiry or a quotation as you do in the sales order?

a)

Yes. An availability check is carried out during inquiry and quotation entry in the same way as during sales order entry (dependent on Customizing).

Task 6: How is the item category found in the sales document? I.

Display the last inquiry processed and write down which item category has been found.

a)

Logistics--> Sales and Distribution--> Sales--> Jnquily--> Display

The item category AFN for Inquiry item is on the Sales tab page. 2.

Based on which criteria is the item category in the sales document usually found?


2009


265~


a)

3.

Yes. Different items can be created in an order with different item categories.

Can you set an item in an inquiry so that it is not relevant for billing and that an item in a sales order is relevant for billing, depending on the item category?

a)

~266

The item category is found dependent on the sales document type (inquiry, quotation, standard order, ... ) and the item category group of the material master.

Can different items be created in an order with different item categories?

a) 4.

TSCM60

Yes. Billing relevance, pricing, delivery relevance and incompleteness control, for example, can be set in Customizing, dependent on item categories.


2009


TSCM60

e

.

Lesson Summary

.

You should now be able to: Explain key functions of item categories

-2-00_9_______________________ ©_2_0_0_9_S_A_P_A_G_._A_II-ri-gh_t_s-re_s_e-~-ed-.--------------~2~6~7~


TSCM60

Lesson: Assembly Processing Lesson Overview This Jesson contains a sample process to demonstrate coJiaboration between Sales and Distribution and Production.

Lesson Objectives After completing this Jesson, you will be able to: Track the status of assembly orders for make-to-order sales orders Pack items in an outbound delivery

Business Example The customer orders a petrol tank that is speciaJiy manufactured for his own requirements. This requires cooperation between Sales and Distribution and Manufacturing. Before the petrol tank is delivered, it must be packed.

Assembly Processing Materials Mgmt./ Production' Individual

I

I

!

Reduces sales order stock

Figure 100: Make-To-Order Flow

Make-to-order production is characterized by the fact that materials are not stored in the warehouse but produced especiaJiy for a particular sales order.

~268


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Assembly Processing

An individual customer requirement is generated from the sales order item and transferred to materials planning (PP). You can use materials planning to plan requirements. Once this has been done, production is carried out. After the product has been manufactured, you post it by goods receipt to sales orders stock specifically for this sales order item. As soon as the delivery is due, you can enter the delivery in SD and post goods issue. This reduces the sales order stock. Then you enter a billing document in SD.

:,x~i~Brt~~~;~~r'1 ....-.......................................................•-...; j;ra'd~-~t:i6ti-_Otd~l Quantity, date

Figure 101: Make-To-Order Production without Assembly Processing The requirement quantity (planned independent requirements), delivery date and configuration specifications are transferred from the sales order to materials planning as an individual customer requirement. You then use a planning run to generate a planned order. Here, bills of material are exploded and dependent requirements for the assemblies and components are generated. As soon as production can start, you create a production order from the planned order. The system returns the confirmed quantity and delivery date from the production order to the sales order.

2009


269~


TSCMSO

~.~.;;~(+,~,

-

< \WM""

'i§,~:!j~§q~

. . .,.____'----~:; . :P/~'~:J.~t-io~---,~t-~:1-;

Figure 102: Make-To-Order Production with Assembly Processing

The individual components for the final product have already been produced for make-to-order production with assembly production. You then only need to assemble the components according to the customer"s wishes. This means you need just a one-level bill of material explosion and you do not need to generate dependent requirements. This means that you do not need a planning run at this point for make-to-order production with assembly processing. You can create a production order directly from the sales order. The system returns the confirmed quantity and delivery date from the production order to the schedule lines in the sales order. Any changes made to the confirmed schedule lines or the delivery date are immediately visible in the sales order and/or in the production order.

Figure 103: Cost Management per Item

~270


2009

TSCM60


In sales order processing, the costs and sales revenue for a sales order item are collected in a controlling object for that item and settled in a profitability analysis. Pricing in the sales order determines the planned sales revenues (net value 2) and the actual sales revenue is posted in the billing document. The planned costs are compared to the revenues. They arise from product or unit costing, or from the valuation price in the material master (standard price or moving average price). The actual costs are calculated from the withdrawal, production orders, internal activity allocation and'surcharges. The accrued actual sales revenues and costs are settled in the profitability analysis to determine the profit or loss.

Figure 104: Packing

During packing, delivery items can be assigned to packaging materials. The handling units created by this can then be packed in additional packaging materials.

2009


271~

Unit 6: Sales and Distribution Processes with

Make~to-Order

Production

TSCM60

Figure 105: Delivery from Sales Order Stock After the material has been produced, it is posted as a goods receipt to the sales order stock. Sales order stock is special stock which can be used only for the special sales order. During goods issue of the delivery, the sales order stock is reduced accordingly. Configurable Material

Configuration Profile

Class

Characteristics

Values

Figure 106: Assembly Processing with Variant Configuration- Example When the attributes of a material are not predefined and there ar~ many possible variations, you can define them in the sales order in the context of a variant configuration. A configuration profile must exist for every configurable material. You use it to define specific attributes of the configuration. The material is assigned to one or more classes in the configuration profile or in the material master. ·

~272


2009

TSCM60


Each class contains one or more characteristics which represent the variable attributes of the material. You can define the possible values (characteristic values) for each characteristic. You can maintain surcharges/discounts for characteristic values, which affect

pricing.

-20_0_9______________________©_o_2_0_09__ S_A_P_A_G_._A_II-ri-gh_t_s-re_s_eN--ed-.--------------~2~7~3~


~274


TSCM60

2009

TSCM60


Exercise 11: Assembly Processing Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. you will be able to: •

Understand the make-to-order process Pack items into the outbound delivery.

Business Example A customer orders a specially lacquered petrol tank from you in accordance with his own personal requirements. You also send him assembly instructions and go-faster stripes for his car. The individual materials should be packed into a carton fo: shipping.

Task 1: Process make-to-order production. I.

The customer orders a petrol tank for his motorbike. He has requested that you lacquer and assemble the tank before it is delivered. The material master T-FSI##, a bill of material and a work plan have already been created. Create a standard order based on the existing purchase order. Purchase order Customer: T -SSOA## ·;

1

PO number: 8-311

Requested delivery date: in I 0 days Material T-FSI##L• ' Quantity

I

{J

Hint: Do not save the order yet!


2009


275~

TSCM60


2.

You give out assembly instructions T-AS7## and go-faster stripes T-ASS## free of charge with the petrol tank. Therefore, enter both materials in the above sales order as well. Hint: As you want to make it clear in the sales order that both materials belong to petrol tank T-FS I##, enter both items under the higher-level item I 0. For lower-level items, enter 10 in the HL Item field.

3.

What item categories do the three items have?

)%'!

( l(!N, (t,

4.

VI

"TP...f'I/10

(2

{)

Tl>d"~

What is the net price of the three items? t'

.fC.rv\

!C. II

I

5.

"1F- cc

II

)

·-1 c/-rr ('

0

Save the sales order and write down the number.

krS <~ C'

Task 2: I.

Display the sales order that you created in the previous task. Check the procurement data for petrol tank T-FSI## on the schedule line for item 10. Hint: To reach the procurement data for the schedule line, choose Schedule line for item and then Procurement. Write down the number oithe assembly order. : ("0\JG

2.

N \

Display the assembly order header. Note the basic dates for the start and finish of the assembly order. Continued on next page

w. 276


2009

TSCM60


3.

Which date in the sales order corresponds to the end date in the assembly order?

Task 3: The customer informs you tha\ he would like to have petrol tank T-FSI## delivered 8 days later. Change the requested delivery date for item 10 accordingly in the sales order. Hint: Use column I First date to change the original requested delivery date of an item at item level. I.

Write down what effects the assigned items II and 12 will have on the requested delivery date.

l'if~v-d~
~~ 7-r~A,

Display the assembly order header for petrol tank T-FSI## (item I 0). Write down how the end date has changed.

((,•ccJiff Hint: To display the assembly order from the sales order, choose ---t Header in the sales order.

Schedule lines for item --}>Procurement


2009


277~


Make~to~Order

TSCM60

Production


Production gives you notice that the petrol tank is assembled. In materials management, enter the goods receipt for the assembly order in the sales order stock in plant 1000, storage location 0001. Hint: To enter the goods receipt in materials management, choose: Logistics ---t Materials Management---t lnventmy Management Goods Movement---> Goods Receipt---> For Order

---t

Movement Type I 0 I Order Assembly order number (see exercise 2-1) (CCC C J.,ft( Plant 1000 Storage location 0001

2.

Display the sales order stock in the stock overview for material T-FSI## in plant 1000. Hint: To display the stock overview in materials management, choose Logistics ---t Materials Management ---t Jnventmy Manageme111 ---t Environment ---t Stock ---t Stock Overview. How many pieces are there in the sales order stock?

Task 5: Process shipping. I.

Enter the outbound delivery for the previous sales order and pack the items. Hint: To be able to enter the outbound delivery at an earlier date, set the selection date 20 days into the future. Use shipping point ZO##. Pack three items in packaging material PK-096. Save the outbound delivery and write down the order number.

9}0Uil·C)( 2.

Pick the delivery and post the goods issue.

t-.T() 3

(Warehouse number 010) Continued on next page

~278


2009

TSCM60


3.

To conclude, display the sales order stock in the stock overview for material T-FSI## inplantlOOO. How many pieces are there in the sales order stock?

(; Hint: To display the stock overview in materials management, choose:

Logistics -7 Materials Management -7 lnvent01y Management Environment - 7 Stock - 7 Stock Overview ttt 1L( 1'5;-e:

2009


-7

279~


Make~to-Order

TSCM60

Production

Solution 11: Assembly Processing Task 1: Process make-to-order production. I.

The customer orders a petrol tank for his motorbike. He has requested that you lacquer and assemble the tank before it is delivered. The material master T-FS I##, a bill of material and a work plan have already been created. Create a standard order based on the existing purchase order. Purchase order Customer: T-SSOA## PO number: 8-311 Requested delivery date: in I 0 days Material T-FS1## 0\ Quantity

{J a)

2.

Hint: Do not save the order yet! Logistics -->Sales and Distribution--> Sales--> Order--> Create

You give out assembly instructions T-AS7## and go-faster stripes T-ASS## free of charge with the petrol tank. Therefore, enter both materials in the above sales order as well. Hint: As you want to make it clear in the sales order that both materials belong to petrol tank T-FS I##, enter both items under the higher-level item I 0. For lower-level items, enter 10 in the HL Item field. a)

Enter sub-items. For sub-items, enter 10 in the HL Item field.


~ 280


2009

TSCMSO


3.

What item categories do the three items have? Answer: Item I 0: MTO Production TAK Item II: free item TANN Item 12: free item TANN

4.

What is the net price of the three items? Answer: Item I 0: 297 Item 11: 0 Item 12: 0

5.

Save the sales order and write down the number.

a)


i'{ S"
Task 2: I.

Display the sales order that you created in the previous task. Check the procurement data for petrol tank T-FSJ## on the schedule line for item 10. Hint: To reach the

procl.lrPITIPnt d3t~.

for thP schedule line. choosP

Schedule line for item and then Procurement. Write down the number of the assembly order.

a)

Logisrics ->Sales and Distribution-> Sales-> Order-> Display //em 10: Choose Sclretlules line for item Choose Procurement.

The document number for the assembly order has been assigned internally. 2.

Display the assembly order header. Note the basic dates for the start and finish of the assembly order.


2009


281~


Make~to~Order

TSCM60

Production

Choose Header.

a)

The end and start dates have been calculated by the system. Backward scheduling for the assembly order is carried out on the basis of the work plans for the material (petrol tank). Backscheduling is carried out from the sales order material staging date. 3.

Which date in the sales order corresponds to the end date in the assembly order? Answer: The finish date of the assembly order corresponds to the material staging date in the sales order.

Task 3: The customer informs you that he would like to have petrol tank T-FSI## delivered 8 days later. Change the requested delivery date for item 10 accordingly in the sales order.

Hint: Use column I First date to change the original requested delivery date of an item at item level. I.

Write down what etTects the assigned items 11 and 12 will have on the requested delivery date.

a)

Logistics-> Sales and Distribution ->Sales-> Order-> Change Item 10: Change First date to 8 days in the future. The required delivery date for items 11 and 12 changes according to the date in item 10, as they are subordinate to this item.

2.

Display the assembly order header for petrol tank T-FSI## (item I 0). Write down how the end date has changed.


~282


2009


TSCM60

Hint: To display the assembly order from the sales order, choose Schedule lines for item ---> Procurement ---> Header in the sales order. a)

Logistics---> Sales and Distribution---> Sales---> Order---> Display Item I 0: Choose Schedules line for item. Choose Procurement. Choose Header. As the required delivery date was changed in the previous exercise, a new material staging date was determined in the sales order. This new material staging date has been transferred to the assembly order as a new Finish date.


2009


283~


Make~toMOrder

TSCM60

Production


Production gives you notice that the petrol tank is assembled. In materials management, enter the goods receipt for the assembly order in the sales order stock in plant 1000, storage location 0001. Hint: To enter the goods receipt in materials management, choose: Logistics--> Materials Management--> Inventmy Management--> Goods Movement-> Goods Receipt-> For Order Movement Type 101 Order Assembly order number (see exercise 2-1) Plant 1000 Storage location 0001 a)

Logistics --)>Materials Management

--l- Inventmy Management Goods Movement--> Goods Receipt-> For Order

--)>

Movement Type I 01 Order Assembly order number (see exercise 2-1) Planr 1000 Storage location 0001

Choose Adopt+ Details. Choose Save. 2.

Display the sales order stock in the stock overview for material T-FSI## in plant 1000. Hint: To display the stock overview in materials management, choose Logistics Materials Management --l- Inventmy Management--)> Environment--)> Stock--)> Stock Overview. --)>

How many pieces are there in the sales order stock?

a)

Logistics -->Materials Management--> Inventmy Management--> Environment --l- Stock--)> Stock Overview

I unit exists in the sales order stock.


~ '2~8'4.-----------------©-c_2_0_0_9_S_A_P_A_G_._A_I_Ir-ig-h-ts--re-s-eN--ed-.------------------------2-0-0-9

TSCM60


Task 5: Process shipping. I.

Enter the outbound delivery for the previous sales order and pack the items.


Pack three items in packaging material PK-096. Save the outbound delivery and write down the order number.

a)

Logistics--> Sales and Distribution--> Shipping and 1J·ansportation--> Outbound Delive~y--> Create--> Single Document-> With Reference to Sales Order

Choose Pack. Packaging material PK-096

Select the Handling Unit and the items to be packed. Choose Pack. Choose Save. The document number is assigned internally by the system. 2.

Pick the delivery and post the goods issue. (Warehouse number 010)

a)

Picking: Logistics----+ Sales and Distribution --)-Shipping and Transportation Picking--> Create 1J-ansfer Order--> Single Document

----7

The document number is assigned internally by the system. Goods issue: Logistics--> Sales and Distribution -->Shipping and 1J·ansportation--> Outbound Delive1y--> Change--> Single Document

Choose Post Goods Issue. 3.

To conclude, display the sales order stock in the stock overview for material T-FSI## in plant] 000. How many pieces are there in the sales order stock?


2009


285~


Make~to~Order

Production

TSCM60

Hint: To display the stock overview in materials management, choose: Logistics -)- Nfaterials Management -)- lnventmy .111anagement -)Environment-)- Stock-)- Stock Overview

a)

Logistics ->Materials Management-> Inventmy Manageme111 Environment---> Stock---> Stock Overview

--->

There is no longer any sales order stock.

~ ~2~8~6,---------------~©~20~0~9~S~A~P-A_G_._A_II_r-ig-ht_s_re_s_e-rv-e-d.-----------------------20_0_9


TSCM60

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Track the status of assembly orders for make-to-order sales orders Pack items in an outbound delivery

2009


287 f:'S"'

TSCM60

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: Describe presales activities Use inquiries and quotations

Explain key functions of item categories Track the status of assembly orders for make-to-order sales orders Pack items in an outbound delivery

~288


2009

Unit Complaints Processing Unit Overview This unit focuses on the complaints processing options available for Sales and Distribution processes.

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: Process a complaint with reference to a previous sales and distribution process Carry out end explain in detail credit memo processing

Carl)' out and explain in detail returns processing Use an invoice correction request and explain the process in detail Cancel a billing document Execute a complaints process using Advanced Returns Management Explain and use the returns overview function

Unit Contents Lesson: Credit Memo Requests .............................................. 290 Lesson: Returns ................................................................. 294 Lesson: Invoice Correction Requests ........................................ 297 Exercise 12: Complaints Processing .................................... 301 Lesson: Advanced Returns Management ................................... 316

2009


289~

Unit 7: Complaints Processing

TSCM60

Lesson: Credit Memo Requests Lesson Overview This lesson explains how credit memos are processed.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Process a complaint with reference to a previous sales and distribution process Carry out and explain in detail credit memo processing

Business Example Damaged or faulty goods and incorrect invoices result in complaints. lfthe complaint is justified, the customers receive a credit memo. It must be ensured here that the correct amount is credited to the customer account. Before a credit memo is issued, it must be approved by an authorized person.

Overview

Figure 107: Processes in Complaints Processing

You create returns, a credit and debit memo request, a credit and debit memo or an invoice correction request after you have: Created a sales order Delivered the goods to the customer, and billed the customer for the goods

~290


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Credit Memo Requests

Create a return request (authorization) if the customer returns the goods to you.

You create an invoice correction request if there is a price or quantity deviation. You can create the returns or a credit or debit memo request with reference to a sales order or a billing document. You create the invoice correction request or credit/debit memo (without credit/memo request) with reference to the billing document. For returns, credit/debit memo request or invoice correction request, billing takes place after checking and approval, by creating a credit or debit memo.

Processing

Figure 108: Processing Credit and Debit Memos

Credit memos are processed in a similar manner to debit memos. Credit and debit memo requests can be created with reference to a billing document or a sales order. In this way, the system can determine the correct amount from the preceding document.

For evaluation purposes, you must enter an order reason. The credit/debit memo request contains a billing block, which prevents immediate billing. Once the process has been checked, it is approved by removing the billing block.

2009


291~


TSCM60

When the billing documents are posted (credit/debit memo), the required accounting documents are generated automatically. In this way, the correct amounts are credited to or debited from the customer account.

Figure 109: Approving a Credit Memo

Before a credit memo can be created, the process requires that an approval or check step is carried out. This is implemented by means of a billing block.

The return, credit memo request, debit memo request, and invoice correction request documents contain a billing block. These documents are checked by an employee with the appropriate authorization. Unjustitied complaints are rejected and the reason for the rejection is entered against the item(s) in question. Once all the items have been checked, the document can be released for billing. At this point, the billing block is removed. Rejected items are not copied to billing documents although they are still available for evaluation purposes.

~292


2009

Lesson: Credit Memo Requests

TSCM60

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Process a complaint with reference to a previous sales and distribution process

Carry out and explain in detail credit memo processing

2009


293~

TSCM60


Lesson: Returns Lesson Overview This Jesson provides an overview of returns processing.

Lesson Objectives After completingthis lesson, you will be able to: Carry out and explain in detail returns processing

Business Example Damaged or faulty goods and incorrect invoices result in complaints. If complaints are made regarding valuable goods, the goods must be returned. The damaged material must first be checked. It is stored in a special area for this purpose. If the complaint is justified, the customers receive a credit memo. It must be ensured here that the correct amount is credited to the customer account. Before a credit memo is issued, it must be approved by an authorized person.

Returns

•

Acceptance of the returned goods

(post goods receipt)

•

Create the credit memo once the

billing block has been removed.

Figure 110: Returns Processing

~294


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Returns

Returns can be created with reference to a billing document or a sales order. In this way, the system receives all the required data about, for example, quantities and price agreements from the original document, thereby ensuring that the correct document is processed fm1her.

For evaluation purposes, you must enter an order reason. Returns processing requires that an approval step is carried out, which is implemented by an automatic billing block. When the damaged/defective goods arrive at your warehouse, post the goods receipt on the basis of a returns delivery. It is usually posted to a separate returns stock rather than to the unrestricted-use stock. This posting can be made before or after the credit memo has been created. Once the returns have been approved (that is, the billing block has been removed), the credit memo and the required accounting documents are generated as a result of the billing process. The correct amount is automatically credited to the customer account. This step can be carried out independently of the inbound delivery of the damaged/defective goods.

2009


295 [IE"'


TSCM60

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Carry out and explain in detail returns processing

~296


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Invoice Correction Requests

Lesson: Invoice Correction Requests Lesson Overview This lesson explains the function of an invoice correction request.

e .

Lesson Objectives

.

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Use an invoice correction request and explain the process in detail Cancel a billing document

Business Example Damaged or faulty goods and incorrect invoices result in complaints. If the billing document contains mistakes, the appropriate corrections must be made. /-

r~~~~ice Correc;ion ';eq~~sts

e .

'

~-'

J

'''""j ._.,.~\- .._,.,.,.\,,_,_.~ . -·J' -- .. __ )

Invoice corrections

Figure 111: Processing Invoice Corrections

The i~voice correction is used to correct quantities or values for which the customer has already been billed. An invoice correction request is always created with reference to the incorrect billing document. The customer receives a document containing the following information: the quantity and price that were originally calculated, the correct quantity and price, and the amount credited to or debited from the customer account.

2009


297~


TSCM60

Figure 112: Invoice Correction Procedure

In the invoice correction request, a credit/debit memo item is generated for each item on the incorrect billing document. When processing begins, therefore, the net value of the document is zero. All the credit memo items are listed in the document followed by the debit memo items. Changes can only be made to the debit memo items. The net values to be credited are derived from the difference between the credit and debit memo items. Credit/debit memo items are always deleted in pairs. Item pairs that have not been changed can be deleted.

~298


2009

TSCM60


Canceling a Billing Document

e .

.

Accounting 100001276

. Cancellation of invoice 90008527 .. , Accounting 100001296

Figure 113: Canceling a Billing Document

A billing document may have to be canceled, for example, if the payment terms or address of the payer have changed. In this case, a separate billing document (cancellation billing document) and a new accounting document are generated. This re\ises all the postings made as a result of the incorrect billing document by reposting each posting item with the opposite symboL

2009


299~


~300


TSCM60

2009

TSCM60


Exercise 12: Complaints Processing Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. you will be able to: Process returns and credit memos

Business Example A customer buys headlights from you. After the headlights have been delivered to the customer and he has paid, the customer sends a complaint to say that one of the headlights does not work. You agree with the customer that he will be given credit for the amount he has already paid. The customer then makes another complaint about another headlight You ask him to send the headlight back so that you can check it

Task 1: You sell headlights. Create the sales order, outbound delivery and billing document for this. I.

Create a standard order for the following customer purchase order. Purchase order Customer:

T-SSOA##


9-111


in 10 days

Material

Quantity

T-AS1##

10


2.

Create an outbound delivery for the previous sales order. Save the outbound delivery and record the document number.

3.

Pick the delivery and post the goods issue. Create a transfer request as a basis for goods movement in the warehouse and to print the picking list Enter the transfer order for the outbound delivery from the previous task: Continued on next page

2009


301~

TSCM60


Warehouse number

010

Plant

1000

Process

Background

Adopt Pick. Quantity 2 (include pick. quantities in delivery and post Gl)

Record the transfer order number.

4.

Create the billing document for the outbound delivery from the previous task: Save the billing document and write down the document number.

Task 2: After the customer has received the materials and has paid, he realizes that one of the headlights is defective. You determine that this damage occurred during transportation. You agree with the customer that he can keep the headlight and will be credited with the amount paid. You carry out credit memo processing. I.

Create a credit memo request (order type CR) with reference to the standard order you created in the first exercise of this unit for a headlight. Hint: You enter a credit memo request with the same transaction as a sales order. Choose Create with Reference to Order. Then choose Selection list, change the quantity to I, and choose Copy.

2.

On the Sales tab page, enter Damaged in transit as the order reason.

3.

Save the credit memo request and record the document number.

Task 3: The credit memo request is checked and approved by the person responsible. I.

Release the credit memo request for billing by removing the billing block.

Hint: Change the credit memo request and remove the billing block on the Sales or Item overview tab page by selecting the blank entry (last row) from the F4 input help.


~302


2009

TSCM60


Task 4: Once the credit memo request has been released, it can be billed and the credit memo can be created. I.

Create the credit memo for the credit memo request.

Hint: To create credit memos, use the same transaction as for

creating billing documents. 2.

Save the credit memo and record the document number.

Task 5: The customer later makes a further complaint saying that another headlight is defective. This time, you want the customer to return the headlight so that the damage can be inspected. You agree with the customer that he sends the headlight back and that he will be credited with the amount paid. Carry out returns processing. I.

Create a return (order type RE) with reference to the standard order you created in the first exercise of this unit for a headlight.

Hint: You enter returns with the same transaction as a sales order.

Choose Create with Reference to Order. Then choose Selection list and change the quantity to I unit. 2.

On the Sales tab page, enter Returns as the order reason.

3.

Save the returns and record the document number.

Task 6: The defective headlight has arrived. Process the delivery and the goods receipt. I.

Create the returns delivery document for the headlight. Hint: To create a returns delivery document, choose Logistics ----? Sales and Distribution-> Shipping and 1i·ansportation ->Outbound Delive1y-> Create ->Single Document-> With Reference to Sales Order. Use shipping point ZO##.


2009


303~

TSCM60


2.

Post the goods receipt and make a note of the number of the returns delivery document.

Hint: The goods receipt is posted in the Create/Change Delivery transaction. Choose Post Goods Receipt. 3.

Check the stock overview for the headlight in plant 1000 to ensure that the one item in question is located in a separate stock for returns.

Hint: Inventory management is carried out in materials management. Use the transaction Logistics.......,. Materials A-fanagement.......,. Invent01y Management .......,. Environment .......,. Stock .......,. Stock Overview. Choose plant I 000.

Task 7: The returns are checked and approved by the person responsible. I.

Release the returns for billing by removing the billing block.

Hint: Change the returns and remove the billing block on the Sales or Item overview tab page by selecting the last entry (empty row) from the F4 input help.

Task 8: Once the returns have been released, they can be billed and the credit memo for returns can be created. I.

Create the credit memo for returns for the returned goods.

Hint: To create credit memos, use the same transaction as for creating billing documents. 2.

Save the credit memo for returns and record the document number.

Task 9: Questions about returns and credit memo processing I.

Can you create a delivery document for a credit memo request? Continued on next page

~304


2009

TSCM60

2009


2.

Do you have to create a credit memo request or a returns document with reference to a sales order or billing document?

3.

Why would you create a credit memo request or returns document with reference to a sales order?

4.

Which document would you create if the billing document contains a different quantity or price?

5.

Can an invoice correction request also be created with reference to a sales order?

6.

Why do you have to enter an order reason for returns or credit/debit memo requests?

7.

Before a credit memo can be created as a result of billing, an approval step may be necessary for the credit memo request. What field is used here?

8.

After you have created a billing document, you notice that the terms of payment are incorrect. What steps do you need to take to correct this error?


305~

TSCM60


Solution 12: Complaints Processing Task 1: You sell headlights. Create the sales order, outbound delivery and billing document for this. I.

Create a standard order for the following customer purchase order. Purchase order Customer:

T-SSOA##


9-lll


in 10 days

Material

Quantity

T-ASI##

10


a)


Choose Save. The document number is assigned internally by the system. 2.

Create an outbound delivery for the previous sales order. Save the outbound delivery and record the document number.

a)

Logistics--> Sales and Distribution--> Shipping and Transportation--> Outbound Delive1y-+ Create -+Single Document---}> TVilh Reference to Sales Order

To be able to enter the outbound delivery at an earlier date, set the selection date 20 days into the future. Use shipping point ZO##. Choose Save. The document number is assigned internally by the system. 3.

Pick the delivery and post the goods issue. Create a transfer request as a basis for goods movement in the warehouse and to print the picking Jist. Enter the transfer order for the outbound delivety from the previous task:


~306


2009

TSCM60


Warehouse number

010

Plant

1000

Process

Background

Adopt Pick Quantity 2 (include pick. quantities in delivery and post Gl)

Record the transfer order number.

a)

Logistics--> Sales and Distribution--> Shipping and Transportation--> Picking--> Create Transfer Order --> Single Document

The document number is assigned internally by the system. b) 4.

Choose Save

Create the billing document for the outbound delivery from the previous task: Save the billing document and write down the document number.

a)

Logistics -->Sales and Distribution -->Billing--> Billing Document ---+ Create



2009


307~

TSCM60


Task 2: After the customer has received the materials and has paid, he realizes that one of the headlights is defective. You determine that this damage occurred during transportation. You agree with the customer that he can keep the headlight and will be credited with the amount paid. You carry out credit memo processing. 1.

Create a credit memo request (order type CR) with reference to the standard order you created in the first exercise of this unit for a headlight.

Hint: You enter a credit memo request with the same transaction as

a sales order. Choose Create with Reference to Order. Then choose Selection list, change the quantity to I, and choose Copy. a)

Logistics-> Sales and Distribution-> Sales-> Order-> Create Order type Credit memo request. Choose Create with Reference. Choose the Order tab page and enter the order number. Choose Item Selection. Change the open quantity to 1 unit. Choose Copy.

2.

On the Sales tab page, enter Damaged in transit as the order reason. a)

3.

Choose the Sales tab page and enter Damaged in transit in the Order reason field.

Save the credit memo request and record the document number.

a)



~308


2009

TSCM60


Task 3: The credit memo request is checked and approved by the person responsible. I.

Release the credit memo request for billing by removing the billing block.

Hint: Change the credit memo request and remove the billing block on the Sales or Item overview tab page by selecting the blank entry (last row) from the F4 input help.

a)

Logistics--> Sales and Distribution--> Sales--> Order--> Change

Choose the Sttles or Item overview tab page and select the last entry (blank) from the F4 input help for the Billing block field.

Task 4: Once the credit memo request has been released, it can be billed and the credit memo can be created. I.

Create the credit memo for the credit memo request. Hint: To create credit memos, use the same transaction as for creating billing documents. a)

2.

Logi.sth:s -Sales and Distribution--+ Billing-+ Billing Document -+Create

Save the credit memo and record the document number.

a)


Continued on next page·

2009


309~

TSCM60


Task 5: The customer later makes a further complaint saying that another headlight is defective. This time, you want the customer to return the headlight so that the damage can be inspected. You agree with the customer that he sends the headlight back and that he will be credited with the amount paid. Carry out returns processing. 1.

Create a rctum (order type RE) with reference to the standard order you created in the first exercise of this unit for a headlight. Hint: You enter returns with the same transaction as a sales order. Choose Create with Reference to Order. Then choose Selection list and change the quantity to I unit.

a)

Logistics--> Sales and Distribution -->Sales--> Order--> Create Order type Returns

Choose Create with Reference. Choose the Order tab page and enter the order number. Choose Item Selection. Change the open quantity to 1 unit. Choose Copy. 2.

On the Sales tab page, enter Returns as the order reason. a)

3.

Choose the Sales tab page and enter Returns in the Order reason field.

Save the returns and record the document number.

a)



~310


2009

TSCM60


Task 6: The defective headlight has arrived. Process the delivery and the goods receipt. I.

Create the returns delivery document for the headlight.

Hint: To create a returns delivery document, choose Logistics --> Sales and Distribution--> Shipping and Transportation--> Outbound Delive1y ~ Create---+ Single Document---+ fVith Reference to Sales Order. Use shipping point ZO##.

a)

Logisrics--> Sales and Distribution--> Shipping and Tramportation--> Outbczmd Delivery--> Create--> Single Document--> With Reference to Sales Order In the Order field, enter the returns document number created in Task 5.

2.

Post the goods receipt and make a note of the number of the returns delivery document.

Hint: The goods receipt is posted in the Create/Change Delivery transaction. Choose Post Goods Receipt.

a)

Choose Post Goods Receipt. The document number is assigned internally by the system.

3.

Check the stock overview for the headlight in plant I 000 to ensure that the one item in question is located in a separate stock for returns.

Hint: Inventory management is carried out in materials management. Use the transaction Logistics---+ Materials Afanagement---+ Inventory Management---+ Environment---+ Stock--+ Stock Overview. Choose plant 1000. a)

Logistics

---+

Environment

Nlaterials Management ---+

---+

Jnvent01y Management

---+

Stock---+ Stock Overview

Choose plant 1000. I unit is located in the returns stock.


2009


311~

TSCM60


Task 7: The returns are checked and approved by the person responsible. 1.

Release the returns for billing by removing the billing block. Hint: Change the returns and remove the billing block on the Sales or Item overview tab page by selecting the last entry (empty row) from the F4 input help.

a)

Logistics-> Sales and Distribution ->Sales-> Order-> Change Choose the Sales or Item overview tab page and select the last entry (blank) from the F4 input help for the Billing block field.

b)

Choose Save

Task 8: Once the returns have been released, they can be billed and the credit memo for returns can be created.

I.

Create the credit memo for returns for the returned goods. Hint: To create credit memos, use the same transaction as for creating billing documents.

a)

2.

Logistics-> Sales and Distribution ->Billing-> Billing Document -l- Create

Save the credit memo for returns and record the document number.

a)


Task 9: Questions about returns and credit memo processing

1.

Can you create a delivery document for a credit memo request?

a)

No. In credit memo processing, no deliveries or goods movements occur.

2.

Do you have to create a credit memo request or a returns document with reference to a sales order or billing document? Continued on next page

~312


2009

TSCM60


a) 3.

Why would you create a credit memo request or returns document with reference to a sales order?

a)

4.

No. An invoice correction request is always created with reference to a billing document.

Why do you have to enter an order reason for returns or credit/debit memo requests?

a) 7.

An invoice correction request is used for correcting quantities or other values in billing documents.

Can an invoice correction request also be created with reference to a sales order?

a)

6.

When you create a credit memo request or returns document with reference to a sales order, the system receives all the required data (customer data, material data, quantity, and price) from the original document.

Which document would you create if the billing document contains a different quantity or price?

a) 5.

No. A credit memo request or returns document can also be created without reference to another document.

The order reason is entered so that that causes of complaints can later be evaluated.

Before a credit memo can be created as a result of billing, an approval step may be necessary for the credit memo request. What field is used here?

a)

The Billing Block field. The credit memo request is subject to a billing block, which prevents immediate or automatic billing. Once the credit memo request has been approved, the billing block can be removed and the document billed. This step can be avoided, however, by making the appropriate Customizing setting for the "credit memo request" document type so that the system deactivates the billing block option. Continued on next page

2009


313 [;3!7


8.

After you have created a billing document, you notice that the terms of payment are incorrect. What steps do you need to take to correct this error?

a)

~314

TSCM60

You cancel the billing document, correct the terms of payment in the sales order, and carry out billing again.


2009

TSCM60

lesson: Invoice Correction Requests

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Use an invoice correction request and explain the process in detail Cancel a billing document

-20_0_9______________________©_c_2_0_09--SA __ P_A_G_.-A-II-ri-gh-ts__re_s_eN--ed-.--------------~3~1~5~


TSCMSO

Lesson: Advanced Returns Management Lesson Overview This lesson provides an overview of Advanced Returns Management, which is

available as of SAP ERP 6.0 Enhancement Package 4.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Execute a complaints process using Advanced Returns Management Explain and use the returns overview function

Business Example The following typical customer returns scenarios require Advanced Returns Management: The customer contacts his local branch or distribution center and informs the internal sales representative that he wants to return some goods that are still at the customer site. The sales representative creates a returns order to initiate the return of materials to a company location. The customer contacts his local branch or distribution center and informs the sales representative that he wants to return some goods that are still at the customer site. The sales representative decides that the materials must be returned directly to the vendor and creates a returns order to initiate the return of materials to the vendor. The customer calls an internal sales representative and infonns him that she wants to return some goods. However, the sales representative decides to perform the inspection at the customer site before initiating a physical return. The customer either returns the goods to the counter directly, or ships a quantity of goods to a warehouse or distribution center without advance notice.

Overview Advanced Returns Management (transaction type RE2) provides advanced functions compared to the classic returns (transaction type RE) that provide end-to-end support for the returns process. Customer returns involve the return of goods from a customer to a company location. With Advanced Returns Management, all returns methods can be handled and automated, including for example, returns made at the counter, returns that involve a shipment to the warehouse- including subsequent reverse logistics- and direct shipments from customer to vendor.

~316


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Advanced Returns Management

Advanced Returns Management also provides for the automatic creation and tracking of all the documents necessary for logistical and financial processing. These include returns deliveries, goods movements, returns purchase orders, returns stock transport orders, ·and credit memos.

Hint: Customer returns that involve a shipment to other company locations or to external vendors also require supplier returns processing. The following figure illustrates the customer returns process in Advanced Returns Management via the associated document flow:

8

.

.'

.Sales

Figure 114: Document flow Advanced Returns Management Caution: Activate the business function OPS_ADVRETURNS_I that is delivered with SAP ERP 6.0 Enhancement Package 4 in Customizing to be able to use the functions of Advanced Returns Management basically. Once activation is complete, you can avail of the corresponding menu paths and Customizing options that are provided.

Creating the Customer Returns Order The customer returns order triggers the customer returns process. It contains information that is the basis for the subsequent logistical and financial processing ofthe return. This includes the automatic creation of follow-up documents.

2009


317~


TSCMSO

A returns order can be created with reference to a previous sales order or the related billing document. The returns information for a customer returns order is retained at item level of the operation.

Recording Material Inspection Results You can record the results of a material inspection that was carried out on returned materials. Sales representatives and warehouse employees can enter inspection results directly in the returns order for materials that have been handed over physically at the counter or that have been shipped to the warehouse without prior announcement. Warehouse employees can use the transaction Material Inspection in Warehouse to enter inspection results for returns deliveries related to a returns order. You can generate a worklist of returns deliveries that require inspection. You can enter inspection information at header or item level, depending on whether the results vary for the items. You can split the delivery item if the subquantities of the retums material have different statuses. Inspection results can be used as the basis for detennining the appropriate logistical follow-up activity and the appropriate customer refund. You can find the transaction for recording material inspection results via Logistics Central Functions-+ Advanced Returns Management-+ Material Inspection.

-+

Decision on Logistical Follow-Up Activities You use logistical follow-up activities to specifY the next step in the logistical processing of a returned material. Examples of logistical follow-up activities include Transfer to Free Available Stock, Ship to Vendor and 7J-ansfer to Scrap. · ·

Sales representatives or warehouse employees can enter the information required for the selected logistical follow-up activity directly in the returns order for materials that have been handed over physically at the counter or that have been shipped to the warehouse without prior announcement. The system automatically creates the corresponding follow-up document. The settings for logistical follow-up and refund control are used as the basis here.

Customer Refund Determination You use customer refund determination to determine how much to refund the customer and then to create the corresponding credit memo request. In the returns order, sales representatives specifY when and how the customer is to be refunded. They can also specify the refund amount simply by selecting a refund code. If the refund cannot be fully processed in the returns order, sales representatives and returns managers can use the transaction Customer Refund Determination to define the refund amount. This transaction provides comprehensive information from previous process steps to help the user determine the refund amount. You can generate a worklist of returns orders that require refund determination.

~318


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Advanced Returns Management

You can find the transaction for this via Logistics -----7 Central Fzmctions -)Advanced Returns Management-> Returns Refimd Determination.

Process Monitoring In the returns overview, you can analyze all the steps in the returns process, all the follow-up documents created as part of the process, as well as information about the status of logistical processing and refunding. The returns overview is divided into the following areas: The selection area allows you to generate a list of all customer returns processes for monitoring The header Iist shows the customer returns orders that meet your selection criteria

The item list shows all the items of a selected returns order The detail tree shows all the steps in the selected returns process with links to the corresponding documents

Log/$Uca/ Follow-Up Action

60000198

10

l1

[§ Returns order l:t Inspection Ell Logistical follow-up action 'iS Returns delivery

Refund

Completed

Complete

[!I

fm II II

~ Goods receipt

lEI

¢1 Credit memo

Iii

Figure 115: Screen Layout of Returns Overview

You can find the transaction for process monitoring via Logistics --> Central Functions~ Advanced Returns Management--)' Returns Overview.

-20_0_9_______________________ ©_2_0_09__ S_A_P_A_G___A_Il_ri-gh-ts--re_s_eN--ed-.--------------~3~1n9~


TSCM60

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Execute a complaints process using Advanced Returns Management Explain and use the returns overview function

~320


2009

TSCM60

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: Process a complaint with reference to a previous sales and distribution process Carry out and explain in detail credit memo processing Carry out and explain in detail returns processing Use an invoice correction request and explain the process in detail Cancel a billing document Execute a complaints process using Advanced Returns Management Explain and use the returns overview function

2009


321~

TSCM60

Unit Summary

~322


2009

nit Analyses for Sales and Distribution Processes Unit Overview This unit looks at the different options available for analyzing Sales and Distribution data.

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: Use list processing to locate and evaluate information Analyze SO information using the tools available in the Sales Information System (SIS) Define the components of information structures

Unit Contents Lesson: Lists and Reports ..................................................... 324 Exercise 13: Lists and Reports ........................................... 331 Lesson: Sales Information System ........................................... 341 Exercise 14: Sales Information System ................................. 349

2009


323~

Unit 8: Analyses for Sales and Distribution Processes

TSCM60

Lesson: Lists and Reports Lesson Overview This lesson explains list evaluation options.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Use list processing to locate and evaluate information

Business Example IDES, Inc. reviews all areas of its business to identify opportunities to reduce costs and improve efficiency. In order to ensure efficient sales order processing, open operations must be

identified quickly and detailed information from documents has to be listed specifically.

Lists and Reports

Figure 116: Sources of Sales and Distribution Information

The Sales Information System (SIS) belongs to Sales and Distribution. With SIS, you can compress data from sales documents to obtain information which will help you make strategic business decisions. SIS contains standard analyses as well as flexible analyses to help you evaluate statistical data. SAP provides list functions to create worklists in sales, delivery, picking, and billing.

~324


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Lists and Reports

The Logistics Information Library allows you to integrate standard and flexible analyses as well as your own reports. You can structure and enhance the information library as you require. In case the standard reports do not fulfill your requirements, you can use SAP queries to extract information from the database into a report.

• Online lists

Backorders

a provide data for documents Open quotations

• display documents, for example, - for a customer or a material

- with a specific status

• allow you to check and change documents

"' ""'"' El

""

• Worklists • display activities that need to be processed

• allow you to organize tasks into efficient work units

Figure 117: Lists and Reports The system provides lists to support the entire sales order management cycle. Lists fall into two categories. Online lists: Online lists display, for example, sales, delivery, or billing documents for a customer, a material, or a combination of both. Other online lists display documents with a status that requires processing. Worklists: (for instance, all documents that are blocked for delivery) Worklists allow you to select certain tasks in sales and distribution and to process them afterwards. You select the tasks according to your area of responsibility and to various selection criteria (such as date, organizational element, or customer).

2009


325~


TSCM60

Figure 118: Example: List of Sales Orders

Enter the information you want to use to restrict the options, on the selection screen. The system then displays a list ofthe relevant documents. You can edit the list further by: Using filter, sort, and sum up functions Adding or deleting additional tields (columns) From the list, you can also: Display or change a sales order and return to the list Display status information (overall status, delivery status, and so on) for each document

~326


2009

TSCM60


Figure 119: Example: Documents with a Specific Status

You can display document lists using the date and some additional selection criteria. For example, you can: •.

Display lists of the inquiries or quotations which are to be processed by a specified point in time Display lists of all sales orders that still have to be delivered Display lists of the incomplete sales and distribution documents in which important information for the subsequent process steps is missing

2009

©


327~


TSCM60

Billing due list

Figure 120: Processing Worklists

The system provides tools that you can use to process different worklists. In the first step, you use specific criteria (for instance, date, responsible organizational unit, and so on) to select from all documents that need to be processed. By doing this, you can organize the organize the work to meet your business requirements. In the second step, the system processes this worklist. Tasks from various reference documents can be grouped together appropriately and multiple tasks from a previous document can be split into several documents. The Delivery Due List and Billing Due List are just two examples ofworklists.

~328


2009

TSCM60


e

.

.

. Outbound delivery 80002832 •. WMS transfer order 482 .. GO goods delivery 4900001537 .. Invoice 90005371 100001276

Figure 121: Document Flow

Document flow is another online list function. It displays the history of successive documents. Document !low tracks the progress of a sales order in order to respond to customer inquiries. It shows all documents associated with the sales order. You can sdect a document to display it and then return to the document flow.

You can also display the status of the entire document and of each line item.

2009


329W


~330


TSCM60

2009

TSCM60


Exercise 13: Lists and Reports Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. you will be able to: Use SD analysis tools and adjust them to your requirements Use lists to organize information on current business processes

Business Example IDES, Inc. must ensure that all phases of sales order management are efficient and effective. To do this, they require instant access to lists and online reporting for customer service, shipping, and invoice processing activities. They also use lists to find important infonnation if, for example, they do not know the actual document number. Each department has specific lists they use; examples include preparing lists of sales orders ready for delivery creation, lists of deliveries ready for picking and shipping, lists of shipped outbound deliveries ready for billing, and lists of blocked documents requiring special attention. IDES, Inc. must also answer customer questions regarding quotations, sales orders, outbound deliveries and billing documents.

Task 1: The sales and distribution departments require reporting and analysis for the current SD processes on a monthly basis at document level. I.

Check whether there are any open orders for the material T -AS3## for the current and the past month. Use a suitable list to do this. Hint: Use the menu path: Logistics

----t

Sales and Distribution __,.Sales---+ Information System

_, Orders _, List qf Sales Orders Choose Open sales orders. 2.

Display a list of all the orders that have been created for material T-ASl## in the course of this month.

3.

Branch to an order and enter the employee Melanie Mayer (personnel number 170 I) as a sales representative. Return to the list.

{J

Hint: You can branch to an order by double-clicking on the entry.


2009


331~

TSCM60


4.

Choose the display variant Order item.

£:J

Hint: Choose Sellings ->Layouts -> Choose.

Task 2: Process the list you executed in the last step according to your management's requirements.

I.

So1t the list in ascending order based on sold-to party numbers. Hint: Select the Sold-to party column and choose Sort in ascending order.

2.

Restrict the list to standard orders. Hint: Select the Sales Documem 7}pe column and choose Set filter. Restrict the list to sales document to OR.

3.

Detennine the net value that has been obtained for this material in the given period of time.

£:J 4.

Hint: Select the Net value column and choose .-Jdd up values.

Move the document number column to the left end of the list and delete the purchasing order column from the list. Hint: Choose Current (or-> Sellings-> Layouts-> Current). Select the SD document entry and choose Selected row(s) up one position. Alternatively, you can move the items by using drag and drop.

5.

Include the information on order quantity, plant and shipping point at the end of the list. Hint: Choose Current. Select the last line. Select the relevant entries in the right table, choose Show selected fields then Copy.

6.

Display subtotals for each sold-to party.

£:J

Hint: Mark the Sold-to party column and choose Subtotal.


~332


2009

TSCM60


7.

Optimize the column width.

[:J 8.

Hint: Choose-> Sel/ings-> Columns-> Optimize width.

Save your processed list as a user-specific display variant with the name: Layout SCM600-## and the description Order list##.

£:J 9.

Hint: Choose-> Sellings-> Layout-> Save.

Set your layout as the initial variant. Hint: Choose-> Sellings-> Layouts-> Administration. Select your variant and choose Set initial variant and then Save.

I 0.

Return to the list of orders. Send the list to another course participant, and a copy to yourself also, and add a short note to it. Hint: Choose Send. As the sender, enter the desired course participant's User-id (SCM600-##) and your User-ID in the Recipient fields. Select Recip. type B S4P Logon Nmne for each User-id. Select the Expr.mail option.

II.

Call up the list using your variant and material T-AS2##.


2009


333~


TSCM60

Task 3: Questions on lists and rep011s

~334

I.

List examples of types of standard reports.

2.

When you process and display lists, what are some of the key features available when editing?

3.

Name two types ofworklists you generated in this course.

4.

What is a display variant?


2009

TSCM60


Solution 13: Lists and Reports Task 1: The sales and distribution departments require reporting and analysis for the current SD processes on a monthly basis at document level. I.

Check whether there are any open orders for the material T-AS3## for the current and the past month. Use a suitable list to do this. Hint: Use the menu path: Logistics---> Sales and Distribution---> Sales---> !riformation System --->Orders---> List of Sales Orders

Choose Open sales orders. a)

Logistics --->Sales and Distribution---> Sales---> Information System Orders---> List q(Sales Orders

--->

Choose Open sales orders. 2.

Display a list of all the orders that have been created for material T-ASI## in the course of this month. a)

3.

Enter material number T-ASI##.

Branch to an order and enter the employtt ~v!elanie \'layer (personnel number 170 I) as a sales representative. Return to the list.

CJ a)

Hint: You can branch to an order by double-clicking on the entry. Double-click the order. Choose Display doc. hellller details. Choose the Partners tab page. Partner function: Sales employee Personnel number: 1701

4.

Choose the display variant Order item.

CJ a)

Hint: Choose Settings --->Layouts --->Choose. Settings --->Layouts

--->

Choose


-20_0_9______________________©_c_2_0_09--SA __ P_A_G_._A_II-ri-gh-ts--re_s_e~--ed-.--------------~3~3~5~


TSCM60

Task 2: Process the list you executed in the last step according to your management's requirements. 1.

Sort the list in ascending order based on sold-to party numbers.

Hint: Select the Sold-to party column and choose Sort in ascending order.

a)

Select the Sold-to party column.

Choose Sort in ascending order. 2.

Restrict the list to standard orders. Hint: Select the Sales Document Type column and choose Set.filter. Restrict the list to sales document to OR. a)

Select the Sales Document Tj•pe column. Choose Set filter. Enter the sales document type OR.

3.

Determine the net value that has been obtained for this material in the given period of time.

{J a)

Hint: Select the Net value column and choose Add up values.

Select the Net value column. Choose Add up values.


~336


2009

TSCM60


4.

Move the document number column to the left end of the list and delete the purchasing order column from the list.

Hint: Choose Current (or-+ Settings-+ Layouts-+ Current). Select the SO document entry and choose Selected row(s) up one position. Alternatively, you can move the items by using drag and drop. a)

Choose Current. Select the Sales Document Type entry. Choose Selected row(s) up one position several times.

5.

b)

Select the Column Name: Purchase order no.

c)

Choose Hide Selected.

d)

Choose TI·ansfer.

Include the information on order quantity, plant and shipping point at the end of the list. Hint: Choose Curre111. Select the last line. Select the relevant entries in the right table, choose Show selected fields then Copy. a)

Choose Current. Select the last line. Select the relevant entries in the table on the right-hand side. Select Show selected fields and then chooseTranser.

6.

Display subtotals for each sold-to party.

{) a)

Hint: Mark the Sold-to party column and choose Subtotal. Select the Sold-to party column. Choose Subtotal.

7.

Optimize the column width.

{J a)

8.

Hint: Choose~ Seltings ~ Columns ~ Optimize width. -4

SetJings __,. Colunms ~Optimize width.

Save your processed list as a user-specific display variant with the name: Continued on next page

2009


337~

TSCM60


Layout SCM600-## and the description Order list##.

{.J a)

Hint: Choose -+ Sellings -+ Layout-+ Save. Choose-+ Settings -+Layouts. Select the User-specific field. ~

9.

Continue.

Set your layout as the il)itial variant. Hint: Choose-+ Sellings-+ Layouts-+ Administration. Select your variant and choose Set initial variant and then Save. a)

Choose Sellings-+ Layouts-+ Adminis!ration. Select your layout. Choose Define Default setting. Choose Save

I 0.

Return to the list of orders. Send the list to another course participant, and a copy to yourself also, and add a short note to it. Hint: Choose Send. As the sender. enter the desired course participant's User-id (SCM600-##) and your User-ID in the Recipient fields. Select Recip. type B SAP Logon Name for each User-id. Select the Expr.mail option. a)

11.

Choose Send.

Call up the list using your variant and material T-AS2##. a)

Logistics~

Sales and Distribution~ Orders-+ List of Sales Orders.

Sales~

Information System

~

The list is called with your display variant.

Task 3: Questions on lists and reports I.

List examples of types of standard reports. Answer: List of orders, quotations, inquiries, outbound deliveries, billing documents, list of incomplete documents, list of blocked documents, and so on. Continued on next page

~338


2009

TSCM60


2.

When you process and display lists, what are some of the key features available when editing? Answer: You can filter (restrict), sort, total and subtotal data. You can also add and delete fields on a list.

3.

Name two types ofworklists you generated in this course. Answer: Delivery Due List and Billing Due List

4.

What is a display variant? Answer: A variant is a variation of a report that is either delivered with the R/3 System or that you created and saved. Each variant contains different fields that are populated with data every time you call up the report.

2009


339 f:!!7


TSCM60

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Use list processing to locate and evaluate information

~340


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Sales Information System

Lesson: Sales Information System Lesson Overview This lesson explains how to carry out strategic analyses using the Sales Information System.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Analyze SD information using the tools available in the Sales Information System (SIS) Define the components of information structures

Business Example The sales order management team must respond to IDES. Inc. management requests for reports on key performance figures and transactions.

Sales Information System

Figure 122: Information Sources in the System The system allows you to analyze data from different corporate perspectives.

2009


341~

TSCM60


Decision makers can carry out multi-level analyses on data specific to one application or a variety of applications. The Logistics Information System (LIS) is used to review and analyze key figures throughout the entire Logistics area in the system.

Figure 123: Logistics Information System

In the area of LIS, a series of application-specific infonnation systems are available which have a standardized interface and similar basic functionality. The following information systems are available in Logistics: SIS Sales Information System PURCHIS Purchasing Information System INVCO Inventory Controlling TIS Transportation Information System SFIS Shop Floor Information System QMIS Quality Management Information System PM IS Plant Maintenance

~342

Informa~ion

System


2009

TSCM60


Online Analytical Processing

OLAP

Figure 124: Data Warehouse Concepts

When you use the transactions in the Logistics applications, LIS-relevant data is updated. You can also update data from other systems in LIS. LIS aggregates and stores this data in the data warehouse. The data can be aggregated with regard to quality or quantity: Quantitative reduction by aggregation at period level Qualitative reduction by the selection of key figures To analyze the aggregate data, you can use the SIS tools. Aggregation improves response times and the quality of the resulting reports.

2009

©


343~


TSCM60

Figure 125: Composition of Information Structures The Sales lnfom1ation System is based on infonnation structures. These are special statistical tables that contain data from processes carried out by the different applications. This data is constantly collected and updated by the system. Information structures comprise three basic types of information: Characteristics are criteria that you specify to collect data on a certain

~

In SD. you generally require sales information about sales organizations. sales offices, customers, and materials. ~is

also a criterion used in infonnation structures. You can update data for a particular period (a day, week, month, or a posting period, for example). ~g~ are metrics for services rendered. They provide key corporate information regarding a particular characteristic. In SD, for example, incoming orders, sales, and returns are of key importance.

~344


2009

TSCM60

e


.'

'

Time unit L'"!A!':.,

Characteristics

Key figures

Figure 126: Information Structures in SD The standard system contains a variety of information structures for SO (SOO I to S006, for example). You can use the standard analyses to evaluate data without having to make additional settings in Customizing. The standard system also contains information structures for internal use. These include information structures for credit management, rebate processing, sales support, or contract processing.

You can also create your own information structures in Customizing in the name range S50 l to S999.

2009


345~


e .

TSCM60

.

Breakdown according to customer

Figure 127: Standard Analyses

Standard analyses offer a wide range of functions for creating complex database presentations and analyses in the LIS. The analysis is based on the information structures. First, select the required data scope dt!pending on the characteristics and period of the information structure. This data is first displayed in a basic list, which can be drilled down to display different characteristics. All analyses can be archived. You can also call up standard transactions from the current evaluation to display, for example, master data or document information. A variety of tools are available that allow you to analyze the selected data further and present your results. These include, for example, cumulative curves, ABC analyses, time series, correlations, top-n evaluations, and other comparison options. You can then display this data graphically. The evaluation results can also be: Printed Downloaded as a file to your local PC Downloaded to a spreadsheet program Sent to one or more employees via your system's office component

~346


2009


TSCM60

Figure 128: Flexible Analyses

Flexible analyses in LIS allow you to determine which data in which format is combined to create an individual report. To do so, use the menu to define the format and content of your required list. At the touch of a button, the program is generated in the background. The resulting list offers a variety of options for interactive online processing. This procedure offers additional functions: You can combine characteristics and key figures from different information structures in one list. You can generate new key figures that can be calculated according to separate formulas on the basis of the existing key figures. You can choose between different layout variants.

2009


347~


~348


TSCM60

2009

TSCM60


Exercise 14: Sales Information System Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. you will be able to: Carry out cross-document analysis of sales and distribution processes Carry out periodic evaluations using the tools of the Sales Information System Use the tools for standard analyses

Business Example The management of IDES, Inc. requests analysis reports to analyze buying patterns, and to review the amount of business with each customer. On this basis, the production requirements can be planned. The project team has requested the ability to respond accurately and quickly to these requirements. IDES, Inc. reviews the overall performance of the SD department by analyzing the sales patterns within each sales organization. IDES, Inc. is primarily interested in viewing the total value of incoming orders and the sales orders by customer. For planning and budgeting, IDES, Inc. analyzes the value of sales by divisions and the value of sales by customer and material. As a member of the SD project team, you will verify that the system can meet the requirements of the IDES. Inc. management. You will run standard analyses using the Sales Information System and test the various reporting functions.

Task 1: Selection for a standard analysis I.

Review the customer sales history for this month by performing a standard customer analysis for all customers in sales organization 1000 and distribution channel 12. Make sure that the entry field Division is blank. Hint: Save your analysis as selection version KA-##. Use the menu path: Logistics -> Sales and Distribution -> Sales Information System ->"Standard analyses -> Customer

You can store your selected data in a selection version for further analysis.


2009


349~

TSCM60


Task 2: Carry out your customer analysis. I.

Change the settings in order to display the customer number and the customer name.

Hint: Choose--> Settings --> Characreristic display--> Key and description. 2.

Note down the value of the incoming orders for customer T-S50A##. Do not leave the analysis. Incoming orders T-SSOA##: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Task 3: Characteristics and standard drilldown

I.

Drill down the analysis to the bottom level. Note down the criteria by which analysis is carried out.

I. 2. 3.

4. 5.

6.

Hint: In order to reach the next level of the drilldown, place the cursor on a characteristic in the left-hand column and choose Detail. 2.

Compare the sequence recorded above with the standard drilldown for this analysis.

[J

Hint: Choose Extras -->Display standard drilldown.


~350


2009

TSCM60


Task 4: Key figures Return to the Initial List screen. I.

Display a list of all possible key figures for your customer T-SSOA##. Note down two key figures with values that are not included in your display (for example, costs for incoming orders and sales volume).

Hint: Place the cursor on a value for a customer key figure for which you need the relevant information. Choose-> Extras-> All Key Figures. (or double-click the key figure) 2.

Add the key figures Incoming orders quantity and Billing quantity to your standard analysis. They are important for your analyses. Note down the number of billed units for your customer. Invoiced quantity: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Hint: Select Choose key figures. To add new key figures, you use the same process that you used to add fields to list displays in the previous topic.

Task 5: Evaluations on standard analysis I.

Compare the two key figures Sales and Invoiced Sales: Cost. Note down the totals for these two values and the percentage difference from both key figures. Sales:-----------------Invoiced sales: c o s t - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - %: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Hint: Select the Sales field. Choose-> Edit_, Comparisons_, 1\vo key figures_, Sales


2009


351~


2.

TSCM60

Close the comparison. Change the display to show the data by material. Hint: Choose Switch drilldown .. -->Material

3.

Create a Top 3 list of your materials by Sales; display the results as percentages and using a graphic. Hint: Choose Top N--> 3. Choose ---+

~352

-->

Settings

-->

Value display

Percent.


2009

TSCM60


Solution 14: Sales Information System Task 1: Selection for a standard analysis I.

Review the customer sales history for this month by performing a standard customer analysis for all customers in sales organization 1000 and distribution channel 12. Make sure that the entry field Division is blank.

Hint: Save your analysis as selection version KA-##. Use the menu path: Logistics --> Sales and Distribution--> Sales Information System --> Standard analyses --> Customer You can store your selected data in a selection version for further analysis. a)

Logistics--> Sales and Distribution--> Sales lliformation System --> Standard analyses --> Customer Enter sales organization 1000 and distribution channel I 2. Execute the analysis and save.

Task 2: Carry out your customer analysis. 1.

Change the settings in order to display the customer number and the customer name.

Hint: Choose--> Settings --> Characteristic display--> Key and description. a) 2.

Settings--> Characteristic display--> Key and description

Note down the value of the incoming orders for customer T-SSOA##. Do not leave the analysis. Incoming orders T-SSOA##: - - - - - - - - - - - - - a)

The values are in the Total line and the Incoming orders column

Coniinued on next page

2009


353~

TSCM60


Task 3: Characteristics and standard drilldown 1.

Drill down the analysis to the bottom level. Note down the criteria by which analysis is carried out. I. Sold-To Party

2. Month 3. Sales organization 4. Distribution channel 5. Division 6. Material

Hint: In order to reach the next level of the drill down, place the cursor on a characteristic in the left-hand column and choose Detail.

a) 2.

Compare the sequence recorded above with the standard drilldown for this analysis.

p a)

Hint: Choose Extras ->Display standard drilldown.

Extras ->Display standard dril/down The drilldown corresponds to the standard drilldown.

Task 4: Key figures Return to the Initial List screen. I.

Display a list of all possible key figures for your customer T-SSOA##. Note down two key figures with values that are not included in your display (for example, costs for incoming orders and sales volume).


~354


2009


TSCMSO

Hint: Place the cursor on a value for a customer key figure for which you need the relevant information. Choose-> Extras-> All Key Figures.

(or double-click the key figure) a)

Place the cursor on the value for a key figure of the customer. ->Extras-> All Key Figures (or double-click the key figure)

2.

Add the key figures Incoming orders quantity and Billing quantity to your standard analysis. They are important for your analyses. Note dow,n the number of billed units for your customer. Invoiced quantity: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Hint: Select Choose key figures.

To add new key figures, you use the same process that you used to add fields to list displays in the previous topic. a)

Select Choose key figures (key figures are added in a similar manner as with lists).

Task 5: Evaluations on standard analysis I.

Compare the two key figures Sales and Invoiced Sales: Cost. Note down the totals for these two values and the percentage difference from both key figures. Sales:------------------Invoiced sales: c o s t - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - o/o: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Hint: Select the Sales field.

Choose ~ Edit ----+ Comparisons

a)

----+

Two key figures

----+

Sales

Select the Sales field. Edit-> Comparisons-> 1\vo key figures-> Sales Continued on ·next page

-20_0_9______________________©_o_2_0_09--SA_P__A_G_.-A-II-rig-h-ts--re_s_eN_e_d-.--------------~3~5~5~~


2.

TSCM60

Close the comparison. Change the display to show the data by material.

Hint: Choose Switch drilldown .. ->Material

a) 3.

Choose Switch dril/down-> Material

Create a Top 3 list of your materials by Sales; display the results as percentages and using a graphic.

Hint: Choose Top N-> 3. Choose -+Settings Percent.

--->

Value display

---t

a)

Choose Top N-> 3 ---> Seuings---> Value display-> Percent. Choose graphic.

E!!"

356


2009

TSCM60

e .

'


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Analyze SO information using the tools available in the Sales Information System (SIS) Define the components of information structures

-2-00_9_______________________ ©_2_0_0_9_S_A_P_A_G_._A_II-ri-gh_t_s-re_s_e_N_ed-.--------------~3~5~7~

TSCM60

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: Use list processing to locate and evaluate information Analyze SO information using the tools available in the Sales Information System (SIS) Define the components of infonnation structures

~358


2009

nit Company Structures- Customizing Unit Overview This unit illustrates the importance of the organizational structure for the Sales and Distribution process. You repeat and consolidate your knowledge from the unit "Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution". In addition, you become familiar with Customizing for organizational units and organizational structures.

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: Use organizational units in the SAP system to map the different areas in your company Set up enterprise structures by assigning them to organizational units Adjust the organizational structures to meet the legal and business

requirements of your company

Unit Contents Lesson: Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution ................... 360 Exercise 15: Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution ......... 371

2009


359~

Unit 9: Company Structures- Customizing

TSCM60

Lesson: Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution Lesson Overview This lesson describes the importance of the organizational structure for sales and distribution processes. The most important organizational units for sales and distribution are set up on the system. The linking of organizational units to the organizational structure is also described.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Use organizational units in the SAP system to map the different areas in your company Set up enterprise structures by assigning them to organizational units Adjust the organizational structures to meet the legal and business requirements of your company

Business Example IDES Inc. has been using the SAP system successfully for some years now. Company management has now decided to expand the company's sales activities. In the future, customers should also be able to place orders at trade fairs. It must be possible to control and evaluate the new sales activities separately from all existing activities. Your responsibility is to expand the enterprise structure in sales accordingly.

~360


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution

Valuation areas

Plants

Inventory management

Figure 129: Enterprise Structures in the SAP system r ...,/y~·-·,."

~~e~~e~

pf organizational structures in the SAP system:

Achieve ne,ibility in representing complex corporate
Adapt to changes in the corporate structure Distinguish between views in logistics (sales and distribution, purchasing, etc.), cost accounting and financial accounting

Process data across company codes

2009


361~

TSCM60

Unit 9: Company Structures - Customizing

Client

Company code 2000

Business area 4000

Figure 130: Integration of sales in Financial Accounting

All organizational units within a client are subject to one business control. A client can thus be considered to be a synonym for the group. A client is a self-contained technical unit. General data and tables that are used for several organizational structures are stored at this level. You can use the company code and business area to represent a group from a financial accounting perspective.

You can create several company codes for each -client so as to be able to carry out financial accounting for several independent companies simultaneously. At least one company code must be created, however. Each company code represents an independent accounting unit. Several company codes can use the same chart of accounts. A business area is a separate business unit for which cross-company code internal reporting can be carried out. Business areas are not limited by company codes. For this reason, the business areas in all company codes must have the same description. Using this organizational unit is optional. You use business areas if you want to calculate profit and loss statements independently of the company code. In the case of postings made from sales and distribution. the business area can be derived automatically.

~362


2009

TSCM60


Figure 131: Organizational Structures in Sales

A variety of organizational units are available for modeling sales business transactions. In the sales area, the following organizational units can be defined and used for mapping and building up the sales structures: Sales organization Distribution channel

Division Sales area Sales office Sales group Other organizational units in sales, such as the shipping point and the transportation planning point, are covered in other SAP courses.

2009


363~

TSCM60


Client

SIOrg 1000

Company code 1000

Company code 2000

Figure 132: Sales organization

A sales organization represents the organizational structures in sales and distribution. Each sales organization represents a selling unit as a legal entity. It is, for example, responsible for product liability and other customer rights of recourse. You can use sales organizations to subdivide markets into regions. Each business transaction is processed within a sales organization. A sales organization is assigned to exactly one company code. A sales organization is assigned to one or more plants.

Each sales organization has its own master data. for example. its own customer and material master data as well as condition records.

~364


2009


TSCM60

12 Resale Figure 133: Distribution channel

You can use different distribution channels in sales and distribution to provide the market with the best possible service. Distribution channels provide a general structure for distributing goods. Wholesale trade, sales to industrial customers or direct sales from a plant are typical examples of distribution channels. Distribution channels can be set up according to your company's market strategy or internal organization. Customers can be served through one or more distribution channels within a sales organization. In addition, you can

Vat)'

the master data relevant to sales -such as customer

master data. sales master data. prices. and surcharges/discounts - for each sales organization and distribution channel.

2009


365~

TSCM60


Figure 134: Division A broad product range can be divided into divisions. In the SAP system, you can also define a division-specific sales structure. You can make customer-specific agreements for each division, for example regarding partial deliveries or pricing. Within a division, you can carry out statistical analyses or devise your own marketing strategies.

r Sales org.

Sales org. London

Frankfurt Division Distribution channel End customer

Motor cycles Division

High Tech

Division

I

I

Motor cycles

.---·-·--·-·1-----·..J.-·+·· Distribution channel

Resale

Division Motor cycles Division

High Tech

Figure 135: Sales Area A sales area is a combination of sales organization, distribution channel and division.

I!T'

366


2009

TSCM60


Sales documents, delivery documents, and billing documents are always assigned to a sales area. Every sales process always takes in a specific sales area. The relevant master data can usually be maintained explicitly for each sales area, for example: Sales-relevant customer master data

Sales-relevant material master data (the division is a general field of the material master; as a result, a material can only be assigned to one division.) Conditions (prices, discounts/surcharges) You can carry out analyses within a sales area such as evaluation of sales volume, for example. You should try to keep the organizational structure of a sales area as simple as possible. Sales area

Figure 136: Sales Office and Sales Group Sales office Sales offices define geographical aspects of the organizational structures in business development and sales. A sales office can be viewed as an actual office or perhaps a territory or region. Sales offices can be assigned to multiple sales areas. If you enter a sales order for a sales office within a particular sales area, ihe sales office must be permitted for that sales area. Sales group Employees of a sales office can be assigned to sales groups defined for each division or distribution channel. Sales groups are assigned to sales offices. Salesperson

2009


367~

TSCM60


A sales group consists of a certain number of salespersons. A salesperson is assigned to a sales office and group in the sales employee master record. Thereafter, you can select this personnel master record in the partner screen of a sales document. You can carry out sales analyses on the different internal organization levels.

Client

Company code

Company code

1000

3000

Figure 137: Plant

Materials management is primarily concerned with the flow of materials within a company. Production facilities and locations for storing stock must therefore be defined in the system. The terms used in the system for these entities are plant and storage location. Material stocks can be described in detail at the level of different storage locations within a plant. A plant can either be a location for production and material requirements planning (MRP) or it may simply represent one or more material stock locations in close proximity to one another. Each plant is assigned to a unique company code. For a plant to deliver goods to customers, it must be configured appropriately as a delivering plant in sales customizing. During the sales process, the delivering plants are first used to verify the stocks, and later to supply the goods the customer has ordered.

~368


2009

TSCM60


Company code 1000

Company code 2000

Figure 138: Delivering Plant The plants from which the Sales department delivers the materials ordered (delivering plants) must be assigned to a sales organization and a distribution channel (distribution chain) in Customizing. By making the plant dependent on the distribution channel. you can differentiate further between plants within a sales organization for sales. This would allow the distribution channel "direct sales" for certain plants in a sales organization but not for others. One plant can be assigned to several distribution chains as the delivering plant. lt can also be assigned to several sales organizations. It is also possible for the delivering plant of a distribution chain to belong to a different independent company in the corporate group (that is, the plant belongs to a different company code to the sales organization). This is known as Cross-Company Sales.

2009


369~

Unit 9: Company Structures -Customizing

~370


TSCMSO

2009

TSCM60


Exercise 15: Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: Describe the structure ofthe IDES company for sales and distribution Set up your own enterprise structures for sales and distribution in the SAP system

Business Example You have joined the project team that is implementing the SAP system in your company. As the employee responsible for sales, you need to familiarize yourself with the structure that has already been created and verify the settings. You will expand the existing enterprise structure for your sales organization to include the new e-sales distribution channel. Hint: The required settings are located in the Implementation Guide (IMG) under the IMG node for Enterprise Structure. You can find some of the organizational data in Sales and Distrihutinn and other data in the Financial Accounting and Logistics - General areas.

2009


371~

TSCMSO


Task 1: Data sheet

Enterprise Structures Organizational unit

Key

Sales organization

1000

Distribution channel

Description

Final customer sales Service

Division

Cross-division

Sales office

Sales group

Company code

1200

Plant

The project team has already modeled the organizational structure of your company in the R/3 system. Familiarize yourself with the organizational units that have been set up to model your company's organizational structure. I.

Complete the Enterprise Structures data sheet as appropriate.

2.

What is the description of your sales organization 1000? Which currency is used to update the statistics? What is the address? Description:

Statistics currency:


~372


2009

TSCM60


Name:

Address:

3.

Which distribution channels have been defined for Final customer sale and Service? Distribution Channel:

Distribution Channel:

4.

Which division has been created for cross-division sales? Division:

Task 2: Familiarize yourself with the enterprise structures that are relevant for sales that have been configured as organizational structures. I.

Complete the Enterprise Structures data sheet as appropriate.

2.

The organizational units determined above have been used to configure various sales areas for your sales organization 1000. Which sales areas have been defined? Sales organization

3.

The sales area

1000

The sales area

1000


Division

Determine the sales offices responsible for managing sales in sales area 1000 I 10 I 00. Sales Office:

Sales Office:

Sales Office: Continued on next page

2009


373~

TSCM60


4.

5.

Add some examples of the sales groups assigned to the sales offices listed above. Office:

Office:

Sales group:

Sales group:

Sales group:

Sales group:

Which company code does your sales organization belong to? Company code:

Which currency is defined for this company code? Currency:

6.

Enter the delivering plants that are assigned to sales organization 1OliO and distribution channe!JO in your data sheet. Delivering plant:


~374


2009

TSCM60


Task 3: Optional: To meet its goal of establishing sales possibilities that are new and up-to-date, your management board has approved a project for establishing eSales as a new sales channel at your company. Management wants to be able to track the sales and revenues from these transactions separately, and pricing procedures that are different from all other sales processes must be possible. Configure the new organizational units you need. I.

Define a new distribution channel fore-sales. Hint: Please use the Define distribution channel function, NOT

Copy, delete, check distribution channel. Background: The Define distribution channel function (only) creates a new distribution channel. The much more powerful function Cop;; delete, check distribwion channel allows you to copy all of the distribution channel-specific settings from the template. You can also perform this synchronization later. This function is extremely useful and efficient in projects. In this course, however, you are responsible for performing the corresponding Customizing steps yourself.

2.

= 70


Y

Description:

eSales ##

+ ##(e.g. group 19: Y

= 70 + 19 = 89)

An independent staff is being trained to process the orders received through e-Sales. Organizationally, these employees will be grouped together in a sales office. Set up the new sales office Ze## eOjjice ## for this group. Use sales office 1000 as a template.

Task 4: Optional: Enhance the existing sales organization structures by integrating new organizational units. I.

Assign the new distribution channel to your sales organization ZOOO.

2.

Build new sales areas with your sales organization, ZOOO, the new distribution channel, and divisions 00, OJ, and 07. Continued on next page

-20_0_9______________________©_c_2_0_09--SA __ P_A_G_._A_II-ri-gh_t_s-re_s_e~--ed-.--------------~3~7~5~


TSCM60

3.

Make sure that deliveries for orders from the new sales areas can take place at your distribution centers at the Hamburg, Dresden, and Stuttgart plants.

4.

Configure Customizing so that orders entered for your new sales area, ZOOO I Y I 00, can be assigned to your new sales oft1ce ZE## eDifice ##as the responsible internal organizational unit.

~ '3~7"6~---------------©-c-2-00_9_S_A_P_A_G--.A-I-Ir-ig_h_ts-r-es-e-~-e-d-.----------------------2-0--09

TSCM60


Solution 15: Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution Task 1: Data sheet

Enterprise Structures O•·ganizational unit

Key

Description

Sales organization

1000

German}!_ Frankfurt


10

Final customer sales

14

Service

Division

00

Cross-division

Sales office

1000

Office Franktitrt

1010

Office Hamburg

1030

O[jice Stullgart

1000 I 100

G~:

F1

M~:

Anton

1000/101

G~:

F2

M~:

MaEer

1010/110

G~:

H 1 M~: Thomas

1030 I 130

G~:

Sf Ms. Chmiel

Company code

1000

!DESAG

Plant

1200

Dresden

1000

Hamburg

1100

Berlin

1300

Franktitrt

Sales group

The project team has already modeled the organizational structure of your company in the R/3 system. Familiarize yourself with the organizational units that have been set up to model

your company's organizational structure. I.

Complete the Enterprise Structures data sheet as appropriate. a)

Go to the SAP Reference IMG and navigate to definition of organizational units. Complete the Enterprise Structures data sheet as appropriate. Continued on next page

2009


377~

TSCM60


--)>

Tools--)> Customizing--)> Ilv!G--)> RYecute Project

Choose SAP reference IMG. -->

2.

Enterprise Structure -->Definition.

What is the description of your sales organization 1000? Which currency is used to update the statistics? What is the address? Description:


Name:

Address:

a)

Find the definition of sales organization 1000. -->Sales and Distribution--> Define. copy. delete sales organization... Choose Dejlne Sales Organizarion.

Description:

Ger.many Frankfurt


Euro

Choose Address.

3.

Name:

IDES Germany - Frankfurt

Address:

Friedrich-Naumann-StraBe 16, 60486 Frankfurt/M

Which distribution channels have been defined for Final customer sale and Service? Distribution Channel:



f:'S"'"

3 78


2009

TSCM60


a)

Find the description of the distribution channels.

->Sales and Distribution-> Define, copy, delete, check distribution channel Choose Define distribution channel.

4.


10 Final customer sales


14 Service

Which division has been created for cross-division sales?

Division:

a)

Find the description of the division.

->Logistics General-> Define, copy, delete, check division. Choose Define division.

Division:

00 Cross-division

Task 2: Familiarize yourself with the enterprise structures that are relevant for sales that have been configured as organizational structures. I.

Complete the Enterprise Structures data sheet as appropriate. a)

Navigate to the assignment of the organizational units to enterprise structures. Complete the Enterprise Structures data sheet as appropriate. -t

2.

Ente1prise Structure

-t

Assignment

The organizational units detem1ined above have been used to configure various sales areas for your sales organization 1000. Which sales areas have been defined?


2009


379~

TSCM60


Sales organization The sales area

1000

The sales area

1000

a)

Division


Go to the assignment of sales areas. --+Sales and Distribution --+Set up sales area.

Sales organization


Division

1000

10

00

The sales area 1000

14

00

The sales area

3.

Determine the sales offices responsible for managing sales in sales area 1000 I 10 I 00. Sales Office:

Sales Office:

Sales Office:

a)

Go to the assignment of sales offices. --)-Sales and Distribution --)-Set up sales area.

4.

Sales Office:

1000 Office Frankfurt

Sales Office:

1010 Office Hamburg

Sales Office:

1030 Office Stuttgart

Add some examples of the sales groups assigned to the sales offices listed above.


~380


2009

TSCM60

lesson: Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution

Office:

Office:

Sales group:

Sales group:

Sales group:

Sales group:

a)

Go to the assignment of sales groups. -->

Sales and Distribution -->Assign sales group to sales office

Office: 1000

Office: 1010 Office: 1030

5.

Sales group:

100 Gr.

F1 Mr.

Anton

Sales group:

101 Gr.

F2 Mr.

Mayer

Sales group:

103 Gr.

F3 Mr.

Ludwig

Sales group:

110 Gr.

H1 Mr.

Thomas

Sales group:

111 Gr.

H2 Mr.

Thiel

Sales group:

130 Gr.

S1 Ms.

Chmiel

Sales group:

131 Gr.

S2 Mr.

Kaysers

Which company code does your sales organization belong to? Company code:

Which currency is defined for this company code? Currency:


-20_0_9______________________©_c_2_0_09--SA_P__A_G___A_II-rig-h-ts--re_s_e~-e-d-.--------------~3~8n.i1

~

TSCM60


a)

Go to the assignment of the company codes. ~Sales

and Distribution~ Assign sales organization to company code

Company code:

1.000 IDES AG

Go to the definition of the company codes. ~

Ente1prise Structure ~ Definition ----:o- Financial Accounting ~ Define, copy, delete, check company code ... Choose Edit company code data. Currency:

6.

Euro

Enter the delivering plants that are assigned to sales organization 1000 and distribution channel 10 in your data sheet. Delivering plant:

a)

Go to the assignment of plants in sales and distribution. ~ Ente1prise Structure~ Assignment~ Sales and DistributionAssign sales organizalion- Jislribution channel- plant.

Delivering plant:

1.000 Hamburg

Delivering plant:

1.1.00 Berlin

Delivering plant:

1.200 Dresden

Delivering plant:

1.3 00 Frankfurt


~382


2009

TSCM60


Task 3: Optional:

To meet its goal of establishing sales possibilities that are new and up-to-date, your management board has approved a project for establishing eSales as a new sales channel at your company. Management wants to be able to track the sales and revenues from these transactions separately, and pricing procedures that are different from all other sales processes must be possible. Configure the new organizational units you need. I.

Define a new distribution channel for e-sales. Hint: Please use the Define distribution channel function, NOT Copy, delete, check distribution channel.

Background: The Define distribution channel function (only) creates a new distribution channel. The much more powerful function Cop}: delete, check distribution channel allows you to copy all of the distribution channel-specific settings from the template. You can also perform this synchronization later. This function is extremely useful and efficient in projects. In this course, however, you are responsible for performing the corresponding Customizing steps yourself. Y = 70 + ##(e.g. group 19: Y = 70 + 19 = 89) Distribution Channel: Descrip-

eSales ##

tion:

a)

Create a new distribution channel Y eSales ## (Y=70 + ##). --)- Ente1prise Structure---+ Definition -~'Sales and Distribution Define, cop;; delete, check distribution channel

---+

Choose Define distribution channel. Y = 70 + ##(e.g. group 19: Y = 70 + 19 = 89) Distribution Channel: Description:

eSales ##


-20_0_9________________________©--20_0_9_S_A __ P_A_G_._A_II_r-ig_h_ts_r_e_se-~-e-d-.----------------~3~8o.;3~


2.

TSCM60

An independent staff is being trained to process the orders received through e-Sales. Organizationally, these employees will be grouped together in a sales office. Set up the new sales office Ze## eOjjice ## for this group. Use sales office 1000 as a template. a)

_, Sales and Distribution_, Maintain sales office

Select sales office I 000 and choose Copy as...

Task 4: Optional: Enhance the existing sales organization structures by integrating new organizational units. 1.

Assign the new distribution channel to your sales organization ZOOO.

a) 2.

--->Sales and Distribution---> Setup sales area.

Make sure that deliveries for orders from the new sales areas can take place at your distribution centers at the Hamburg, Dresden, and Stuttgart plants.

a) 4.

-7

Build new sales areas with your sales organization, ZOOO, the new distribution channel, and divisions 00, OJ, and 07.

a) 3.

--} Ente17Jrise Structure -7 Assignment--} Sales and Distribution Assign distribution channel to sales organization.

- 7 Sales and Distribution--} Assign sales or;_e:anization- distribution channel -plant.

Configure Customizing so that orders entered for your new sales area, ZOOO ! Y! 00, can be assigned to your new sales office ZE## eQ(fice ## as the responsible internal organizational unit. a)

f!!1""

384

--->Sales and Distribution---> Assign sales office to sales area.


2009

TSCM60


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Use organizational units in the SAP system to map the different areas in your company

Set up enterprise structures by assigning them to organizational units Adjust the organizational structures to meet the legal and business requirements of your company

-2-00_9________________________© __2-00-9--SA __ P_A_G_._A_II_r-ig_h_ts_r_e-se-~-e-d-.----------------~3;c8~5~

TSCM60

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: Use organizational units in the SAP system to map the different areas in your company Set up enterprise structures by assigning them to organizational units Adjust the organizational structures to meet the legal and business requirements of your company

~386


2009

Unit 1 Sales Order Processing Unit Overview This unit explains where the information in the sales document comes from and selected tools for processing the sales document.

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: Determine the origin of document data from various sources, like the material master, the customer master, or Customizing Find and use the tools and help for entering and processing sales orders

Unit Contents Lesson: Information Sources and Data Transfer ........................... 388 Lesson: Selected Entry Aids and Techniques ............................... 396 Exercise 16: Sales Order Processing ................................... .401

2009


387~

TSCM60

Unit 10: Sales Order Processing

Lesson: Information Sources and Data Transfer Lesson Overview This lesson describes possible sales document data sources and shows transfer of master data to sales document as part of document processing using the customer master as an example.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Determine the origin of document data from various sources, like the material master, the customer master, or Customizing

Business Example IDES-AG would like to further optimize entry and processing of sales documents. To do this, document data is to be extracted as default values and fixed values from the master data and other sources.

Example: Weighting the different sources of information during plaot deteJrmiJnatioo

Figure 139: Overview: Sources for Document Data

~388


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Information Sources and Data Transfer

During data input for sales documents, the system supports you by analyzing various sources of information. The aim is to make creating documents easier by using default values or fixed reference data. Possible sources of information are: Master data: The system reads the master data defined for a customer, a material, or a pricing condition. For example, the specific terms of payment for a customer can be found. The sales information from a material master can serve as the source for the delivering plant. Existing document data: Document data that has already been entered or determined automatically by the system can be used to enter additional document data. For example, the delivering plant is used- along with other information -to determine the shipping point. Customizing: Default values for creating documents can be defined in Customizing. For example, you can set a default value for the delivery date or configure a delivery or billing block in the sales document type. You can also define strategies in Customizing for determining document information based on combinations of several criteria (for example: determining the shipping point through a combination of delivering plant, loading group, and shipping condition). Hard-coded controls: Different information sources can be weighted using controls hard-coded in the SAP program (example: proposing plants automatically).

-: :. ;. ~d'-.~-:0-.

-pa_rt_y_:_,r)

C1 Smith Inc. Ship-to party: 51. Smith Inc. Sales area:

1000 10 00 Item: M 1·•• Material1 Figure 140: Sales Order Entry - Deriving the Sales Area

Each sales order is assigned to a unique sales area (sales organization, distribution channel, division). When you enter a sales order, you don't need to specify the sales area immediately. If you don't, the system automatically derives the sales area from the sold-to party.

-20_0_9______________________©_c_2_0_09--SA_P__A_G_._A_II-ri-gh-ts--re-se-~-e-d-.--------------~3'-8~9~~

TSCMGO


Ifthere is master data for the sold-to party in several sales areas, a selection screen appears where you can choose the sales area you require.

n _Hint: You can also create the master record for a new sold-to party when

~*creating the document.

Order

10

M1

20

M2

Figure 141: Proposing Order Data from Master Data

It is advisable to store as much data as possible in master records in the SAP system. This will save you time during order entry and help you to avoid incorrect

entries. You can enter different types of master data in the SAP system, such as information on business patiners, materials, customer/material, item proposals, bills of material, prices, discounts and rebates, taxes, freight, output and texts and so on . The system will frequently access this data during order processing.

In the order overview, you can create items for the ordering company by entering cusl[!f?1er-specific }ll.'!terial numbers. -~~~'"···~.__.~ . -..-.... ~ -~·

~390

....

-- _"' ....

____

,._,.,

...

"'

"

'"""""'"~'"--.,

__ ···•···· ·· .......


2009

TSCM60


Figure 142: Business Partners from the Customer Master

The essential business partners for a sales transaction are the sold-to party. ship-to party, payer and bill-to party. These business partners pia} various roles (called partner functions) in the business process.

You can maintain a customer master record for each partner. There is a suitable entry screen for each type of business partner. When you enter a sales document, you can also enter the ship-to party instead of the sold-to party. The system then detennines the sold-to party from the ship-to party. Jfthere is exactly one sold-to party for the ship-to party, the system can do this automatically. If there are several possible sold-to parties for the ship-to party, the system displays a selection screen with the possible alternatives. If a sold-to pmiy cannot be determined, the system issues an error message in the status bar. A message also appears if you entered a ship-to party in the sold-to party field inadvertently. The system then continues to process the data as if you had entered the ship-to party in the ship-to party field.

2009


391~

TSCM60


Sold-to party: Ship-to party: Payer:

Item

Material

Figure 143: Proposing Order Data from the Customer Master

The business data in a sales document is taken from the master data records for the different business partners. Since locations of ship-to parties and sold-to parties can vary, delivery address and control information are taken from the ship-to party master record. Since the payer is responsible for the payment of receivables, payment conditions in the document are taken from the payer master record. The bill-to party contains the address to which the invoice should be sent. This address may be different from that of the payer.

W' 392


2009


TSCM60

Order 1

Order 2

HEADER

HEADER

Jncoterms Cop y

FOB

Cop y

Item 10

Payment cond.: 2801

FOB

lncoterms:

Item 20

Item 20

•

Payment cond.: 2801

lncoterms:

~

Item 10

Payment cond.: ZB01 FOB lnccterms:

.

j

Payment con d. : ZB01 lncoterms FOB _

Payment cond. : 2801

Payment cond.~01 2802 ~ EXW

lncoterms:

FOB -c

.

Changes are possible because different business data is permitted

Different data at item

level not possible

at item level

Figure 144: Business Data

You can define business data (such as payment conditions, lncoterms) at document header level or for each item. You can decide in Customizing for the item category whether business data at item level should be able to differ from business data at header level. You define this option separately for each item categmy. This allows you to create documents containing both items in which the business data must be identical to the sales document header and items that allow different business data.

Sold-to party Ship-to party

Item

: K1 : 51

---

CUstome-r Quantity

Plaht

material

10

PC-100


Item

: K2 : 51

M1 M2


10 20

1400

Material Quantity

10 20

Item

10

: C3 :, 52

Material Quantity

M1 M2

10 10

Plarit

1100 1100

10 10

--

Plant

1000 1200

_ ___j

Figure 145: Proposing Plants Automatically

2009


393~


TSCM60

The plant is an integral part of Logistics. It assumes the role of a delivering plant in sales. When you enter an item to be delivered, the SAP system attempts to determine a delivering plant automatically from the master data. If the search is successful, the results are copied to the document item. You can change this plant manually. During its search, the system checks several master data records: First, it checks whether it can propose a delivering plant from an entry in the customer-material info record. If the customer-material info record doesn't contain a plant, or ifthere aren't any customer-material info records, the system checks the customer master record for the ship-to party. If this search is unsuccessful, the delivering plant is determined from the material master record. If there isn't a plant in the material master record, the system will be unable to determine a valid plant. And if the system is unable to determine a valid plant, it cannot determine any other document data. either. For example. it would not be possible to automatically determine the shipping point. Furthermore, no availability check is possible, and no delivery can be created. Hint: If necessary, you can use a USEREXIT to enhance the standard system.

~394


2009


TSCM60

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Determine the origin of document data from various sources, like the material master, the customer master, or Customizing

-20_0_9______________________©_c_2_0_09__ S_A_P_A_G_._A_II-ri-gh-ts--re_s_e~-e-d-.--------------~3~9~5~

TSCM60


Lesson: Selected Entry Aids and Techniques Lesson Overview This lesson describes selected data entry aids and techniques for use in the processing of sales documents.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Find and use the tools and help for entering and processing sales orders

Business Example IDES Inc. has successfully implemented the SAP system. You now want to further optimize the processes of entering and processing sales orders. You want to take full advantage of the aids and tools that are available for creating documents. It is your responsibility to familiarize yourself with the techniques for creating and processing documents.

Sales Summary for Customer 5264

Info blocks

• Address •

Key figures

• Quick info

• Contact person •

Last SD documents

•

Document key figures

•

Pricing

•

Figure 146: Sales Summary

The sales summary helps to create documents by displaying a variety of relevant information about the customer. This information is available using a pushbutton at any time during document processing.

~396


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Selected Entry Aids and Techniques

The information in the sales summary is grouped into info blocks on various topics. You can configure the info block views according to topic yourself in Customizing.

e .

.

~t~i~:~~1~~~~{J';~~~;f,~~};~$;f;~}y;;:>:t-:;--,;'' <·>Y-
'''';S:I,_>_,

i~ ():rd;~r-_-:>:~i--'er __ _ _ __:_-- ~r , -ier __ -~;;1,.)

Plant~

t .'!$a t '!$a ht '!$a 2000 2000 2000

1.

I I''· 9t~~tl,9,~~}!,,~,~~'~,~-~-~-~-~~--~-!-~,! ' "-,,-,j" l>

;i•.

2000

Figure 147: Overview: Changing of sales documents

Different options are available for changing document data: Fast change function: The fast change function allows you to change several -or all - items of a document at the same time (for example: changing the delivering plant or delivery date, settings blocks, rejections) Changing of several documents: You can use the document list to change the plant, currency, materials, and pricing in several documents at the same time. The new mass change tool for documents in Release 4.6 supports comprehensive changes to the selected sales documents.

2009


397~

TSCM60

Unit 10; Sales Order Processing

Order Defining blocks in Customizing

User sets and removes Header

blocks

Item 10

Billing block

Item 20 Schedule line 1 Schedule line 2 Delivery block

Figure 148: Blocks In sales orders, you can block the following transactions: For shipping For billing You can set a billing block in the document header and in the individual items. You can customize the delivery block to configure the detailed effects of that block in shipping processing. For example, you can prevent the creation of a delivery in general, or allow processing of the delivery and picking but block the goods issue, and so on (see Appendix). You can set a billing block in the document header and in the individual items. You can enter reasons for rejection for one or more items. In copying control, you

can stop this item from being copied into subsequent documents. The "Fast change" function enables you to simultaneously block all the items that you have selected in the document.

~398


2009

TSCM60


Quotation

Sold-to party:

luem 10

C1

10p;1

M1

20 pc Rejection reason: 03 Too expensive

litem 30

30 pc

M3

Order

Sold-to party:

·

c1

4

;=ll:::te='m='1=0='==M='=1=====1"--0~ ;-=~~-------

X:

Il

......

c.!_u_~:m_._?_o__M_s_~------3"0 pc_ . ; :j Figure 149: Reject

You can enter a reason for rejection for one or several items. You can create a suitable copying requirement in copying control to prevent these items from being copied into subsequent documents. For example, if a customer doesn't want some of the items in a quotation, you can assign a reason for rejection to those items. This gives the items the completed status. The business transaction can thus be concluded without deleting the item. Reasons for rejection also allow you to verify what your customers think of your products during a certain tin1e period. The marketing department can use these results as an important planning tool for their strategies in the next sales period. The "Fast change" function allows you to reject several or all items of a document at the same time. A special pushbutton is also available for rejecting all the items in a document

2009


399~

TSCM60


Unchanged Data • sa;es area • Saies office and sales group • Availability and product allocation • Batches

No cha~g!'s ifthere aie:,S2 ~ _ ;_: s_~atus~;elev8 ~t-~rt:C~-diil~_\I¥~n~:~nt~

Figure 150: Changes to the Sold-to Party in the Sales Document At times, it can be beneficial to start entering individual items before you enter the sold-to party, especially when phone sales are involved. Because a sold-to party is always required to create a sales document, a default value must be set in the sold-to party field. You can do this with your user-specific parameters or- depending on the sales document type- with a transaction variant. The incompletion log of the sales document ensures that the person responsible replaces the default customer value with the actual sold-to party. To do this, the default sold-to party must be flagged as such in the customer master (activate customer type Default SP). When the sold-to party is changed, the changed value runs through the same checks as the initial entry. As a result, a variety of data is re-determined -such as texts, prices, and delivering plant. You can also change the ship-to party later on the overview screen. However, the system does not re-determine the sold-to party in this case.

~400


2009


TSCM60

Exercise 16: Sales Order Processing Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. you will be able to: Explain how master data is proposed in sales documents Use the various tools for processing orders

Business Example The order clerk only has to enter a few items when creating sales documents. The majority of the information is copied from the master data.

Task 1: I.

Create a standard order for product T-ATC## (1 unit) with purchase order number##L0605-0R03.

2.

Do not specify the sales area (delete any values that default). The ship-to party is T-S62F##.

3.

Which sold-to party is determined by the system? Sold-to party:

4.

Which sales area is automatically detennined by the system? Sales area:

Where does the system find this infonnation?

Task 2: Your customer T-S62A## places an order with you. They want the delivery to take place in 2 weeks. The purchase order number is ##L0605-0R04. I.

Enter an item for material T-ATC## (quantity: '5 pieces). You offer the following tenns of payment to your customer for this item:

14 days 3%, 30 days 2%, 45 days net. Terms of payment: Continued on next page

2009


401~

TSCM60


2.

Enter another item with material T-ATD## (20 units). This item has different tenns of payment: 20 days 2%, 30 days net. This material should also be delivered to another address. Change the ship-to party of this item to your customer T-S62B##. Payment terms:

3.

Deliver the order on the delivery date requested by your customer. What message appears in the log?

Hint: If necessary, set the selection date for the delivery to two weeks from today.

4.

Which delivering plant is determined by the system? Delivering plant for item 10: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ Delivering plant for item 20: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

5.

Which master records does the system use to extract this information?

Task 3: I.

Your plant 1000 contains stock for material T-ATD##. This is the material that should be delivered from this plant, when customer T-S62A## orders it.

2.

Create a customer-material infonnation record so that this material is always taken from plant 1000 for this customer.

3.

The customer manages this material with number PC-M-## and description PC-Monitor ##. Enter these details in the customer-matetialinfo record.

4.

You receive an order from customer T-S62A## with purchase order number ##L0605-0R05. The order consists of 12 monitors, which the customer manages under material number PC-M-##. The customer wants to receive the delivery in two weeks. Create the sales order. Can you meet the customer's requested delivery date? Continued on next page

~402


2009

TSCM60


Which plant will be used to supply the delivery?

Hint: You can use the Ordering Party overview screen to enter items with the customer's purchase order numbers.

Task 4: Your customer informs you they would like to add to their purchase order number ##L0605-0R05. 1.

Enter another item with 16 units of material T-ATE##. The delivery date is in two week's time.

Task 5: Optional: Your customer can get the first order item of document ##L0605-0R05 for a better price somewhere else, so they reject this item. I.

Cancel this item by entering the relevant reason for rejection.

2.

Display the delivery and rejection status for the order. Overall processing: Header- Delivery Status: Header - Reject status:

Item 10 Overall processing: Item- Delivery status:

Item - Rejection status:

Item 20 Overall processing: Continued on next page

2009


403~


TSCM60

Item - Delivery status: Item - Reject status: 3.

Create a delivery for this order with shipping point 1200. The delive1y date is two weeksfimn today. Decrease the quantity of the first item in the delivery by half. Save the delivery. Check the status of the order.

Shipping point: Selection date: Delivery quantity of item 10: Overall processing: Header- Delivery status:

Item 20: Overall processing: Item - Delivery status:

~404


2009

TSCM60


Solution 16: Sales Order Processing Task 1: I.

Create a standard order for product T-ATC## (I unit) with purchase order number##L0605-0R03. a)

2.

-->Logistics--> Sales and Distribution--> Sales--> Order--> Create.

Do not specify the sales area (delete any values that default). The ship-to party is T-S62F##.

a)

3.

Order type:

OR

Ship-to party:

T-S62F##

PO number:

#!IL0605-0R03

Which sold-to party is determined by the system? Sold-to party:

a)

Sold-to party: 4.

T-S62E## HiTech AG

Which sales area is automatically determined by the system? Sales area:

Where does the system find this information?

a)

Sales area:

1000 I 10 I 00

In the first step, rhe sys1em determines the sold-to party from thl! ship-lv party The sales area is then determined ji-om the sold-to party s master record.


2009


405~

TSCM60


Task 2: Your customer T-S62A## places an order with you. They want the delivery to take place in 2 weeks. The purchase order number is ##L0605-0R04. I.

Enter an item for material T-ATC## (quantity: 5 pieces). You offer the following terms of payment to your customer for this item: 14 days 3%, 30 days 2%, 45 days net.

Terms of payment:

a)

2.

Order type:

OR

Sold-to party:

T-S62A##

PO number:

##L0605-0R04

Material:

T-ATC## (5 units)

Payment terms:

ZBOJ

Enter another item with material T-ATD## (20 units). This item has different tem1s of payment: 20 days 2%, 30 days net. This material should also be delivered to another address. Change the ship-to party of this item to your customer T-S62B##. Payment terms:

a)

3.

Material:

T-ATD## (20 units)

Payment terms:

ZB03

Ship-to party:

T-S62B##

Deliver the order on the delivery date requested by your customer. What message appears in the log?


~406


2009

TSCM60



a)

Logistics-> Sales and Distribution-> Shipping and Transportation-> Outbound Delive1y ----+ Create

----+

Single Document ----+ with reference

to sales orde1:

Shipping point:

1200

Selection date:

T\vo weeks ji-om today

Choose Error log. "Item 000020: Delivery split due to varying route" This is because two order items are to be delivered to different ship-to parties, which means each one has to be a separate delivery.


4.

Which delivering plant is determined by the system? Delivering plant for item 10: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ Delivering plant for item 20: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ a)

Delivering plant for item I 0: 1200 Delivering plant for item 20: 1200

5.

Which master records does the system use to extract this information? a)

From ihe materials master records.

Task 3: I.

Your plant 1000 contains stock for material T-ATD##. This is the material that should be delivered from this plant, when customer T-S62A## orders it. a)

Save the agreement with your customer as a master record. Logistics

-t

Sales and Distribution----+ Master Data----+ Agreements.


2009


407~

TSCM60


2.

Create a customer-material information record so that this material is always taken from plant I 000 for this customer.

a)

Create a customer-material information record. -->

3.

Customer-Material Information--> Create.

Customer:

T-S62A##

Sales organization:

1000

Distr. channel:

10

Material:

T-ATD##

Delivering plant:

1000

The customer manages this material with number PC-M-## and description PC-Monitor ##. Enter these details in the customer-material info record.

a)

4.

Customer material:

PC-M-##

Cusomter material description:

PC-Monitor ##

You receive an order from customer T-S62A## with purchase order number ##L0605-0R05. The order consists of 12 monitors, which the customer manages under material number PC-M-##. The customer wants to receive the delivery in two weeks. Create the sales order. Can you meet the customer's requested delivery date?


~408


2009

TSCMSO


Which plant will be used to supply the delivery?

Hint: You can use the Ordering Party overview screen to enter items with the customer's purchase order numbers.

a)

Sold-to party: :

T-S62A##

PO number

##L0605-0R05

Req. delivery date:

T\vo weeks .ft·om today

Customer material:

PC-M-## (12 units)

The requested delivery date can be met. Delive1y will take place fi"om plant 1000, as agreed.

Task 4: Your customer informs you they would like to add to their purchase order number ##L0605-0R05. I.

Enter another item with 16 units of material T-ATE##. The delivery date is in two week's time. a)

Material:

T-ATE## (1 6 units)

Delivery date:

T\vo weeks .ftwn today

Task 5: Optional:

Your customer can get the first order item of document ##L0605-0R05 for a better price somewhere else, so they reject this item. 1.

Cancel this item by entering the relevant reason for rejection. a)

Reject the first item. Reason for rejection:

2.

03 Too expensive

Display the delivery and rejection status for the order. Overall processing:

Being processed Continued On next page

2009


409~

TSCM60


Header - Delivery Status:

Not delivered

Header - Reject status:

Partiallv rejected

Item 10

Overall processing:

Completed

Item- Delivery status: Not delivered Item - Rejection status:

Fully rejected

Item 20

Overall processing: Item- Delivery status: Not delivered Item- Reject status:

a) 3.

Choose Status overview and then expand all.

Create a delivery for this order with shipping point 1200. The delivery date is two weeks from roday. Decrease the quantity of the first item in the delivery by half. Save the delivery. Check the status of the order. Logistics -r Sales and Distribution -r Shipping and Transportation -r Outbound Delivery -r Create -r Single Document -r With Reference to Sales Orela

Shipping point: Selection date:

ni'O

weeks fi-om today

Delivery quantity of item 10: Continued on next page

~410


2009

TSCM60


Overall processing:

Being processed

Header- Delivery status:

Partially delivered

Item 20: Overall processing:

Being processed

Item - Delivery status:

Partially delivered

a)

Logistics --+Sales and Distribution--+ Sales--+ Order--+ Display Choose Status overview and then expand all.

2009


411~


TSCM60

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Find and use the tools and help for entering and processing sales orders

~ 412


2009

TSCM60

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: Determine the origin of document data from various sources, like the

material master, the customer master, or Customizing Find and use the tools and help for entering and processing sales orders

2009


413~

TSCM60

Unit Summary

~414


2009

Unit 11 Controlling Sales Documents

Unit Overview This unit describes the control elements of sales documents.

e

.

.

Unit Objectives After completing this unit. you will be able to: Describe the basic principles of business process control in sales. Identify the elements that control the sales documents Name examples of different sales document types used for different business processes Explain what the sales document type does Create Customizing settings for the sales document type Restrict the validity of sales document types to sales areas Identif)• and explain the important control parameters for item categories Create a new item category

Configure the system so that item categories are automatically assigned to a sales document type Control settings for bills of material in the sales document. Identify and explain the most important control parameters for schedule line categories Create a new schedule line category Configure your settings so that schedule line categories are automatically assigned to. each sales document item

Unit Contents Lesson: Basic Principles of Business Process Control .................... 417 Lesson: Controlling Sales Documents- Sales Document Type ......... .421 Exercise 17: Controlling Sales Documents with Sales Document Types ........................................................................ .425 Lesson: Controlling Sales Documents- Item Category .................... 431

2009


415~

Unit 11: Controlling Sales Documents

TSCM60

Exercise 18: Controlling Sales Documents- Item Categories and Item Category Determination .................................................. .439 Exercise 19: Control of Sales Documents- Item Category - BOMs in Sales Document ........................................................... .449 Lesson: Controlling Sales Documents- Schedule Line Categories ..... .455 Exercise 20: Controlling Sales Documents - Schedule Line Categories ................................................................... 461

~416


2009

TSCMGO

Lesson: Basic Principles of Business Process Control

Lesson: Basic Principles of Business Process Control Lesson Overview This lesson describes the basic principles of business process control in sales.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe the basic principles of business process control in sales.

Business Example IDES Inc. has successfully implemented the SAP system. You now want to further optimize the processes of entering and processing sales orders. To do this, you require an overview of control levels and options as part of sales document customizing.

Document

Subsequent document

Figure 151: Controlling Business Processes in Sales

Sales processes are controlled b;. Customizing for sales documents. Customizing for sales documents can be done at header, item or schedule line level, depending on the structure of the document. The instruments for control are the sales document type, item category and schedule line category.

2009


417~

TSCM60


You need to make settings in Customizing so that the item and schedule line categories are detennined automatically in the sales document. To fully set up a business process in your system, you need to configure the system for forwarding data from the sales document to subsequent documents according to your needs. You can do this in copying control.

e

.

.

Figure 152: Basic Functions

You need to configure several general sales functions (basic functions) for the sales documents. These include: Partner determination

Pricing

Message detennination

Text determination

Material detennination

Credit management

Incompleteness

Delivery scheduling

You can fine tune these settings at each level within the sales document. The sales document is not completely configured until you have processed all the necessary basic functions.

~ 418


2009

Lesson: Basic Principles of Business Process Control

TSCMSO

Examples: For pricing, you can set up your own pricing procedure for a sales document

type. First you configure the sales document type and pricing procedure separately, then you assign the procedure to the sales document type. You can also create default output types for each sales document type. To do this, you assign the relevant output determination procedure to the sales document type in output customizing. You can use different functions for different sales document types. For example, pricing but not inventory updates are needed to create an inquiry.

-20_0_9______________________©_o_2_00_9_S_A_P__ A_G___ A_II_rig_h_ts--re-se-~-e-d-.----------------4~1~9~~


TSCM60

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Describe the basic principles of business process control in sales.

~420


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Controlling Sales Documents- Sales Document Type

Lesson: Controlling Sales Documents- Sales Document Type Lesson Overview This Jesson describes how to use and control options for the sales document type customizing object.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Identify the elements that control the sales documents Name examples of different sales document types used for different business processes

Explain what the sales document type does Create Customizing settings for the sales document type Restrict the validity of sales document types to sales areas

Business Example IDES Inc. has been using the SAP sales functionality successfully for some years now.

Compan) management has recently decided to expand the company's sales activities. In the future, customers should also be able to place orders at trade fairs. It must be possible to control and evaluate the new sales activities separately from all existing activities. It is your responsibility to configure a separate sales document type for trade fair sales.

2009


421~

TSCM60


IN QT

~

Inquiry Quotation

QC OS I QP

~ Quantity contract ~ ~

Scheduling agreement Rental contract

WK1 =General value contract

OR~

RO

cs

CF FD

~ ~ ~

Standard order Rush Order Cash sales Consignment fill-up Free-of-charge delivery

RE ~Returns CR = Credit memo request SDF ~ Free-of-charge subsequent delivery DR ~ Debit memo reqeust

Figure 153: Examples of Sales Document Types

Various sales document types are delivered with the system to represent the different business processes. These provide you with examples of how to use sales document types.

Figure 154: Functions in the Sales Document Type

In Customizing for the sales document type, you configure the settings that influence the sales process, such as the sales document category, delivery and billing blocks or the document types for subsequent deliveries and billing documents.

~422


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Controlling Sales Documents - Sales Document Type

You can also save default values that appear when you create a document. You can overwrite these values at different levels of the document to match particular procedures, such as the customer's requested delivery date or certain basic requirements for contracts.

In addition, you can activate various checks such as messages about open quotations or outline agreements, searches for customer-material info records, or credit limit checks. Note that activating checks can affect system performance. Hint: Adding a new sales document type to sales processing is time consuming because many of the entries in Customizing depend on the sales document type. To avoid any difficulties, you should generate a new sales document type by copying an existing one with similar functions. This document type should be one from the SAP standard system or should already have been tested by your company. When you copy the document type, both the fields and the dependent entries are copied. Once the system has copied the document, it automatically generates a log that you can save for documentation purposes.

Figure 155: Order Types Permitted for Sales Areas

You can use Customizing to define which sales document types are valid in which ... Sales organizations Distribution channels

Divisions

2009


423~


TSCMSO

This means you can limit the validity of your sales document types for one single sales area.

~424


2009

TSCM60


Exercise 17: Controlling Sales Documents with Sales Document Types Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: Control sales document types in Customizing Implement your own sales processes with new sales document types.

Business Example You want to control and evaluate your sales activities for trade fairs separately. To do this, you use a different sales document type, which you set up in Customizing to meet your requirements. You limit the use of that sales document type for the defined sales areas.

Task 1: Your new trade fair order should meet the following requirements: -Description: Fair##-orde1: -The number assignment should be internal- you should not be able to assign numbers externally. -Item numbering should have an increment of 100. -Order entry should begin with the Item overview screen. -Checking open quotations or contracts is not necessary. -When billing documents are created, the system should re-run pricing automatically.

Hint: In the standard system, billing type Fl is configured so that pricing is re-run automatically when you create a new billing document.

-Your company wants the requested delivery date to be proposed automatically with a lead time of 10 days. -Pricing should be based on the current date. -The system should automatically propose the current date as the purchase order date. I.

Change order type ZA##, which has been generated as a copy of the standard order (order type OR) to meet these requirements. Continued on next page

-20_0_9_______________________ ©_2_0_09__S_A_P_A_G___A_II_ri-gh_t_s-re_s_e~--ed-.----------------4~2~5~


TSCMGO

Task 2: Check your settings by creating an order with the new sales document type ZA## and an item. I.

Your customer T-S62B## orders 10 units of material T-ATB## at a trade fair. Enter a fair order (sales document type ZA##). The purchase order number is ##L0605-ZA01.

2.

Check the fields containing the document number of the order, the requested delivery date, the pricing date, the order date, the overview screen, and the item numbering for this order.

Task 3: Optional: I.

Compare the two sales document types Standard order and Rush order. What are the differences between these two types?

3.

Change sales document type ZA## so it behaves like a rush order. Hint: Check the settings for immediate delive1y; shipping conditions and lead time in days.

4.

Create an order with order type ZA## in sales area 1000 I 10 I 00 for customer T-S62A## and your material T-ATA##. The purchase order number is ##L0605-ZA03.

5.

Take a look at the document flow to determine whether the delivery has been created. Outbound delivery number: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

6.

~426

Undo your changes to order type ZA## when you are finished.


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Controlling Sales Documents - Sales Document Type

Solution 17: Controlling Sales Documents with Sales Document Types Task 1: Your new trade fair order should meet the following requirements: -Description: Fairll#-orde1: -The number assignment should be internal- you should not be able to assign numbers externally. -Item numbering should have an increment of 100. -Order entry should begin with the Item overview screen. -Checking open quotations or contracts is not necessary. -When billing documents are created, the system should re-run pricing automatically.

Hint: In the standard system, billing type F1 is configured so that pricing is re-run automatically when you create a new billing document.

-Your company wants the requested delivery date to be proposed automatically with a lead time of 10 days. -Pricing should be based on the current date. -The system should automatically propose the current date as the purchase order date. I.

Change order type Z4##, which has been generated as a copy of the standard order (order type OR) to meet these requirements. a)

Change sales document type ZA##. -> Tools-> Customizing-> JMG-> E-..:ecute Project-> SAP Reference !MG.

Sales and Distribution --+ Sales --+ Sales Documents --+ Sales Document Header --+ Define Sales Document Types.

--+

Select document type ZA#II. Choose Details. Description:

Fair##-order

Number range external

blank

assignment: Item no. increment:

100 Continued on next page

2009


427~

TSCM60


FCODE overview screen:

UER2

Quotation messages:

blank

Messages about outline

blank

agreements

Delivery-rei. billing type:

Fl

Order-related billing type:

Fl

Le~d time in days:

10

Default pricing date:

blank

Propose delivery date:

activate

Propose PO date:

activate

Task 2: Check your settings by creating an order with the new sales document type ZA ## and an item.

I.

Your customer T-S62B## orders I 0 units of material T-ATB## at a trade fair. Enter a fair order (sales document type ZA##). The purchase order number is ##L0605-ZAOI. a)

Verify the settings in the sales order. Create the sales order.

2.

Check the fields containing the document number of the order, the requested delivery date, the pricing date, the order date, the overview screen, and the item numbering for this order. a)

Check the Customizing of your sales document type ZA##. Fair##-order:

blank (number is only assigned internally on saving)

Req. deliv. date:

1iro days .fi·om today

Pricing date:

today

Order date:

Today

Overview screen:

Item overview

Item number:

100


~428


2009

TSCM60


Task 3: Optional: I.

Compare the two sales document types Standard order and Rush order. a)

Compare the document types in Customizing.

Sales and Distribution ----> Sales ----> Sales Documents Document Header ----> Define Sales Document Types.

---->

2.

---->

Sales

What are the differences between these two types? Answer: The following fields in the rush order are different from those in the standard order (Note: these are the critical fields that are differentthere are others): Imm. delivery: activated Shipping condition: 10 immediately Lead time in days: blank

3.

Change sales document type Z4## so it behaves like a rush order.

Hint: Check the settings for immediate delive1y; shipping conditions

and lead time in days. a) 4.

Create an order with order type Z4## in sales area 1000 I 10 I 00 for customer T-S62A## and your material T-ATA##. The purchase order number is ##L0605-Z403. a)

5.

Change the document type.

Create the order and save it.

Take a look at the document flow to determine whether the delivery has been created. Outbound delivery number: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ a)

6.

Display the order and choose Document flow.

Undo your changes to order type ZA## when you are finished. a) Imm. delivery:

blank

Shipping condition:

blank

Lead time in days:

10

-2-00_9_______________________ ©_2_0_09__S_A_P_A_G_._A_II-ri-gh_t_s-re_s_e_N_ed-.----------------4~2~9~


TSCM60

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: IdentifY the elements that control the sales documents Name examples of different sales document types used for different business processes Explain what the sales document type does Create Customizing settings for the sales document type Restrict the validity of sales document types to sales areas

~430


2009

Lesson: Controlling Sales Documents ~ Item Category

TSCM60

Lesson: Controlling Sales Documents - Item Category Lesson Overview This lesson describes tasks, control options and automatic determination of item categories. The use of item categories to control bills of material in sales documents is also described.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Identify and explain the important control parameters for item categories Create a new item category Configure the system so that item categories are automatically assigned to a sales document type Control settings for bills of material in the sales document.

Business Example Company management has now decided to expand the company's sales activities. In future, BOM's are to be used to sell certain products. To control these processes separately, you want to be able to influence document control at item level.

------, AFN = Standard item in inquiry AGTX=Text item in quotation

TAD = Service In standard order BVNN= Free..Of..charge item in cash sales , KEN = Standard item in consignment issue

!

KMN = Standard item in quantity contract WVN = Standard item in maintenance contract WKN= Item in value contract

i REN =

Standard item in returns I G2TX= Text item in I credit memo request ~ KLN = Free-of-charge item 1

Figure 156: Examples of Item Categories

-2-00_9_______________________ ©_2_0_09__S_A_P_A_G_._A_II-ri-gh_t_s-re_s_e_N_ed-.----------------4~3"1 ~


TSCM60

Various item categories are delivered with the system to model the different business processes. You can use them as examples or as templates for creating your own item categories.

The item category is defined with a four-digit key. These keys are copied automatically from the original German keys and are not translated. The first two characters provide a clue to the sales document type that was originally designed for these item categories. The last two characters indicate the use of the item category, such as: •

AFTX Sales document type: IN Usage: TEXT TAD Sales document type: OR Item category group: LEIS KMN Sales document type: AG Item category group: NORM

You can decide if you would like to keep the standard keys or define your own so that the abbreviation refers to your sales document types and how the category is configured.

Figure 157: Item Category Functions The item category controls what the item does in the sales document and in any subsequent processing for the business transaction.

~432


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Controlling Sales Documents - Item Category

The essential characteristics of an item category decide: Whether business data in the item can be different to that of the document header Whether pricing applies to the item Whether and how an item is billed Whether the item refers to a material or whether it is just a text item Which incompleteness procedure is used to check the item data. You can change the item category settings defined in the standard system. You can also define new item categories. To do this, you should always copy existing item categories that have already been tested, then change these to meet your requirements. The delivery relevance indicator is only for items without schedule lines. You could indicate that a text item was relevant to delivery, for example, so that the system copies this item from the sales order into the delivery document. Function

Example

Figure 158: Controlling the Items in the Sales Document

The diagram contains examples with settings as provided in the standard SAP system. Every item in a sales document is controlled by means of its item category. This enables you to Use different item categories in different sales document types Realize different business processes for each item in the sales document.

2009


433~

TSCM60


You can configure the functions of the item categories according to your requirements. For example: You do not need price determination for the text item in the inquiry (item category AFTX). but you want to enter delivery quantities and delivery dates, and you therefore allow schedule lines. You want schedule lines for a free-of-charge item in the sales order (item category TANN) but you do not want to carry out pricing for this item or transfer it to billing.

·Header

.

I

Item

Examples: Sub-items

10

Item 20 Higher-level item 10

Figure 159: Sub-Items

You can assign an item to a higher-level item if, for example, a customer receives

free goods for ordering a certain quantity of your product. Example: Item 10:

Ml

100 unirs

1000 Euro

Item 20:

M2

10 units

free-of-charge

For ordering 100 pieces of item 10, the customer receives 10 units free of charge. To display this, you enter item 10 in the higher-level item field for item 20. This simple form of supplying free goods is supplemented with automatic determination of free goods (see the unit entitled "Free goods").

~434


2009

TSCM60


Other examples for using sub-items include the explosion of BOMs or service items in sales documents.

()

Hint: Alternative items can also be recorded in quotations and inquiries

~)!(. in addition to sub-items. Alternative items are treated differently to

sub-items; for example, alternative items are not included in the net value

of the document.

Sales document

~-----'-

Header

Sales document _

1 I

Figure 160: Assignment: Item Category to Sales Document Type

Item categories are assigned to sales document types.

The purpose of this assignment is to: Configure the system to propose an item category when you create an order. Define alternative item categories to the system default which users can choose. This assignment is influenced by: The item category group from the material master record. The item category group allows you to group together different materials that behave in a similar way during sales and distribution processes. for example. You can also define new item category groups if needed. The usage for the item, which in some cases is set internally in the program.

2009


435~

TSCM60


The system uses TEXT if the user enters an item in the inquiry or quotation by entering data in the "Description" field without specifYing a material number. FREE is used for controlling free goods items. The item categmy of a higher-level item (in the case of a sub-item)

Screen

Casing

Figure 161: Bills of material: Example: Computer A computer consists of several components. Each of these components is in tum constructed from several separate parts. You can store this structure in the system as a bill of material. All the items in the bill of material (BOM) that you want to control in the sales document must be flagged as relevamfor sales. (Please note: the items in a bill of material are controlled differently than the item categories in a sales document). If you create a BOM material with BOM usage 5 (sales and distribution), all the items in the bill of material will be automatically flagged as relevant to sales. By making the appropriate settings in Customizing for the item categories in the sales document, you can copy the components in the bill of material to a sales order. To process the sales document, you only need to enter the material number of the BOM. The BOM appears in the sales document as a structure with main items and sub-items. The system explodes the BOM in the sales order by automatically generating sub-items for the components.

W'"

436


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Controlling Sales Documents

8

Item Category

Sales document Item category of

TA Q

main item:

-7 Pricing Item category of sub-item:

TAE

-7 Not priced 'Aite;h~_ti~e--:~'6-ri't;ci'_t:~f:B-bM>f~_::;_-"

-:·-'}________________ _ Sales document lte~ ~ategory of mam ttem:

TAP

-7 Not priced Item category of sub-item:

TAN

-7 Pricing

Figure 162: Exploding Bills of Materials in Sales Documents

The individual item categories control what a bill of material can do in a sales document. In Customizing, you define and assign item categories for the main and sub-items of the BOM in the sales document. A specific item category group assigned to the material master record of the main item defines which item categories are assigned to the main item. To determine how far the BOM should be exploded in the sales document, you need to define the extent of the structure of the item category for the main item. When you determine the sub-items. the system also needs to know the item category of the higher-level item.

In Customizing for item categories, you control which item(s) are relevant to pricing and how you want to implement requirements transfer.

-2-00_9_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ©_2_0_09_S_A_P_A_G_.-A-II-ri-gh_t_s_re_s_e_N_ed-.--------4~3;;;7~


~438


TSCM60

2009

TSCM60


Exercise 18: Controlling Sales Documents - Item Categories and Item Category Determination Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: Configure Customizing of item categories Explain and control automatic determination of item categories.

Business Example Items in sales documents frequently have to be controlled differently, such as for pricing or billing. This applies to items That pass through several sales documents during the course of the transaction

Within an individual sales document Item categories are determined automatically.

Task 1: Your customer tells you they would like to add to their purchase order number ##L0605-0R05. I.

Enter another item with 16 units of material T-ATE##. The delivery date is in two week's time.

2.

You have also agreed to give your customer a free goods item of I unit of material T-ATE##. Enter a corresponding sub-item.

3.

This item is included in the net value of the order. Determine 1rhe1her this statemem is true or false.

o o 4.

True False

What are the item categories in this order?

Item 10: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ Item 20: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ Item 30: - - - - - - - - - - - - - Item 40: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ Continued on next page

2009


439~

TSCM60


Task 2: Complete the following table.

1. Item category

Description

TAN

Standard item

TANN

Free-ofcharge item

TAP

Extent delivered

1:4Q

E
TATX

Text item

TAD

Service

1:4E

E
Business item

Schedule lines permitted

Item relev. for delivery

Pricing

Structure scope

Task 3: I.

Why is the item category in the order automatically proposed by the system? Find the relevant table in Customizing. What are the key fields for automatically determining the item categories? Key field 1: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ Key field 2: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ Key field 3: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ Key field 4: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Task 4: Complete the following table.

1.


~440


2009

TSCM60


Sales document type

Item

Item

Higher-

Default

Mmt-

Man-

category

usage

level

item category

ual item

ua/

cafe-

item cate-

group

item category

gory

gory

EN

DIEN

QT

TEXT

OR

NORM

OR

NORM

TAN

OR

NORM

TAP

OR

NORM

TAQ

ZA##

ERLA

ZA##

ERLA

ZA##

LUMF

ZA##

LUMF

TAQ

TAP

Task 5: Optional Your customer T-S62A## places a standard order with purchase order number ##L0605-0R06. I.

Enter the standard order with a requested delivery date of one week from today. Enter the following items: Material:

T-ATA## (5 units)

Material:

T-ZSA## (3h)

Which item category groups have been assigned to the two materials? Item 10: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ Item 20: - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

2.

Which item categories are used? In Customizing, check which of the item categories are relevant for delivery and pricing.


2009


441~


TSCM60

Item

Pricing

category

Schedule lines

permitted

Item relevant for delivery

Item 10 Item 20 3.

~442

Deliver the order with purchase order number ##L0605-0R06. Which order items are delivery items generated for?


2009

TSCM60


Solution 18: Controlling Sales Documents - Item Categories and Item Category Determination Task 1: Your customer tells you they would like to add to their purchase order number

##L0605-0R05. I.

Enter another item with 16 units of material T-ATE##. The delivery date is in two week's time. a)

2.

Material:

T-ATE## (1 6 units)

Delivery date:

1il'O weeks ji-om today

You have also agreed to give your customer a free goods item of I unit of material T-ATE##. Enter a corresponding sub-item. a)

3.

Material:

T-ATE## (1 units)

Higher-level item:

20

This item is included in the net value of the order. Answer: False Select the free goods item and choose Item conditions.

No. The net value of the item is zero. 4.

What are the item categories in this order? Item 10: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ Item 20: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ Item 30: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Continued on nexl page

2009


443~

TSCM60


Item 40: - - - - - - - - - - - - a)

--->Logistics---> Sales and Distribution---> Sales---> Order---> Display

Item 10:

TAN

Item 20:

TAN

Item 30:

TAN

Item 40:

TANN

Task 2: Complete the following table. 1. Item category

Description

Business item


Item relev. for delivery

Pricing

Structure scope

TAN

Standard ilem

~

~

--

X

--

TANN

Free-ofcharge ilem

~

~

--

B

--

TAP

EY!enl delivered

--

~

--

--

~

TAQ

Extent delivered

~

~

-

-

X

A

TATX

Text item

--

-

-

~

--

-

TAD

Service

X

X

TAE

Explanation

-

-

~

a)

--

X

-

-

-

--

--->

IMG---> Sales and Distriblllion --->Sales-> Sales Documents

--->

Sales Document Item -> Define Item Categories.

Task 3: I.

Why is the item category in the order automatically proposed by the system? Find the relevant table in Customizing. Continued on next page

f:'!i!!'

444


2009

TSCM60


~

Item Category

What are the key fields for automatically determining the item categories? Key field 1: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ Key field 2: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ Key field 3: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ Key field 4: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ a)

Check the assignment of the respective item categories. -+

IMG-+ Sales and Distribution-+ Sales-+ Sales Documents

-+Sales Document Item -+Assign Item Categories. Key field I:

SaTy

Sales document type

Key field 2:

ItCGr

Item categ01y group

Key field 3:

Usage

Item usage

Key field 4:

HlevitCa

Item categ01y of higher-level item

Task 4: Complete the following table. I.

Sales document type

Item category group

Item usage

Higherlevel item category

Default item category

ManMtmual item lUll cafeitem cafegory gory

EN

AFX

DIEN

QT

AGTX

TEI.'T

TAN

OR

NORM

OR

NORM

TAN

TANN

OR

NORIYI

TAP

TAN

OR

NORM

TAQ

TAE

ZA##

ERLA

TAP

TAQ

TAQ


2009


445~


Sales documcnt type

Item category group

TSCM60

Item usage

Higherlevel item category

Default item category

ManMtmual item ual cafeitem gory category

ZA##

ERLA

ZA##

LUMF

ZA##

LUMF

a)

TAO

TAE TAP

TAP

TAN

see task description

Task 5: Optional Your customer T-S62A## places a standard order with purchase order number ##L0605-0R06. I.

Enter the standard order with a requested delivery date of one week from today. Enter the following items: Material:

T-ATA## 15 units)

Material:

T-ZSA## (3h)

Which item category groups have been assigned to the two materials? Item 10: - - - - - - - - - - - - - Item 20: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - a)

Create the sales order. Go from the sales order to the material master. Environment-+ Display materia/In the material master, go to the Sales and Distribution tab: Sales0rg2,

2.

Item 10:

Item categ01y group: NORM

Item 20:

Item categ01y group: LEIS

Which item categories are used? In Customizing, check which of the item categories are relevant for delivery and pricing.


~446


2009

TSCM60


Item category

Pricing



Item 10

TAN

X

X

Item 20

TAD

X

X

-

a) 3.

Deliver the order with purchase order number ##L0605-0R06. Which order items are delivery items generated for?

a)

2009


A delivery item is generated for the standard item.


447~


~448


TSCM60

2009

TSCM60


~

Item Category

Exercise 19: Control of Sales DocumentsItem Category - BOMs in Sales Document Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: Create master records for sales BOMs Control BOMs in sales documents.

Business Example You often have to explode BOMs in sales documents. In the process, you have to determine, for example, the level at which price determination and/or transfer of requirements is performed.

Task: You want your material T-FUA## in plant: 1200 to appear as a bill of material in your sales docmnents. Work with the bill of material and use it for entering data. I.

For this material, create a sales BOM (usage: 5 Sales and Distribution) with the components T-ATA##, T-ATF## and T-ATG## (I piece each). Configure the bill of material items as stock items (L ).

2.

Create an order for your customer T-S62A## and your material T-FUA##. The purchase order number is ##L0605-0R07. Does the system explode the bill of material?

Why I why not?

3.

In future, you only want to determine prices for the finished product. You want to list the individual components of the finished product for informational purposes. Change the material master for your material T-FUA## so that pricing only takes place at main item level.

4.

Check the effects of your change in the sales document. Create an order for your customer T-S62A## and your material T-FUA##. The purchase order number is ##L0605-TA08. Does the system explode the bill of material?


2009


449~


TSCM60

Which items affect the net value of the order?

5.

Change your material T-FUA## so that pricing only takes place at sub-item level.

6.

Check the effects of your change in the sales document. Does the system explode the bill of material?

Which items affect the net value of the order? PO number: ##L0605-0R09

~450


2009

TSCMSO


Solution 19: Control of Sales Documents Item Category - BOMs in Sales Document Task: You want your material T-FUA## in plant: 1200 to appear as a bill of material in your sales documents. Work with the bill of material and use it for entering data. I.

For this material, create a sales BOM (usage: 5 Sales and Distribution) with the components T-ATA##, T-ATF## and T-ATG## (I piece each). Configure the bill of material items as stock items (L ). a)

Enter the bill of material. ----+Logistics--+ Sales and Distribution--+ Master Data--+ Products--+

Bills ofMaterial-+ Bill ofMaterial-+ Material BOM-+ Create

2.

Plant:

I :!00 Dresden

Usage:

5 Sales and Distribution

BOM item category:

L Stock item

Create an order for your customer T-S62A## and your material T-FUA##. The purchase order number is ##LOn05-0R07. Does the system explode the bill of material?

Why I why not?

a)

Enter the bill of material. The BOM is not exploded. --+

JNJG----+ Sales and Distribution --+Sales

--+

Sales Documents----+

Sales Document Item --+Define Item Categories

The item categ01y of the main item in the BOM, TAN, does not support the explosion of BOMs in the sales document (the "Structure scope" field is blank).


2009


451~

TSCM60


3.

In future, you only want to determine prices for the finished product. You want to list the individual components of the finished product for informational purposes. Change the material master for your material T-FUA## so that pricing only takes place at main item level. a)

-+Logistics-+ Sales and Distribution -+Master Data-+ Products-+ Material -+ 1)·ading Goods -+ Change Choose Sales: Sales Org. Data 2

4.

Sales organization:

1000

Distr. channel:

10

Item category group:

ERLA

Check the effects of your change in the sales document. Create an order for your customer T-S62A## and your material T-FUA##. The purchase order number is ##L0605-TA08. Does the system explode the bill of material?

Which items affect the net value of the order?

a)

5.

The BON! is e:xploded. Pricing is on(rpeiformedfor !he main item. As a result, the net value ofthe order is calculated exclusively from this item.

Change your material T-FUA## so that pricing only takes place at sub-item level. a)

-+Logistics -+Sales and Distribution-+ Master Data-+ Products -+ Material -+ Tl·ading Goods -+ Change Choose Sales: Sales Org. Data 2.

6.

Sales Organization:

1000


10

Item category group:

LUMF

Check the effects of your change in the sales document. Does the system explode the bill of material?

Which items affect the net value of the order? PO number: ##L0605-0R09 Continued on next page

~452


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Controlling Sales Documents • Item Category

a)

The BOM is exploded. Pricing is only pe~formedfor the sub-item. As a result, the net value ofthe order is calculated exclusively ji·om the sub-items.

-20_0_9______________________©_c_2_0_09--SA_P__A_G_._A_II-rig_h_ts--re-se_N_e_d-.--------------~4~5~3~~

Unit 11: .Controlling Sales Documents

TSCM60

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Identify and explain the imp011ant control parameters for item categories Create a new item category

Configure the system so that item categories are automatically assigned to a sales document type Control settings for bills of material in the sales document.

~454


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Controlling Sales Documents- Schedule Line Categories

Lesson: Controlling Sales Documents - Schedule Line Categories Lesson Overview This lesson describes tasks, control options and automatic determination of scheduling line categories.

e

.

.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: IdentifY and explain the most important control parameters for schedule line categories Create a new s·chedule line category Configure your settings so that schedule line categories are automatically assigned to each sales document item

Business Example Changes that affect the entire logistics process are taking place at your company, IDES AG. One of the interfaces to the other logistics modules represents the schedule lines of the sales documents. As a result, you have to find out about the control parameters and automatic determination of schedule line categories. $~"'~'""\"'"

}t,,;;

PS1 Pre:.Sales Phase:%'0 )\'\, \ "' 2 i>Y "1 ,», \~"L'

= Inquiry schedule line

AT BN

cV

= Scheduling agreement

= Schedule line in quotation

with consumpation-based MRP

without MRP

v

\

~;

,,

l

\

)l

' Sales Phase /\'

)( j0

'

)

I CP CO

(l

= Order schedule line with

=

planning Consignment issue without availability check

"'

Schedule line In returns without MRP

material requirements

'

''

Complaints:· 1

DO

=

Consignment returns

Figure 163: Examples of Schedule Line Categories

2009


455 r:!E."'"

TSCMSO


Various schedule line categories are delivered with the system to provide different control options for the items throughout the sales process. You can use them as model examples or as templates for creating your own schedule line categories. The schedule line category is defined with a two-character key. The standard system already includes keys that often indicate the usage of the schedule line category. The first character indicates the sales process in which the schedule line category is used. A = Inquiry

B = Quotation

C =Order

D =Returns

The second character in the key indicates what happens to the schedule line within logistics. D =No inventory management

X =No inventory management with goods issue

N=NoMRP

P = Material requirements planning

V = Consumption-based planning You can decide if you would like to keep the standard keys or define your own so that the abbreviation refers to your sales document types and how the category is configured.

• Assigning basic;· • • functions· • ,

Figure 164: Schedule line category

~456


2009

TSCM60


~Schedule

Line Categories

Schedule lines contain delivery dates and quantities as well as information about the requirements transfer and inventory management. They are a prerequisite for delivering materials. In Customizing for item categories, you decide if you are going to allow schedule lines for the item. You can assign schedule line categories to each item category. By defining a schedule line category, you determine which schedule lines are actually relevant for delivery. You need to activate the relevant to delivery indicator if you want the goods to be physically delivered. In the schedule line category, you set the movement type to control which changes to quantities and values are posted to inventory accounting. Inventory management is responsible for maintaining the movement types. Movement types have been configured for all processes in the SAP standard system. Many of the movement types relevant to sales are between 601 and 699. You can deactivate requirements transfer and availability checks at schedule line level. A purchase requisition is a prerequisite for a purchase order and this can be automatically generated from the sales document. To do this, you need to configure the purchase order type as well as item and account assignment categories in the purchase order. If you activate a delivery block in the schedule line category, the block is automatically set at schedule line level in the sales document. Function

Example

Figure 165: Controlling Schedule Lines in Sales Documents Examples in the standard SAP system. Schedule lines in quotations are not relevant for delivery. The requirements transfer is inactive in the schedule line category. Goods movements are not necessary in your warehouses so no movement type is needed.

2009


457~

TSCM60


Since schedule lines from category CP generate delivery items in the sales order, the 'relevant to delivery' indicator is activated. The requirements transfer is active in the schedule line category. Complete Customizing for requirements transfer (for example, for requirements planning) requires you to define and assign the requirements class. The goods movement is controlled by movement type 60 I. With this movement type, when the goods issue for the delivery is posted, the quantity shipped is taken from unrestricted use stocks. If you want a returns delivery to follow a return order, you need a schedule line category that is relevant for delivery. In this case, transferring requirements is not necessary. Movement type 651 enables you to make sure that a goods receipt goes to blocked stock returns. This replaces the usual good issue.

SaleS document '--

--L-..

Jltem r-·---·---··-Item

1.

Figure 166: Assigning Schedule Line Categories to Item Categories

Schedule line categories are assigned to item categories. The purpose of this assignment is to: Configure the system to propose a schedule line category automatically when you create an order Determine the schedule line categories that the user can choose instead of the system proposal. The assignment is influenced by the materials requirements planning (MRP) type in the material master record.

~458


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Controlling Sales Documents - Schedule Line Categories

The system uses two steps to automatically determine the schedule line category: First, it tries to determine the schedule line category using the key combination of item category and MRP type. If no schedule line category is found, the system searches for the key combination of item category I no MRP type.

2009


459~


~460


TSCM60

2009

TSCM60


~Schedule

Line Categories

Exercise 20: Controlling Sales Documents -Schedule Line Categories Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: Configure Customizing of schedule line categories Explain and control automatic detennination of schedule line categories.

Business Example The schedule lines contain delivery quantities and dates for a sales document item. Later on in the business process, a schedule line can either create an item in a delivery or it can transfer the data to a subsequent sales document. You use the schedule line categmy to decide, for example, whether the system should check availability or transfer requirements for that schedule line.

Task 1: I.

Customer T-S62A## requests a quotation for 10 units of material T-ATA##.

2.

Enter the quotation with purchase order number ##L0605-QT02. The quotation should be valid for one month.

3.

On what date has the delivery of the schedule line been confirmed? Confirmed date:

4.

Which item and schedule line categories have been determined? Item category:

Schedule line category:

5.

How does the schedule line category control this schedule line? Item relev. for delivery: Continued on next page

2009


461~

TSCM60


Requirements transfer:

Availability check:

6.

Try to deliver the quotation (change the delivery selection date to the schedule line confirmed date). Can you do it?

Task 2: I.

Complete the following table: Schedule line cat.

Description

AT

Inquiry sched line

BN

NoMRP

BP

Deterministic Materials planning!MRP

Availability

Requirements transfer


Movement type


~462


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Controlling Sales Documents -Schedule line Categories

Schedule line cat.

Description

CN

.~Vo

Availability



Movement type

ma-

feria! requiremenls

planning

(MRP)

CP

Delermin-

istic Materials planning

DN

Returns

Task 3: After checking your quotation thoroughly, customer T-S62A## places an order with you. Create the sales order. I.

Enter a standard order with reference to the quotation created in the previous exercise (order will use purchase order number ##L0605-0RJO). Copy the quotation into the order in full.

2.

On what date is the delivery of the schedule line confirmed? Confirmed date: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

3.

Which item and schedule line categories have been determined? Item category:


4.

How does the schedule line category control this schedule line? Item relev. for delivery:


2009


463~

TSCM60


Movement type:


Availability check:

5.

Try to deliver the order. Is this possible?

6.

Optional Which order screens contain infonnation about the movement type and delivery blocks linked to schedule lines? Movement type:

Delivery block:

Task 4: Complete the following table: I. Item category

MRP type

Proposed schedule line category

Manual schedule line category


ItCa

Typ

SchLC

MSLCa

MSLCa

AFN AFN

ND

AGN TAN TAN

VM Continued on next page

~464


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Controlling Sales Documents -Schedule Line Categories

Item category

MRPtype




ItCa

Typ

SchLC

MSLCa

MSLCa

TANN REN KBN KEN

ND

Task 5: Optional I.

Which schedule line category does the system determine for an item in item category TAN if the MRP type for the material is P3 (MRP fixing type -3-)? Schedule line category:

Which search key does the system use? Key:

-2-00_9_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _©_2-00-9-SA_P_A_G_._A_II_r-ig_h_ts_r_e-se_rv_e_d__---------4.-6~5

~

TSCM60


Solution 20: Controlling Sales Documents - Schedule Line Categories Task 1: I.

Customer T-S62A## requests a quotation for I 0 units of material T-ATA##. a)

Create this quotation. --+

2.

Logistics --+ Sales and Distribution --+ Sales --+ Quotation --+ Create

Enter the quotation with purchase order number ##L0605-QT02. The quotation should be valid for one month. a)

3.

Quotation type:

QT


##L0605-QT02

Valid to:

One month fi'om today

On what date has the delivery of the schedule line been confirmed? Contlnned date: Select the item and choose Schedule lines (or item. a)

4.

Which item and schedule line categories have been determined? Item category: AGN Standard item Schedule line category: B V Consumption MRP a)

5.

How does the schedule line category control this schedule line? Item relev. for delivery: Continued on next page

~466


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Controlling Sales Documents - Schedule Line Categories

deactivated

Requirements transfer: deactivated

Availability check: deactivated

a)

Go to definition of the schedule line category. IMG -->Sales and Distribution -->Sales--> Sales Documents--> Schedule Lines--> Define Schedule Line Categories

6.

Try to deliver the quotation (change the delivery selection date to the schedule line confinned date). Can you do it?

a)

No. The schedule lines of the quotation are not relevant for delivery

Task 2: I.

Complete the following table: Schedule line cat.

Description

Availability

Requirements

transfer AT

Inquily sched. line

BN

NoMRP

BP

Deterministic Materials planning!MRP

X


Movement type

X


-20_0_9_______________________ ©_2_0_09__S_A_P_A_G_._A_II-ri-gh_t_s-re_s_e_N_ed-.----------------4·6~7~

TSCM60


Schedule line cat.

Description

CN

Nomaferia! requirements planning (MRP)

CP

Deterministic Materials planning

DN

Returns

Availability

X


X

Item •·elevant for delivery

Movement type

X

601

X

601

X

651

a)

Task 3: After checking your quotation thoroughly, customer T-S62A## places an order with you. Create the sales order. I.

Enter a standard order with reference to the quotation created in the previous exercise (order will use purchase order number ##L0605-0RJO). Copy the quotation into the order in full. a)

2.

Choose Create with reference and enter the number of the quotation.

On what date is the delivery ofthe schedule line confirmed? Confirmed date: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ a)

3.

Select the item and choose Schedule lines for item.

Which item and schedule line categories have been determined? Item category: TAN


cv a)

See task Continued on next page

~468


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Controlling Sales Documents -Schedule Line Categories

4.

How does the schedule line category control this schedule line? Item relev. for delivery:

Movement type:

601 GD Goods delivery Requirements transfer: X

Availability check: X

a) 5.

Try to deliver the order. Is this possible?

a) 6.

Call the order and choose Sales document--> Deliver.Yes.

Optional Which order screens contain information about the movement type and delivery blocks linked to schedule lines? Movement type:

Delivery block:

a)

Select the item and choose Schedule lines for item. Select the item again and choose Schedule line details or press the Proczll"ement or Shipping pushbutton. The movement type is located on the Procurement tab page. The delivery block is located on the Shipping tab page.


2009


469~

TSCM60


Task 4: Complete the following table: I.

Item category

MRP type




ItCa

Typ

SchLC

MSLCa

MSLCa

AT

BP

AFN AFN

ND

AT

AGN

BN

TAN

CP

TAN

VM

cv

TANN

ND

CN

REN

DN

KBN

ill

KEN

Q_

BP

EO co

a)

Task 5: Optional

I.

Which schedule line category does the system determine for an item in item category TAN if the MRP type for the material is P3 (MRP fixing type -3-)? Schedule line category:

CP Which search key does the system use? Key: Item category: TAN


~470


2009

lesson: Controlling Sales

TSCM60

Documents~

Schedule Line Categories

MRP type: blank a)

Hint: No explicit entries are maintained for item catego1y and MRP type in the assignment table. In this case, the system checks whether an entry without a definition of the MRP type exists for the item category involved.

2009


471~


TSCM60

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Identity and explain the most important control parameters for schedule line categories

Create a new schedule line category Configure your settings so that schedule line categories are automatically assigned to each sales document item

~472


2009

TSCM60

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: Describe the basic principles of business process control in sales. Identify the elements that control the sales documents Name examples of different sales document types used for different business processes Explain what the sales document type does Create Customizing settings for the sales document type Restrict the validity of sales document types to sales areas Identity and explain the important control parameters for item categories Create a new item category Configure the system so that item categories are automatically assigned to a sales document type Control settings for bills of material in the sales document. IdentifY and explain the most important control parameters for schedule line categories Create a new schedule line category Configure your settings so that schedule line categories are automatically assigned to each sales document item

2009


473~

TSCMSO

Unit Summary

~474


2009

Unit 12 Data Flow Unit Overview This unit also describes how to map business processes in sales by creating documents related to existing documents.

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: Use document flow Understand and influence how data is passed on between sales documents at header, item and schedule line level Use the completion rule for item categories to control creation of documents

with reference. Understand and intluence how data is passed on between sales documents at item and schedule line level and recognize possibilities for individual company adjustments. heade~.

Unit Contents Lesson: Data Flow in the Application ....................................... .476 Exercise 21 : Data Flow in the Application .............................. .483 Lesson: Copying Control. ..................................................... .492 Exercise 22: Copying Control. ........................................... .497

2009


475~

TSCM60

Unit 12: Data Flow

Lesson: Data Flow in the Application Lesson Overview This lesson describes the mapping of business processes in sales by the creation of sales documents with reference to preceding documents. This enables document flows to be built up that describe business processes. Information is transferred from the preceding document to the subsequent document (data flow). A status update is also made to the preceding document. The document flow can be analyzed and provides an overview of the business process.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lessoR, you will be able to: Use document flow Understand and influence how data is passed on between sales documents at header, item and schedule line level Use the completion rule for item categories to control creation of documents with reference.

Business Example The different sales processes at your company. IDES AG. need to differentiate how they copy data from a preceding document to a subsequent document The update of status information in the preceding document also has to be controlled differently, depending on the process. You need to model the processes as document flow lists.

Figure 167: Create with Reference:Dialog

~476


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Data Flow in the Application

You can create a sales document with reference to a preceding document from both the initial screen and during document processing. The process is controlled using a uniform dialog box. The dialog box contains the six tab pages for Inquiry, Quotation, Orde1; Contract, Scheduling agreement and Billing document, from which you can choose one. The default tab card that appears when you first call up the screen has been determined by the system depending on the sales document category and the Mandatmy reference field. The system then determines the document number of the required reference document. When you choose Copy, the system copies the reference document completely and if you choose Item selection, you can select certain items and change the quantities before they are copied (see next slides).

so document 5376' Sold-to party: 1000 Business data Item Material Quantity Date Price 10 M1 40 G4.01. 100.00 20 M2 50 04.01. 150,00 30 M3 100 04.01. 120,00

Figure 168: Create with Reference: Item Selection (1)

>>» so document: 5376 Sold-to party: 10,00

Business data

'

Dialog Create with reference


-20_0_9______________________©_c_2_0_09_S_A_P__A_G___ A_II_rig-h-ts--re-se-~-e-d-.--------------~4"7~7~~

TSCM60

Unit 12: Data Flow

»»

Jtem Material Amount Date Price 10 M1 40 06.20 100.00 30 M3 GO 06.20 120.00


You can create sales documents with reference to documents that already exist. In the process, you can specify a different requested delivery date for the new document. This date is set at header level and for all referenced items in the new document.

You can use the Selection list button to select one or more items in the referenced document and change the order quantities according 10 your custOmer's requirements. This allows you to copy partial quantities or all the items and quantities in the referenced document to the new one directly. Alternatively, you can also copy all the items and quantities directly from the preceding document.

You can create with reference from both the initial screen and during document entry. This allows you to group several quotations for a customer together in a single order. You can create with reference for inquiries, quotations, sales orders. contracts.

scheduling agreements and billing documents. To create with reference, you must first configure the corresponding copying controls. Please note that you should only configure these controls for logical business processes. Example: A free-of-charge subsequent delivery based on a sales order is appropriate. An order based on a free-of-charge subsequent delivery is not appropriate.

~478


2009

TSCM60


SO doCument: 5376

sp doCument

Sold-to party: 1000 Business data

l

item Material Quantity Date Price 10 M1 40 04.01. 100.00

20 30

M2 M3

50 100

04.01. 150.00 04.01. 120.00

Figure 171·: Create with Reference: Transfer

When you create with reference using the Copy pushbutton in the dialog box, the full quantities of all items are copied to the subsequent document. This does not apply to items in the reference document that have been partially or fully completed. Inquiry Sold-to party: ftem . 10

~]

Ma····t·. .·.n.·al Amo.Uilt M1 10

Statos:full~

Order

Quotation

referenc
r !

~

~l

Sold-to party:

i

r

It·· . m M.at·e· r.ial m.· ount.· 10 . M1 . ·;o..

status; partly referenced

I .

Sold-to party:

~~-l

lteni Material Amount j 10 M1 6

If

I .! 1

ts~~ii~ag§,ii[gl:·. IX•

Figure 172: Completion Rule and Reference Status

When you Create with reference to preceding documents, you frequently have to update the infonnation about referred quantities or values. To do this, you have to check the Document flow update field at item level in copy control.

-20_0_9_______________________ ©_2_0_09__ S_A_P_A_G___A_II_ri-gh-ffi--re_s_e~--ed-.----------------4~7~9~

TSCM60

Unit 12: Data Flow

In addition, if you want to restrict the reference to an item (for example, only until the full quantity in the preceding document has been referenced), set the appropriate Completion rule in the item category. The status of each item in the preceding document is updated separately, depending on the completion rule of the item category. Examples

Completion rule A: An inquiry item is given "Completed" status as soon as it has been referred to in a quotation. This applies even if only part of the quantity in the quotation is referenced.

Completion rule B: A quotation item is not given "Completedt' status until the complete quantity has been copied to the subsequent order. If only some of the quantity is copied, the quotation item is given the status "Partially referred". This allows you to continue creating orders from this item until the total quantity has been used up. There are additional completion rules for items in contracts. If you enter a reason for rejection, the item receives "Completed" status.

Figure 173: Document Flow- List

A sales process is made up of the sequence of individual process steps recorded as documents. This process chain is captured in the document flow. Document flows are updated for the overall document and for individual items.

~480


2009

TSCM60


You can view all of the documents within the document flow in a list. You can branch directly from the lists to the display of the individual documents and then return to the document flow. In the status overview that can be displayed for each document in the document flow, you can quickly find detailed information about the current status of the sales and distribution process. Example: Order-> Delivery status Outbound delivery _, Picking status -> Billing status Billing document -> Posting status

-20_0_9_____________________©_2_0_0_9_S_A_P_A_G_._A_II-rig_h_ts-r-es_e_N_e-d.---------------4~8~1

~

TSCM60

Unit 12: Data Flow

~482


2009

TSCM60


Exercise 21: Data Flow in the Application Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. you will be able to: Follow how the completion status is updated between documents Follow data transfer between sales documents

Business Example In each step within a business process, you formulate requirements that become prerequisites for the next step. For example, you can define that a quotation can only lead to an order when The sold-to party is identical in both documents The customer's order lies within the validity period of the quotation

Task 1: You receive an inquiry (purchase order number ##L0605-IN02) from customer T-S62A##. The customer requests 50 units each of materials T-ATA## and T-ATB##. The requested delivery date is the first day of the next month. I.

Enter the inquiry.

2.

What is the status of the items in the inquiry? Total processing

Rejection status

Reference status

Header Item 10 Item 20 3.

After checking with your MRP controller, you know that you can offer the customer the requested quantity for material T-AT.4##, but only 30 units of material T-ATB##. Enter a corresponding quotation (purchase order number ##L0605-AG03) with reference to the inquiry. The quotation is valid for a month.

4.

Which changes does the system make to the document status?


2009


48 3 t:'?E."

Unit 12: Data Flow

TSCM60

Total processing

Rejection status

Reference status

Inquiry Header Item 10 Item 20 Quotation Header Item 10 Item 20 5.

Once your customer has checked the quotation, they order the first item with the complete quantity in the quotation, but initially only order 20 units of the second item. Create the trade fair## order (purchase order number ##L0605-Z4##0.J). '

6.

Which changes are made to the status of the quotation? Total processing

Rejection status

Reference status

Header Item 10 Item 20 7.

Your customer then informs you that they do not want the open quantity of item 20 in the quotation because the product is too expensive. Reject the item in the quotation and check the changes to the status. Reason for rejection: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Total processing

Rejection status

Reference status

Header Item 20

Continued on nexl page

~484


2009

TSCM60


Task 2: I.

Try to create another order with reference to the quotation.

2.

Is this possible?

Why I why not?

-20_0_9_______________________ ©_2_0_09__S_A_P_A_G_._A_II-ri-gh_t_s-re_s_e~--ed-.----------------4.8n,;5~

TSCM60

Unit 12: Data Flow

Solution 21: Data Flow in the Application Task 1: You receive an inquiry (purchase order number ##L0605-IN02) from customer T-S62A##. The customer requests 50 units each of materials T-ATA## and T-ATE##. The requested delivery date is the first day of the next month. 1.

Enter the inquiry. a)

Create the inquiry and save the document. -->Logistics--> Sales and Distribution--> Sales--> Jnquily--> Create

2.

What is the status of the items in the inquiry? Total processing

Rejection status

Reference status

Header Item 10 Item 20 a)

-->Logistics--> Sales and Distribution--> Sales--> Inquiry--> Display Choose Status o\ erview.

Total processing

Rejection status

Keference status

Header

Open

Nothing rejected

Not •·eferenced

Item 10

Open

Nothing rejected

Not referenced

Item 20

Open

Nothing rejected

Not referenced


['E."' 486

©


2009

TSCM60


3.

After checking with your MRP controller, you know that you can offer the customer the requested quantity for material T-ATA##, but only 30 units of material T-ATE##. Enter a corresponding quotation (purchase order number ##L0605-AG03) with reference to the inquiry. The quotation is valid for a month. a)

Create the quotation. ---+Logistics---+ Sales and Distribution---+ Sales---+ Quotation---+ Create

Choose Create with Reference---+ lnquhy, enter the inquiry number, choose copy and reduce the quantity of the second item. 4.

Which changes does the system make to the document status? Total processing

Rejection status

Reference status ·

Inquiry Header Item I 0 Item 20 Quotation

Continued on 1iext page

2009


487~

Unit 12: Data Flow

TSCMSO

Total processing

Rejection status

Reference status


-> Logistics-> Sales and Distribution ->Sales Display

->

Quotation

->

Choose Document flow, select one of the documents, and choose Status

overvie1v. Total processing

Rejection status

Reference status

Header

Completed

Nothing rejected

Fully referenced

Item 10

Completed

Nothing rejected

Fully referenced

Item 20

Completed

Nothing rejected

Fully referenced

Header

Open

1'i othing rejected

Not referenced

Item 10

Open

Nothing rejected

Not referenced

Item 20

Open

Nothing rejected

Not referenced

Inquiry

Quotation

5.

Once your customer has checked the quotation, they order the first item with the complete quantity in the quotation, but initially only order 20 units of the second item. Create the trade fair## order (purchase order number ##L0605-ZA ##04}. a)

Create the trade fair order. ---+

Logistics ---+ Sales and Distribution ---+ Sales

---+

Order ---+ Create

Choose Create with Reference-> Quotation, enter the quotation number, Choose Copy and reduce the quantity of the second item. 6.

Which changes are made to the status of the quotation? Continued on next page

~488


2009

TSCMGO


Total processing

Rejection status

Reference status


~Logistics ~Sales

and Distribution

~ Sales~

Quotation

~

Display

Choose Status overview.

7.

Total processing

Rejection status

Reference status

Header Being processed

Nothing rejected

Partially referenced

Item 10

Completed

Nothing rejected

Fully referenced

Item 20

Being processed

Nothing rejected

Partly referenced

Your customer then informs you that they do not want the open quantity of item 20 in the quotation because the product is too expensive. Reject the item in the quotation and check the changes to the status. Reason for rejection: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -


2009


489~

Unit 12: Data Flow

TSCM60

Total processing

Rejection status

Reference status

Header Item

20 a)

Choose Reason for rejection. Rejection reason: Too expensive

Total processing Header Completed Item

Completed

Rejection status

Reference status

Partially rejected

Partially referenced

Fully rejected

Partly referenced

20

Task 2: I.

Try to create another order with reference to the quotation.

a)

->Logistics-> Sales and Distribution~ Sales-> Order-> Create Choose Create with Reference-> Quotation.

2.

Is this possible?

Why I why not?

a)

You cannot create the quotation because it has already been completed. The system displays the following message:

The reference has already been completely copied or rejected.

~490


2009


TSCM60

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Use document flow Understand and influence how data is passed on between sales documents at header, item and schedule line level Use the completion rule for item categories to control creation of documents with reference.

-2-00_9_______________________ ©_2_0_09__ S_A_P_A_G___A_II_ri-gh_t_s-re_s_e~--ed-.----------------4~9n.1

~

Unit 12: Data Flow

TSCM60

Lesson: Copying Control Lesson Overview This lesson describes elements and control options of copy control.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Understand and influence how data is passed on between sales documents at header, item and schedule line level and recognize possibilities for individual company adjustments.

Business Example It is your responsibility to work out the functions for copying control.

e-

.

• Quotation (QT)

.

J

~"~~~~~ Standard order (OR)_!

'~~~~ Billing doCument (F2L-

. . ..

. .··

I '

Figure 174: Copying Control in Sales and Distribution

~ '4~9~2_----------------©--20_0_9_S_A_P_A_G_._A_II_r-ig-ht_s_~_s_e_N_e-d.-----------------------20_0_9

TSCM60

Lesson: Copying Control

In copying control, you determine which document types can be copied to another document type. Examples of this show how you can create a: Sales document type from a sales doc. type, for example, standard order (OR) +-quotation (QT) Sales document type from a billing doc. type e.g. Credit memo request (G2) +- invoice (F2) Delivery type from a sales document type e.g. Delivery (DL) +-Standard order (OR) Billing doc. type from a sales doc. type e.g. Credit memo (G2) +- Credit memo request (G2) Billing document type from a delivery type e.g. Invoice (FI) +-Delivery (DF) .Billing doc. type from a billing doc. type e.g. Invoice cancellation (S I) +- invoice (Fl) You determine the details ofthe copying procedure in copying control.

Source

Figure 175: Copying Control for Sales Documents

You set up copying control for header, item and schedule line level to match the structure of your sales document.

2009


493~

TSCM60

Unit 12: Data Flow

To control the copying procedure, at each level you create: Routines for data tramfer

These routines control transfer of fields in the preceding document. Copying Requirements

Here you define requirements that are checked when you create a document with reference. If these requirements are not met in a pm1icular case, the system issues a waming or error message and if necessary, terminates processing. Switches

There are switches for setting specific controls for each transaction. For example, you can activate or deactivat~ the transfer of item numbers from the preceding document at header level for sales documents. lfyou enter an invalid value or do not enter a target value at item and schedule line level, the system determines the target from the assignment of the item or schedule line categories. Any value you enter must exist in the item or schedule line category assignment (as an alternative). Quotation

Standard order

~======-_.,-, ~~=G=.=,=.=,=,:da:ta=====-~l General data ~ If customer Is the same Business header data Partner

fGeneral it~;-d;;-------·

Business header data Parbler

f--.::"_::'';:;.•m::;.:ls'7"o::t-+j! -G~-;-.;jjt;~d-,ta- ··---·-·-···-·-- ..

j Business item data , Partners Conditions

not complete (completely copied or cancelled)

! !I

. Business item data · ·· Partners . -1 Conditions

if open quantity is greater than zero

Schedule line data

---'-----·-·----Figure 176: Copying requirements

You can store copying requirements at every level in copying control. Copying requirements contain the specific requirements for each business process. The reference document can only be created if all these requirements have been met.

r::E."" 494


2009

TSCM60


Examples of copying requirements that have been included in the SAP standard system are:

Header level Copying requirement 00 I checks, for instance, whether the sold-to party and the sales area in the source and target document are the same. Item level Copying requirement 301 checks, for instance, whether the item that is to be used as a copy has a reason for rejection or completed status. Schedule line level Copying requirement 50 I ensures that only schedule lines with an open quantity greater than zero are copied. Hint: Routines and requirements are written in ABAP code and they can be processed in Customizing for Sales and Distribution under the menu option "~stem Modifications". Here you should check whether the existing objects are suitable. Normally, you can adjust your system quickly by copying the objects in the standard system and deleting or adding lines of code to them.

2009


495~

TSCM60

Unit 12: Data Flow

~496


2009

TSCM60


Exercise 22: Copying Control Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. you will be able to: Adjust data transfer between sales documents to meet the specific requirements of a business process

Business Example In each step within a business process, you formulate requirements that become prerequisites for the next step. For example, you can define that a quotation can only lead to an order when: the sold-to party is identical in both documents or when The customer's order lies within the validity period of the quotation

Task: You decide in copying control whether the item numbers for the subsequent document should be copied from the preceding document. I.

Was the item numbering in the trade fair order (purchase order number ##L0605-ZA##04 recalculated or taken from the quotation?

2.

Item numbering should be re-detennined when you create an order for order type ZA## with reference to a quotation. Change the settings in copying control accordingly.

3.

Create a quotation for customer T-S62A## that is valid for a month, with purchase order number ##L0605-QT04 and any two items. Enter an order, order type ZA##, with reference to this quotation (purchase order number ##L0605-ZA##05). Copy both items. Check the item numbering in the quotation and the sales order. Item numbers in quotation: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Item numbers in order: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

-20_0_9______________________©_c_2_00_9_S_A_P__A_G_._A_II-rig-h-ts--re-se-~-.-d-.--------------~4~9~7~~

TSCM60

Unit 12: Data Flow

Solution 22: Copying Control Task: You decide in copying control whether the item numbers for the subsequent document should be copied from the preceding document. I.

Was the item numbering in the trade fair order (purchase order number ##L0605-ZA##04 recalculated or taken from the quotation?

a)

Compare the two documents.

The document numbers have been copied from the quotation. Othenvise, the item numbers would be generated in increments of 100. . 2.

Item numbering should be re-determined when you create an order for order type ZA## with reference to a quotation. Change the settings in copying control accordingly. a)

JMG-> Sales and Distribution-> Sales-> Maintain Copy Control for Sitles Documents ->

Choose Copying control: Sales document to sales document

Choose Change. Choose Position. Target: ZA## Source: QT Select the entry and choose Details. Deselect field "Copy iten1number" and save.

3.

Create a quotation for customer T-S62A## that is valid for a month, with purchase order number ##L0605-QT04 and any two items. Enter an order, order type ZA##, with reference to this quotation (purchase order number ##L0605-ZA##05). Copy both items. Check the item numbering in the quotation and the sales order. Item numbers in quotation: ________________ Item numbers in order: ________________ a)

Verify the settings in the process. Choose Create with Reference-> Quotation. The document numbers are re-determined in the order, and item numbers are generated in increments of 100.

t3!!" 498


2009

TSCM60


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Understand and influence how data is passed on between sales documents at header, item and schedule line level and recognize possibilities for individual company adjustments.

2009


499~

TSCM60

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: Use document flow Understand and influence how data is passed on between sales documents at header, item and schedule line level Use the completion rule for item categories to control creation of documents with reference. Understand and influence how data is passed on between sales documents at header, item and schedule line level and recognize possibilities for individual company adjustments.

W,' 500


2009

7ti/ . ~Hfn·c~j ./fee r
er:;-:

J ""- "'-

r. ""

I

p ri cc t e

\J/

j. a " !()

~/ (...;:

r-/.e." i'f..(!t,._,t

,r

>.-c-1

C'ir>

cr· " G""-f

•

Cc,vG ~ fe_ ·

f<-u. ~~

(J

,.J.t,

'"":s"~.rUnit

13

Special Business Transactions Unit Overview This unit describes special business transactions in Sales and Distribution and how these are mapped using appropriate sales document types, item categories, schedule line categories, and a specific copying controL

Unit Objectives After completing thfs unit, you will be able to: Explain the differences between cash sales and rush orders and their special features Explain how customer consignments are represented in Customizing for sales Control free-of-charge deliveries and subsequent free-of-charge deliveries

Unit Contents Lesson: Special Business Transactions ..................................... 502 Exercise 23: Special Business Transactions ........................... 507

2009


501~

TSCM60

Unit 13: Special Business Transactions

Lesson: Special Business Transactions Lesson Overview This lesson describes the business transactions rush order, cash sale, consignment processing, free delivery and free subsequent delivery and their specific control at the levels sales document type, item category schedule line and copy control.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain the differences between cash sales and rush orders and their special features Explain how customer consignments are represented in Customizing for sales Control free-of-charge deliveries and subsequent free-of-charge deliveries

Business Example Special business transactions occur regularly in the sales process at your company, IDES Inc. You want to support these processes with the SAP system. It is your responsibility to find out about the process variants that are modeled in the standard SAP system.

In the process, you also want to find the control parameters for individual modifications.

8

.

.

Created automatically

Figure 177: Rush Orders

~502


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Special Business Transactions

~·/_.--y~)

/---...././-y-....')

(Rush order§Jand :cash sale~! are sales document types that are used in the sales from 'rfai,(pro~ess or for ~hen the customer needs to pick up their goods immediately from the warehouse. In the rush order sales document type, the immediate delivery S\Vit~h and delivery type DF are configured. When you save a ;~sho;der, the syst~m automatically creat-;$a delivery of type LE ~-·····-··~Once the goods have been withdrawn from the warehouse, picking and posting goods issue can begin. When you create the billing documents (for example in collective processing), the system prints the invoice papers and sends them to the customer.

+---X--- ...

Figure 178: Cash Sales

cs

>

In the sales document type for cash sales, the immediate delivery switch and delivery type ~ are configured. When you save the cash sale, the system automatically creates a delivery of type BY and prints a document that can be given to the customer as an invoice.

--

You control the invoice papers with output type RD03, contained in the output determination procedure for order type CS. Once the goods have been withdrawn from the warehouse, picking and posting of the goods issue can begin. An order-related billing index is generated automatically. This updates the billing due list. Billing type BY is created while the billing due list is being processed. The system does not print invoices during billing. ·~

2009

>


503~

TSCM60


~

j D Picking : B Goods issue ~ B Billing document

,

Cl

.•

/

Cj!--'J

(C-;;'nsignm'-e-n-ct-pi:-c-:-k--u·~p~ BOrder I B lnbounddelivery I

I

D Picking B Goods receipt 1 , ....D Billing document 1 .. ____ .. , _______ .-'

____________

___

1

--~

issue ( . Consignment BOrder J B Delivery

------

J

I/' £-:f

~R/GO t" p..

L_ _____ _

(Consignment return' BOrder Delivery I DEJ Picking Goods receipt I\ El'El' Billing document --...,

__ __ _______ ,

,

~--------

/

Figure 179: Consignment Processing

In consignment processing, goods are delivered to the custom..,.L.llJ!tLemain.1!.1l< property ofth~coJJJ.Pill!Y~ntil theyare actually-used.- An-invoice is not created uritlfihec-;;;tomer withdrawsg.oods the consignment stock. Up until that point, the customer has the right to return consignment goods.

tFom

You process consignment fill-up with order type CF. The goods issue sets up a special stock at thecliStOiilef~-fhe goods remain in the valuated stocks of the delivering plant however. This transaction isn't billed because the consignment stock remains the property of your company. Consignment issue is processed with order type Cl. When goods are issued, both the customer special stock and the stock in the delivering plant are reduced. This transaction is relevant for billing. If the customer returns the goods, you can represent this with order type g> (consignment pick-up). This transaction credits the special customer stock during the goods issue. Like the consignment fill-up, this transaction is not relevant for billing. If you want to reverse a consignment issue, you can process this with document type CONR (consignment return):Thegoods receipt sets up the special stock at the customer's again. A credit memo is generated based on the consignment returns.

~504


2009

TSCM60


LF Delivery

M1 10 PC

RE Return

LF Delivery

M1 10

M1 10 PC

Figure 180: Deliveries Free of Charge and Subsequent Deliveries

FO

You create a deli vel)' free-of-charge document when you want to send your customer a sample, for example. You enter a subsequent delivery free-of-charge document, for example, when you need to deliver material for an order due to a complaint. Customizing for sales document type SDF determines that this transaction requires a preceding document. The relevant copying controls must be set up for all preceding documents that might be u5ea. tor example. copying control for SDF from an RE (returns order). By activating a delivery block in the sales document type, you ensure that delivery free-of-charge o~elivery free-of-charge transactions are not released for delivel)' until they have been checked by the relevant employee. lfthe employee decides that the delivery should not take place, he or she can maintain a relevant reason for rejection in the sales document. In Customizing for item categories, you determine that items in sales document types FD and SDF are free of charge (for example with KLN or KLX). You can also decide what happens to these items with regard to pricing and billing there.

2009


505~

TSCM60


~~ ~0-) -~i rJ< ( J! > (

I"''(') --)

-~ ( ) ·~'>

';;..,-

\,;

f-t S

1D t
If'. 1:

-> i

IU.tv-gf_ •

-» g·(A: (If

->

·

d.tJ. '-'"'cfl I "'><:J c., &rf.··", I a.

t::;r, c.

pnc

,) '

( ; ,..,,~~A:~

procJ»rc o C

-~ -7~ru- r~

-:

Is (~ "'F c&.!f)

<)/I '

SQ F ~ C,

eNJ.re;:(

Co 4"" I

-;)

~.,,en& ,v.c..-.Je,~

_:,~oc.. .:>J .,.,

~ 506

f"''c

IV! Fro

r~co_dJ.ht " t~-e<~

C

c

__ 1:;;


2009

TSCM60


Exercise 23: Special Business Transactions Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: Explain how complex business processes such as consignment processing are handled Explain how to control document types FD and SDF.

Business Example Consignment processing offers your partners great advantages. Your customers manage the consignment stock themselves and can access the goods in the consignment warehouse at any time. They do not have to pay until the goods are issued and then only for the amount that has been used. There are two different cases that involve dispatching goods free of charge to the customers: The free of charge delivery of advertising materials and subsequent delivery within returns processing.

Task 1: You agree to make material T-ATE## available immediately as consignment goods for customer T-S62.4##. Hint: Check the stocks (plant 1200) in another session mode.

You can call up the stock overview with the following menu path: ~Logistics~

Materials Management~ Inventory Management

~Environment~ Stock~

I.

Stock Overview

Check the consignment material stock. Unrestricted use:

Consignment stock:


2009


507~

TSCM60


2.

Send 100 units of the material to the customer's consignment warehouse by entering a consignment fill-up (purchase order number ##L0605-CFOJ). Don't forget to create a delivery and a transfer order and to post the goods issue. Hint: Create the delivery directly from the order.

Menu path: -->Sales document--> Deliver

Hint: Create a transfer order directly from the delivery.

Menu path: Next functions--> Create transfer request

Hint: Use the following settings:

3.

-

Warehouse number:

012

Warehouse (Lean) Dresden

-

Foreground/Background:

D

Processing in the background

-

Adopt pick quantity:

2

(copy picked quantity to delivery as delivery quantity as delivery quamity and post Gl)


Consignment stock:

4. Try to create a billing document from the delivery document. Is this possible?

Why? Continued on next page

~508


2009

TSCM60


5.

The customer informs you that they have used 50 units of the material in the consignment warehouse. Enter a consignment issue (purchase order number ##L0605-C/OJ). Deliver the order and post the goods issue.

Hint: You can post the goods issue directly from the delivery, as the goods do not physically move in your warehouse (no transfer order required).

Create the delivery directly from the order. Post the goods issue directly from the delivery.

Menu p11th: ->Edit-> Post goods issue 6.


Consignment stock:

7.

Bill the consignment issue. Is this possible?

Why?

8.

The customer informs you that they don't need the remaining consignment goods. Enter a consignment pick-up (purchase order number ##L0605-CPOJ). Deliver the order and post the goods receipt.

9.


Consignment stock:


2009


509~

TSCM60


I 0.

Bill the consignment pick-up. Is this possible?

Why?

Task 2: I.

Display consignment fill-up and consignment issue with purchase order numbers ##L0605-CFOI and ##L0605-CIOJ. Which item and schedule line categories did the system determine? Item category

Schedule line cat.

Consignment fill-up Consignment issue

Task 3: I.

How and why are these schedule line categories different from each other?

Task 4:

~ 510

I.

What are the differences in Customizing for sales document types FD and SDF?

2.

How can you ensure the items in documents of this type are really delivered free of charge?


2009

TSCM60


Solution 23: Special Business Transactions Task 1: You agree to make material T-ATE## available immediately as consignment goods for customer T-S62A##.

Hint: Check the stocks (plant 1200) in another session mode. You can call up the stock overview with the following menu path:

-->Logistics--> Materials Management--> Inventory Management ~ Environment~ Stock~

I.

Stock Overview

Check the consignment material stock. Unrestricted use: 2000

Consignment stock: 0

a)

Logistics---). Materials Management---). Inventory Management---). Environment--> Stock--> Stock Overview


2009


511~

TSCM60


2.

Send I 00 units of the material to the customer's consignment warehouse by entering a consignment fill-up (purchase order number ##L0605-CFOJ). Don't forget to create a delivery and a transfer order and to post the goods issue.

Hint: Create the delivery directly from the order.

Menu patlt: -+Sales document-+ Deliver Hint: Create a transfer order directly from the delivery. Menu path: Next functions--> Create transfer request


-

Warehouse

012


D

Processing in the background

2

(copy picked quantity to delivery as delivery quantity as delivery quantity and post Gl)

number:

-

Foreground/Background:

-

a)

3.


Logistics-+ Sales ant! Distribution-+ Sales-+ Order-+ Create-+ Order type: CF Consignment Fill-up -->Sales Document--> Deliver _,.Subsequent Function--;. Transport order


Consignment stock:

a)

4. Try to create a billing document from the delivery document. Continued on next page

~512


2009

TSCM60


Is this possible?

Why?

a)

Logistics--} Sales anti Distribution--)- Billing--). Billing document-?

Create-> Enter document number of delivery Log: The document is not billing-relevant. Cause: Billing Jws not been tlejinetl in Customizing for consignment

fill-ups. There are no default values for sales document type CF for ortler-relatetl anti tlelivery-re/atetl billing documents. Item category KBN is not relevant for billing. 5.

The customer informs you that they have used 50 units of the material in the consignment warehouse. Enter a consignment issue (purchase order number

##L0605-CIOJ). Deliver the order and post the goods issue.

Hint: You can post the goods issue directly from the delivery, as the goods do not physically move in your warehouse (no transfer order required).

Create the delivery directly from the order. Post the goods issue directly from the delivery. Menu path:

a)

--+

Etlit-+ Post goods issue

Logistics--). Sales and Distribution --+Sales--+ Order

-)o

Create--?

Order type: C/ Consignment issue --).Sales document--+ Deliver --+

6.

Menu path

--+

Post goods issue

Check the consignment material stock. Unrestricted use: 1900 Consignment stock:


2009


513~


TSCM60

50 a)

7.

Bill the consignment issue. Is this possible? Yes

Why?

8.

a)

Logistics--> Sales am/ Distribution--> Billing--> Billing document-> Create--> Enter document number of delivery

b)

Cause: A delivery-related billing document has been defined for item category KEN in Customizing. Bi/ling document type F2 has been proposed for delivery-related billing in sales document type CJ.

The customer informs you that they don"! need the remaining consignment goods. Enter a consignment pick-up (purchase order number ##L0605-CPOI). Deliver the order and post the goods receipt. a)

Logistics ___,. Sales mul Distribution ___,. Sales ___,. Order --"' Create ___,. Order type: CP Consignment pick-up

b)

-->Sales document-> Deliver

___,.Edit___,. Post gootls issue 9.


Consignment stock: 0 a) I 0.

Bill the consignment pick-up. Is this possible? No

Why? Continued on next page

~514

© 2009 SAP AG. All righls reserved.

2009

TSCM60


a)

Log: A billing type could not be determined. Cause: Billing has not been defined for the consignment pick-up.

There are no default values for sales document type CP for orderaml delivery-relatet! billing documents. Delivery type LR does not contain a default order typefromwilicil alternative default values for order- ami delivery-relatet! billing documents could be determined. In addition, item category KANis not refeVlmt for billing.

Task 2: I.

Display con5ignment fill-up and consignment issue with purchase order numbers ##L0605-CFOI and ##L0605-CIOJ. Which item and schedule line categories did the system determine? Item category

Schedule line cat.

Consignment fill-up

KBN

EO

Consignment issue

KEN

co

a)

Task 3: I.

How and why are these schedule line categories different from each other?


2009


515~

TSCM60


a)

Schedule line cat.

EO:

Schedule line cat.

CO:

Movement type

63/(GI Consignment

Movement type

633(01 Goods

loan) Issue Customer Consignment)

Tlleji/1-up posts tile releV
Task 4: I.

What are the differences in Customizing for sales document types FD and SDF?

a)

2.

How can you ensure the items in documents of this type are really delivered free of charge?

a)

~516

Entry C in tile "Reference mandatory" field means that document type SDF can only be created with reference to an order.

Tile item categories for these order types are not relevant for billing.


2009

TSCMSO

e

..


Lesson Summary

.

You should now be able to: Explain the differences between cash sales and rush orders and their special features Explain how customer consignments are represented in Customizing for sales Control free-of-charge deliveries and subsequent free-of-charge deliveries

-20_0_9______________________©_c_2_0_09--SA __ P_A_G_._A_II-ri-gh-ts--re_s_eN--ed-.--------------~5~1~7~

TSCM60

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: Explain the differences between cash sales and rush orders and their special features Explain how customer consignments are represented in Customizing for sales Control free-of-charge deliveries and subsequent free-of-charge deliveries

~ 518

©


2009

I

are

C1A.d

u!Mfl

rzrad

0-"'

!cQ,-,

I MM..JLdJ

ccui,

-/f-e-

c4}.ef(

c

trM

fS?,(e

are

~~

T-n --/M? to k:ru~ ·

1)i\.UJC

A.u_J

Unit 1 Incompleteness Unit Overview This unit describes the function of the incompleteness check. During sales document processing, the system can check to see whether all necessary information for the document has been recorded. If not, the document is incomplete. The consequences of this incompleteness can be controlled enterprise-specifically.

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: Understand the incompletion log and process incomplete orders. Use Customizing to adjust the incompletion procedure to meet your own requirements.

Unit Contents Lesson: Incompletion Log ..................................................... 520 Lesson: Configuration of the Incompletion Procedure ..................... 524 Exercise 24: Configuration of the Incompletion Log ................... 527

2009


519~

TSCM60

Unit 14: Incompleteness

Lesson: Incompletion Log Lesson Overview The incompleteness log is a list containing all information that has been defined as relevant for the sales document but that has not been processed during sales document processing. This list can be called and processed manually or automatically on saving the sales document. Specific searches can also be made for incomplete documents.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Understand the incompletion log and process incomplete orders.

Business Example A wide variety of information is required to ensure that the sales processes at your company run smoothly. O~der

·

I

sOi'd,Mi~P~-rtY:-__ K1---

', ",

pe-nu~r:---- :--~

Order. tncom leteness L::og "

"X" <;; E1

-;::::::========--1 --:F~~~\ 1

Item 10 Material: M3

] Route: · j Schedule line

:,! ·1

1

Recount 10

Missing data PO number Route

I[_schedule line

[-~:7e~i~I:~~-----Route:

00001

I Schedule line j

I.

Figure 181: Incompletion Log

An incompleteness log is a list of all data essential to your company in a sales document that has not yet been entered in the system. You can define these data fields in Customizing for the incompletion procedure. The system goes directly from the incompleteness log to various views, where you can then edit the incomplete data.

~520


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Incompletion Log

Figure 182: Lists of Incomplete Orders

All employees can list all the incomplete sales documents that they have entered. They can also display certain documents that have been blocked for a particular step in a selection screen, for example, a list of all the documents blocked for shipping due to incompleteness. Incomplete orders can be then called up from the list and completed. When you have finished processing, the system automatically returns to the list of incomplete documents.

2009


521~

TSCM60


'~.;'«'+\ -~~ ''
Sales document

Figure 183: Incomplete Sales Documents

In Customizing for sales document types, the incompletion messages field allows you to control whether incomplete sales documents can be saved or not. If this switch is not set, then the subsequent course of the business process is determined from status groups in the incompleteness procedure. The procedure controls whar effects the incomplete data has on the process. Examples: If the terms of payment are missing, the order can be delivered but it cannot be billed. At the same time. you will not be able to create a new order with reference to an incomplete order. The incompletion log may tell you the purchase order number is missing, but you can continue to process the document.

~522


2009

Lesson: Incompletion Log

TSCM60

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Understand the incompletion log and process incomplete orders.

2009


523~

TSCM60


Lesson: Configuration of the Incompletion Procedure Lesson Overview The incompleteness log is a list containing all information that has been defined as relevant for the sales document but that has not been processed during sales document processing. The relevant information can be defined company-specific for each business transaction in Customizing for the appropriate incompleteness procedure. The consequences of this incompleteness are controlled specifically for each field using the status group.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Use Customizing to adjust the incompletion procedure to meet your own requirements.

Business Example A wide variety of information is required to ensure that the sales processes at your company run smoothly.

The amount of information required can differ depending on the process. It is your responsibility to configure the system in such a way to make sure that people can verifY that the document data is complete during document entry.

You want to control which subsequent functions of the document are blocked depending on which information is missing in the document.

~524


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Configuration of the Incompletion Procedure

e

.

.

QT Quotation

10

OR Standard order ZO Z order

11 11

Figure 184: Controlling the Incompletion Log

The incompletion log differentiates between the following levels: Sales document header Sales document item Sales document schedule line In each procedure, you detennine which fields are checked for completion. You determine areas of validity by assigning procedures. For example, you can assign the incompleteness procedure for the sales document header using the sales document type. Procedure at header level -+ Sales document type Procedure at item level -+ Item category Procedure at schedule line level-+ Schedule line cat. You can also flag partner functions, texts and condition types in pricing as mandatory. If these entries are then missing, a note will appear in the incompletion log.

2009


525~

TSCM60


Figure 185: Status of Incomplete Sales Documents

Incomplete document data affects further processing in different ways. A status group is assigned to each field in the incompletion procedure. When you define the status groups, you decide which steps should be prevented if data is missing. Examples: Incomplete for delivery --->No delivery is possible Incomplete for billing---> No billing is possible Incomplete for pricing---> No order confirmation or billing are possible A status group can contain any number of these consequences. This allows you to control the effects of incomplete data separately for each field.

~526


2009

TSCMSO


Exercise 24: Configuration of the Incompletion Log Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: Use the incompleteness log for sales documents during document processing and control this in Customizing.

Business Example The incompleteness log ensures that you cannot continue with certain steps in the business process when essential data is missing.

Task 1: You would like to ensure that sales documents of type ZA## cannot be left incomplete in sales order processing. I.

Create an order with order type ZA## for customer T-S62A## and material T-ATA## (10 units) and save the document without entering a purchase order number. Can you do it?

2.

Activate the Incomplet. messages indicator for sales document type ZA##.

3.

Create an order with order type Z4## for customer T-S62A## and material T-ATA## (10 units) and save the document without entering a purchase order number. Is this possible?

4.

Process the incompletion log by maintaining purchase order number ##L0605-ZA##07. Save the document.

5.

Delete the Jncomplet. messages indicator for this sales document type.


2009


527~

TSCM60


Task 2: You want to ensure that the name of the contact person (Document header: Tab page Purchase order data, field: Name) who is responsible for the sales order is always entered in trade fair orders. I.

Create the incompleteness procedure Y# with the description Order procedure## (key of the new procedure for each participant group: see the following table): Key:

Y# (see the following table)

Description:

Order procedure ##

Key of the new procedure for each participant group (ignore the system message regarding the namespace conventions):

2.

Group number

Proced.

Group number

Procedure

Group number

Procedure

01

YA

07

YG

13

YM

02

YB

08

YH

14

YN

03

YC

09

Yl

15

04

YD

10

YJ

16

YO yp

05

YE

11

17

06

YF

12

YK YL

18

YQ YR

Copy the field for the ordering party's name BNAME from table VBAK into the procedure. This field will be displayed in the KBES Header- Purchase order data sales order screen. If the ordering party's name is missing in the sales document, the system should not create a delivery. Assign a corresponding status group.

3.

SpecifY that the new incompleteness procedure Y# is valid for sales document type ZA##.

Task 3: Create an order with order type ZA## in sales area 1000 /10 I 00 for customer T-S62A## and your material T-ATA## (10 units). I.

The purchase order number is ##L0605-ZA##08. Save the incomplete document.

2.

Try to deliver the order. Set the selection date to one month from today. What message appears? Continued on next page

~528


2009

TSCM60

2009


3.

Change the order and edit the incompletion log.

4.

Try to deliver the order again. Is this possible?


529~

TSCM60


Solution 24: Configuration of the Incompletion Log Task 1: You would like to ensure that sales documents of type ZA## cannot be left incomplete in sales order processing. I.

Create an order with order type ZA## for customer T-S62A## and material T-ATA## (10 units) and save the document without entering a purchase order number.

Can you do it?

Yes, the incomplete document can be saved. a)

2.

Activate the Incomplet. messages indicator for sales document type ZA##. a)

3.

Logistics--> Sales am/ Distribution -->Sales--> Order (order type ZA##) --> Create

IMG--> Sales anti Distribution -->Sales--> Sales Documents--> Sttles Document Header--> Define Sttles Document Types--> Select document type ZA##--> Activate imlicator--> Save

Create an order with order type ZA## for customer T-S62A## and material

T-ATA## (10 units) and save the document without entering a purchase order number. Is this possible?

No a)

4.

Logistics--> Sttles am/ Distribution -->Sales--> Order (order type ZA##)--> Create

Process the incompletion log by maintaining purchase order number ##L0605-ZA##07. Save the document. a)

-->

Button: Complete data

-->Enter PO number -->

5.

Back

-->

Save

Delete the Jncomplet. messages indicator for this sales document type. a)

(delete the indicator you set above in the JC tlialogfieltl) ---)- see 2 above. Continued on next page

~530


2009

TSCMSO


Task 2: You want to ensure that the name of the contact person (Document header: Tab page Purchase order data, field: Name) who is responsible for the sales order is always entered in trade fair orders. I.

Create the incompleteness procedure Y# with the description Order procedure## (key of the new procedure for each participant group: see the following table): Key:

Y# (see the following table)

Description:

Order procedure##

Key of the new procedure for each participant group (ignore the system message regarding the names pace conventions):

a)

Group number

Proced.

Group number

Procedure

Group number

Procedure

01

YA

07

YO

13

YM

02

YB

08

YH

14

YN

03

YC

09

Yl

15

YO

04

YD

10

YJ

16

yp

05

YE

11

YK

17

YQ

06

YF

12

YL

18

YR

IMG---+ Sales and Distribution Incomplete Items

---+

Basic Functions---+ Log of

---+Define Incompleteness Procedure ~Select

Group A

-+

Dialog Structure: Procedures-+ Button:

Change ---+

2.

Button: New Entries

Copy the field for the ordering party's name BNAME from table VBAK into the procedure. This field will be displayed in the KBES Hettder- Purchase order tfltta sales order screen.


2009


531~

TSCM60

Unit-14: Incompleteness

lfthe ordering party's name is missing in the sales document, the system should not create a delivery. Assign a corresponding status group. a)

-7

Dialog structure: Fields

-7

Maintain entries

-7

Bullon: ,Vew Entries

Status group: 02 -7

Save

-7

Exit

Hint: You can determine the names of tables and fields in the sales document by placing the cursor on the relevant field, pressing Fl and pressing the button: Technical info.

(Document header: Purchase ord?r data tab page, field: Name) 3.

SpecifY that the new incompleteness procedure Y# is valid for sales document type ZA##. a)

IMG---> Sales ami Distribution Incomplete Items.

--->

Basic Functions---> Log of

-7

Assign Incompleteness Procedures

-7

Assign procedures to sales document types - t Maintain entries

-t

Save

-7

Exit

Task 3: Create an order with order type ZA## in sales area 1000 i 10 I 00 for customer T-S62A## and your material T-ATA## (10 units). 1.

The purchase order number is ##L0605-ZA##08. Save the incomplete document. a)

2.

Logistics---> Sitles ami Distribution --->Sales---> Order (order type ZA##) ---> Create

Try to deliver the order. Set the selection date to one month from today. What message appears?

a)

Logistics-> Sales ami Distribution ->Sales-> Order-> Change ->Sales Document-> Deliver Message: Order is incomplete (please maintain)


~532


2009

TSCM60


3.

Change the order and edit the incompletion log. a)

Logistics~

Sales and Distribution ->Sales - t Ortler-+

Change~

Edit-> Log of Incomplete Items--> Select tile ordering p11rty's nmne --> Button: Complete d11t11 --> B11ck 4.

Try to deliver the order again. Is this possible?

Yes. the order can be delivered. a)

2009

-->

Sitles Document--> Deliver


533~

TSCM60


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Use Customizing to adjust the incompletion procedure to meet your own requirements.

f3!7' 534


2009

TSCM60

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: Understand the incompletion Jog and process incomplete orders. Use Customizing to adjust the incompletion procedure to meet your own requirements.

-2-00_9_______________________ ©_2_0_09__S_A_P_A_G_._A_II-ri-gh-ts--re_s_e~--ed-.--------------~5~3~5~

TSCM60

Unit Summary

~536


2009

(]) 1fvl.. S
/6el (i,.f<: a(f -t.~errpccf Jc. ·~-, .f!._e c/De {f..q-1 !~eva JVO/ /(e;/ bee., .enfecJ ~~ .Jk. :·.,crY~pr-cj/D/>

'r·

] i;A. <:..o<-.tiA.e::fl,y~

r ...,c, 2/rw -1 .

A-0

nit 1 Business Partner Unit Overview This unit describes the function and use of the partner roles in the Sales and Distribution process. The configuration of partner roles and partner determination is also introduced.

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: Understand the importance of the partner function concept for the sales and distribution process. Define new partner functions and integrate these into the process chain.

Unit Contents Lesson: Function and Significance of Partner Functions .................. 538 Lesson: Configuration of Partner FunctiQns and Partner Function Determination .................................................................... 544 Exercise 25: Configuration of Partner Functions and Partner Function Determination ............................................................... 551

2009


537~

TSCM60

Unit 15: Business Partner

Lesson: Function and Significance of Partner Functions Lesson Overview This lesson describes the significance and function of partner functions in the sales and distribution process. It focuses on categorization of business partners using partner functions and transfer of partner functions and partner function assignments from the customer master to the sales document.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Understand the importance of the partner function concept for the sales and distribution process.

Business Example As part of your efforts to improve customer service, you want to assign each

of your customers a sales employee as their own personal representative. This information should be available automatically in your sales documents. Your company is also investigating whether you can evaluate this data, in order to obtain criteria for awarding perfonnance-related bonuses to your staff.

Market

Figure 186: Business Partners

Various business pm1ners exist within the marketplace, with various business relationships to each other.

B!i"'

538


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Function and Significance of Partner Functions

Examples of business partners are: Customer Vendor Employee Contact person Examples of business relationships are: I.

Vendor-customer: The yendor acts as the forwarding agent for the customer

2.

Contact person- customer: The contact person is employed at the customer's company Contact person- customer: The contact person is the customer's consultant but does not work in the same company. Customer-customer: Sold-to party and ship-to pm1y are not the same. Employee- contact person: Contact person is looked after individually Employee - customer: Customer manager

3. 4. 5. 6.

e .

.

~=Customer

EZlS'ii] =Vendor c::::J = Contact person c:::J = Personnel number

Figure 187: Partner Types

The business partners that exist in the marketplace are represented in the SAP system by a partner type.

-20_0_9______________________©_c_2_0_09--SA __ P_A_G___A_II_ri-gh-ts--re_s_e~--ed-.--------------~5~3~9~

TSCM60


Partner types AP, KU, LI and PE are defined in partner processing for the Sales and Distribution application module. These are defined as follows: AP Contact person KU Customer LI Vendor PE Personnel Further partner functions (for example, 0 organizational unit. S position A work center) are used in other applications (for example, service management).

AP Contact person Figure 188: Partner Functions While the partner types allow us to distinguish between different business partners, the partner functions represent the roles they play within the business transaction. For example, different customers (customer partners) can assume certain roles in a business transaction. The customer who places the order does not necessarily have to be the same customer who receives the goods or the customer who is responsible for paying the invoice. Assigning partner functions in the SAP system determines the function(s) of particular partners in the sales process. One partner may take on several functions. In the simplest case, all the pm1ner functions within the customer partner type are assigned to one business partner, in other words, the same customer is the sold-to party, ship-to party, payer and bill-to party.

~540


2009

TSCM60


You can enter contact persons for a customer directly in the customer master so

that they are automatically assigned to that customer. The contact person can also be assigned to another customer, for example, in a consultant role. The forwarding agent is an example of a vendor. Employees at your own company (such as sales representatives or clerks) are managed in the employee master records. They can assume partner functions of partner type "Personnel", such as the partner function ER, responsible employee.

Partner functions: Sold~to party: Bill-to party: Payer: Ship-to party:

SP BP PY SH

_Order C1 C1 C1 C1, C2, C3

Proposal

HEADER C1 SP SH : C2

Also valid for items unless agreed otherwise

~~-~---__j

Changes possible if partner function SH is configured at item level

PY py

C1 C1

ITEM2

;"r '

Figure 189: Partners in the Sales Process You can maintain partner relationships both in sales documents and in the master data. Partner relationships are usually already defined in the customer master. These are proposed automatically in the document header when you create a sales document. Providing Customizing permits it, you can change or supplement these relationships manually by going to the partner screen and changing the function assignment.

You decide whether several partners can be assigned to one partner function in the customer master in Customizing. If multiple partners are maintained with the same function, a selection list appears containing these partners when you then enter a sales order. In the sales documents, the system has been configured so that only one partner can be assigned to each partner function. The only exception is for outline agreements (partner functions AA and AW).

2009


541~

TSCM60


You can also define partners at item level in the sales documents. Business partners that are only defined in the header cannot be changed at item level however. You can determine which partner functions have to be entered (mandatory functions). You can prohibit anyone from changing a partner that has already been entered (You can indicate that the sold-to party cannot be changed in the sales document for example). It is also possible to enter or change the address of a partner such as the ship-to party manually. This change does not affect the master record.

~542


2009

TSCM60

e . .


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Understand the importance of the partner function concept for the sales and distribution process.

-20_0_9______________________©_c_2_0_09--SA_P__A_G_._A_Il_rig-h-ts--re_s_eN_e_d-.--------------~5"4'3~~


TSCM60

Lesson: Configuration of Partner Functions and Partner Function Determination Lesson Overview This lesson looks at configuration of partner functions, partner procedures and partner determination.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Define new partner functions and integrate these into the process chain.

Business Example As part of your efforts to improve customer service. you want to assign each of your customers a sales employee as their O\Vn personal representative.

This new "Representative" partner role needs to be implemented in the system by system administration.

>»> I

I Customer master · Sales d.ocument header Sales document item 1 Delivery Billing header Billing item Sales activities (CAS)

I !

Figure 190: Partner Determination Procedure (1)

~544

©


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Configuration of Partner Functions and Partner Function Determination

»» Customer

.------+sales document header Sales document item Delivery Billing header Billing item Sales activities (CAS)

SP

OR Standard order SM Assortment KAB Release order

Sold~to

party

PY Payer SH Ship-to party


Customer

.------+sales document header Sales document item Delivery Billing header Billing item Sales activities (CAS)

Sold-to party

AsSortment Releas'e order

Ship-to party Payer

Sales partner Forwarding agent


-2-00_9_______________________ ©_2_0_09__S_A_P_A_G_._A_II-ri-gh_t_s-re_s_eN--ed-.---------------,5~4~5~

TSCM60


Customer

r-----+ Sales document header Sales document item Delivery Billing header Billing item Sales activity (CAS)

Sold~to party Shlp-.to'party Payer Sales partner Forwarding agent

Standard order Free-of-charge delivery

One-time customers


Partners appear in the system at various levels, such as in the customer master,

sales document header, sales document items and so on. You can define your own partner determination procedures for each of these levels. A partner determination procedure is where you determine which partner functions may or must appear.

You determine areas of validity by assigning procedures. For example. you use the account group to assign the partner determination

procedure for the customer master. Pminer procedures are assigned to partner objects as follows: Partner object:

~546

Assignment key:

Customer master

-+

Account group

Sales document header

-+

Sales document type

Sales document item

-+

Item category in sales

Free-of-charge

-+

Delivery type

Shipment

-+

Shipment type

Billing header

-+

Billing type

Billing item

-+

Billing type

Sales activities (CAS)

-+

Sales activity type


2009

TSCM60


C1

Customer Sales organization:


10

Division Account group

0001

Sold-to party

0002

Ship-to party

0003

Payer

0004

Bill-to party

Number assignment CpD account: Yes/No Default output

Figure 194: Customer Master and Account Group

The account group controls the amount of data and the response of customer master records. Account groups are already defined in the standard SAP system, such as 000 I Sold-to party, 0002 Ship-to party, 0003 Payer, and so on .. You can create additional account groups as necessary. When you detine the account group, you determine: For each data field, whether it is displayed or not and whether maintenance is mandatory. optional. or not possible The number range A number of other control elements, such as for partners and texts of the customer master.

Example: A customer master record for a customer who only acts as a ship-to party (created with account group 0002) requires information relevant for shipping. Billing information is not required, which is why the corresponding fields are not displayed. In contrast to the account group, which controls a customer master record, the partner function determines which partner assumes specific business functions within the sales process.

2009


547~

TSCM60


0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0007

Sold-to party Ship-to party Payer Bill-to party Sales prospect Sales partner

Sold-to party Ship-to party Payer Bill-to party e;p--~'OntacTPefSOn--

FA

Forwarding agent

Figure 195: Permitted Partner Functions per Account Group For organized sales processing, it is important that each customer is only used for the functions within a document that have been assigned to him or her. You can guarantee this by assigning permitted partner functions to each account group. If you choose the customer partner type for a new partner function, you then have to determine which of your customers may be entered for this partner type. Because you control the customers through the account group, you assign all the defined partner functions to each account group. As a result, the account group of a customer also controls the possible partner functions. Examples from the standard system: Customers in the following account groups can be sold-to parties: 0001,0005,0007. CPD, and so on .. Customers from account group 0002 (ship-to pm1y), 0003 (payer) or 0004 (bill-to party) should not take on the function SP (sold-to party).

~548


2009

TSCM60

e


.

.

Order

Partners----!+ SP SH py

Figure 196: Partner Determination for Sales Documents When you create sales documents, business partners are automatically copied from the customer master. In the process, the customer master of the sold-to party is accessed. Several partner relationships are stored in the customer master record for a sold-to pany. The system can also copy a partner function from other customer master records to create a partner for the sales document by specifying the source of the partner function and the determination sequence. When you do, you should note the sequence in which the system determines the partners. Example of indirect partner !unctions:

You have various regular suppliers in various regions. You want the system to determine the forwarding agent in the sales document depending on the ship-to party. In Customizing, you ensure that the system determines the ship-to party by first accessing the master record for the sold-to party. It then accesses the ship-to party's master record to determine the forwarding agent. You can also use other sources to determine business partners in sales documents automatically, such as the tables for customer hierarchy (KNVH), contact persons (KNVK), credit representatives (T024P), and so on ... An analysis function is provided for tracing automatic determination of business partners in sales documents in greater detail.

2009


549~

TSCM60


.

.

·~-cn/L ¥f..Lr ~Q< cfqfc;-,

/

~550


2009

TSCM60


Exercise 25: Configuration of Partner Functions and Partner Function Determination Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: Include and control your own business partners in the master data and business processes

Business Example Your company wants to improve their customer care in the future. You would therefore like to assign a personal representative to important customers, such as customer T-S62C##, who would then be responsible for ensuring that business transactions with that customer run smoothly.

Task 1: I.

Enter a new partner function 9# for the personal representative in Customizing. (Key of the new role for each participant group: see the table below) Key:

9# (see the table below)

Description:

Representative ##

Partner type:

PE

Keys of the new function for each participant group: Group number

Partner function

Group number

Partner function

Group number

Partner function

01

9A

07

9G

13

9M

02

98

08

9H

14

9N

03

9C

09

91

IS

90

04

9D

10

9J

16

9P

OS

9E

II

9K

17

9Q

06

9F

12

9L

18

9R


2009


551~

TSCM60


2.

Create a new partner determination procedure Z## with description Procedure## for the object "customer master". Enter the following partner functions: - SP

Sold-to party (cannot be changed, mandatory function)

- SH

Ship-to party (mandatory function)

- BP

Bill-to party (mandatory function)

- PY

Payer (mandatory function)

- 9#

Representative##

Customer T-S62C## master record is controlled by account group ZK##. Assign the new procedure to account group ZK##. 3.

Extend the customer master record for customer T-S62C## with the personal representative.

Hint: Under Master Data in the Sales and Distribution menu, choose Business Partner -Jo Customer -Jo Change Sales and Distribution -> Button: Sales area data; Tab page: Partner Functions

-Jo

--)>

Enter employee 1 701## in the partner screen as the personal representative and save the master record.

Task 2: Optional In the next step, you want to ensure that the new partner in the master record will be controlled automatically in sales documents of document type ZA##. I.

Create a new partner detennination procedure Y## with description Order procedure## for the object "sales document type".

2.

Enter the following pa11ner functions: - SP


- SH


- BP


- PY


- 9#

Representative ##

- VE

Sales employee Continued on next page

~552


2009

TSCM60


3.

Assign the new procedure to sales document type ZA##.

Task 3: Optional Check whether the partner function 9# Representative ## has been transferred automatically from the customer master record to the order. I.

Create a trade fair## order for customer T-S62C## (purchase order number ##L0605-ZA##06). Check whether the partner function 9# representative ## has been stored as a partner in the order header.

2.

Additionally, enter an employee called Hubert Schwarz as the sales employee.

3.

Can you determine the sales employee from the solsf-to party's master record?

Why I why not?

2009


553~

TSCM60


Solution 25: Configuration of Partner Functions and Partner Function Determination Task 1: I.

Enter a new partner function 9# for the personal representative in Customizing. (Key ofthe new role for each participant group: see the table

below) Key:

9# (see the table below)

Description:

Representative ##

Partner type:

PE

Keys of the new function for each participant group:

a)

Group number

Partner function

Group number

Partner function

Group number

Partner function

01

9A

07

9G

13

9M

02

9B

08

9H

14

9N

03

9C

09

91

15

90

04

90

10

91

16

9P

05

9E

II

9K

17

9Q

06

9F

12

9L

18

9R

Create new partner function

IMG-+ Sales am/ Distribution -+ Basic Functions-+ Partner Determination-+ Set Up Partner Determination -+Set Up Partner Determination for the Customer Master~ Partner Functions Folder (double-click) -+ Button: New Entries-+ Enter Partner Function 9#-+ Save 2.

Create a new partner detennination procedure Z## with description Procedure## for the object "customer master". Enter the following pm1ner functions:


~554


2009


TSCM60

- SP


- SH


- BP


- PY


- 9#

Representative ##

Customer T-S62C## master record is controlled by account group ZK##. Assign the new procedure to account group ZK##. a)

Create new partner procedures for customer masters

-->Partner Determination Procedures folder (double-click)--> Button: New Entries--> Enter Partner Determination Procedure Z## -->Save -->Select determination procedure Z## --> Partner Functions iti Procedure folder (double-click)--> Button: New Entries--> Enter Functions--+ Save Partner Determination Procedure Assignment foltler (double-click) -->Assign partner determit111tion procedure Z## to accou11t group ZK## -->Save--> Exit

--+

3.

Extend the customer master record for customer T-S62C## with the personal representative.

Hint: Under Master Data in the Sales and Distribution menu, choose Business Partner --+ Customer --+ Change --+ Sales and Distribution -> Button: Sales area data; Tab page: Partner

--+

Functions

Enter employee 170 I## in the partner screen as the personal representative and save the master record.

a)

Business partner Distribution

--+

->

---t

Customer--+ Change

--+

Sales and

Button: Sales area data

Tab page: Select Part11er Functions-> Part11er Fu11ctio11: Add representative ##

->

Continued on nexi page

2009


555~

TSCM60


Task 2: Optional In the next step, you want to ensure that the new partner in the master record will be controlled automatically in sales documents of document type ZA##. I.

Create a new partner determination procedure Y## with description Order procedure## for the object "sales document type". a)

2.

Enter the following partner functions: - SP


- SH


- BP


- PY


- 9#

Representative##

- VE

Sales employee

a)

3.

JMG-> Sales and Distribution '-'> Basic Functions-> Partner Determination ->Set Up Partner Determination-> Set Up Partner Determination for Sales Document Header-> Partner Functions Folder (double-click)-> Button: New Entries....., Enter Partner Determination Procedure Y# ....., Save

....., Select procedure Y##-> P1trtner Functions Folder in Procedure (double-click) -> Bullon: New Entries-> Enter Functions-> Save

Assign the new procedure to sales document type ZA##. a)

Partner Determination Procedures Assignment folder (double-click) ->Assign partner determination procedure Y## to account group ZA## ....., Save-> Exit --+

Task 3: Optional Check whether the partner function 9# Represent1ttive ## has been transferred automatically from the customer master record to the order. I.

Create a trade fair## order for customer T-S62C## (purchase order number ##L0605-ZA##06). Check whether the partner function 9# representath•e ## has been stored as a partner in the order header. a)

Logistics....., Sales and distribution ->Sales....., Order (order type: ZA##) ....., Create Continued on next page

~556


2009

TSCM60


2.

Additionally, enter an employee called Hubert Schwarz as the sales employee.

a)

-->

Goto

-->

Header--> Partner

--)' Fintl personnel number of employee using matchcotle

3.

Can you determine the sales employee from the sold-to party's master record?

No Why I why not?

a)

2009

Partner procedure Z##, which controls this customer, does not contain this function. As a result, you ca1111ot save a partner with the function of sales employee in the sold-to party's customer master record. This means that the system cannot use the customer master to propose this partner in the sales document.


557~

TSCM60


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Define new partner functions and integrate the5e into the process chain.

~558


2009

TSCM60

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: Understand the importance of the partner function concept for the sales and distribution process. Define new partner functions and integrate these into the process chain.

-20_0_9______________________©_c_2_0_09--SA __ P_A_G_._A_II-ri-gh-ts--re_s_eN--ed-.---------------,5~5~9~

TSCMSO

Unit Summary

~560


2009

nit 1 Outline Agreements Unit Overview This unit describes outline agreements such as quantity contracts, value contracts, and scheduling agreements (for example).

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: Use different types of outline agreements and their functions Configure outline agreements in Customizing so that they meet your requirements. Set up and use value contracts in Customizing. Store pm1ners authorized to release in contracts.

Unit Contents Lesson: Scheduling Agreements and Quantity Contracts ................. 562 Lesson: Value Contracts ....................................................... 568 Exercise 26: Scheduling Agreements, Quantity Contracts and Value Contracts .................................................................... 577

2009


561~

TSCM60

Unit 16: Outline Agreements

Lesson: Scheduling Agreements and Quantity Contracts Lesson Overview This lesson describes the function of scheduling agreements and quantity contracts as well as control of contract data.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Use different types of outline agreements and their functions Configure outline agreements in Customizing so that they meet your requirements.

Business Example Your company. IDES AG. has excellent business relationships with many of its customers, and conducts frequent transactions with them. Your company wants to plan business processes for the future together with these customers based on contractual agreements. Different types of outline agreements will be needed, depending on the product and customer involved. It is your responsibility to find out the extent to which the different outline agreements can be modeled using the available sales document types in the SAP system.

e . .

Contracts

Scheduling Agreements

I• DS ~

BL

Scheduling agreement Sched. agr. with del. sched.

' " DEL Sched. agr. for external agent

• QC

Quantity contract

• WK1 General value contract • WK2

Material~related

value contract

,

_______

i• sc

Rental contract Service and maintenance

Figure 197: Contracts- Sales Document Types

~562


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Scheduling Agreements and Quantity Contracts

Outline agreements play an important role in nearly all business processes. Customers and vendors agree on the goods to be provided under certain conditions and within a specific period of time. Outline agreements streamline business processes for both partners in a business relationship. In the SAP system, various sales document types represent different outline agreements. The standard SAP system contains a range of different document types that you can either use directly or copy as templates. The two main outline agreements are scheduling agreements and contracts. The simplest and most common type of scheduling agreement is represented in the system by document type OS. Document types for scheduling agreements such as BL or DEL are special cases that are used in the automotive component supplier industry. There are two types of contracts- value and quantity. Contracts can cover both goods and services. Generally, no restrictions apply to the different contract forms. Rental and maintenance contracts are frequently used in the service industry. Maintenance agreements are signed for products that the customer uses over a long period of time and which need to be serviced during that time. Alongside maintenance contracts, we also offer the Service Management application module whose functions are explained in another course.

Delivery

Figure 198: Scheduling Agreements

A scheduling agreement is an outline agreement between you and a sold-to party that is valid for a certain period oftime. The scheduling agreement contains fixed delivery dates and quantities. These dates are contained in the schedule lines for the scheduling agreements. Once the scheduling agreement is due for delivery, you can create the delivery as normal or by using a delivery due list.

-20_0_9______________________©_c_2_0_09--SA __ P_A_G___A_II_ri-gh_t_s-re_s_eN--ed-.--------------~5~6~3~

TSCM60


When you enter schedule lines for an item in the scheduling agreement, the system adds up the quantities that have already been entered and compares them to both the target quantity and the quantity already shipped. This gives you an overview of all the open quantities. If the quantity in the schedule lines exceeds the target quantity, the system issues a warning message.

If the customer requires it, you can process invoices periodically- for example, once a month. All deliveries due for the billing document are combined in a collective invoice.

Update of released quantities

Figure 199: Quantity Contracts A contract is an outline agreement between you and your customer that is valid for a certain time period. The contract does ~n.tain_any scheduleJillS'.~_
~564


2009

TSCM60


You can create release orders in the following ways: Choose 'Create with reference' on the initial screen In the Sales document menu, choose Sales document---> Create with To contract...

reference~

Assign an order item to a contract retrospectively Use the automatic system to search for open outline agreements when you create an order

~·'

.

'0swr·

Material

Value

M3 5 PC 5 000 USD -10% discount

t~,.

Referenced 1documentsy:'\/: Lbi_< Eo£: ~o-, Sysiem , ~~

.I

"ji_ CQ;;,y'

I

Open documents fOf customer

______ ,"-,K~-,

~-~'

'40000059

o01'0

:-40001292

0030

..,,,,

Figure 200: Messages about Open Outline Agreements

-20_0_9______________________©_c_2_0_09--SA_P__A_G_._A_II-rig_h_ffi--re-se_N_e_d-.---------------,5~6~5~~

TSCM60


.f\

~·

You can configure Customizing for the sales document type so that, when you create a release order, the system automatically searches for any open outline agreements. You can choose several options for the search and determine how the system should react if the search is successful: Blank: No checks AIB:Check at header I item level:

The system compares the customer numbers and material numbers. lfthere are any open outline agreements, it displays a dialog box in which you can make a selection. You can then display the open agreements in the form of a list, or continue to process the sales order. C/D: Check at header I item level and copy if unique:

If the system finds ex<~ctly one open outline agreement, this document is created automatically. Instead of displaying a dialog box, the system issues an information message in the status bar for the release. vF:Check at header I item level and branch immediately to selection list: Instead of displaying a dialog box, the system immediately goes to the selection list. No dialog box is displayed. If there is only one open contract, the system reacts as in CID.

~566


2009

TSCM60


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Use different types of outline agreements and their functions Configure outline agreements in Customizing so that they meet your

requirements.

-20_0_9______________________©_c_2_0_09--SA __ P_A_G_._A_II-ri-gh_t_s_re_s_eN--ed-.--------------~5~6~7~

TSCM60


Lesson: Value Contracts Lesson Overview This lesson describes the function of value contracts and specific control of business partners in contracts.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Set up and use value contracts in Customizing. Store partners authorized to release in contracts.

Business Example You want to be able to finalize value contracts, agree assortments and be able to store other partners authorized to release in addition to the actual contract partners.

Agreement

Customer: Schmidt Inc. Headquarters Validity: 01/2009 12/2014 Item

Target value

10

10 000 Euro - 10% discount

Figure 201: Value Contracts A value contract is an outline agreement between you and your customer. It specifies that your customer agrees to purchase a fixed dollar value (target amount) of goods and services during a defined period.

~568


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Value Contracts

A value contract can contain other agreements between you and your customer

that are checked in the release orders: Special price agreements

Customer restrictions Material restrictions If the check is activated in Customizing, the system issues a message informing you whether there are any valid contracts when you enter a release order. You can change the target values in the contract later on.

Assortment module 0 0 0 0 0

0

0

Product hierarchy

0 0 0

Figure 202: Valid Materials

You can restrict materials that can be released in a value contract in the standard system in the following ways: Product hierarchy (can be searched for generically by entering the first few digits, such as 0000 I 0 I*) List of valid materials (assortment module) If both the product hierarchy and the assortment module are maintained in the document, all of the materials that belong to one or other of the material groups are valid for the release order (logical OR link). Assortment modules for value contracts are maintained in the master data for products. You can define a validity period for each material in the assortment module. When you create a release order, the system checks the respective entry date against the validity period.

2009


569~

TSCM60


If you have not made any entries in the document, all the materials defined in sales can be released unless there are any other restrictions in copying control at item level. These materials are also limited in that they must be permitted for the sales area assigned to the value contract (copying control). Agreement Release Customer: Schmidt Inc. _Munich

-=lI _

Customer: Schmidt Inc. Head quarters Validity: 01/09·12114 Item Target value 10

Material M14 PC

Release

~~~omer: ~~~~~'~ ~ Material Val M23 PC 6

10 000 Euro ;;,- 10% discount

Release

·1 Inc.

Figure 203: Value Contracts - Releases

A release order releases a partial quantity of the agreed total value of goods or services in a contract. A release order is a type of sales order. Normally~

you create a release order with reference to a contract. Several functions exist for searching for the relevant contract:

Search for suitable contracts using the partner number Search for suitable partners using the contract number (for customer lists only) You can select items from all the valid materials using the item selection function. You can choose materials directly or by exploding 2n assortment module. Delivery quantities and times are stored in the schedule lines for the release order. You can create releases in any currency but the total value is updated in the currency of the contract. When you create a release order, the system checks the requirements stored in the contract, such as the release rule or validity period. The value of the release order is compared with the value still open in the contract. You can define how the system responds when this value is exceeded.

~570


2009

TSCM60


You can assign an order to a contract later both at header and item level. In both cases, the system re-runs pricing automatically. Values in the contract can only be updated when the assignment is defined at item level.

~ ~

Contract

Customer: Smith Inc. New York Material Net value

M3 5 PC 5,000 euros ·10% discount

Billing document Customer: Smith Inc.

Material

Net value

M1 2 PC

.... euros

M2,5 PC

.... euros

Figure 204: Value Contracts - Billing Documents

You can either bill the value contract directly or you can bill each release order. Billing a release order You can use the standard order OR for release orders. Billing can be either order-related or delivery-related. Billing a value contract Order type WA exists in the standard system for the release. The value contract is then billed according to the order. A billing plan allows you to bill the contract for several dates and partial quantities at once. The system automatically adjusts the open billing dates if you make a change to the target value in an item in the value contract later on. The system does not allow you to automatically bill value contracts that have not been completely released.

2009


571~

TSCM60


e

.

.

Sales doc. type

Item category WKN With value contract material

Figure 205: ControHing Value Contracts There are two types of value contracts in the SAP standard system: WK I General value contract: This order type allows you to refer to different materials and services according to the selection options described earlier. WK2 Material-related value contract: This is used when the contract contains exactly one material (for example, configurable). In Customizing, you only distinguish between the sales document types for value contracts WKI and WK2 in the screen sequence group for document header and

item. You can maintain the value contract material in the item category. It acts as a technical vehicle in the contract item for determining important data, such as account assignments, taxes or statistical updates.

*

Document type WK I uses item category WKN. Document type WK2 uses item category WKC. According to what you enter in the item, the system determines the item category with the usage indicator VCTR or the item category group VCIT. In copying control, you can decide at item level if the value contract material should be copied to the release, (WKC) or not (WKN).

If a release exceeds the targ. et value in a contract item, you can configure how the '-\' system reacts: no response. two different warning messages and an error message. In the standard system, value contracts (document determination procedure Y) use pricing procedure WKOOO I with condition type WKOO for the agreed target value.

w. 572


2009

TSCM60


Contract Sold-to party:

Smith Inc., New York

Partner authorized to

--v,

'

Partner function AA

release: Smith & Little, SF 1 Material

Partner function SP

Value

M1 4 PC 6,000 Euro -10% discount

Customer hierarchy

Figure 206: Partners Authorized to Release in Contract

Normally, both the sold-to party and other business partners are authorized to release from a contract. This means that the central office for a company can decide which of its branches can release from a contract. There may also be several ship-to parties. To meet this requirement, maintain the Check partner authorization field in Customizing for the sales document type. The sales order can be set up as a customer list (rule A) or via the customer hierarchy (rule B). The partner determination procedure assigns the partners authorized to release against the contract. If there are several partners authorized to release against a contract, you can choose the relevant partner from a list when you create the release order. If there are several ship-to parties that are authorized to release for the selected sold-to party, you can choose the relevant one from a list when you create the release.

To enable the releasing partner to be different than the sold-to party for the contract, copying control uses requirement 002 (Header- Di.f!Customer.

2009


573~

TSCM60


Contract 40002000

Create Order: Initial Screen ,

SP

AA

4711 4722 4733 4744 4810 4811

AA

4812

py

BP SH AA

t3

AW 4910

AW 4911 AW 4912

Order He'aderJPartner SP py BP SH

4812

~

4722 4733 4911

Figure 207: Partners Authorized to Release: Customer List

Rule A Check contract partners Ifthere is a customer list, you can store the partners authorized to release directly in the partner screen for the contract document. In the standard system, partner function AA has been defined for use as an optional partner function in the relevant partner determination procedure (KAB procedure in the standard system). Alternative ship-to parties are represented by partner function AW. If there are already several possible sold-to parties in the customer master record (partner functions SP and AA), the system displays a selection screen when you create the contract where you can select and copy several partners in one step. Partners authorized to release are checked at header level only.

~574


2009

TSCM60


Order Tab: Contract data

-

Contract start:

1o1.o?.

Contract end:

j12.31.

Installation date:

Order

Accepta-nce date:

Header--------~-~~~

contract sign'ed:

Sales doc. type: QP Rental contract Customer:C1

Dismantling date:

R'equested

~~10-----------~--~

cancellation date: Cancellatioh party:

ReceiPt Of CanCellation:

litem 20

Figure 208: Contract Data in Sales Documents

In Customizing for sales document types, you can activate the contract data. blank

No contract data

X

Contract data is permitted. Any changes to the contract header are not copied to the items.

Y

Contract data is permitted. Changes to the contract header are automatically copied to the items if the header and item data were identical previously. Changes are saved in a Jog. The Jog also notes any possible problems and inconsistencies.

You can maintain contract data at both the header and the item level in the sales document. Contract data at header level is valid for all items as long as the data at item level is not different. You can use the date detennination rules so that the system automatically finds deadlines relevant to the contract.

2009


575~

TSCM60


QP- Create contract

J

~~~-~05\_

I I

c_)J-~tractend: Rut-; 08 - - - Installation date:

-J

-1_,.. 08.07.2009 \

Contract start:

~,c"~"'

1

4

I\ 07.01.2019J d,l,.,=='""",_, hJ:Y;;-,H?_~gz-.~Bft~,;;

--------------\--

Proposal

Entered manually

Figure 209: Determining Dates

When you create a contract the system proposes, for example, the start and end dates of the contract. You define the date determination rules in Customizing. These rules start the document on one of the dates that you have set (for example, today's date or installation date). Any interval you specify can also be added to this date. You can also schedule the date for the beginning or end of the month that is determined in this manner. If you specify a duration category, the system automatically generates the duration of the contract. This can be a component of the date rule, for example, for determining the end of the contract. If you assign a contract profile to the sales document type, the system automatically determines default values specific to the contract. These could be: Rules for determining start and end of the contract Duration category Subsequent activities Cancellation procedure

~576


2009

TSCM60


Exercise 26: Scheduling Agreements, Quantity Contracts and Value Contracts Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: Use outline agreements and configure their specific settings in Customizing

Explain the concept of partners authorized to release

Business Example Outline agreements play an important role in nearly all business areas. Long-term agreements enable you to use forward planning and special pricing arrangements.

Task 1: You have entered into a value contract with customer T-S62A## that is valid for 6 months. Create a contract and indicate the party authorized to release. The materials that are permitted for contract releases will be listed in an assortment module. The customer subsequently requests releases as orders. The system determines the permitted partners and materials for releases from the information stored in the value contract. I.

Create an assortment module for value contracts. Have the system assign a number for the assortment module and enter the description value contract module ##. The module should be valid until the end of next year. List the materials T-ATB##, T-ATC## and T-ATD##. Module number: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

2.

When the system automatically determines item categories, the item category for value contracts is determined by the usage indicator VCTR when an assortment module is specified. Check in Customizing which item category has been found for sales document type WKJ Value contract- general. Item category: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

3.

Display the item category. Value contract material: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

4.

Create a value contract for customer T-S62A## with purchase order number ##L0605-WKJOJ and the description Value contract##: Continued on next page

2009


577~

TSCM60


5.

Contract type:

WKI

Sold-to party:

Customer T -S62A##

alternative SP:

Customer T-S62E##

alternative SH:

Customer T-S62F##

Valid from:

Today until 6 months from today

Target value:

20,000 Euro

Assortment module:

see above

Create a release order with reference to the value contract above with purchase order number ##L0605-0RJJ. Order type:

OR

Releasing partner:

Customer T -S62A##

Ship-to party:

Customer T-S62F##

Material:

Material T-ATB## (I unit) Material T-ATC## (I unit)

6.

Create a second release order with reference to the contract and with purchase order number iiiiL0605-TAJ2. Order type:

OR

Releasing partner:

Customer T-S62E##

Ship-to patty:

Customer T -S62F##

Material:

Material T-ATD## (10 units)

What message appears when you save?

Reduce the quantity to one unit and save. 7.

Determine the total released value for the value contract.

8.

Check in the document tlow to determine how many release orders exist for the contract.

9.

Total:-----------------Optional Continued on next page

~578


2009

TSCM60


Where do you determine whether the value contract material should be transferred to the release order or not?

I 0.

Optional

Which item category settings do you use to control what happens when the target value in the contract is exceeded?

II.

Optional

Which partner determination procedure has been assigned to the value contract?

12.

Optional

Which partner functions for releasing partners are configured in this procedure?

Task 2: You have entered into a rental contract with customer T-S62D##. L

Enter &.1 outline agreement for customer T-S62D## with purchase order number ##L0605-QPOJ. Do not enter a sales area.

Which sales area was determined?

2.

When you create the rental contract, the system refers to the contract profile for essential contract data. Find the following contact data in the document:


2009


579~


TSCM60

Contract start date rule Contract end rule Duration category Contract validity type Cancellation procedure

Hint: The contract data appears on a separate tab page in the document header.

~580


2009

TSCM60


Solution 26: Scheduling Agreements, Quantity Contracts and Value Contracts Task 1: You have entered into a value contract with customer T-S62A## that is valid for 6 months. Create a contract and indicate the pmiy authorized to release. The materials that are permitted for contract releases will be listed in an assortment module. The customer subsequently requests releases as orders. The system determines the permitted partners and materials for releases from the information stored in the value contract. I.

Create an assortment module for value contracts. Have the system assign a number for the assortment module and enter the description value contract module ##. The module should be valid until the end of next year. List the materials T-ATE##. T-ATC## and T-ATD##. Module number: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - a)

Create assortment module Logistics --t Sales and Distribution --t Master Dafa --t Products --t Value Contract-Assortmem .Nlodule --t Create --t Buuon: ITems ----+ Enter items --t Save

Module number: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2.

When the system automatically determines item categories, the item category for value contracts is detennined by the usage indicator VCTR when an assortment module is specified. Check in Customizing which item category has been found for sales document type WKJ Value contract- general. Item c a t e g o r y : - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - a)

Check in Customizing which item category has been found for sales document type WKI Value contract- general. IMG -+ Sales and Distribution -+ Sales -+ Sales Documents -+ Contracts-+ Value Contract-+ Define Item Categories

Item category: WKN 3.

Display the item category.


2009


581~

TSCM60


Value contract material: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - a)

JMG --+Sales and Distribution --+Sales --+Sales Documents--+ Contracts ----+ Value Contract ----+ Define item categories for value contract----+ Position on WKN Value contract material: WKMI

4.

Create a value contract for customer T-S62A## with purchase order number ##L0605-WKIOJ and the description Value contract##: Contract type:

WKI

Sold-to party:

Customer T -S62A##

alternative SP:

Customer T-S62E##

alternative SH:

Customer T-S62F##

Valid from:

Today until 6 months from today

Target value:

20,000 Euro

Assortment module:

see above

a)

Create value contracts Logistics----+ Sales and Distribution---+ Sales----+ Contract----+ Create

Contract type:

WKI

Sold-to party:

T-S62A##

----+ Goto ----+ Header--). Partner

Sold-to party contract release:

T-S62E##

SH contract release:

T-S62F##

--+Back

5.

Valid from:

today for six months

Target value:

20,000 Euro

Assortment module:

See above

Create a release order with reference to the value contract above with purchase order number ##L0605-0RJJ. Continued on next page

~582


2009

TSCM60


Order type:

0R

Releasing partner:

Customer T-S62A##

Ship-to party:

Customer T-S62F## Material T-ATB## (I unit)

Material:

Material T-ATC## (I unit) a)

Create release order for value contract Logistics--+ Sales and Distribution --+Sales--+ Order--+ Create

Order type:

OR

Button:

Create with reference --> to contract

Button:

Item selection

Select the releasing sold-to party and ship-to party in the dialog: Releasing sold-to party:

T-S62A##

Ship-to party:

T-S62F##

~

On the screen: Selection list for reference

Expand assortment module

Button: ~

document~

enter materials and quantities

Material:

T-ATB## (I unit)

Material:

T-ATC## (I unit)

--+Back

Button:

Copy

~save

6.

Create a second release order with reference to the contract and with purchase order number ##L0605-TA12.


2009


583~

TSCM60


Order type:

OR

Releasing partner:

Customer T-S62E##

Ship-to party:

Customer T-S62F##

Material:

Material T-ATD## (10 units)

What message appears when you save?

Reduce the quantity to one unit and save. a)

Create a second release order Menu paths: See above Contract type:

OR

Releasing partner:

T-S62E##

Ship-to party:

T-S62F##

Material:

T-ATD## (10 units)

What message appears when you save? The target value of the contract has been exceeded. Button:

Edit

Reduce the quantity to one unit and save. 7.


a)


Logistics--)- Sales and Distribution - t Sales--)- Contract--)- Display Field: 8.

Released value: 5,185.40 Euro

Check in the document flow to determine how many release orders exist for the contract. Total: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ a)

--)- Environment Number:

-t

Document flow 2


~584


2009

TSCM60

lesson: Value Contracts

9.

Optional Where do you determine whether the value contract material should be transferred to the release order or not?

a)

I 0.

-+In copying control at item level IMG--+ Sales and Distribution --+ Sales--+ Sales Documents--+ Contracts--+ Value Contract--+ Copying Control for Value Contract Button:

Position

Target:

ORSource: WKI

Dialog structure:

Item

Field:

Contract item copy mode

Optional Which item category settings do you use to control what happens when the target value in the contract is exceeded?

a)

IMG

Sales and Distribution --+ Sales--+ Sales Documents --+ Value Conn·act ~Define Item Categories for Value Contract and Contract Rei. --+ Call WKN --+

Contracts~

Information area: Business Data Field: Completion rule Information area: Value contract Field: Contract release control 11.

Optional Which partner determination procedure has been assigned to the value contract?

a)

Sales and Distribution ~Basic Functions ~ Partner Set Up Partner Determination ~Set Up Partner Determination for Sales Document Header--+ Partner Functions folder (double-click) JMG

~

Determination~

Sales doc. type:

WKI Partner determination procedure: KAB (contract release)


2009


585~

TSCM60


12.

Optional Which partner functions for releasing partners are configured in this procedure?

-+Partner Determination Procedures folder (double-click) -+Select

a)

determination procedure KAB

----+

Partner Functions in Procedure

folder (double-click) Partner function:

AA (SP Contract rei. ord.)

Partner function:

AW (SH Contract rei. ord.)

Task 2: You have entered into a rental contract with customer T-S62D##.

I.

Enter an outline agreement for customer T-S62D## with purchase order number ##£0605-QPO 1. Do not enter a sales area. Which sales area was determined?

a)

Create rental contract Logistics----+ Sales and Distribution----+ Sales---+ Contract----+ Create

Sales document type:

QP (Rental contract)

Which sales area was determined?

1000/14/00 2.

When you create the rental contract, the system refers to the contract profile for essential contract data. Find the following contact data in the document:


~586


2009

TSCM60


Contract start date rule Contract end rule Duration category Contract validity type Cancellation procedure

Hint: The contract data appears on a separate tab page in the document header. a)

2009

Find the following contract data in the rental contract: Tab page:

Header- Contract data

Contract start date rule

Today's date (01)

Contract end date rule

Contract start+ contract validity period (08)

Duration categol)'

1 year (02)

Contract validity period

1 year (1 4)

Cancellation procedure

0001 (Cancellation at end of validity period)


587~

TSCM60


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Set up and use value contracts in Customizing. Store partners authorized to release in contracts.

~588


2009

TSCM60

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: Use different types of outline agreements and their functions Configure outline agreements in Customizing so that they meet your

requirements. Set up and use value contracts in Customizing. Store partners authorized to release in contracts.

2009

©


589~

TSCM60

Unit Summary

~590


2009

T8?1 .

c

'fre -·.

Unit 17 Material Determination, listing and Exclusion Unit Overview This unit describes the manual and automatic product selection as well as the listing and exclusion of products. ·

e

.

.

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: Explain and use the material determination and product selection Explain how to configure customizing so that these functions meet your needs Create master records Understand and analyze the settings for these functions in the sales document Explain and use the material listing and exclusion functions.

Unit Contents Lesson: Material Determination ............................................... 592 Exercise 27: Material Determination ..................................... 601 Lesson: Material Listing and Exclusion ...................................... 605 Exercise 28: Material Listing and Exclusion ............................ 607

2009


591

f!!E""

TSCM60

Unit 17: Material Determination, Listing and Exclusion

Lesson: Material Determination Lesson Overview This lesson describes material determination from the application perspective as well as the underlying customizing.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain and use the material determination and product selection Explain how to configure customizing so that these functions meet your needs Creaie master records Understand and analyze the settings for these functions in the sales document

Business Example Your company offers a wide range of products. For various reasons, you want to regularly replace some products by others during the sales process. Material Determination Order Item:·

Material]

10

~! M1

Figure 210: Material Determination Material determination J?I:.QYide.syog with a tool for automatically exchanging materials in the sales document. ·--·"'"""'-.~---- .... ~-·""~·"'-"'

The condition technique provides you with greater flexibility in material determination. When you process a document. the system automatically searches

for valid master records that you created previously in material determination. You can assign a substitution reason to every master record in material

determination that defines how the material should be detennined. You define the substitution rules in Customizing. Examples in the standard system include:

~592


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Material Determination

Reason for substitution 0002:

Customized material

Reason for substitution 0003:

EAN number

You do not need a material master record for the material number that you are replacing. · During order entry, the material ordered by the customer is replaced by the substitute defined in the master record. The system now continues processing with the substitute (for example, in the availability check, pricing, delivery, billing). L

Yt

fci {OCIC

Note: The item overview for Sales A contains information about the material that was originally entered as well as the reason for substitution.

Figure 211: Selecting Products Manually

In some sectors of industry, the same products are sold in different packaging materials (for example, packaging for standard and promotion articles). Material master records exist in the system for managing these stocks. When you enter an order, you can use different material numbers for the same product. We have extended the functions in manual and automatic product selection so that material determination can support this business practice:

2009

Substitution reason 0005:

Manual production selection (list of default values)

Reason for substitution 0004 I 0006:

Automatic product selection (depending on availability in order and delivery)


593~


TSCM60

In manual production selection, (reason for substitution 0005), the system does not automatically replace the product. Instead, it displays a list of all of the substitution materials and other information in the master record. You can then select the required material from this list. To simplify selection, the system displays the material quantities that can be confirmed on the customer's requested delivery date. If a material cannot be confirmed fully for the requested delivery date, the system displays the date on which the material can be completely delivered.

Figure 212: Master data

Maintain the master records for material determination in the master data menu for Sales and Distribution under Products. You can use the condition technique to define the master data for material determination at any level. For example, you can create data records depending only on the material number or depending on the material and the customer number.

When you process master records, you can: Restrict the validity period of a record Maintain separate entries for each key combination Determine reasons for substitution Save one or more substitutes per master record If there is more than one material defined in the master record for material determination I product selection, the sequence in which they appear defines the priority that they have.

~594


2009

TSCM60


e .

Order April 01

.

Product:

4711

a Available

10 PC 0 PC

~~I

Outbound delivery June 01 Product: • Available

4711

10 PCJ--II•I 4 PC

-~·-*------------"--

Figure 213: Automatic Product Selection

In automatic product seL~cJl<:>n (reasons for substitution 0004 and 0006), the sysfetn replaces the entered material automatically if it is not available. --~

......-... --------···----~··----~ .. ~~·· .. ~-•"""'''~- ..

If automatic product selection is being used, the system may display (based on customizing) the entered and substituted material as main and sub-items in the sales order. When you enter an order, the system tries to till the quantity ofthe order with the first material in the material determination master record. If there is not enough of this material, it fills the remaining quantity with the next material. You can choose whether or not you want to re-run material determination when

the delivery is created. If material determination is re-run, the result of the substitution may change due to the new availability situation. You can use the product attributes in the material and customer master records to exclude a particular material from product selection. This means, for example, that all the materials that have been rejected in the customer master will not be included by the system when it determines a substitution material. The Partial confirmation ofproduct selection allows you to deal with shortfall cases (in which only the available quantity is confirmed, and it is less than the order quantity) by passing the shortfall quantity on to materials planning. In this case, an additional sub-item is generated with a specifically defined material.

2009


595~

TSCM60


Master records for

0

If material A is not available, this is automatically replaced by material B. The customer orders material C. You want to use up material D so this is automatically selected until stocks run out.

Figure 214: Automatic Product Selection ·Master Data The sequence of the substitution materials in the master data influences the result of the automatic product selection in the order. If you want the material that is first entered in the order to be included in the substitution, then you must enter it in the substitutions list. Case A:The original material is in the first place in the list. and its available stock is included in the substitution. The system then refers to the available stock for the next material in the master record. Case B:First, the system uses up the available stock for the materials that appear in the master record before the material that has been entered. Only when these stocks have been used up, does it include that material in the substitution.

~596


2009

TSCM60


>>>>

r

_Sales doc. type OR

~

Order Document type : Sales org. Distribution

OR 1000

channel

10

Division Customer

00 C1

Material

M-10

Figure 215: Material Determination- Condition Technique (1)

e .

>>>>

'

~Sales doc. type OR

L

Order Document type :

Sales org. Distribution channel Division Customer Material

OR 1000 10 00

C1 M-10


2009


597~

TSCM60


»» !-Sales doc. type OR

l

Order Document type : Sales org. Distribution channel Division Customer Material

OR 1000

Access seq.

Valid from

Valid to

1 o1.o1.19991112.31.2oo2l 10 00 C1

: M-10


!-Sales doc. type OR

l.

Order j Document type : ' Sales org. Distribution channel Division II Customer

OR 1000

Valid from

10 00 C1

Valid to

1 01.01.19981131.12.20021

Access: 10 2

SlsOrg/DistCh/Ent.mat.

Access:20

Material entered


5!!" 598


2009

TSCM60


1l

Sales doc. type OR Order Document type : Sales org. Distribution channel Division Customer

I ~~!erial

--OR

1000 10 00

C1

-·,_ M-10


l

Sales doc. type OR Order Document type :

Sales org. Distribution channel Division Customer

I ~~!erial

---I

OR 1000

I

;

10 00

C1 M-10

master record

Entry:

MAT -10

Valid from

Subst.reason: 0002

Valid to

suhstituti~n·~aterial:

Figure 220: Material Determination -Condition Technique (6)

The condition technique provides more flexibility in modeling material determination and product selection.

2009


599~


TSCM60

You can assign a material determination procedure to each sales document type. The procedure contains all of the Customizing information that the system needs for material determination. The procedure includes one or more defined condition types One access sequence (search strategy) is assigned to each condition type. Each access sequence consists of one or more accesses.

Each access contains exactly one condition table. This represents the search key that the system uses to search for a valid master record. ·~You

can activate an analysis of the material determination in the sales document. The system then displays detailed information on how the materials were determined.

~600


2009

TSCM60


Exercise 27: Material Determination Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: Set up the functions for material determination and use these in sales processes.

Business Example Exchange of materials is an important requirement of your sales process. You would like to exchange standard items for promotional materials for instance or exchange certain items for other items if they are not available.

Task 1: Material T-ATE## is to be replaced with material T-ATA ## automatically for a period of two months. I.

Create the relevant master record for material determination. Choose determination type AOOJ.

2.

Create a trade fair order ZA## with purchase order number ##L0605-ZA##09 for sold-to party T-S62A## and material T-ATE##. Check whether the system replaces the material automatically.

3.

In which sales document view can you find information about the material entered (and if necessary the reason for substitution)? View:-------------------

Task 2: You would like your employees in sales order processing to be able to call up a selection list for certain products, from which they can then choose a suitable material. I.

Create a reason for substitution Z## with the description Substitution ## in Customizing.

2.

Enter a material determination master record with the description MONJTOR!ffl and reason for substitution Z##. In the mast!]r record, list the materials T-ATA##, T-ATE## and T-ATC##. The data record is valid for two months.

3.

Create a trade fair order ZA## with purchase order number ##L0605-ZA##JO for sold-to party T-S62A##. Instead of entering the material, enter MONITOR## and check the effect of your master record.

-20_0_9_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _©_c_2_00_9_S_A_P_A_G_._A_II-rig_h_ts-re-se_N_e_d-.--------,6~Q~1A~

TSCM60


Solution 27: Material Determination Task 1: Material T-ATB## is to be replaced with material T-ATA## automatically for a period of two months. I.

Create the relevant master record for material determination. Choose determination type AOOJ. a)

Master record for material determination

Logistics -->Sales and Distribution -->Master Data--> Products--> Material Determination-> Create Material determin. type:

AOOI

Entry Material:

T-ATB##

Material:

T-ATA##

---t

Save

---t

E·dt

Hint: The validity period ofthe master record was proposed from Customizing of condition type AOO I.

2.

Create a trade fair order ZA## with purchase order number ##L0605-ZA##09 for sold-to party T-S62A## and material T-ATB##. Check whether the system replaces the material automatically. a)

3.

Logistics--> Sales and Distribution-> Sales-> Order (order type ZA##)-> Create

In which sales document view can you find information about the material entered (and if necessary the reason for substitution)? View:------------------a) View: ·Field:

Item data: Sales A, Entered Material


~602


2009


TSCM60

Task 2: You would like your employees in sales order processing to be able to call up a selection list for cetiain products, from which they can then choose a suitable material. I.

Create a reason for substitution Z## with the description Substitution ## in Customizing. a)

Substitution reason

IMG--> Sales and Distribution --> Basic Functions -->Material Determination--> Define Substitution Reasons Button:

New Entries

Substitution reason:

Z##

Description:

Substitution ##

Strategy:

A

----+

2.

Save ----+ ExiI

Enter a material determination master record with the description MONITOR## and reason for substitution Z##. In the master record, list the materials T-ATA##. T-ATE## and T-ATC##. The data record is valid for two months. a)

Master record for material determination

Logistics ----t Sales and Distribution ----t A1aster Data----+ Products A1aterial Determination

----t

Material determin. type:

AOOI

Inc. mat:

MONITOR##

Material:

T-ATA##

Reason:

Z##

----+Select ent1:v---+ Goto

----t

----t

Create

Alternative materials ----tEnter additional

materials----+ Save ---+Exit

3.

Create a trade fair order ZA## with purchase order number ##L0605-ZA##J 0 for sold-to party T-S62A##. Instead of entering the material, enter MONITOR## and check the effect of your master record. a)

2009

Logistics--> Sales and Distribution ZA##) --> Create

-->

Sales


-->

Order (order type

60313!!'


TSCM60

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Explain and use the material determination and product selection Explain how to configure customizing so that these functions meet your needs Create master records Understand and analyze the settings for these functions in the sales document

~604

© 2009 SAP AG, All rights reserved.

2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Material Listing and Exclusion

;r

Lesson: Material Listing and Exclusion Lesson Overview

This lesson describes material listing and exclusion from the application perspective as well as the underlying Customizing for this.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

--

Explain and use the material listing and exclusion functions.

Business Example Your company offers a wide range of products. For various reasons, certain customers can only access certain parts of your product range.

..

Master records for material listing ~··

"" ••'•

Order

'·~~" •+··-,~····~·-·"·

I~

Sold-to party : A 1--~

)tern 10 20

30

~:-I

-~-4_j

Figure 221: Material Listing

You want to make sure that your customer receives only specific materials. You enter these materials as a material listing. The material listing is controlled by the condition technique. In the above example, you have created master records with a key for the customer and material numbers. This key is delivered in the standard system. The access sequence for the condition type guarantees that the system searches for valid master records both for the sold-to party and the payer. You can also define your own keys, for example: Customer group/material Customer/product hierarchy

2009


605~

TSCM60


You define in the sales document type whether the system checks the material listing or not.

.·.~.'.''"'''11 S!::::r. >0¢,y,'

Material exclusion customer master record

Order

~~ Sold-to party : A2 Item

Material

10

4711

20

.f/'1:5

.30

~

Figure 222: Material exclusion

You want to ensure that the customer does not receive certain materials. You enter these materials as a material exclusion. The material exclusion is also controlled with the condition technique.

r::::!!'

606


2009

TSCM60


Exercise 28: Material listing and Exclusion Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: Set up the functions for material listing and exclusion and use these in sales processes.

Business Example You would like to control which customers can access certain parts of your product range. As a result, certain products need to be listed then excluded for certain customers.

Task 1: A discussion between the sales department and customer T-S62A ## reveals that the customer can only use materials T-ATA##, T-ATE## and T-ATC## in production and therefore does not require any other products. I.

Enter a condition record for the material listing.

2.

Check the etTect of this material master by creating a trade fair order ZA## for customer T-S62B## with purchase order number ##605-ZA##J2. Enter another item with material T-ATA## and material T-ATF##. Which item cannot be created and why?

Task 2: A discussion between your sales department and customer T-S62B## reveals that the customer no longer wishes to purchase materials T-ATF## or T-ATG##. I.

Enter a condition record for the material exclusion.

2.

Check the etTect of this material master record by creating a trade fair order (ZA##) for customer T-S62B## with purchase order number ##605-ZA##JJ. Try to create an item with materials T-ATA## and T-ATF##. Which item cannot be created and why?

2009


607~

TSCM60


Solution 28: Material Listing and Exclusion Task 1: A discussion between the sales department and cmtomer T-S62A## reveals that the customer can only use materials T-ATA##, T-ATE## and T-ATC## in production and therefore does not require any other products. I.

Enter a condition record for the material listing. a)

Master record for material listing Logistics--)- Sales and Distribution --)-Master Data--)- Products -)Listing/Exclusion-> Create

List/ex_cl. type: AOOl --)-Key combination: Customer/material

Customer: T -S62A## --)- Maintain Materials --)- Save --)- Rr:it

2.

Check the effect of this material master by creating a trade fair order ZA## for customer T-S62B## with purchase order number ##605-ZA##J2. Enter another item with material T-ATA## and material T-ATF##. Which item cannot be created and why?

a)

Logistics ->Sales and Distribution ->Sales ZA##) -> Create

b)

Which item cannot be created and why?

->

Order (order type

Material T-ATF## cannot be entered in the document. Message: Material T-ATF## is not allowed because it is not listed.


~608


2009

TSCM60


Task 2: A discussion between your sales department and customer T-S62B## reveals that the customer no longer wishes to purchase materials T-ATF## or T-ATG##. I.

Enter a condition record for the material exclusion. a)

Master record for material exclusion Logistics --7 Sales and Distribution Listing/Exclusion ---+ Create

Jvlaster Data

Listing/Excl. type:

BOO!

Customer:

T-S62B##

--:~-Maintain

2.

--:~-

materials---+ Save

-7

--:~-

Products

--7

Exit

Check the effect of this material master record by creating a trade fair order (ZA##) for customer T-S62B## with purchase order number ##605-ZA##JJ. Try to create an item with materials T-ATA## and T-ATF##. Which item cannot be created and why?

a)

Logistics-> Sales and Distribution-> Sales-> Order (order type ZA##) -> Create

b)

Which item cannot be created and why? Material T-ATF## cannot be entered in the document. Message: Material T-ATF## is not allowed because it has been excluded.

2009


609~


TSCM60

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Explain and use the material listing and exclusion functions.

~610


2009

TSCM60

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: Explain and use the material determination and product selection Explain how to configure customizing so that these functions meet your needs Create master records Understand and analyze the settings for these functions in the sales document Explain and use the material listing and exclusion functions.

-20_0_9------------------------©--20_0_9_S_A_P__A_G_._A_II_r-ig-ht_s_r_e-se_N_e_d-.----------------~6~1A1 ~

TSCM60

Unit Summary

~612


2009

TG~.

Unit 1 Free Goods Unit Overview This unit discusses automatic free goods determination.

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: Set up automatic free goods determination.

Unit Contents Lesson: Free Goods ............................................................ 614 Exercise 29: Free Goods .................................................. 621

2009


613~

TSCM60

Unit 18: Free Goods

This lesson deals with automatic free goods determination.

~

Lesson Objectives

''NJJ+'

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

}~'

Set up automatic free goods determination.

Business Example Free goods play a large role in price negotiations with your customers. As a result, you want to be able to determine free goods and place them in sales documents automatically. You are responsible for automating determination of free goods. bearing in mind that certain information related to the free goods has to be supplied to Controlling.

»»

Figure 223: Exclusive and Inclusive Bonus Quantities (1)

~614


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Free Goods

Figure 224: Exclusive and Inclusive Bonus Quantities (2)

In industry sectors such as retail, the chemicals industry or consumer goods industry, it is common to provide discounts in the form offree goods. Free goods can be part of the order quantity not included in the invoice. This is called an inclusive bonus quantity. The ordered goods and the free goods both involve the same material. The quantity units of the free goods and ordered goods must be the same.

Free goods can also take the form of extra goods that are free of charge. These are called exclusive bonus quantities. In exclusive bonus quantities, the extra goods are delivered free of charge and

are not included in the invoice. This can either be an additional quantity of the goods ordered or it can be another article. The ~xclusiv,. fre\'_goods appear in the sales document as a separate, fre~:.Of:charge item.

2009


615~

TSCM60

Unit 18: Free Goods

Order

Order

Sold-to party:

C1

Sold-to party:

C2

Pricirig date:

08 May

Pricing date:

08 May

Delivery date:

15 May

Delivery date:

15 May

Item Hglt Material Quantity ltCat 10 20

10

Eggs

4

Eggs

1

TAN TANN

Item Hglt Material Quantity ltCat 10 20

10

Eggs

5

Duck

1

TAN TANN

Figure 225: Free Goods in the Sales Order

Both forms of free goods are handled in the same way in the sales order. The material that has been ordered is entered as a main item and the free goods material is automatically displayed as a sub-item. The item category determines how the item is controlled later in the business process (for example, for delivery or pricing). Item categories TAN and TANN are used in the standard SAP system. The system determines the free goods automatically by accessing the relevant condition records. The system then accesses the free goods master record with the pricing date. As in earlier releases, you can also enter free goods manually by entering data in the higher-level item and item category fields (fANN). In this case however, the system does not refer to the free goods master record, and settings such as automatic reduction of the main item quantity for inclusive quantities or certain controls for the delivery are not available. The system re-reads the free goods master record in the sales order if the quantities in the main item change or if the pricing date changes. The system then deletes the sub-items and re-creates them. Any manual changes to the free goods quantity are lost. If pricing is re-run in the sales order, it does not affect the free goods determination.

~616


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Free Goods

Figure 226: Free Goods - Master Data

The condition technique is used for free goods. Free goods are generally regarded as a supplement to the pricing agreement for a material. You maintain the free goods in the master records for sales by: Using a different menu entry Going to Prices and Discounts/surcharges when maintaining the master records You can define master records for free goods at any level - for example, material, customer I material, price list category I currency I material or customer hierarchy I material. You can restrict master records for one level in many different ways:

Validity period: The condition is only valid within this period. Minimum quantity: The condition comes into affect when this quantity has been exceeded Calculation rule: see next slide Scales You can process different master data with the same key for inclusive and exclusive bonus quantities at the same time. You only need to press a button to switch between the two types of discount. When you enter an exclusive bonus quantity, an extra entry line appears where you can enter the goods item if it is not the same as the ordered material.

2009


617~

TSCM60

Unit 18: Free Goods

Figure 227: Free Goods -Calculation Rule When you specifY a calculation rule, you decide how the system determines the free goods quantity from the additional and document quantities. The free goods quantity is the quantity from which the discount is calculated (not the minimum quantity). The additional quantity is the quantity delivered free-of-charge. The document quantity is the quantity entered by the person creating the sales order. Three calculation rules are provided in the standard system. The following example describes how they work: You offer supply 20 units of free goods for a free goods quantity of I 00 units. The customer orders 162 units (document quantity). Rule I Prorated: 32 units of free goods [ 162*(20/100) =rounded down) ]') , ~ Rule 2 Related to units: 20 units of free goods [ I 00*(2011 00) =rounded : ,_ c, down] Rule 3 Whole units: 0 units free goods [ 162 is not a complete unit of I 00] Calculation rules are stored in the system in the fonn of ABAP/4 code. You can also define your own rules (transactionfvOFMlunder menu entry, formulas). \~.J

\

~618


2009

:o

:? 1,

'

····~~·········~~--

TSCM60

Lesson: Free Goods

Example of transfer to Accounting

SAP standard

·Pricing: • R100 with

req.55

• No pricing

Figure 228: Free Goods -Analyses and Accounting

You can see detailed information about free goods in Accounting or analyses. Revenues, sales deductions and costs of free goods can be transferred to Accounting in different ways, shown in the examples below. (Mit~ main item, Sit~ sub-item) Scenario 1 (SAP standard system)

Mit: Not intluenced by free goods Sit: Pricing de-activated, calculation price (VPRS) configured as costs Scenario 2

Mit: Not influenced by free goods Sit: Pricing activated for item category TANN with characteristic B (in pricing procedure, condition type RIOO- 100% discount- is activated by condition 55 at level 819), discount is transferred as sales deduction and the calculation price (VPRS) as costs. Scenario 3

Mit: Cumulation of calculation price for lower-level item configured at main item level (in copying control Delivery -+ Billing document), cumulated calculation price transferred as costs Sit: Pricing deactivated

2009


619~

TSCM60

Unit 18: Free Goods

Order

1000 10 C1 M1

Figure 229: Free Goods -Condition Technique

The condition technique provides greater flexibility for using the free goods functions. The system uses the information about the sales areas, document determination procedure (from the sales document type) and customer determination procedure (from the customer master) to determine the free goods procedure. The procedure contains a list of the condition types for free goods. One access sequence (search strategy) is assigned to each condition type. Each access sequence consistS of one or more accesses. Each access contains exactly one condition table. This represents the search key that the system uses to search for a valid master record. If the search is successful, the system generates a sub-item for the free goods in the document. The item category is assigned with the item category usage FREE. Pricing for both items is controlled with the item category as normal. You can activate an analysis of the free goods determination in the sales document. The system then displays detailed information on how the free goods were determined.

~620


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Free Goods

Exercise 29: Free Goods Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: Create different master records for free goods Explain how free goods affect the sales process Describe how to control free goods

Business Example You can extend pricing by using free goods in the form of exclusive and inclusive bonus quantities. You make the relevant agreements with your customer. These will be automatically controlled by the SAP System in the document when you enter a sales order.

Task 1: You have agreed on a price reduction for customer T-S62A## in the form of free goods. I.

Create a free goods master record (free goods type NAOO) for sales organization 1000 and distribution channelJO. lfthe customer orders at least 20 units of material T-ATC##, I 0% ofthe purchased quantity is to be free of charge. The free-of charge material should be a proportion of the quantity in the higher-level item.

2.

Create a trade fair order ZA## with purchase order number ##L0605-ZA##J3 for customer T-S62A ## and material T-ATC##. Order quantity is I 0 units. What message appears?

3.

Increase the quantity to 40 units. What are the quantities in the higher-level and sub-items? Main i t e m : - - - - - - - - - - Sub-item: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Task 2: You make another free goods agreement with customer T-S62E## for material T-ATD##. The minimum order quantity is 20 units. You want to deliver one free-of-charge unit of material T-ATA## for each 20 units ordered. I.

Create the relevant master record for sales organization I 000 and distribution channel 10. Continued on next page

2009

©


621~

Unit 18: Free Goods

TSCM60

2.

In the record, indicate that the system only determines the quantity of the free-of-charge material in multiples of the free goods quantity.

3.

Create a trade fair order ZA## with purchase order number ##L0605-ZA##l4 for customer T-S62E## and material T-ATD##. Order quantity is 40 units.

Task 3: Optional The system automatically created a free goods sub-item for the order with purchase order number ##L0605-ZA##l4. The system runs pricing for this sub-item even though it is free of charge.

I.

Which item category did the system find for the sub-item and which key did it use? Item category: Key:

2.

~622

Which settings in Customizing affect pricing for the free-of-charge item?


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Free Goods

Solution 29: Free Goods Task 1: You have agreed on a price reduction for customer T-S62A## in the form offree goods. I.

Create a free goods master record (free goods type NAOO) for sales organization 1000 and distribution channe!JO. If the customer orders at least 20 units of material T-ATC##, 10% of the purchased quantity is to be free of charge. The free-of charge material should be a proportion of the quantity in the higher-level item. a)

Logistics ->Sales and Distribution ->Master Data-> Conditions -> Free Goods-> Create Discount type:

NAOO

Customer:

T-S62A##

Material:

T-ATC##

Lowest quantity:

20

For:

10

Unit of measure:

PC

are free goods:

I

Unit of measure:

PC

Calculation type:

1

Free goods delivery control (L):

blank

Save--+ Exit

2.

Create a trade fair order ZA## with purchase order number ##L0605-ZA##J3 for customer T-S62A## and material T-ATC##. Order quantity is I 0 units. What message appears?

a)

Order

Logistics ->Sales and Distribution-> Sales-> Order (order type ZA##) -> Create b)

What message appears? Minimum quantity of20 PC of free goods has not been reached.


2009


623~

Unit 18: Free Goods

3.

TSCM60

Increase the quantity to 40 units. What are the quantities in the higher-level and sub-items? Main item: - - - - - - - - - - Sub-item: - - - - - - - - - - - a)

Main item: 36 pieces Sub-item: 4 pieces

Task 2: You make another free goods agreement with customer T-S62E## for material T-ATD##. The minimum order quantity is 20 units. You want to deliver one free-of-charge unit of material T-ATA## for each 20 units ordered. I.

Create the relevant master record for sales organization 1000 and distribution channel 10. a)

Logistics~ -+

2.

Discount type:

NAOO

Button:

Exclusive BQ

Customer:

T-S62E##

Material:

T-ATD##

Lowest quantity:

20

For:

20

Unit of measure:

PC

Additional quantity:

1

Unit of measure:

PC

Additional mat!:

T-ATA##

In the record, indicate that the system only determines the quantity of the free-of-charge material in multiples of the free goods quantity. a)

3.

Sales and Distribution-~- Alaster Data--~- Conditions Free Goods -+ Create

Calculation type (ReR): 2

Create a trade fair order ZA## with purchase order number ##L0605-ZA##J4 for customer T-S62E## and material T-ATD##. Order quantity is 40 units. a)

Logistics ->Sales and Distribution ZA##) -> Create

->

Sales

->

Order (order type


~624


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Free Goods

Task 3: Optional The system automatically created a free goods sub-item for the order with purchase order number ##L0605-ZA##J4. The system runs pricing for this sub-item even though it is free of charge. I.

Which item category did the system find for the sub-item and which key did it use? Item category: Key:

a)

Logislics-+ Sales and Distribution -+Sales ZA#II) -+ Create Item category:

-+

Order (order type

TANN

JMG-+ Sales and Distribution -+Basic Funcrions -+Free Goods-+ Item Type Determinalionfor Free Goods Item ZA## I NORM I FREE I TAN

Key: 2.

Which settings in Customizing affect pricing for the free-of-charge item?

a)

IA1G---+ Sales and Distribution---+ Basic Functions ---+Free Goods

Control Free Goods Pricing -+ Control pricing for ji-ee goods item categmy

-+

---+Item category: Pricing:

2009

B Pricing Free goods (I 00% discount)


625~

TSCM60

Unit 18: Free Goods

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Set up automatic free goods determination.

~626


2009

TSCM60

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: Set up automatic free goods determination.

2009


627~

Unit Summary

~628

TSCMSO


2009

Unit 1 Sales Workshop Unit Overview The workshop provides you with an opportunity to consolidate the knowledge taught in the course using integrated exercise scenarios. You have three different scenarios to choose from: sales to employees, bills of material, and material determination.

e ..

.

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: Set up a cash sales scenario with the sales workshop for the sale of materials to your own employees. Control the various functions of bills of material at main and sub-item level. Expand the condition technique in material determination so ihat this may be both customer-specific and non customer-specific.

Unit Contents Lesson: Sales Workshop: Sales to Employees Scenario ................ 630 Exercise 30: Sales Workshop: Sales to Employees Scenario ....... 633 Lesson: Sales Workshop: Bills of Materials Scenario ..................... 653 Exercise 31: Sales Workshop: Bills of Materials Scenario ............ 657 Lesson: Sales Workshop: Material Determination Scenario .............. 687 Exercise 32: Sales Workshop: Material Determination Scenario .... 691

2009


629~

TSCM60

Unit 19: Sales Workshop

Lesson: Sales Workshop: Sales to Employees Scenario Lesson Overview This lesson looks at the subject of cash sales to employees in your own company.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Set up a cash sales scenario with the sales workshop for the sale of materials to your own employees.

Business Example Company employees are often able to buy goods from their company at reduced prices. In the following scenario. it is your job to create this process for your company IDES. IDES has set up its own shop where employees can purchase its products at reduced rates. Invoice

-----'---~---1

Customer:_MA##

I

lnv. no.: 5718

1000/10/00 10

The employee takes the goods from the shelves and pays in cash.

1'(: ) PCE

The employee receives

an invoice.

The employee takes the goods immediately.

The delivery is created automatically.

Figure 230: Sales to Employees - Orders Goods offered to employees at reduced prices can be obtained from a shop set up specially for employees. Employees select their goods, take them from the shelves and then proceed to checkout. Since employees can only buy the goods that are in the shop, an availability check and transfer of requirements are not necessary. You should only create orders with a net value. This prevents documents without items or with free items from being created in the system.

~630

©


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Sales Workshop: Sales to Employees Scenario

No individual customer master data for employees is maintained in the system. Employee orders are processed using a collective master record (one-time '·~ .. · customer account). Employees generally receive a discount of 15% off the material price. Some materials can also have a higher discount. As soon employees have paid, they are given an invoice which serves as a receipt. Employees take the goods away immediately.

----

Delivery Customer: MA## Del. no.: 80002451

1000 10 00

10

PC

1 PCE Picking is not required.

The delivery is created automatlcally.

Goods iSsue is posted automatically e.g. at the

end of each day..

Figure 231: Sales to Employees - Delivery

The system automatically creates the delivery once the sales document has been saved. Picking is not necessary, as the employees can only buy goods which are available in the shop. Goods issue can be posted manually for a single delivery, or automatically in the background at the end of each day. _:::_:_::= Invoice _ _ _

Customer: MA##

lnv. no.: 9005718

1000 10 00 10

PC

1 PCE

An invoice has already been created and therefore does not need to be reprinted.

Figure 232: Sales to Employees - Billing Document

Because the goods are delivered as soon as the order has been saved, the order quantity is always the same as the goods issue quantity. The system thus creates an order-related billing document.

2009


631~


TSCM60

Billing documents are created automatically in a collective run by running the billing Jist during night-time processing for instance. In the financial accounting document, the billed amount is posted to a special cash sales account. There are no receivables for the customer.

Sales to Employees - Tasks Create a sales document type for sales to employees Define a new item category for the order and delivery Control important fields for processing sales to employees in the incompleteness procedure Create a customer master record for one-time customers Extend pricing to include employees Create an output master record for the invoice Test sales to employees in the system

~ ~6~3~2_----------------©--20_0_9_S~A~P-A_G ___A_I_Ir-ig_h_ts-r-es_e_N_e_d-.----------------------2-00--9

TSCM60


Exercise 30: Sales Workshop: Sales to Employees Scenario Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: Set up new document types and item categories Create customer master records for CPO customers Set up price determination Set up message determination Set up the incompletion log.

Business Example Your company produces computers. Your employees can buy in the company shop either at cost price or at discounted prices for employees. They have to pay in cash and take their purchases with them straight away. The employee then receives an invoice for a cash sale. The goods issue posting and the billing document creation can then be performed in automatic processes, for example, at the end of the day.

Task 1: Sales document type Set up the sales document type ZB## MA## sale. I.

To do this, copy the CS Cash Sales order type. Ensure that all related table entries are copied.

2.

Configure the new document type so that the shipping condition as soon as possible (01) is found.

3.

A 1-ride range of checks and functions can be activated in the sales document type, such as checking for open contracts or searching for customer material info records. These checks take place in documelll processing and therefore affect syste.m pe1jormance.

Ensure that all the checks and functions you do not need have been deactivated.


2009


633~

TSCMGO


4.

Which entry prevents the user from saving incomplete documents?

5.

What effect does the entry in the Shipping conditions field have?

6.

Which entry causes a delivery to be created automatically when the sales document is saved?

7.

Which entries ensure that the current date is used automatically as the requested delivery date?

8.

What is the document type for the delivery?

9.

Make sure that the system does not propose a billing document for delivery-related transactions.


~634


2009

TSCM60


Task 2: Item category in sales and delivery Create a separate item category to enable an item control that is independent of cash sales. I.

Create a new item category ZB## by copying the item category BVN. Use the settings from the original item categoty.

2.

Make sure that item category ZB## is automatically determined for materials with item category group NORM in sales document type ZB##.

3.

Change item category ZB## for deliveries. Picking is not needed because the goods that are bought are already in the employee shop. Therefore, deactivate the Relevant for picking field in the item category ZB## of the delivery.

Task 3: Incompleteness Create a new incompleteness procedure at header level. I.

Copy the incompleteness procedure that controls document type CS. First, determine which incompleteness procedure is used, then copy the key entry. (Note: Dialog box: "Warning, you are not within the customer namespace"; you can choose Enter to skip this message) Key: 60+## Description: MA## sales header (Example for detennining the key for seat 20: Maintain item 80: 60 +seat no. 20 = 80) 20 = 80 for seat 01: Maintain item 61: 60 +seat no. 01

2.

= 61) 01 = 61)

Change the new incompleteness procedure: -Remove the entry for the purchase order number. -To stop the system from creating free-of-charge documents, fill in the Net Value field of the Order. - Copy the Sales office field.

3.

Assign the procedure to sales document type ZB##. Make sure that incomplete documents cannot be saved.


-20_0_9______________________©_c_2_0_09--SA __ P_A_G___A_ll_ri-gh-ts--re_s_eN--ed-.--------------~6~3~5~

TSCM60


Task 4: Customer master record The employees have to be saved in the system as customers so that you can create orders for them. During project planning, it was decided that an individual customer master record is not needed for each employee. Instead, a collective master record (one-time customer account) can be used for employee sales. I.

Create a customer master record accordingly: Number:

MA##

Company code:

1000 IDES AG

Sales area

1000 10 00

Account group:

CPD customer (CPDA)

Reference: Customer:

CPD-L0615 (sample customer)

Company code:

/000/DESAG

Sales area:

100010 00

General data ->

Tab page: Address:

Name:

Employee ##

Search term:

MA##

Sales area data -+

Tab page: Sirles:

Sales office: -t

1000 Frttnkfurt

Tab page: Billing document:

lncoterms:

CPT (carriage paid to)

Terms of payment:

000 I (immediate payment due net)

Tax classification:

I


~636


2009

TSCM60


Task 5: Pricing Your sales manager has decided that each employee may receive a basic discount of 15%. I.

Maintain a master record for a customer-dependent discount (condition type: K007 customer discount) of 15% ..

Task 6: Printing the invoice The system should print the invoice automatically as soon as the sales document has been saved. I.

Create an output master data record. You can also use the output master record of the cash sales for this. Use output type RD03.

2.

The output has been configured so that it is sent to the bill-to party.. Set up the master record so that output is printed as soon as the document has been saved.

3.

Maintain the following communication data for the output master record you just maintained: Output device:

LPOJ

Number of messages:

1

Task 7: Sales to Employees Test your settings by trying to create a sale to an employee. I.

Create a sale to an employee. Customer: MA## (Enter address)

2.

What are the terms of delivery for the order?

3.

What are the terms of payment for the order?

4.

Can you save the document? Why I why not?

5.

Enter two items Continued on next page

2009


637~


TSCM60

Material: T-ATM## (I unit) Material: T-ATN## (1 unit) What discount did the system find?

6.

Which item categories did the system find for the items in the sales document?

7.

Save the order. Does the system automatically create a delivery?

8.

Check whether the system automatically printed the output when you saved the sales document.

9.

What type of delivery has been created?

I 0.

Which item category does the system find for the delivery items?

Post the goods issue.

11.

Create a billing document for the transaction

Which document does the billing document refer to? 12.

Where is this set in Customizing?

13.

What is the document type for the billing document?

14. Check the accounting document. Which accounts were the incoming payments posted to?

~638

15.

Did the system automatically determine an output in the billing document for printing the invoice? Why I why not?

16.

Look at the document flow for the whole process. Check the overall processing status of the individual documents.


2009

TSCM60


Solution 30: Sales Workshop: Sales to Employees Scenario Task 1: Sales document type Set up the sales document type ZB## MA## sale. I.

To do this, copy the CS Cash Sales order type. Ensure that all related table entries are copied. a)

IMG-> Sirles aml Distribution -> Sules-> Sales Documents-> S Define Sales Document Types-> Select sales document type BV-> Button: Copy Key: ZB## Description: MA## sale Press Enter to con finn Dialog box (confirmation prompt): Is the entry relevant for copying control? Choose Yes to confirm

Save the transaction. 2.

Configure the new document type so that the shipping condition as soon as possible (OJ) is found. a)

Set up the new document type as follows:

JMG-> Sales ami Distribution-> Sales-> Sales Documents-> Sales Document Header-> Define Sales Document Types Call the sales document type ZB## you have just set up. Make the following changes and checks. Bullon: Change

Shipping condition field: OJ (as soon as possible)

Save 3.

A ·wide range of checks andfimctions can be activated in the sales document type, such as checking for open contracts or searching for customer material

info records. These checks take place in document processing and therefore affect system petformance.


2009


639~


TSCM60

Ensure that all the checks and functions you do not need have been deactivated. a)

You can deactivate the following checks: Credit limit PO number Commitn1ent tlate Notes on quotations, outline agreements and group contracts Protluct attribute messages

Payment cards 4.

Which entry prevents the user from saving incomplete documents? Answer: The "lncomplet. messages" field is activated.

5.

What effect does the entry in the Shipping conditions field have? Answer: The shipping point is determined in the sales document from the shipping condition, the tlelivering plant, and the loading group of the material (see Fl Help for the field).

6.

Which entry causes a delivery to be created automatically when the sales document is saved? Answer: The Immediate delivery field is Activated by entry: X: Generate delivery immediately if quantity is confirmed for today.

7.

Which entries ensure that the current date is used automatically as the requested delivery date? Answer:

The "Lead time in days"jielll is blank. The "Propose deliv. Date" field is activated. 8.

What is the document type for the delivery? Answer: Information screen: Shipping: Delivery

9.

~l•pe

CS

Make sure that the system does not propose a billing document for delivery-related transactions. a)

Delete the entry in the field Del.-rel. bill. doc. type: CS


~640


2009

TSCM60


Task 2: Item category in sales and delivery Create a separate item category to enable an item control that is independent of cash sales. I.

Create a new item category ZB## by copying the item category BVN. Use the settings from the original item category. a)

JMG--> Sales ami Distribution--> Sirles--> Sales Documents--> Sltles Document Item--> Define Item Category -->Select item category "BVJ\m-+ Button: Copy Key: ZB## Description: ZB## item Choose Enter to confirm your entry. Dialog box (confirmation prompt): Is the entry relevant for copying control? Confirm with YES


Make sure that item category ZB## is automatically determined for materials with item category group NORM in sales document type ZB##. a)

JMG--> Sales ami Distribmion--> Sales--> Sales Documents--> Sales Document Item_,. Assign Item Categories----? Button: Position: Sales doc. type: ZB## Item cat. group: NORM Item usage: blank ItemCot-HgLvitm: bilmk Default item categ01y: ZB## (ovenvrite B VN) -+

3.

Button: Details -+ Delete all alternate item categories

Change item category ZB## for deliveries.


2009


641~


TSCM60

Picking is not needed because the goods that are bought are already in the employee shop. Therefore, deactivate the Relevant for picking field in the item category ZB## of the delivery. a)

IMG--> Logistics Execution--> Shipping--> Deliveries--> Define //em Categories for Deliveries Select your new item ctttegory: ZB## Select Button Detail and make your changes. -->

Deactivttte field relevant for picking

Save your entries.

Task 3: Incompleteness Create a new incompleteness procedure at header level. I.

Copy the incompleteness procedure that controls document type CS. First, determine which incompleteness procedure is used, then copy the key entry. (Note: Dialog box: "Warning, you are not within the customer namespace"; you can choose Enter to skip this message) Key: 60+## Description: MA## sales header (Example for determining the key for seat 20: Maintain item 80: 60 +seat no. 20 = 80) 20 = 80


~642


2009

TSCM60


for seat 01: Maintain item 61: 60 +seat no. 01 = 61) OJ= 61) a)

To determine which incompletness procedure has been used, check the corresponding assignment under ----+ JMG-+ Sales and Distribution Incomplete //ems

-+

Basic Functions-+ Log of

Assign Incompleteness Procedures-+ Assign procedures to the sales document types-> Procedure II ->

Exit button to go back

IMG ->Sales mul Distribution -> Basic Functions-> Log of Incomplete Terms-> Define Incompleteness Procedures---> Select error group A ->Press the "Procedures" button-> Press the "Change" button-> Select procedure II-> Press "Copy as" Key: 60+## Description: MA## sales header (Example for calculation of key for place 20: Maintain entry 80: 60 +seat no. 20 = 80 for seat 01: Maintain entry 61: 60 +seat no. 01

=

61)

Hint: Dialog box: "Warning, you are not within the customer

names pace": you can choose Enter to skip this message) --->

Copy all entries

Choose Enter to confirm your entry. Dialog box (confirmation prompt): Is the entry relevant for copying control? Choose YES to confirm this


Change the new incompleteness procedure: -Remove the entry for the purchase order number. -To stop the system from creating free-of-charge documents, fill in the Net Value field of the Order.


2009


643~


TSCM60

- Copy the Sales office field. a)

Change the new incompleteness procedure:

->Select new procedure 60+##-> Fielr/s button Remove the entry for the purchase order number.

Select item -> Delete button

->

To stop the system from creating free-of-charge documents, add the Net value of the order field.

Button: New Entries

->

Table:

VBAK

Field:

NETWR

Titb:

KKON

Status:

OJ

Warning:

blank

Ranking:

bilmk

Copy the Sales office field.

Titble:

VBAK

Field:

VKBUR

Screen:

KKAU

Status:

01

Warning:

blank

Rank:

blank

Hint: You can use any status group because incomplete documents cannot be savetl (incompleteness control was

activated in the document type SE##). 3.

Assign the procedure to sales document type ZB##.


~644


2009

TSCM60


Make sure that incomplete documents cannot be saved.

->Exit

a)

--)-Assign Incompleteness Procedures --)o

Assign procedures to sales document types ZB##

->

Procedure 60+##

Make sure that incomplete documents cannot be saved. --)o

Set the "lncomplet. messages" indicator

Task 4: Customer master record The employees have to be saved in the system as customers so that you can create orders for them. During project planning. it was decided that an individual customer master record is not needed for each employee. Instead, a collective master record (one-time customer account) can be used for employee sales. I.

Create a customer master record accordingly: Number:

MA##

Company code:

1000/DESAG

Sales area

1000 10 00

Account group:

CPD customer (CPDA)

Reference: Customer:

CPD-L0615 (sample customer)

Company code:

1000/DESAG

Sales area:

1000 10 00

Gener11l data ->

Tab page: Address:

Name:

Employee##

Search term:

MA##

Sales area data -->

Tab page: Sales:

1000 Fr11nk[urt

Sales office: ->

Tab page: Billing document: Continued on next page

2009


645~

TSCM60


lncoterms:

CPT (carriage paid to)

Terms of payment:

OOOI (immediate payment due net)

Tax classification:

I

a)

Logistics --->Sales aml Distribution --->Master Data Partner -----7 Custmner ~ Create_.,. Cmnplete

--->

Business

Number:

MA##

Company code:

1000/DESAG

Sales Area

1000 IO 00

Account group:

One-time customer (CPDA)

Template: Customer:

CPD-L06I5 (sample customer)

Company code:

1000/DESAG

Sales area:

1000 IO 00

Click Enter to start maintenance of data

General data _.,. Tab page: Atltlress:

Name:

Employee ##

Search term:

MA##

Sl1les area data ___, Tab page: Sales: Sales Office:

1000 Frankfurt

_.,.Billing screen:

Incoterms:

CPT (Carriage Paid To)

Payment terms:

OOOI (immediate payment due net)

Tax classification:

I


~646


2009

TSCM60


Task 5: Pricing Your sales manager has decided that each employee may receive a basic discount ofl5%. I.

Maintain a master record for a customer-dependent discount (condition type: K007 customer discount) of 15% .. a)

->Logistics-> Sales ami Distribution-> Muster Data-> Conditions Select Using Condition Type -> Create

->

Condition type: K007 Key combinutions button ->Division/customer Muintain the condition record Customer: MA## Rate: /5

Press Enter to retrieve the default data from the message type Suve the condition record

Task 6: Printing the invoice The system should print the invoice automatically as soon as the sales document has been saved. 1.

Create an output master data record. You can also use the output master record of the cash sales for this. Use output type RD03. a)

-}Logistics~

->

2.

Sales and Distribution --).Master Data

Output-> Sit!es Document-> Crmte-> RD03

The output has been configured so that it is sent to the bill-to party.. Set up the master record so that output is printed as soon as the document has been saved. a)

Field: Sules doc type:

ZB##

Field: Role:

BP

Field: Medium:

I

Fieltl: Stage:

4


2009


647~

TSCM60


3.

Maintain the following communication data for the output master record you just maintained: Output device:

LPOI

Number of messages:

I

a)

If you exited the transaction for maintaining the output master record, call the output master record you have just created in change mode. Sales document type: ZB##

Button: Execute ~Button:

Communication

Output device:

LPOI

Field: Output immediately

activate

Field: Release after output:

Activate

Number of messages:

I

Save

your entries.

Task 7: Sales to Employees Test your settings by trying to create a sale to an employee. 1.

Create a sale to an employee. Customer: MA## (Enter address) a)

2.

-->

Tab page: Sales--> CPT (from customer master record)

What are the terms of payment for the order?

a) 4.

Enter address

What are the terms of delivery for the order?

a)

3.

-->

--)" Tab page:

Sales~

0001 (from customer ma.'ifer record)

Can you save the document? Why I why not?


f:'!i!!'"

648


2009

TSCM60


a)

No. You have not entered any items so the net value of the document is zero. Since the "Incompleteness messages indicator was activated, you cannot save an incomplete document. 11

5.

Enter two items Material: T-ATM## (I unit) Material: T-ATN## (I unit) What discount did the system find?

a)

-->Select item IO--> Button. Conditions--> K007 -I 5% customer discount has been found

6.

Which item categories did the system find for the items in the sales document?

a) 7.

--> Goto --> Overview--> Scroll to the right in the table--> Item category: ZB##

Save the order. Does the system automatically create a delivery?

a)

---)-Yes. Message in the status bar:

MA## sales#### has been sa••ed (Delivery#### created) 8.

Check whether the system automatically printed the output when you saved the sales document.

a)

~

Change sales document~ Extras~ Output~ Header~ Green Traffic Light =successfully processed

Edit~

Display the output on your screen. In the sales document

-->Sales document--> Button: View he(/(ler output 9.

What type of delivery has been created?


2009


649~


a)

TSCM60

Logistics---> Sales anti Distribution---> Shipping anti Transportation ---> Outbound Delivery---> Change---> Single Document Button: Button: Header details

--)o

TI1b page

"Atl!nini~tration ":

De/ive1y Type Field: CS I 0.

Which item category does the system find for the delivery items?

Post the goods issue. a)

--->

Back

--7

Select an item anti choose the button "Item details"; Item

category: ZB## --*

II.

Button: Post tile goods issue

Create a billing document for the transaction

Which document does the billing document refer to?

a)

Logistics--). Sales and Distribution __, Billing - 7 Billing Documents __, Create

Tile billing document refers to tile sales document.

12.

Where is this set in Customizing?

a)

Customizing: Sales and Distribution --)o Sales --)o Sales Documents__,. Sales Doczunent Item - 7 Define Item Categories

in item category ZB## Relevant for billing jieltl: B 13.

What is the document type for the billing document?

a)

--->See title bar of screen Billing type: CS

14. Check the accounting document. Which accounts were the incoming payments posted to?


~650


2009

TSCM60


a)

~Billing

tlocument

~

Change

-->Environment--> Display document flow ~Select

-->

accounting document

Bullon: Display document

-->Account Number: 100 000 Petty cash 15.

Did the system automatically determine an output in the billing document for printing the invoice? Why I why not?

a) 16.

No. As soon as the order was saved, an invoice was printed and given to the customer.

Look at the document flow for the whole process. Check the overall processing status of the individual documents. a)

Logistics--> Sales ami Distribution--> Sctles--> Order--> Display -->

Environment--> Display Document Flow

-->Select each document ~

2009

Button: Status overview


651~

TSCM60


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Set up a cash sales scenario with the sales workshop for the sale of materials to your own employees.

~652


2009

TSCMSO

Lesson: Sales Workshop: Bills of Materials Scenario

Lesson: Sales Workshop: Bills of Materials Scenario Lesson Overview This lesson looks at control of bills of material at main and sub-item level.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Control the various functions of bills of material at main and sub-item level.

Business Example Several materials can often be sold together as sets or packages. These are stored in the SAP system as bills of material (BOMs). Each separate material in the bill can be configured individually. Your company, IDES. specializes in combining PC packages to meet the customer's individual requirements. The individual components are not ordered until the customer places an actual order. It is your job to create the settings for these PC packages.

Order ----'---...----; Customer: 2738 l Order no.: 5718 Sales area: 1ooo' I _·1 01 00 j

I

100 110 120

PC package 1 PC BasiC device1 PC Processor 1 PC

130

PAM

4 PC

140 200

Monitor Monitor

1 PC 2 PC

Transfer of requirements.

Figure 233: BOMs - Requirements

You are a specialist in selling PCs configured according to individual customer requirements. The components are obtained from a distributor who is in contact with the producers in the Far East.

2009


653~

TSCM60


The components are not ordered from the distributor until the customer has placed an order for the PC. This reduces warehouse stock and thus capital tie-up. Your customers may also order replacement pa11s. The components of the PC come from different vendors. Requirements are therefore transferred to purchasing at component level. This means that one order can generate several purchase orders. An availability check is not necessary in the order because the components are ordered directly from the distributor. The delivery note must contain details of both the PC and all its components. The invoice contains the whole package with the quantity that was delivered. All the components should be listed in the invoice.

Order 5718 Customer: 2738 100 PC package

1~ i

The bill of material is saved in the system as a master

record.

Figure 234: BOMs -Exploding BOMs in Sales Order 1

~654


2009

TSCM60


'.~ ·~ '+;-,%F

2. System determines item category of main

item

Order 5718

Customer: 273B 100 PC package 1 PC

The bill of material is saved in the system as a master record.

Figure 235: BOMs - Exploding BOMs in Sales Order 2

•r-:-::ter :'\;;\,

'"<~~,

rna~~:,~-. ~~· =~=~~ ·.-::_;~ 2. System l{ ~:~termines item

..... ".".m. ber with 80. M ...·..

··~z.;.;;~~:~--:::-. '~> Order 5718

Customer: 2738

100 110


category of main item

·-::~.~

-~ 1~

PC package 1 PJ ElM tC deVlCC l PC

·<::;~\'<>.. )'-~ _:_;' ..·-"''

~·.;.;.:~,

··;:">z \ exp~odes the bill of ,

1,~

3.1tem category

"'"-'-.....:.::,....,.~

material

N

---------

Figure 236: BOMs - Exploding BOMs in Sales Order 3

-20_0_9_______________________ ©_2_0_09__S_A_P_A_G_._A_II-ri-gh_t_s-re_s_eN--ed-.--------------~6~5~5~

TSCM60


2. System determines item category of main

PC package 1 PC Basic device 1 PC Processor 1 PC


RAM

4PC

Monitor

1 PC

The material and components in the BOM are controlled by the item and schedule line categories,

Figure 237: BOMs - Exploding BOMs in Sales Order

If there is a bill of material master record for the material, it can be exploded in the sales document. This depends on the settings you make in Customizing. The structure is exploded in the following order in the sales document: The material that has a bill of material is entered in the order. This is the main item of the bill of material. The item category of the main item is determined. This item categot)· controls whether and how the BOM is exploded. If the BOM needs to be exploded, the system does it automatically. The components are then listed in the document as sub-items for !he main item. The system determines an item category for each sub-item. You can control the functions of each item eategory when' you define it. The schedule line categories are determined dependent on the respective item category. These settings can also be customized. Bills of Material -Tasks Create bills of material Modify the sales document type Create your own item category group Create and assign your own item categories Identify and assign suitable schedule line categories Generate an automatic purchase requisition Test the bills of material in the application

~656


2009

TSCM60


Exercise 31: Sales Workshop: Bills of Materials Scenario Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: Create item category groups Create sales BOMs Create and assign item categories Create and assign schedule line categories

Set up automatic purchase requisitions.

Business Example Your company, IDES, is a trading company that specializes in selling personal computers that have been designed to meet your customer's specific requirements. You obtain the components from a distributor who is in contact with producers in the Far East. The components are not ordered from the distributor until the customer has placed an order for the PC. This reduces warehouse stock and thus capital tie-up. For you to be able to order the individual components of a PC from different distributors. requirements have to be transferred to the Purchasing Department at the component level. This means that one sales order can lead to several purchase orders. However, the invoice only contains the whole package with the quantity that was delivered. Your customers are also able to purchase individual spare parts. This means that you still have to be able to price the components individually. The delivery note and the billing document should contain both the PC and all its relevant components.

An availability check is not necessary for the order because you procure the components directly from the distributor. You also want to determine the cost for all components for statistics and controlling purposes. Change the settings for a bill of material (BOM) in Sales and Distribution so that it can fulfill all these requirements.

2009


657~

TSCMSO


Task 1: Bill of materials Save a PC package in your system as a single-level bill of material by using the materials created for you in the training system. Use the materials saredfor you in the training system to do this ..

I.

2.

3.

Create a BOM for material T-ATS##: Material:

T-ATS##

Plant:

1200 Dresden

Usage:

5

Sales and distribution valid from:

today

Enter the following BOM items with the BOM item category L (stock item): Item I 0:

T-ATT##

1 PC

Item 20:

T-ATU##

1 PC

Item 30:

T-ATV##

4 PC

Item 40:

T-ATW##

1 PC

a) Check whether the items in the BOM are relevant to sales documents. b) How is this achieved?

4.

Which item category groups are assigned to the materials in the BOM for sales organization 1000 and distribution channel] 0 in the material master?

T-ATS##: T-ATT##: T-ATU##:.

T-ATW##:


~658


2009

TSCMSO


Task 2: Create order Check your new sales and distribution BOM by creating an order in the test system. I.

a) Create an order for the BOM you have just created. Document type:

ZA##

Sales area:

100010 00

Customer:

T-L63D##

PO number:

BOM##- OJ

Material:

T-ATS##

b) Does the system explode ihe bill of material?

2.

What item categories are automatically chosen by the system for the main and sub-items? Main item: Sub-items:

3.

At what level does pricing take place?

Where is this controlled in Customizing?

4.

Which items will appear in the billing document and why? Why I why not?

5.

Which schedule line categories does the system find for the main and sub-items?

Main item: Subitems:


2009


659~

TSCM60


Task 3: Sales document type Use the sales BOMs in sales documents of sales document type ZA##. Further processing of sales processes in your company is as in the SAP standard system that is, deliveries are created with delivery type LF and billing documents with billing document type F2. I.

Check whether the correct default values have been activated in your sales document type and, if necessary, change any settings. Delivery type: Order-related billing document type Delivery-related billing document type:

2.

The items in the sales document should be numbered in I OOs. When you explode a BOM, the sub-items should be numbered in 1Os. Configure your sales document type accordingly. Item no. increment: Sub-item increment:

Task 4: Item category in the sales order You use the settings already defined in Customizing for the SAP standard system for your BOM settings. You therefore copy the item categories fi"om the standard system.

You want the following to take place in your BOMs: -Pricing should be calculated for the whole package. -The delivery note should contain all items in the package. -The invoice should contain the main item and its components with the quantities that were actually delivered. -The whole BOM should be exploded in the sales document. 1.

The settings that you configure in the main item are valid.for the ·whole package. Continued on next page

Wsso


2009

TSCM60


Create a new item category ZH## with description Package##-MI by copying item category TAQ.

Name: ZH## Description: Package##-Ml 2.

The item category ZH## should be customized to meet the following requirements; Pricing should be performed, the item is relevant for billing and it should be sent with the delivery, the bill of material should be exploded (single-level) and the cost should be determined using the subitems. If necessary, change item category ZH## to meet your needs. Note the Pricing, Relevant for billing, Schedule lines allowed, Structure scope, Application and Determine cost fields. Pricing:

Billing relevance: Schedule lines allowed: Determine cost: Structure scope:

Application:

3.

The setlings at the sub-item level control all the rasks you want to implement separately for each item.

Create a new item category ZU## with description Package##-SI by copying item category TAE.

Name: ZU## Description: Package##-UP 4.

The item category ZU## should be customized to meet the following requirements; Pricing is not required but the value of the subitem should be displayed as the cost. Also, the item is relevant for billing and it should be sent with the delivery. If necessary, change the item category ZH## to meet your needs. Note the following fields Pricing, Relevant for billing, Schedule lines allowed, Structure scope, Application and Determine cost.


-20_0_9______________________©_c_2_0_09__S_A_P_A_G_._A_II-ri-gh_t_s-re_s_e~--ed-.--------------~6~6~1 ~

TSCM60


Pricing: Billing relevance: Schedule lines allowed: Determine cost fields: Structure scope:

Application:

5.

Ifyou want to sell the computer parts separately,

there should be a separate

item categmy in the sales document.

Create a new item category ZN## with description PC parts## by copying TAN. Name: ZN## Description: PC parts##

6.

The item category ZN## should be customized to meet the following requirements; Pricing should be performed, the item is relevant for billing and it should be sent with the delivery, the cost of the material delivered should be determined. If necessary, change item category ZN## to meet your needs. Note the Pricing, Relevant.for billing, Schedule lines allowed, Structure scope, and Application fields. Pricing: Billing relevance:

Schedule lines allowed: Determine cost fields: Structure scope:

Application:


~662


2009

TSCM60


Task 5: Define item category group

In order to use the controls that have been defined for BOMs in the standard ;ystem, you decide to create a third, independem control. l.

Define the new item category group ZO## with description MTPOS Group##.

2.

Change the item category group of your BOM product T-ATS## to ZO##. (Org. data: Plant: 1200 I Sales org. 1000 I DChnl: I 0)

Task 6: Assign item categories

The new item categories should be used in the sales document type ZA##. l.

Configure the settings so that the system finds the new item category ZH## Package##-MI for the main item of the BOM.

2.

Configure the settings so that the system finds the new item category ZU## Package##-SJ for the sub-items in the BOM. Note that your subitems have the item category group NORM and that they should be found together with the main item ZH##.

3.

Configure the settings so that when you sell individual computer parts, the system finds the new item category ZN## PC parts## and no other alternatives are possible. You may have to change or overwrite an existing assignment.

Task 7: Schedule line cat. The components should be automatically ordered ji·om the distributor when the sales order is saved.

I.

The two schedule line categories ZH SCM605-HP and ZU SCM 60S-UP have been created in the training system for this. The schedule line categories ZH and ZU have already been configured to ensure that they work correctly for this workshop section. Please do not change them.

2.

Which setting in the schedule line category ensures that a delivery item is cr~ated from the schedule line?

3.

Which setting in the schedule line category ensures that goods issue is posted to inventory management?


2009


663~

TSCM60


4.

Schedule line category ZH SCM605-HP was created to control the main item. How are the following fields defined in Customizing? Item rei.

f

dlv:

Movement type: Requirements transfer:

Avoi/ability check:

5.

Schedule line category ZU SCM605-UP has been created to control the subitems. How are the following fields defined in Customizing? Item relevant for de/ive1y: Movement type: Requirements tramfer: Availability check:

6.

{fan order is placedfor a PC. you want purchase requisition creation to take place automatically fOr the components.

All the necessary information is contained in the schedule lines in the sales order. Important control parameters were already determined for purchase requisition creation when you defined the schedule line category in the sales order. How are the following entries for the schedule line category ZU SCM605-UP defined for the subitems of the bill of material: Purchase order type:

P.req.del.sched: Item category: Acct. assigt cgt.:

Task 8: Assign schedule line category I.

~664

Which MRP type was assigned to each material in the BOM for plant 1200 in the material master record? Continued on next page


2009

TSCM60

lesson: Sales Workshop: Bills of Materials Scenario

T-ATS##: T-ATT##: T-ATU##: T-ATV##: T-ATW##:

2.

Configure your settings to ensure that the system finds the schedule line category ZH SCM605-HP for the main item ZH## of the bill of material. You may have to change or overwrite an existing assignment.

3.

Configure your settings to ensure that the system finds schedule line category ZU SCM605-UP for the subitems in the BOM.

4.

Configure the settings to ensure that the system finds the schedule line category ZU SCM605-UP for items in item category ZN##. As already determined, the computer parts have the MRP type PD.

Task 9: Item category in the delivery The PC delivered to the customer comprises the nrdered components.

I.

You therefore decide to carry out picking at component level.

2.

Make sure the components in the BOM need to be picked. To do this, set the delivery item category ZU## the same way as the delivery item category TAN. The automatic batch detennination should be deactivated in the delivery item category ZU## .

3.

Ensure that the main item in the BOM ZH## is not picked.

4.

How does delivery item category ZN## respond with regard to picking? Check and. if necessary, change the settings.

Task 10: Create an order

Test your BOM in a sales order. I.

a) Create an order.

Continued

2009


011

next page

665~

TSCM60


Order type:

ZA##

Sales area:

1000 10 00

Customer:

T-L63D##

PO number:

BOM##- 02

Req. deliv. date:

In two weeks time

Material:

T-ATS## (I unit)

b) Does the system explode the bill of material?

2.

Which item numbers does the system give the BOM? I. Item:

2. Item: 3. Item: 4. Item: 5. Item: 3.

Does the system automaticaily use your item categories for the main and sub-items?

Main item: Subitems: 4.

Does the system automatically use your schedule line categories? Schedule line category for main item:

Scheduling category for sub-items:

5.

Your customer adds two more monitors to the original order. Change the order and enter an item with material T-ATW##. What is the item number ofthis item? Number:

6.

Which item and schedule line categories does the system use for the new item?


~666


2009

TSCM60


Item category:


7.

Did the system calculate a price for this material? Why I why not?

8.

You can call the purchase requisition directly from the sales document. Navigate from the order to the purchase requisition.

9.

Deliver the order. Does the system explode the BOM in the delivery note?

a) Pick the delivery by creating a transfer order (warehouse number: 012, Process: Background, adopt pick. quantity: /) b) Post the goods issue. I 0.

a) Bill the delivery. b) Does the system explode the BOM in the billing document?

II.

Do the costs appear in the billing document? Depending on how you have configured your settings, the costs should appear on the conditions tab page of the respective item. Pricing should be displayed for the main item but no cost should be determined. Pricing should not be performed for the subitems but the item cost should be displayed. Main item:

Sub-item:

2009


667~

TSCM60


Solution 31: Sales Workshop: Bills of Materials Scenario Task 1: Bill of materials

Save a PC package in your system as a single-level bill of material by using the materials created for you in the training system. Use the materials saved for you in the training system to do this ..

I.

Create a BOM for material T-ATS##: Material:

T-ATS##

Plant:

1200 Dresden

Usage:

5

Sales and distribution valid from:

toduy

a)

2.

Logistics-+ Sales m1tl Distribution -+Master D11t11-+ Products-+ Bills of Material-+ Bill ofMaterial-+ Material BOM-+ Create

Enter the following BOM items with the BOM item category L (stock item): Item 10:

T-ATT##

I PC

Item 20:

T-ATU##

I PC

Item 30:

T-ATV##

4 PC

Hem 40:

T-ATW##

I PC

a) 3.

a) Check whether the items in the BOM are relevant to sales documents. b) How is this achieved?

a)

Bill ofmaterilll-+ Material BOM-+ Change-+ Select Items-+ Goto -+ Item -+ Status/long text

b)

The item has been set to the status "relevant to sales". When you create a BOM, this status is automatically activated because the BOM has been created as a Sales and Distribution BOM. (Usage indicator: 5 Sales and distribution). Continued on next page

~668


2009

TSCM60


4.

Which item category groups are assigned to the materials in the BOM for sales organization 1000 and distribution channel] 0 in the material master?

T-ATS##: T-ATT##: T-ATU##: T-ATV##: T-ATW##:

a)

Logistics-> Sales and Distribution ->Master Data -> Products -> Materials -> Trading Goods -> Display -> View: Sales: SalesOrgData 2 T-ATS##:

ERL4

T-ATT##:

NORM

T-ATU##:

NORM

T-ATV##:

NORM

T-ATW##:

NORM

Task 2: Create order Check your new sales and distribution BOM by creating an order in the test system. I.

a) Create an order for the BOM you have just created. Document type:

ZA##

Sales area:

1000 10 00

Customer:

T-L63D##

PO number:

BOM##- OJ

M'\terial:

T-ATS##



2009


669~


2.

TSCM60

a)

Logistics--)> Sales and Distribution---). Sales-+ Order--+ Create

b)

Yes.

What item categories are automatically chosen by the system for the main and sub-items? Main item: Sub-items:

a)

3.

Logistics--> Sales and Distribution -->Sales--> Order--> Change -+ Sales overview Main item:

TAQ

Subitems:

TAE

At what level does pricing take place?

Where is this controlled in Customizing?

a)

-->

Select item--> Conditions button

Main item level.

JMG--> Sales aml Distribution--> Sitles--> Sales Documents--> Sales Document Item--+ Define Item Categories - TAQ is relevant for pricing - TAE is not relevant for pricing 4.

Which items will appear in the billing document and why? Why I why not?


~670


2009

TSCM60


a)

IMG---> Sales anti Distribution---> Sales---> Sales Documents---> Sales Document Item---> Define Item Categories

Only the main item. Only item categ01y TAQ is releva111 to billing.

5.

Which schedule line categories does the system find for the main and sub-items? Main item: Subitems:

a)

Logistics-+ Sales and Distribution -+Sales-+ Order-+ Change-+ Select item---> Button: Schedule lines for item

Main item:

CN

Subitems:

CT

Task 3: Sales document type Use the sales BOMs in sales documents of sales document type Z4##. Further processing of sales processes in your company is as in the SAP standard system that is, deliveries are created with delivery type LF and billing documents with billing document type F2. I.

Check whether the correct default values have been activated in your sales document type and, if necessary, change any settings.


2009


671~

TSCM60


Delivery type: Order-related billing document type Delivery-related billing document type: a)

2.

IMG--> Sales am/ Distribution-> Sales-> Sales Documents--> Sales Document Header-> Define Sales Document Types Delivery type:

LF

Order-related billing document type

F2

Delivery-related billing document type:

F2

The items in the sales document should be numbered in I OOs. When you explode a BOM, the sub-items should be numbered in I Os. Configure your sales document type accordingly. Item no. increment:

Sub-item increment:

a) Item no. increment:

I 00

Sub-item no. increment:

10


~672


2009

TSCM60


Task 4: Item category in the sales order You use the sellings already defined in Customizing for the SAP standard system for your BOM settings. You ther~fore copy the item categories.fi·omthe standard system. You want the following to take place in your BOMs: - Pricing should be calculated for the whole package. -The delivery note should contain all items in the package. -The invoice should contain the main item and its components with the quantities that were actually delivered. -The whole BOM should be exploded in the sales document. I.

The settings that you configure in the main item are valid for the whole package. Create a new item category ZH## with description PackageH:iL1\1l by

copying item category TAQ.

Name: ZH## Description: Package##-MI

a)

2.

JMG--)- Sales and Distribution ---}Sales -7 Sales Documents-+ Sales Document Item--> Define Item Category--> Select TAQ--> Bullon: Copy

The item category ZH## should be customized to meet the following requirements; Pricing should be performed, the item is relevant for billing and it should be sent with the delivery. the bill of material should be exploded (single-level) and the cost should be determined using the subitems. If necessary, change item categmy ZH## to meet your needs. Note the Pricing, Relevant for billing, Schedule lines allowed, Structure scope, Application and Determine cost fields.

Pricing: Billing relevance:

Schedule lines allowed:


2009


673~

TSCM60


Determine cost:

Structure scope: Application:

a)

3.

Pricing:

X Standard pricing

Billing relevance:

A


activated

Determine cost:

deactivated

Structure scope:

A Explode single-level bill of material

Application:

SDOJ Sales and Distribution

Delive~:v-related

billing document

The settings at the sub-item level control all the tasks you want to implement

separately for each item. Create a new item category ZU## with description Package##-SJ by copying item category TA E.

Name: ZU## Description: Package##-UP

a)

4.

JMG--> Sales ami Distribution -->Sales--> Sales Documents--> Sales Document item--> Define Item CategOIJ'--> Select TAQ--> But/on: Copy

The item category ZU## should be customized to meet the following requirements; Pricing is not required but the value of the subitem should be displayed as the cost. Also, the item is relevant for billing and it should be sent with the delivery. If necessary, change the item category ZH## to meet your needs. Note the following fields Pricing, Relevant for billing, Schedule lines allowed, Structure scope, Application and Determine cost. Pricing:

Billing relevance: Schedule lines allowed:

Conanued on next page

~674


2009

TSCM60


Determine cost fields: Structure scope:

Applicatio•1:

a)

Pricing:

Blank No pricing

Billing relevance:

A delive1y-related billing


activated

Determine cost fields:

activated

Structure scope:

Blank (do not explode bill of material structzwe)

Application: 5.

blank

Ifyou want to sell the computer parts separately, there should be a separate item categmy in the sales document. Create a new item category ZN## with description PC parts## by copying TAN.

Name: ZN## Description: PC p11rts##

a)

JMG-> Sales ami Distribution

->

S11les-> S11/es Documents

->

Sales Document Item--)' Define Item Categories--)' Select TAN--)'

Bullon: Copy 6.

The item category ZN## should be customized to meet the following requirements; Pricing should be performed, the item is relevant for billing and it should be sent with the delivery. the cost of the material delivered should be determined. If necessary. change item category ZN## to meet your needs. Note the Pricing, Relevant for billing, Schedule lines allowed, Structure scope, and Application fields. Pricing:

Billing relevance:



2009


675 I::E""

TSCM60


Determine cost fields: Structure scope:

Application: a) Pricing:

X Standard pricing

Billing relevance:

A delive1y-related billing


activated

Determine cost fields:

activated

Structure scope:

blank Do not explode bill qf material structure

Application:

blank

Task 5: Define item category group

In order to use the controls that have been defined for BOMs in the standard s...vstem, you decide to create u third, independent control. I.

Define the new item category group ZO## 1rith description MTPOS Group##. a)

2.

IMG-+ Sales and Distribution-+ Sales-+ Sales Documents-+ Sales Document Item-+ Define Item Category Groups

Change the item category group of your BOM product T-ATS## to ZO##. (Org. data: Plant: 1200/ Sales org. 1000/ DChnl: 10) a)

-->Logistics--> Sales and Distribution--> Master Data--> Products--> Material--> Trading Goods--> Change View: Sales: Sales org. data 2


~676


2009

TSCMSO


Task 6: Assign item categories The new item caregories should be used in the sales document type ZA##.

I.

Configure the settings so that the system finds the new item category ZH## Package##-MI for the main item of the BOM. a)

2.

IMG-> Sales and Distribution ->Sales-> Sales Documents-> Sttles Document Item--} Assign Item Categories--)- Button: New Entries Sales doc. type:

ZA##

Item categmy group:

ZO##

Item usage:

blank

HLevltCa:

blank

DjltC (default item categmy):

ZH##

Configure the settings so that the system finds the new item category ZU## Package##-SJ for the sub-items in the BOM. Note that your subitems have the item category group NORM and that they should be found together with the main item ZH##. a)

IMG-> Sales aml Distribution ~ Sttles ~Sales Documents-> Sales Document ltenz-+ Assign Item Categories-+ Button: New Entries Sales doc. type:

ZA##

Item categmy group:

NORM

Item usage:

blank

ItemCat-HgLvltm:

ZH##

Default item category:

ZU##


2009


677~

TSCM60


3.

Configure the settings so that when you sell individual computer parts, the system finds the new item category ZN## PC parts## and no other alternatives are possible. You may have to change or overwrite an existing assignment. a)

IMG--> S1tfes 11nd Distribution--> S11les--> S11les Documents--> S11les Document Item -7 Assign Item Categories -7 Button: Position: Sales doc. type:

ZA##

Item categmy group:

NORM

Item usage:

bl!mk

ItemCat-HgLvitm:

bl11nk

Default item category:

ZN## (overwrite TAN)

-->

Button: Det11i/s--> Delete llllllltenwle item c11tegories

Task 7: Schedule line cat. The components should be automatically orderedfi·om the distributor when the sales order is saved.

1.

The two schedule line categories ZH SCM605-HP and ZU SCM605-UP have been created in the training system for this. The schedule line categories ZH and ZU have already been configured to ensure that they work correctly for this workshop section. Please do not change them. a)

2.

Which setting in the schedule line category ensures that a delivery item is created from the schedule Iine?

a) 3.

The 1111em relevant for deliveJJ1 11 indicator has to be activated.

Which setting in the schedule line category ensures that goods issue is posted to inventory management?

a) 4.

IMG--> Sales and Distribution -->Sales--> S1tfes Documents--> Schedule Lines--> Define Schedule Line C11tegories

The movement type.

::,t.:iJeciui~:: iim:

CalcgOIY

ZJ-i 5Ci'v1605-i-ip \"''a:':~ ~H:alt:ci lO CUI1i.tv;

Lllc. lllu.<;,

item. How are the following fields defined in Customizing?


~678


2009

TSCM60


Item rei.

f

dlv:

Movemem type: Requirements

tran~fer:

Availabiliry check:

a)

5.

Item relevant for delive1y:

activated

Movement type:

blank


blank

Availability check:

blank

Schedule line category ZU SCM605-UP has been created to control the subitems. How are the following fields defined in Customizing? Item relevant for delivery: ~~1ovement

type:

Requirements

tran~fer:

Availability check:

a) Item relevant for delivery:

activated

Movement type:

601

Requirements

tran~fer:

Availability check:

6.

blank blank

Ifan order is placed for a PC, you want purchase requisition creation to take place automatically for the components. All the necessary information is contained in the schedule lines in the sales order.. Important control parameters were already determined for purchase requisition creation when you defined the schedule line category in the sales order. How are the following entries for the schedule line category ZU SCM605-UP defined for the subitems of the bill of material: Continued on next page

2009


679~

TSCM60


Purchase order type: P.req.del.sched: Item categmy Acct. assigt cat.:

a) Purchase order type:

NB

P.req.del.sched:

activated

Item categmy:

0 Normal (in purchase requisition)

Account assignment cat.

E Customer individual requirements

Task 8: Assign schedule line category I.

Which MRP type was assigned to each material in the BOM for plant 1200 in the material master record? T-ATS##: T-ATT##: T-ATU##: T-ATV##: T-ATW##:

a)

Logistics-+ Sales anti Distribution -+Master Data -+Products-+ Materiltl-+ Trading Goods-+ Display-+ View: MRP I T-ATS##:

ND

T-ATT##:

PD

T-ATU##:

PD

T-ATV##:

PD

T-ATW##:

PD


~680


2009

TSCM60


2.

Configure your settings to ensure that the system finds the schedule line category ZH SCM605-HP for the main item ZH## of the bill of material. You may have to change or overwrite an existing assignment. a)

IMG-> S11/es am/ Distribution -> S11fes-> S11/es Documents-> Schedule Lines--* Assign Schedule Line Categories--* Button: "Position": Item category: ZH## MRP type: ND Schedule line categ01y: Set ZH

3.

Configure your settings to ensure that the system finds schedule line category ZU SCM605-UP for the subitems in the BOM.

Item categ01y: ZU##

a)

MRP type: PD Schedule line categ01:v:Set ZU 4.

Configure the settings to ensure that the system finds the schedule line category ZU SCM605-UP for items in item category ZN##. As already determined. the computer parts have the MRP type PD. a)

Item category: ZN## MRP type: PD Schedule line category: Set ZU

Task 9: Item category in the deliHry The PC delivered to the customer comprises the ordered components.

I.

You therefore decide to carry out picking at component level.

a)

IMG-> Logistics Execution ->Shipping-> Deliveries-> Define Item Categories for Deliveries


2009


681~

TSCM60


2.

Make sure the components in the BOM need to be picked. To do this, set the delivery item category ZU## the same way as the delivery item category TAN. The automatic batch determination should be deactivated in the delivery item category ZU## . a)

-+Mat. no. 0 allowed -+

Check quantity 0:

--)' Check minimum quantify

activate A Note about the situation A Note about situation

field:

3.

Relevant for picking:

activate

-+

StLocation required:

activate

--l-

Determine StLocation:

activate

-+

AutoBatchDeterm.:

deactivate

Ensure that the main item in the BOM ZH## is not picked. a)

4.

-+

-+Deactivate the "Relevant for picking" jie/tl

How does delivery item category ZN## respond with regard to picking? Check and, if necessary, change the settings. a)

If you sell spare parts, they have to be picked as well. Because item category ZN## was created by copying TAN, you do not need to change the settings for picking for this delivery item category.

Task 10: Create an order Test your BOM in a sales order. 1.

a) Create an order. Order type:

ZA##

Sales area:

1000 10 00

Customer:

T-L63D##

PO number:

BOM##- 02

Reg. deliv. date:

lniiVo weeks time

Material:

T-ATS## (1 unit)



~

"6"'8"2'--------©:--20_0_9_S_A_P_A_G ___A_II_r_ig_h_ts-re_s_e_rv_e_d_.- - - - - - - - - - - 2 - 0 0 - 9

TSCM60


2.

a)

Logistics---> Sales and Distribution---> Sales---> Order---> Create

b)

Yes

Which item numbers does the system give the BOM? I. Item:

100

2. Item:

110

3. Item:

120

4. Item:

130

5. Item:

140

a) 3.

Does the system automatically use your item categories for the main and sub-items? Main item:

ZH##

Subitems:

ZU##

a)

Logistics~ ~

4.

Sales and Distribution Sales Overview

~Sales~ Order~

Change

Does the system automatically use your schedule line categories? Schedule line category for main item:

ZH

Scheduling category for sub-items:

ZU

a)

Logistics~


~Sales~ Order~ Change~

Select Item---> Button: Schedule lines 5.

Your customer adds two more monitors to the original order. Change the order and enter an item with material T-ATW##. What is the item number of this item? Number: a)

Logistics---> Sales and Distribution---> Sales---> Order---> Change Material: T-ATW## (2 pieces) Continued on next page

2009


683~

TSCM60


6.

Which item and schedule line categories does the system use for the new item? Item category:


a) Item category:

ZN## PC parts##

--). Tab page: Procurement

Schedule line category: 7.

ZU SCM605-UP

Did the system calculate a price for this material? Why I why not?

a)

->Select item ->

Button: Conditions

Yes. item ctttegory ZN## is priced by the system. 8.

You can call the purchase requisition directly from the sales document. Navigate from the order to the purchase requisition. a)

Select item-> Button: Schedule line Select schedule line..., Button: Details..., Tab page: Procurement Button: Edit

9.

Deliver the order. Does the system explode the BOM in the delivery note?

a) Pick the delivery by creating a transfer order (warehouse number: 012, Process: Background, adopt pick. quantity: /)


~684


2009

TSCM60


b) Post the goods issue.

a)

-+Logistics---+ Sales and Distribution---+ Shipping and Transportation -+

Outbound Delivery---+ Change-+ Single Document-+

£:J

Hint: Create a transfer order directly from the delivery.

Menu path: Next functions---> Create transfer request

£:J


-

Warehouse number:

-

Process:

012


Back- · Background processing ground

b)


I

(copy the picking quantity to the delivery)

--->Logistics---> Sales am/ Distribution---> Shipping am/ Transportation

-+

Outbound Delivery

-+

Change

-+Button: Post the goods issue 10. a) Bill the delivery. b) Does the system explode the BOM in the billing document?

a)

-+Logistics-+ Sales and Distribution-+ Billing-+ Billing Document -+Create

b) Yes II.

Do the costs appear in the billing document? Depending on how you have configured your settings, the costs should appear on the conditions tab page of the respective item. Pricing should be displayed for the main item but no cost should be determined. Pricing should not be performed for the subitems . but the item cost should be displayed. Main item: Sub-item:

a)

2009

-+

Button: Item price conditions.


685~

TSCM60


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Control the various functions of bills of material at main and sub-item level.

~686


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Sales Workshop: Material Determination Scenario

Lesson: Sales Workshop: Material Determination Scenario Lesson Overview This lesson deals with the subject of customer-specific material determination.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Expand the condition technique in material determination so that this may be both customer-specific and non customer-specific.

Business Example Materials can be automatically replaced in sales documents. In the following scenario, it is your job to set up automatic substitution for your company, IDES. Whenever possible, the stock of the old material should be used up for the orders before you sell the new product. However, you also want to deliver the new product to certain customers.

e

.

.

Order

. ~ Customer: 2738 i

Order

Order no.: 590]

Order no.: 5907

1000 10 00

1000 10 00

10 Old

P~

10 new PC 1 PCE

1 PC

You create an order for the old material.

A valid master record for material determination exists.

The system automatically enters the new material in the order.

Figure 238: Material Determination -Order

2009


687~

TSCM60


You want to use material determination to meet the following requirements: Special customers always receive the newest model even if a purchase order is created for the old one by mistake. A warning message is to inform the employee who creates the order that the material will be automatically replaced. This should also take place if any of these customers are the ship-to party in the sales document. All other customers only receive the new material if they order it specifically. Once the stock of the old material has been used up, the new material can then automatically replace the old one in the sales document.

e .

.

Sales document type

r

Order

-,

Document type : OR Sales org. 1000 Distribution

channel Division Customer

Material

10 00

C1 M-10

access Entry: MAT~10; Valid from

Subst.reason: 0002 valid to ,

Substitution material:

M-10

I

Figure 239: Material Determination -Condition Technique (6)

The condition technique provides more flexibility in modeling material determination and product selection. You can assign a material determination procedure to each sales document type. The procedure contains all of the Customizing information that the system needs for material determination. The procedure includes one or more defined condition types. One access sequence (search strategy) is assigned to each condition type. Each access sequence consists of one or more accesses.

Each access contains exactly one condition table. This represents the search key that the system uses to search for a valid master record.

Wsss


2009

TSCM60


You can activate an analysis of the material determination in the sales document. The system then displays detailed information on how the materials were determined.

Material determination master record

Condition table

Assigned to sales document type

Access

Material determination procedure

Access sequence Condition type

Figure 240: Material Determination -Customizing You should configure Customizing in the reverse sequence as the system searches for the valid material detennination master records for sales orders. You can activate the material determination analysis in the sales document. Menu path:

Environment~

Analysis----+ Material Determination----+ On

You can use this function to check Customizing in detail and carry out a step-by-step search of the system. This helps you to recognize and correct any incorrect settings quickly and easily.

Hint: The analysis runs during material determination so it must be activated before you enter the items in the document.

2009


689~

TSCM60


e .

.

Delivery Should the material be re-determined when you create the delivery?

Customer: 2738

Customer: 2738

._<:;,if'.

Order no.: 5907

1000 10 00 10 new PC 1 PC

Order no.: 5907

_/J . .

Order ------~

#[!,

1000 10 00 10 new PC 1 PC

? •

~·.•.·...

-,_-~

..

'"·'-"''

0 0 0 0

0

Order

0

confirmation

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Old PC 1 PC

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Which material appears in the order confirmation?

Figure 241: Material Determination -Substitution Reason

If the system automatically replaces the old material because it is no longer available(~ automatic product selection), you can 1-e-execute substitution when you create a delivery. This is useful if the amount of available material changes between creating the order and the delivery. Depending on your settings in Customizing, the order confirmation can contain either the material that was ordered or the substitution material.

Material Determination - Tasks Create a ne\v material master record

Create a new condition table Set up a new access sequence

Set up a new condition type for material determination Set up a new procedure for material determination Create a new reason for substitution Create master records for material determination

Test the effect of material determination in the order, delivery and order confinnation.

~690


2009

TSCM60


Exercise 32: Sales Workshop: Material Determination Scenario Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to:

Define and assign a material determination procedure Define the material determination type and assign this Define access sequences and assign these Define condition tables and assign these.

Business Example Your company IDES sells computers and computer parts. You recently added some new products to your stock. It is your job to configure the sales and distribution model so that special

customers always receive a "new" product when they order the "old" one. All other customers >hould continue to receive the old product until stocks run out. Up until now, you have been using material determination with the standard Customizing settings that were delivered in your SAP system. In this exercise, you will change material determination to meet your new requirements.

Task 1: Material master record: Your monitor T-ATQ## is one of the most successful trading goods in the industry sector "Mechanical Engineering" and therefore, your company is constantly updating it. I.

Create a material master record for the new product T-ATR##. Use the previous model T-ATQ## as a reference. Maintain the following views:

- Basic data I and 2 -Sales 1 and 2 -Sales/General plant -Sales text - Purchasing

- MRP 1-4

-Forecast - General plant data/Storage 1 and 2 Continued on next page

2009


691~

TSCM60


-Accounting 1 and 2

2.

Create the material in the following organizational units: Plant:

1200

Sales organization:

1000

Storage location:

0001

Disll: channel:

10

Make sure you refer to the same organizati(mal units for the template. Copy the data from the previous model and add or change the following fields: -Basic data 1: Material description:

NewScreen ##

Net weight:

15 kg

Gross weight:

16 kg

-Sales 2: Pricing ref material:

M-15

-MRP 2: Prod. st01: location:

0001

-Accounting 1: Standard price:

3.

1600

Post 1000 units to the unrestricted-use stock (movement type: 561, Plant: 1200, Storage Location: 000 1).

Task 2: Condition table I.

In the condition table, you define the fields in the sales document whose data the SAP system should use to find a valid master record for material determination.

2.

Create the new condition table 6## so that you can use it for creating master records for material determination. The new condition table should allow you to create master records that are only effective for certain customers and materials. You want to be able to restrict the validity of the master records. Use condition table 002 as a reference.


~692


2009

TSCM60


Condition table:

6##

Description:

Customer I Material##

Hint: Make sure that the material you want to enter appears as the last key field in the condition table. This means that the system checks the header fields first (for example, customer) and then the item fields in the condition table, which improves system performance. 3.

When you set up the condition table, you can determine what the screen for processing master records in the new condition table looks like.

For efficient maintenance of master records, you should be able to process the customer and material numbers in separate lines. 4.

Generate the new condition table. Hint: Create the new object in the Data Dictionary for development class $TMP. It is then a local object and cannot be transported.

5.

What information do you receive in the log?

Task 3: Access sequence The access sequence is the strategy used by the system to search for valid master records for a particular condition type. The access sequence contains one or more search steps (= accesses). Each access contains a condiTion wble which determines the key fields for the search. These are the document fields that the system uses to search for valid master records ..

Define a new access sequence containing three steps that the system can use to search for master records in material determination: I.

Was a master record stored for the material and the sold-to party?

2.

Was a master record stored for the material and the ship-to party?

3.

Was a master record stored for the material that substitutes the material depending on availability?

I.

Define the new access sequence.


2009


693~

TSCM60


AcSq (access sequence):

YO##

Description:

Search strategy ##

2.

The material should be substituted in the first access (no. 10 in the sequence) if there is a valid master record for the customer (field KUNNR: KUNAG) and the entered material.

3.

Branch to the fields in the condition table entered and look at the settings.

Hint: No condition is required. You can therefore skip the warning regarding the field assignment by pressing Enter. Which field in the sales document does the system use to determine the customer number?

4.

Substitution should take place in the second access ifthere is a valid master record for the ship-to party and entered material. Configure the access.

5.

In the third access (no.30 in the sequence), the system should only search for valid master records in material determination using the material entered. This is the standard setting in the SAP system. Check the fields in the access.

6.

Save the new access sequence. To do this, create a new workbench request

Short description: Access sequence group ##

Task 4: Condition type of material determination

You can use different search strategies to model material determination. You have to configure a separate condition type for each search strategy that you use in the business process.

I.

2.

Create a new condition type with the access sequence that you have just defined.

Condition type:

YO##

Descripaon:

Condition (rpe ##

Customize the condition type so that when you create a master record, the system automatically proposes a validity period from today to the end of the year. Continued on next page

~694


2009

TSCM60


Task 5: Material determination procedure All the tasks that are undertaken in the business process for material determination are anchored in a procedure for material determination. The procedure includes

one or more defined condition types. One access sequence (search strategy) is assigned to each condition type.

I.

2.

3.

Define a new procedure. A1aterial determination procedure:

YOOO##

Description:

Group procedure##

Copy the condition type you defined earlier into the procedure. Step:

10

Counter:

blank

Condition type:

YO##

Assign the new determination procedure to sales document type ZA##.

Task 6: Create substitution reason

I.

Create a reason for substitution Z## with short text Substitution ## for material determination. Define the following properties (or change your reason for substitution Z## if you already created it in the Material Substitution unit): -The order confirmation should contain the material ordered by the customer. -The system should issue a warning message before it substitutes a material. - Substitution should take place automatically (that is, without a selection screen). -The system should not generate any lower-level items in the document when it substitutes a material.

Task 7: Create master record

I.

Create a master data for material determination.


2009


695~

TSCM60


2.

T-L63B## is one of your special customers. Ensure that this customer always receives the new material in future orders, even if the sales order depmtment enters an order for the old material by mistake. Use your substitution reason.

3.

Ensure that this customer also always receives the new material in future orders when he or she is entered as the ship-to party in a sales process and an order is created with the old material. Use your substitution reason.

4.

Enter another master record in which you ensure that material T-ATR## automatically replaces material T-ATQ## once the latter is no longer available. This should take place for all orders for material T-ATQ## regardless of the ordering party. The material should only be substituted in the sales document. The subsequent delivery document should copy the details from the sales order. Choose a relevant substitution reason. Hint: The master record must contain the materials to be substituted, T-ATQ## and T-ATR##, in the correct sequence.

Task 8: Create output I.

Create a master record for output type BAOO Order confirmation for document type ZA ##.

Output type:

BAOO

Sales doc. type:

ZA##

Use the default values from the output type (ENTER). Maintain printer LPOI as the output device and set the number of messages to I.

Task 9: Creating the Order Test your settings for material determination in the sales document. I.

According to the master record you have created for material determination, customer T-L63B## should always receive the new product T-ATR##. Create a standard order (order type: OR for customer T-L63B## and the old product T-ATQ## (10 units) (purchase order number: Matftnd##OI), requested delivery date in two weeks). Did the system substitute the material? Continued on next page

~696


2009

TSCM60


Why or why not?

2.

Create the same order for order type Z4## (purchase order number:Matfind##02). Did the system substitute the material?

Check the substitution reason in the sales document.


Display the order confirmation on the screen. Which material is displayed in the printout? Material: Why 0

3.

T-L63B## is also the ship-to party for your customer T-L63C##. Create an order (order type: Z4##) for ship-to party T-L63B##. Ship-to party:

T-L63B##

Sold-to party:

T-L63C##

PO number:

Ma!Deter##OJ

Activate the material determination analysis (before entering the item). Material:

T-ATQ## (10 units)

Was the substitution made for the ship-to party?

Did the system display a warning message for the substitution?


-2-00_9_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ©_2_0_09_S_A_P_A_G___A_IJ_ri-gh_t_s-re_s_e_rv-ed-.-------~6;;-;;;9;:;7

~

TSCM60


Use the analysis to check your Customizing settings for material determination. Use the analysis to check which date the system uses in the document to check the validity date of the master record.

4.

Enter another order for sales document type ZA## for a "regular" customer. Customer:

T-L63A##


MatDeter##04

Material

T-ATQ## (10 units)

Check the substitution reason in the sales document. Substitution reason:

Display the order confirmation on the screen. Which materials are displayed in the printout? Material:

Material:

Why or why not?

5.

Check the available stock for material T-ATQ##. Stock:


~698


2009

TSCM60


Change the last order and enter a new item with a quantity that exceeds the available quantity. Which materials and quantity does the system automatically use when substituting this material? Material:

Material:

Check the order confirmation on the screen. Does the system display both substituted materials?

6.

Post 50 units of material T-ATQ## to stock. (Plant: 1200; Storage location: 0001; Movement type: 561). Deliver the last order. Compare the quantities in the order and the delivery. Are there any differences?

Why?

2009


699~


TSCM60

Solution 32: Sales Workshop: Material Determination Scenario Task 1: Material master record: Your monitor T-ATQ## is one ofthe most successful trading goods in the industry sector "Mechanical Engineering" and therefore, your company is constantly updating it. I.

Create a material master record for the new product T-ATR##. Use the previous model T-ATQ## as a reference. Maintain the following views:

- Basic data 1 and 2 - Sales 1 and 2 - Sales/General plant -Sales text -Purchasing -MRP 1-4 - Forecasl

- Gt:nc:ral plunt Jutu.'Storugt! 1 and 2 - Accouming 1 and 2

a)

2.

Logistics-> Sales am/ Distribution ->Master Data-> Products ----+ .41aterial----+ Trtuling Goods----+ Create----+ Sector: Meclzanica/ Engineering

Create the material in the following organizational units:

Plant:

1200

Sales organization:

1000

Storage location:

0001

Dist~:

10

channel:

Make sure you refer to the same organizational units for the template. Copy the data from the previous model and add or change the following fields:


~700


2009

TSCM60


-Basic data I: Material description:

NewScreen ##

Net weight:

I5 kg

Gross weight:

I6 kg

-Sales 2: Pricing ref material:

M-I5

-MRP2: Prod. stOJ: location:

OOOI

-Accounting 1:

Standard price: a) 3.

I600


Post IOOO units to the unrestricted-use stock (movement type: 56 I, Plant: I200, Storage Location: 000 I). a)

Logistics-+ Materials Management-+ Gootls Movement-+ Goods Movement_, Goods Receipt_, Other Movement

~}'pe:

56I

Plant:

I200

Storage Location:

OOOI

Enter Material:

T-ATR##

Quantity:

1000

Save

Task 2: Condition table I.

In the condition table, you define the fields in the sales document whose data the SAP system should use to find a valid master record for material determination.

a)

IMG _,Sirles and Distribution_, Basic Functions_, Material Determination


2009


701~


2.

TSCM60

Create the new condition table 6## so that you can use it for creating master records for material determination. The new condition table should allow you to create master records that are only effective for certain customers and materials. You want to be able to restrict the validity of the master records. Use condition table 002 as a reference. Condition table:

6##

Description:

Customer I Material##

Hint: Make sure that the material you want to enter appears as the last key field in the condition table. This means that the system checks the header fields first (for example, customer) and then the item fields in the condition table, which improves system performance.

a)

--)>Maintain prerequisites for material determination --)>

Create condition tables Hint: To change the description, press button:

Propose I maintain text. --)>Delete the "Sales organi:.ation" and "Distribution channel"jie/ds by positioning the cursor on the entry and choosing: Delete line. ->

Insert field, Place cursor on the first row within/he fields you have

selected and choose "Insert Row" --)>Select the field "Customer" from the field "Catalog" mul select the bullon "Select field" 3.

When you set up the condition table, you can determine what the screen for processing master records in the new condition table looks like.

For efficient maintenance of master records, you should be able to process the customer and material numbers in separate lines. a)

->

Choose Tee/mica/ Perspective

--)>

Set the "Line field" indicator for the new "Customer" key field


~702


2009

TSCM60


4.

Generate the new condition table. Hint: Create the new object in the Data Dictionary for development class $TMP. It is then a local object and cannot be transported.

a)

Button: Generate -->Development Cfltss: $TMP -->

5.

Choose Local Object

What information do you receive in the log?

a)

The log indicates that/he new table was activated amltltattlte condition record screens are ready to be generated. Tlte system does not generate the screens for entering condition records immediately but when you create a master record with the new key combination (= condition table) for the firs/time.

Task 3: Access sequence The access sequence is the strategy used by the ~ystern to search for valid master records for a particular condition type. The access sequence contains one or rnore search steps (= accesses). Each access contains a condition table which determines the keyfleldsfor the search. These are the document fields that the system uses to search for valid master records .. Define a new access sequence containing three steps that the system can use to search for master records in material determination: I.

Was a master record stored for the material and the sold-to party?

2.

Was a master record stored for the material and the ship-to party?

3.

Was a master record stored for the material that substitutes the material depending on availability?

I.

Define the new access sequence.

AcSq (access sequence):

YO##

Description:

Search strategy ##

a)

-->Maintain Prerequisites for Material Determination -+Maintain Access Sequences-+ Button: New Entries


2009


703~

TSCM60


2.

The material should be substituted in the first access (no. 10 in the sequence) if there is a valid master record for the customer (field KUNNR: KUNAG) and the entered material. a)

3.

-->Access sequence: Select YO## -->Dialog structure: Accesses--> Choose: "New entries" -->

AcNo field.: 10

-->

Tab. Field: 6##

Branch to the fields in the condition table entered and look at the settings.

Hint: No condition is required. You can therefore skip the warning regarding the field assignment by pressing Enter. Which field in the sales document does the system use to determine the customer number?

The svstem checks the KUNNR (ield. In the order, this is the (ield with the sold-to party's customer number (KUNAG). a) 4.

-->Select !Iccess 10--> Dialog structure: Fields

Substitution should take place in the second access if there is a valid master record for the ship-to party and entered material. Configure the access. a)

~

Dialog structure: Accesses

-->

AcNo field.: 20

-->

Tab. Field: 6##

-->

Select access 20

-->Dialog structure: Fields -->

Cursor in column: Place document field on field: KUNNR

~

Choose "Field catalog"

-->Select field "Ship-to party" (KUNWE) Skip the warning and save your entry .


~ ~7'-0"4.----------©-c-2-00_9_S_A_P_A_G_.A-1-1r-ig-h-ts_r_e-se_rv_e_d_.- - - - - - - - - - - 2 - 0 - 0 9

TSCMGO


5.

In the third access (no.30 in the sequence), the system should only search for valid master records in material determination using the material entered. This is the standard setting in the SAP system. Check the fields in the access. a)

-->Dialog structure: Accesses (--> Choose "New Entries") -->

AcNo field.: 30

-->

Tab. Field: 00 I

-->Select access 30--> Dialog structure: Fields Skip the warning and save your entry . 6.

Save the new access sequence. To do this, create a new workbench request

Short description: Access sequence group ##

a)

_,.Save_,. Choose "Create onler"

b)

-->Assign activity to the new sales order

Task 4: Condition type of material determination You can use different search strategies to mode/material determination. You have to configure a separate conditionl}pefor each search strategy that you use in the business process. I.

2.

Create a new condition type with the access sequence that you have just defined.

Condition type:

YO##

Description:

Condition type##

a)

_,.Maintain prerequisites for material tletermination _,.Define material determination type_,. Choose "New entries"

b)

AcSq (access sequence): YO##

Customize the condition type so that when you create a master record, the system automatically proposes a validity period from today to the end of the year. a)

Valid from: blank V

-20_0_9______________________©_c_2_0_09--SA __ P_A_G___A_II_ri-gh_t_s-re_s_e~--ed-.--------------~7~0~5~

TSCM60


Task 5: Material determination procedm·e All the tasks that are undertaken in the business process for material determination are anchored in a procedure for material determination. The procedure includes one or more defined condition types. One access sequence (search strategy) is assigned to each condition type.

1.

Define a new procedure. Material determination procedure:

YOOO##

Description:

Group procedure##

a) 2.

Maintain prerequisites for material determination --). Maintain procedure--). Choose "New entries"

Copy the condition type you defined earlier into the procedure. Step:

10

Counter:

blank

Condition type:

YO##

a)

--).Choose "Control"--). "New Entries" Save the procedure.

3.

Assign the new determination procedure to sales document type ZA##. a)

--).Assign material determination to sales tlocument types -->Select entry ZA##--> Enter procedure YOOO## Save the assignment.

Task 6: Create substitution reason 1.

Create a reason for substitution Z## with short text Substitution ## for material detennination. Define the following properties (or change your reason for substitution Z## if you already created it in the Material Substitution unit): -The order confirmation should contain the material ordered by the customer. -The system should issue a warning message before it substitutes a material. - Substitution should take place automatically (that is, without a selection screen). Continued on next page

~706


2009

TSCM60


-The system should not generate any lower-level items in the document when it substitutes a material. a)

--+

Define Substitution Reasons--+ Choose "New entries"

Subst. reason:

Z##

Description:

Substitution ##

Entry field:

Select

Waming field:

Select

Strategy field:

Blank

Outcome field:

Blank

Category field:

Blank

b)

Save the substitution reason

Task 7: Create master record I.

Create a master data for material determination. a)

2.

Logistics -7 Sales and Distribution Material Determination --)' Create

-7

Master Data _,. Products_,.

T-L63B## is one of your special customers. Ensure that this customer always receives the new material in future orders, even if the sales order department enters an order for the old material by mistake. Use your substitution reason.

a)

Material determin. type: --+

YO##

Choose Key combination--+ Customer/Material##

Customer:

T-L63B##

Inc. mal:

T-ATQ##

Material:

T-ATR##

Reason:

Z##

Save !he master record. Continued on next page

2009


707~

TSCM60


3.

Ensure that this customer also always receives the new material in future orders when he or she is entered as the ship-to party in a sales process and an order is created with the old material. Use your substitution reason. a)

4.

Tit is is already ensured by 1/tejirs/ muster record loge/Iter with uccess 20.

Enter another master record in which you ensure that material T-ATR## automatically replaces material T-ATQ## once the latter is no longer available. This should take place for all orders for material T-ATQ## regardless of the ordering party. The material should only be substituted in the sales document. The subsequent delivery document should copy the details from the sales order. Choose a relevant substitution reason. Hint: The master record must contain the materials to be substituted, T-ATQ## and T-ATR##, in the correct sequence.

a) Materiul determin. type: --+

YO##

Choose Key combination --+,Material enteretl

Muteriul entered:

T-ATQ##

Muteriul:

T-ATQ## (T-ATQ## should be delivered first)

Reason:

0006

--+Select entry--+ Choose "Alternative Materials"

Materiul:

T-ATR## (is used once T-ATQ## is not uvailuble)

Save the master record.

Task 8: Create output I.

Create a master record for output type BA 00 Order confirmation for document type ZA##. Continued on next page

~708


2009

TSCM60


Output type:

BAOO

Sales doc. type:

ZA##

Use the default values from the output type (ENTER). Maintain printer LPOJ as the output device and set the number of messages to I. a)

Logistics-> Sales 1mtl Distribution ->Master Data Sales Document-> Create ~

->

Output->

Choose Communication

Save the master record.

Task 9: Creating the Order Test your settings for material determination in the sales document. I.

According to the master record you have created for material determination, customer T-L63B## should always receive the new product T-ATR##. Create a standard order (order type: OR for customer T-L63B## and the old product T-ATQ## (1 0 units) (purchase order number: Ma(find##OI), requested delivery date in two weeks). Did the system substitute the material?

Why or why not?

a)

Logistics~


~Sales~ Order~

Create

Did the system substitute the material? No

Why? The material determination procedure was assigned to order type ZA## and nat the standard orde~:

2.

Create the same order for order type ZA## (purchase order num ber:Matfint/##02). Did the system substitute the material?

Check the substitution reason in the sales document. Continued on next page

2009


709~

TSCM60



Display the order confirmation on the screen. Which material is displayed in the printout? Material: Why?

a)

Did the system substitute the material?

Yes Check the substitution reason in the sales document. ->

Item

->

Details: Sales

ISubstitution reason:

IZ##

Display the order confirmation on the screen. Which material is displayed in the printout?

Choose: Header output in the me11u bur

IMaterial:

I T-ATO##

Why? The enhy SlJiitch has been set in substitution reason Z##. This ensures that the material entered is printed out on the order confirmation ..

3.

T-L63B## is also the ship-to party for your Cl!Stomer T-L63C##. Create an order (order type: ZA##) for ship-to party T-L63B##. Ship-to party:

T-L63B##

Sold-to party:

T-L63C##

PO number:

MatDeter#/103

Activate the material determination analysis (before entering the item). Material:

T-ATQ## (10 llllils) Continued on next page

~710


2009

TSCM60


Was the substitution made for the ship-to party?

Yes Did the system display a warning message for the substitution?

Yes Use the analysis to check your Customizing settings for material determination. Use the analysis to check which date the system uses in the document to check the validity date of the master record.

Req. deliverv date

4.

a)

Environment

b)

Each time you choose an access on the /eft-hand side of the screen, information about the access is displayed 011 the right-hand sitle of the screen.

-7

Ana(vsis-+ Material determination

-+

On

Enter another order for sales document type ZA## for a "regular" customer. Customer:

T-L6}.4##


MatDeter##04

Material

T-ATQ## (10 unit•)

Check the substitution reason in the sales document.


0006 Display the order confirmation on the screen. Which materials are displayed in the printout? Material:

T-ATQ##

Material: T-ATO## Continued on next page

2009


711~


TSCM60

Why or why not? The order ca11 be met usi11g T-ATQ## so it is the o11IV material tleliveretl.

a) 5.

See task

Check the available stock for material T-ATQ##. Stock:

Change the last order and enter a new item with a quantity that exceeds the available quantity. Which materials and quantity does the system automatically use when substituting this material? Material: T-ATQ##

Material: T-ATR##

Check the order confirmation on the screen. Does the system display both substituted materials?

a) 6.

-->Select seco11tl item--> Ellvirollmellt--> Availability

Post 50 units of material T-ATQ## to stock. (Plant: 1200; Storage location: 0001; Movement type: 561). Deliver the last order. Compare the quantities in the order and the delivery. Are there any differences?

Why?

Contimted on next page

f:'S"'"

71 2


2009


TSCM60

Substitution reason 0006: The SJ'Stem onlv substitutes the material in the order am/not in the deliverp.

a)

2009

Logistics--) Materials Management--). Management--). Goods Movement--> Goods Receipt--> Other

Movement type:

561

Plant:

1200

Storage Location:

0001


713~

TSCM60


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Expand the condition technique in material determination so that this may be both customer-specific and non customer-specific.

~714


2009

TSCM60

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: Set up a cash sales scenario with the sales workshop for the sale of materials to your own employees. Control the various functions of bills of material at main and sub-item level. Expand the condition technique in material determination so that this may be both customer-specific and non customer-specific.

-20_0_9_______________________ ©_2_0_09__ S_A_P_A_G_._A_II-ri-gh-ts--re_s_e~--ed-.--------------~7~1~5~

TSCM60

Unit Summary

~716


2009

nit Concept and Function of the Delivery Document Unit Overview This unit gives you an overview of the delivery process as part of Logistics Execution. We discuss the structure of a delivery document, and how delivery is used.

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: understand the function and use of the delive1y document, explain the structure of the delivery document and find information in the delivery document.

Unit Contents Lesson: Idea and Function of the Delivery Document .................... .718 Exercise 33: Idea and function of the delievery document. ........... 725

2009


717~

Unit 20: Concept and Function of the Delivery Document

TSCM60

Lesson: Idea and Function of the Delivery Document Lesson Overview This lesson introduces you to the application "Logistics Execution". You will then receive an overview of delivery processes as part of Logistics Execution. The lesson discusses the use of the delivery document, the creation of a delivery document and the display of the delivery.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: understand the function and use of the delivery document, explain the structure of the delivery document and find information in the delivery document.

Business Example Your company creates inbound/outbound deliveries in procurement/sales processes

These documents are the basis for various goods receipt. shipping and warehouse activities.

To process the goods issues. the shipping employees require information such as the weight, transportation relevance, ship-to address and so on. The goods receipt is provided with information from suppliers on the basis of inbound deliveries. Inbound delivery activities are then processed using the inbound delivery. You also use the delivery document to process shipping activities if material is delivered to other plants within the company.

~718


2009

TSCM60

e

Lesson: Idea and Function of the Delivery Document

'

'

;, ' 1 ' ,

Goods I'C!cclpt' ' posting "' '

Figure 242: Goods receipt and goods issue processes

Logistics Execution is the application component for specific functions of executable logistics. Logistics Execution provides you with comprehensive functions required to map the execution of all logistical processes irrespective of industry or branch. It is basically a matter of more or less complex goods receipt and goods issue processes. Logistics Execution is the link between procurement and distribution, regardless of whether the processes involved are internal or relate to third-parties (vendors, customers, or service providers). Both materials produced in-house and those procured externally are put away and removed from storage using Warehouse Management, in order to supply the enterprise's own production or for delivery to retailers or end users. In this case, the underlying organizational structures may be quite complex: Logistics Execution uses separate organizational units and master data that are included in the system of the organizational structures in SAP ECC. You can use these structural elements to accurately map complicated business situations. There are two basic ways to map processes for goods receipts and goods issues in Logistics Execution: You can either create a delivery or place an Inventory Management posting (usually with reference to a preceding document) at the beginning of a process. The above overview juxtaposes the document flow and the technical posting procedure for both methods. If you work with deliveries. Warehouse Management activities (creating and confirming a transfer order) are completed before posting in Inventory Management. The goods receipt or goods issue posting always relates to the delivery. Note: The transfer order is the document used to execute all material -~·--.-~---.

movements in the warehouse.

2009


719~

TSCM60


e

''

Delivery document

Preceding document

'

Figure 243: Application areas of the delivery document

Employees using other processes for buying and selling may also need to complete shipping activities such as picking, packing, and document printing, They can use the delivery documents for these activities too. Example: Stock transfer from plant to plant: The ordering plant creates a purchase order in purchasing; the delivering plant creates a deliver:· for this purchase order. Based on this delivery, the goods are picked, packed, and posted as a goods issue. The different business processes are modeled using different delivery types.

Created either automatically, using I Doc, or EWT by the vendor

~i

,,o' Inbound ' delivery 0,

"'

D

Goods receipt for Inbound delivery

'';.;-

.,'"

'"

:0.

'"

l

Transfer Order

Figure 244: The goods receipt process

~ ~7~2~Q~----------------©~c-2_0_09 __S_A_P_A_G_._A_II_r-ig_h_ts_r_e_se-r-ve-d-.------------------------2-0-09-

TSCM60

lesson: Idea and Function of the Delivery Document

Inbound deliveries can be created with reference to purchase orders. You can do this using several purchase orders, entire purchase orders, or just partial quantities of purchase order items. The inbound delivery then serves as the basis for further activities, such as transfer order creation, placing in storage, packing and goods receipt posting.

• Monitoring of shipping due date • Creating the delivery

Warehouse

Shipping docs

Packing

Picking

Figure 245: The Shipping Process When talking. about deliveries. we often also refer to shipping or the shipping process. This describes outbound goods movements that usually refer to an order. The term shipping also refers to the department that is responisble for the logistical process of the delivery processing (picking, packing, loading). However, since you can also use the delivery document for other areas, when we refer to deliveries that refer to a sales document, we talk about outbound deliveries.

2009


721~


TSCM60

Figure 246: Structure of the Delivery Document A delivery document consists of a header and any number of items. The header contains data that applies for the entire document. This means that the ship-to party, shipping point. route, and so on, are clearly displayed for each outbound delivery. The individual items contain, above all, information about the material to be delivered. The information in the delivery document is displayed in different screens: The overview screen displays selected header and item data, which is grouped according to activity on tabstrips. This means that the important data is all located on one screen.

At both header and item level, you can access other screens to display detailed infonnation. Again, the infonnation is grouped into processes on tabstrips.

At header level. this information includes data on processing, picking, loading, shipment, foreign trade/customs, texts, partners, output, package monitoring, and conditions. At item level, the detailed screen displays similar tabstrips with information about the items.

~722


2009

TSCM60


Ship. point 1100 Ship. poiht 1000

outbound delive Ship. point 1000 GR2004

GR2004

Figure 247: Difference Between Outbound Delivery and Shipment

The delivery in the SAP system supports the processing of shipping or receiving activities in the warehouse and at the shipping point. The delivery itself simplifies transportation processing. This applies, for example, for shipping: Basically, each outbound delivery starts at a shipping point, continues via a route, and has a ship-to party as the destination. These criteria are header fields in the outbound delivery. For example, several outbound deliveries are to be loaded onto a truck and the truck is to d~liv.ergood£(o several_s.hipping points and ship-to parties along a particular "rQ!!te". Here, ;;,recommend th<;traiisportaiion fcmctional{ty. If you use these functions, o_y.t.IJ()lli!5L
The functions provided in transportation planning, shipment completion, and shipment costs calculation form the contents of SAP course SCM611.

2009


723~


~724


TSCM60

2009

TSCM60


Exercise 33: Idea and function of the delievery document Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: Explain the functions and activities in shipping, Identify the structure of the outbound delivery, Find the ditferent information items that are stored in the outbound delivery

Business Example As an employee with responsibilities in shipping, you are also a member of the project team working on system implementation for shipping. Before you start configuring the system and examining the processes in shipping, you want to clarity the position of shipping processing in logistics. You need to identify the individual shipping activities that you can perfonn in the SAP system. You also want to examine the structure of the delivery document and find out what information it contains.

2009


725~

TSCM60


Task 1: Shipping is an element of the components Sales and Distribution and Logistics Execution. I.

Which specific activities can you complete within shipping processing?

2.

What is the role of the delivery document in this context?

3.

In the sales and distribution process, you usually create a delivery document (outbound delivery) with reference to a sales order. In what other scenarios might you want to use a delivery document in shipping processing?

Task 2: You want to familiarize yourself with the structure of the delivery document and find information on an existing outbound delivery. I.

Find out the number of the outbound delivery that refers to the sales order with the purchase order number "SCM61 0". Delivery:_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

2.

Which shipping point is processing this outbound delivery? Shipping point: - - - - - - - - -

3.

Detennine the gross weight for the second item. Total weight: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __


~726


2009

TSCM60

2009


4.

When will the goods reach the ship-to party?

5.

Display the order that is the basis for this delivery and check its delivery status.

6.

Does the delivery status of the order tell you whether the goods have already left your warehouse? Give a reason for your answer.


727~

TSCM60


Solution 33: Idea and function of the delievery document Task 1: Shipping is an element of the components Sales and Distribution and Logistics Execution.

1.

Which specific activities can you complete wiihin shipping processing? Answer:

Monitoring the deadlines of reference documents due for shipping Creating and processing of outbound deliveries Monitoring of the capacity situation in the warehouse Support for picking Packing Printing and distributing shipping documents Processing the goods issue Controlling 2.

What is the role of the delivery document in this context? Answer: The delivery document forms the basis for all these activities. It is used in various business transactions, and the status settings in the document provide information on the progress of different steps within shipping processing.

3.

In the sales and distribution process. you usually create a delivery document (outbound delivery) with reference to a sales order. In what other scenarios might you want to use a delivery document in shipping processing? Answer:

Replenishment delivery for stock transport orders Delivery for subcontract order Vendor returns Inbound delivery for purchase order Delivery from project


~728


2009

TSCMSO


Task 2: You want to familiarize yourself with the structure of the delivery document and find information on an existing outbound delivery. I.

Find out the number of the outbound delivery that refers to the sales order with the purchase order number "SCM61 0". Delivery:_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ a)

Choose Logistics -+Sales and Distribution

-+

Sales

-+

Order-+

Display b)

Enter the PO number SCM610 in the corresponding field and choose

~Search.

The system should find a document. Choose
2.

c)

Choose Environment-> Display Document Flow and note the document number of the de/ive1y.

d)

Exit the document by choosing

C Back.

Which shipping point is processing this outbound delivery? Shipping point: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ a)

Choose Logistics -+Logistics Execution-+ Outbound Process -+ Goods Issue for Outbound Delive1y-+ Outbound De/ive1y-+ Display

b)

Enter the delivery number you just found.

c)

Choose Header De/ails-+ Shipment tab page or the Administration tab page. Note the shipping point.

3.

Determine the gross weight for the second item. Total weight:. _ _ _ _ _ _ __

4.

a)

Make sure that you are in the delive1y overview screen.

b)

Position the cursor on the second item.

c)

Choose the

d)

Choose the Picking tab page.

e)

Note the total weight.

~~Item Details pushbutton.

When will the goods reach the ship-to party? Answe.·: Header-+ Shipment Field "Delivery Date"


2009


729~


5.

TSCM60

Display the order that is the basis for this delivery and check its delivery status. Answer: Logistics --)- Sales anti Distribution --)- Sales --)- Ortler --)- Display

Goto

-->

Header--> Status

Delivery status: Fully delivered 6.

Does the delivery status of the order tell you whether the goods have already left your warehouse? Give a reason for your answer.

Answer: No, the delivery status in the order depends solely on whether an outbound delivery already exists for the items. If you want to find out about the actual progress of the delivery, you should view the status of the outbound delivery itself.

~730


2009


TSCMSO

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: understand the function and use of the delivery document, explain the structure of the delivery document and find information in the delivery document.

-20_0_9_______________________ ©_2_0_09__S_A_P_A_G_._A_II-ri-gh_t_s-re_s_e_N_ed-.--------------~7~3n.1

~

TSCM60

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: understand the function and use of the deliver; document, explain the structure of the delivery document and find information in the delivery document.

~732


2009

&,:

]/I.e

I rt;A,-6ou o .d cfloc -/~

c?,.f/ ~en:

C1/

lv.-o(C

d6GctNH'~"1 /v> i~

u2 ~u..-fe

c~IQI(m..t_S<

nit 21 Basic Organizational Units for the Delivery Process Unit Overview This unit discusses the organizational units related to shipping.

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will. be able to: Describe the organizational units relevant to shipping or goods receipt Define and assign the organizational units in the Implementation Guide

Unit Contents Lesson: Basic Organizational Units for the Delivery Process ............. 734 Exercise 34: Organizational Units in Shipping .......................... 739

2009


733~

Unit 21: Basic Organizational Units for the Delivery Process

TSCM60

Lesson: Basic Organizational Units for the Delivery Process Lesson Overview This lesson will introduce you to the organizational units and structures that are most important for the shipping or goods receipt. These are basically shipping units. However, the delivery document is also the interface to Inventory Management and possibly Warehouse Management. For this reason, the organizational elements of these applications are also briefly described.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe the organizational units relevant to shipping or goods receipt Define and assign the organizational units in the Implementation Guide

Business Example One of the first tasks in this project is to map the organizational structure in the company for shipping and the related areas. To do this, you need to define organizational units and set the links between them. Since. for example, the shipping of goods that require refrigeration bas very specific requirements in your company, you require a separate organizational unit for this.

Shipping/Goods receipt point

Figure 248: Organizational Structures in Shipping and Goods Receipt

~734


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Basic Organizational Units for the Delivery Process

A _s!1ipping poin~is an independent organizational unit at a fixed location that processes and monitors outbound deliveries and goods issue. An outbound delivery is processed from a single shipping point. The responsible shipping point is determined in the order at item level. A shipping point can process the outbound deliveries of several plants. However, this is only useful ifthe plants are located in the same general vicinity. Several shipping points can be assigned to one plant with different loading equipment, different processing times, and so on. The allowed combinations of shipping point and plant are defined in the Customizing application of the enterprise structure. Another organizational unit in shipping is the loading point. It can be used to structure shipping. Loading points are defined in Customizing for Logistics Execution and are stored manually to the delivery document header. If desired, they can be included in the delivery output. Any number of loading points can be assigned to a shipping point. But only one shipping point can be assigned to a loading point. A shipping point may also be set as a goods receipt point, which means it can also be used for inbound deliveries. ·-··--···-..

Figure 249: Organizational Units in Inventory Management You can model the structure of a corporate group by using clients and company codes. A client is often synonymous with a corporate group, while a company code represents an independent accounting unit. Company codes are legally independent from one another.

2009

©


735~


TSCM60

The plant plays a central role in Inventory Management. A plant is a production facility or a location that handles material stock. It could also be a collection of several locations in one general vicinity with material stock, which are known as storage locations. Stock is managed at the level of the storage location. A plant is assigned to only one company code. In this way, you can manage stocks and stock values in the individual companies independently.

Figure 250: Organizational Units of Warehouse Management (WM)

~736


2009

TSCM60


In order to achieve efficient processing for goods receipt and goods issue in the warehouse, you can use the following organizational units: Warehouse number: The entire warehouse structure is managed under one

warehouse number. This number represents the warehouse complex. Storage type: The different warehouse areas, which differ from each other with regards to their organizational and technical features, are defined as storage types (for example, high-rack warehouse with random storage, picking warehouse with fixed bins, shipping area). Storage Section I Picking Area: The picking area groups storage bins together in the storage type from the picking viewpoint. It is the opposite of the storage section, which groups storage bins together from the putaway viewpoint. For example, a delivery can be split up into different picking areas to make parallel picking possible. Storage bin: The storage bin identifies the exact locatioh in the warehouse where goods are stored or can be stored. Staging area: The staging area is an area in the warehouse where the goods are stored immediately after unloading or shortly before loading. Door: A door within a warehouse can be used both for inbound delivery as well as outbound delivery of goods. The door and the staging area are already defined in the outbound delivery header. They can be determined automatically; for example, on the basis of the customer.

0001

005

Storage Fixed bin types storage

916 Sfiipping zone

Figure 251: Connection Between Warehouse Number and Plant/Storage Location

2009


737~


TSCM60

The connection of the organizational units in the warehouse to MM Inventory Management results from the assignment of the warehouse number to a combination of plant and storage location. Several storage locations within a plant can refer to the same warehouse number. As a result, they form the warehouse complex from the point of view oflnventory Management.

~ ~7~3~8,----------------©~20_0_9_S_A_P_A_G ___A_II_r_ig-ht-s-~-s-e-~-e-d.-----------------------2-00--9

TSCM60


Exercise 34: Organizational Units m Shipping Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: Describe the assignment of shipping point to plant, Define a new shipping point in Customizing.

Business Example Shipping point XO## is responsible for standard shipping operations. It is already defined in the system. However, a new shipping point is required for processing refrigerated goods. As a project team member, you are responsible for defining this new shipping point.

2009


739~


TSCM60

Task 1:

I.

What is the role of the shipping point?

2.

Find out to which plant or plants shipping point XO## is assigned.

Task 2: Set up a new shipping point for processing refrigerated goods shipments. This shipping point should be near shipping point XO##. 1.

In your system, create this new shipping point with the key YO## by copying the existing shipping point XO##. Hint: Use the copyingfimction for shipping points instead of the shipping point function. This has the advantage that any dependent tables are automatically maintained by the system as well.

D~(ine

2.

Afterwards, change the description of shipping point YO## to ## Refr. Shipm. Dresden.

3.

Optional: Maintain the address screen for the shipping point you have just defined.

4.

~740

Make sure that the newly created shipping point YO## works for the same plant as shipping point XO## responsible for standard shipping processes.


2009

TSCM60


Solution 34: Organizational Units in Shipping Task 1: I.

What is the role of the shipping point? Answer: The shipping point creates, processes, and monitors inbound and outbound deliveries. It is responsible for the different shipping activities. Each inbound or outbound delivery is processed from a single shipping point.

2.

Find out to which plant or plants shipping point XO## is assigned. Answer: Call up the Implementation Guide (IMG):

Tools--> Customizing--> JMG--> Edit Project Choose"Display SAP Reference IMG".

Enterprise Structure----!> Assignment__. Logistics Execution shipping point to plant

~Assign

XO## is assigned to plant 1200.

Task 2: Set up a new shipping point for processing refrigerated goods shipments. This shipping point should be near shipping point XO##. I.

In your system, create this new shipping point with the key YO## by copying the existing shipping point XO##.

Hint: Use the copyingfimction for shipping points instead of the Define shipping point function. This has the advantage that any dependent tables are automatically maintained by the system as well. a)

In the IMG:

Enterprise Structure ----jo Definition-+ Logistics Execution -+Define, copy, delete, check shipping point From the dialog box, choose "Copy, delete, check shipping point".

Organization Object-> Copy Organization Object From shipping point:

XO##

To shipping point:

YO##


2009


741

fJ!E.Y


2.

TSCM60

Afterwards, change the description of shipping point YO## to## Refr. Shipm. Dresden. a)

In the IMG: Enterpri"ie Structure.-.....+ Definition _,.Logistics Execution _,. Define,

copy, tlelete, check shipping point From the dialog box, choose"Define shipping point". Find your entry, YO##, and overwrite the description. 3.

Optional:

Maintain the address screen for the shipping point you have just defined. a)

In the IMG: Enterprise Structure _,. Definition _,. Logistics Execution _,. Define,

copy, tlelete, check shipping point From the dialog box, choose" Define shipping point". Select the line with the entry YO## and choose the Details pushbutton. Now choose the "Address" pushbutton. 4.

Make sure that the newly created shipping point YO## works for the same plant as shipping point XO## responsible for standard shipping processes. a)

In the IMG: Enterprise Structure---+ Assignment---+ Logistics Execution_,. Assign

shipping point to plant Plant 1200: Shipping point YO## When the shipping point was copied, the system maintained the existing entry at the same time. (See question I)

~742


2009

TSCM60


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Describe the organizational units relevant to shipping or goods receipt Define and assign the organizational units in the Implementation Guide

-20_0_9________________________© __2-00-9--SA __P_A_G_._A_II_r-ig_h_ts_r_e-se_N_e_d-.----------------~7~4~3~

TSCM60

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: Describe the organizational units relevant to shipping or goods receipt Define and assign the organizational units in the Implementation Guide

~744


2009

..

Unit 2 Controlling Deliveries Unit Overview This unit explains the basic settings in delivery Customizing. You will be introduced to the delivery type and the delivery item category as elementary control objects.

e !ill

.

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: Give an overview of the standard delivery types Explain delivery control at header and item level Describe item category determination in outbound deliveries

Unit Contents Lesson: Controlling Deliveries ................................................ 746 Exercise 35: Controlling Deliveries ....................................... 757

2009

©


745~

TSCM60

Unit 22: Controlling Deliveries

Lesson: Controlling Deliveries Lesson Overview This Jesson explains the basic settings in the delivery Customizing. You will get to know the delivery type and the delivery item category as elementary control objects.

Lesson Objectives After completing this Jesson, you will be able to: Give an overview of the standard delivery types Explain delivery control at header and item level Describe iiem category determination in outbound deliveries

Business Example In shipping and goods receipt, you map different business transactions using different delivery types, and you may therefore require separate delivery types for processing express deliveries, stock transfers, returns delivery, and so on. The different delivery types usually require different processing within shipping. For example, returns deliveries do not require any picking activities.

Partners Output Delivery split by warehouse number Route redetermination Texts

Figure 252: Delivery type

~746


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Controlling Deliveries

The delivery type controls the entire delivery. You see the delivery type in the delivery header. The delivery types take into account the various business transactions in shipping and goods receipt processing. The delivety types defined in the standard system include: EL: Inbound delivery (shipping notification) LB: Delivery for subcontract order

LF: Outbound delivery

LO: Delivery without reference (no sales order necessary in order to create a delivery) LP: Delivery from project RE: Returns delivery NL: Replenishment delivery Using control elements, you can configure each delivery type to carry out different functions. You can adjust the delivery types in the standard system to meet your business requirements. However, if you require major adjustments, we recommend that you create a new delivery type.

Check for Packing control Picking storage location Automatic batch determination Texts

.

Check minimum delivery quantity

,

'--·-··----~-----~-~----·--'

Figure 253: Delivery Item Categories The delivery item category controls how the affected delivery items are handled and processed during the shipping or goods receipt process. The control elements available provide a high degree of automatic detennination and checking. You can also configure the item categories to meet the specific requirements of your

system installation.

-20_0_9______________________©_o_2_00-9--SA_P__A_G___A_ll_rig_h_ts--re_s_e~-.-d-.--------------~7~4~7~

TSCM60


TAN

Normal item

TAX

TAN TAX

item

Normal item Non~stock

item

Figure 254: Copying Item Categories from the Order

When you copy an order item to a delivery, the system copies the item category of the order item to the delivery item. If an order item or the schedule line assigned to it is relevant for delivery, you must define a corresponding item category for the delivery. You must do this under the same key as that of the order item.

Figure 255: Excursion: Item category determination in the sales document

~748


2009


TSCM60

If order items are delivered, the (order) item category that is determined in the sales document is transferred to the delivery item. In this way, to understand the delivery Customizing, it is impmiant that you know about the item category determination in the sales document. A maximum of four criteria may affect the process of determining the item category in the sales document: I. The sales document type of the order. When you create an order, the order type is usually determined by the decision of the employee who creates the order

2. The item category group. The item category group is defined for each material or for each material, sales organization and distribution channel. You can therefore use the material of the sales document item to influence the control(~ order item category) of the document item . . }. Item category usage. In connection with specific functions and/or processes of the program, the item category usage is set to a certain status in order to reach a very specific item control (~order item category) for these special functions or processes. The use of the item category usage to determine the order item category is therefore part of the basic programming. For the item category determination in the order, you can also define an item category usage in the customer material information master record.

4. Item category of higher-level item. If the sales document item is a subitem, the item category of this item is affected by the previously-detennined item category of the higher-level item. In Customizing, for a characteristic (for which there is a maximum of four criteria), you can define an item category as default for the automatic proposal and other item categories for manual usage.

Order

Outbound delivery Item 10

Item 20

Figure 256: Determining Item Categories in Deliveries

-20_0_9______________________©_c_2_0_09--SA_P__A_G_._A_II-rig_h_ts--re-se_N_e_d-.--------------~7"4'9n~

TSCM60


No (order) item category is specified (or can be transferred) for order-independent items in the delivery (for example, packing material), for deliveries without reference to an order (delivery type LO), or for outbound deliveries (for example, delivery type EL for a purchase order). In this case, the system determines an item category for the delivery according to the assignments specified in Customizing. The item category determination in the delivery is very similar to the item category determination in the order. To determine the item category, the system takes imo account the delivery type and the item categor'y group (from the material master of the item concerned). Additional usages are set internally for some functions, such as: PACK for generating packing items CHSP for a batch split PSEL for product selection V for inbound deliveries for purchase orders This means that the system can determine a differem item category for the delivery items resulting from these functions.

....

Note: Usage: The determination of a usage is hard~. This means that they are located in the ongoing process of the program. You can use only a modification, and not Customizing, to change the determination. A usage can·oe specified in the customer-material info record. The item category determination considers this only in the order and not in the delivery.

Item category group The material master contains the field Item Category Group twice: A "generalltet;:J-C.a.~g£_~_gro_up" and an "'~ GrOJ.lp". The general item category group does not refer to the sales organization and distribution channel. This entry is used for inbounddeliveries. The other entry is used if the delivery contains a sales orga';ization and d_ie1dbution ~---~---·channel (for example, outbound deliveries). "---·--..•

~750


2009

TSCM60


Copying Control Source Sales

Docm'nenf Type

,

Header

Destination

Delivery Type

Order

Outbound Delivery

Doc. type OR

Doc. type LF

Item 10 TAN

Item 10

Item 20 TAX

Item 20 TAX

TAN

Item 30 TATX

Copying Control Item

Figure 257: Copying Control

In the copying control table you specify: Which sales and distribution document types can be copied to which delivery types Which item categories are copied from reference documents You can also specify: Under what conditions data is copied from the order to the outbound delivery Under what conditions several orders can be combined in an outbound delivery Which data is to be transferred Whether the reference should be recorded in the document 1low Order items that are due for delivery that have the same delivery split criteria are shipped together. If you select "ord_~Lc.oJ!lbJ'la1i()n", all of the orders or order items that are processed togetherTn the process of delivery creation are grouped together in a delivery if the order items match the delivery splitcriteria. Required delivery splitting criteria include, for example, the'shipplng j)Oint;t!Je.route, and the ship-to party. Certain delivery splitting criteria in the standard system are optional and can be removed as splitting criteria from the copying control table. You can also define additional splitting criteria that do not allow joint shipping if the defined fields have different values.

2009


751~

TSCM60


e

.

.

Order Doc. type OR

Item

TAN

~

-,. _- D~fl-~,~~y}e_l~y~h~:~:;:;_ ;:_'/: -:,_-: ' ~ _sc:~_ffd,~J~--Iine~-,~-~rtli_tt~_d

Schedule line CP

Figure 258: Shipping-Relevant Customizing in Sales

You conirol order types by specifying: Which delivery type is proposed for the outbound delivery Whether a requested delivery date is proposed in the order and how far it is in the future Whether the outbound delivery is automatically created in the background when the order is saved Delivery relevance on the order item category level is valid only for text or value items. You can set, for example, a text item as relevant for delivery so that it will be transferred to the outbound delivery from the standard order and is therefore available in the delivery document. Physical deliveries using the interface to the MM Inventory Management component are only possible if schedule lines are used. This is why in this standard case schedule lines must be allowed for the order item category, and the schedule line category must be set as relevant for delivery. The goods issue movement type (or goods receipt movement type for returns deliveries) is defined at the schedule line category level. These settings have certain effects: All delivery item categories must also be defined as item categories in Sales and Distribution, even item categories that are never found in sales documents. For example, DLN or ELN. Determination of a schedule line must be configured for all item categories in Sales and Distribution that do not have sales document category 7 as the delivery item category (inbound delivery/shipping notification) and for which a goods movement should be posted. Reason: the movement type comes from the transaction type. You can directly specify the movement type in Customizing only for delivery item categories that have the SO document category 7 (for example, the delivery item category ELN).

~752


2009

TSCM60


Order Customizing

Delivery Customizing

• • <, '',•'•< 'i<·';-'''',''/';'''':,'<''"''>'-¥''/'H'i,'',''''' "'''' '''<''

_Valu~, ~r, teJ;t, tb:i:lll_: :IAR!'r'-'T_~"

Figure 259: Customizing for the Order-Related Outbound Delivery

The delivery type controls the delivery document. The delivery type is located in the header of the delivery document. The delivery type of the delivery document is usually generated from the order type of the order ro be delivered. In the transaction "Create Outbound Delivery .. , you can define another delivery type for the delivery document. To use a delivery type within the order-related outbound delivery, the copy control must link the relevant order type to the required delivery types. To deliver order items, these must be relevant for delivery. For text and value items, the delivery relevance is defined for the order item category. For normal items, the delivery relevance is controlled at the level of the schedule line. In addition, you can define a movement type only for the schedule line category and this creates a connection to Inventory Management. As a result of this. schedule lines are permitted for standard items and the automatic determination of the schedule line category is configured. Another prerequisite for delivering order items is that each order item category for transferring to the required delivery type using the copy control is provided.

If order items are delivered, the item category that was previously defined using the order item is transferred to the delivery item. For delivery items that are dependent on the order type, you cannot transfer any item categories from the order. For the delivery items, item category determination occurs in the delivery.

2009


753~

TSCMSO

Unit 22; Controlling Deliveries

Order Customizing

Delivery Customizing Manual Entry

I

Figure 260: Customizing of the Outbound Delivery Without Order Reference If you create deliveries without order reference, you must manually define the delivery type in the initial screen of the transaction "Create Outbound Delivery Without Order Reference... For the delivery process and for the billing that follows, the system must access the order Customizing. Since, the delivery without reference does not contain any concrete orders, a default order type is defined in the Customizing for the delivery type. The Customizing for this order type contains, for example, the default billing type for billing this delivery. As soon as you enter an item in the delivery without order reference, the system uses the item category determination to determine the item category for this item. There must always be a corresponding order item category for this delivery item category. This order item category decides whether this operation is relevant for billing and which billing procedure to use. To create a connection to Inventory Management for the delivery item, the system must allow schedule lines for the order item category. You can then use the schedule line category determination to determine a schedule line in the order. The movement type that is defined there controls the goods issue posting of the delivery item.

~754


2009

TSCM60


Purchase Order

Order Customizing

Figure 261: Customizing of the Inbound Delivery

If you create an inbound delivery with reference to a purchase order, the delivery type of the inbound delivery is detennined from the Customizing of the confinnation category. For this delivery type, the preceding document is defined as a purchase order. In addition, a default order type is defined for this delivery t) pe because order Customizing must be accessed for this process as well. The default order type is defined in the Customizing of the sales documents. The default order type uses the copy control "Order Type to Delivery Type" to transfer information from the purchase order to the delivery using the data transfer routine. In the delivery document, the system creates delivery items for the items of the purchase order. The delivery item category determination determines the item categories for these items. In this case, you work with the item usage V. A corresponding order item category must exist for this delivery order category so that the system can create a copying relationship between the order and delivery document at item-level. This copying relationship is used to provide data from the purchase order using the data transfer routine in the delivery. Since the delivery item categories are of the type SD document category 7 (inbound delivery/shipping nqtification), for the delivery item category, you can directly define the movement type for the goods receipt posting of the delivery item.

2009


755~


~756


TSCM60

2009

TSCM60


Exercise 35: Controlling Deliveries Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. you will be able to: Describe how to control key shipping functions at header and item level in the delivery, Describe how to set item category determination and copy control for delivery types.

Business Example In your company, you model various operations using shipping functions. You

therefore require different delivery types and item categories in order to control the different elements of the delivery.

Caution: Do not change the standard Customizing settings. Use only your own order rype ZA##, delivery type ZL##, for testing and making changes.

Task 1: Decide at what level you define the following controls (delive1y type or item category): To do this, look for the relevant fields in Customizing. I.

Number range for deliveries in the case of internal number assignment

2.

Picking relevance of an item in the delive1y


2009


757~


TSCM60

3.

Packing requirement of a material in the delivery

4.

Whether a preceding document is required for the delivery, and what type

Task 2: When you create an outbound delivery with reference to a sales order, the system automatically determines the delivery type. I.

Where is this configured? In other words, how does the system know which delivery document type to use?

2.

Your orders of type ZA## (trade fail·## order) should always be delivered using express deliveries (ZL##). Make the relevant settings in Cusromizing.

Task 3: In copy control, define the permitted combination of sales document type and delivery type. I.

In Customizing, check which order types can be delivered using delivery type ZL##.


~758


2009

TSCM60


Task 4: The system automatically determines the item categories of the delivery. What does the system take into account when it determines the item category in the delivery? I.

Distinguish between items that already come from the sales order.

2.

Distinguish between items that were added to the delivery.

3.

In Customizing, find out which item category the system proposes when you create an additional item with material from the item category group NORM in the de/ive1y type ZL##.

Task 5: In addition to your own delivery type ZL##, you want to use your own item category ZA## (trade fair item ##) for orders and deliveries. I.

To do this, copy the sales document item category TAN and all dependent entries.

2.

After the sales document item category has been created, check whether a corresponding delivery item category was generated and whether the entries in copy control are complete.

3.

To use item category ZA## in orders with order type ZA##, you have to adjust the sales category assignment in Sales and Distribution. Change the assignment for item category group NORM only, without an "Item category of the higher level Item". Continued on next page

2009


759~

TSCMGO


4.

Overdelivery should not be allowed for the new delivery item category.

Task 6: Now check your Customizing settings. I.

Create an order using the order type trade fair## order (ZA##). Sold-to party:

T-L64A##


##-4-1

Req. delive1y date:

Tomorrow

Material:

T-AU2##

Quantity:

12

Which item category was found for the item?

2.

Deliver the order. What is the delivery type of the outbound delivery?

3.

Change the delivery quantity of the item to 15. With what message does the system react?


~760


2009

TSCM60


4.

Add another item to the outbound delivery. To do this, use material T-AU3##. What is the item category of this item?

5.

Save the outbound delivery. What is the number of the outbound delivery?

-20_0_9______________________©_c_2_0_09__ S_A_P_A_G_._A_II-ri-gh_t_s-re_s_e~--ed-.--------------~7~6~1

~

TSCM60

Unit 22:· Controlling Deliveries

Solution 35: Controlling Deliveries Task 1: Decide at what level you define the following controls (delivery type or item category): To do this, look for the relevant fields in Customizing. I.

Number range for deliveries in the case of internal number assignment Answer: Delivery type

2.

Picking relevance of an item in the delivery Answer: delivery item category

3.

Packing requirement of a material in the delivery Answer: delivery item category

4.

Whether a preceding document is required for the delivery, and what type Answer: Delivery type

Task 2: When you create an outbound delivery with reference to a sales order, the system automatically determines the delivery type. I.

Where is this configured? In other words, how does the system know which delivery document type to use? Answer: The proposal for the delivery type comes from the respective definition in the sales document type.

In the JMG: Sales and Distribution--> Sales--> Sales Docume111s--> Sales Document Header--> Define Sales Document Types Go to the detail screen of an order- the standard order (OR), for example. Delivery type: LF


~ ~7~6'-2~---------------©--2-00_9_S_A_P--AG--.A-I-Ir-ig_h_ls-r-es-e-~-e-d-.----------------------2-0--09

TSCM60


2.

Your orders of type ZA## (trade fair## order) should always be delivered using express deliveries (ZL##). Make the relevant settings in Customizing. Delivering order type ZA## (trade fair##order) using express delivery ZL##.

a)

In the IMG: Sales am/ Distribution-> Sales-> Sitfes Documents-> Sales Document Header-> Define Sales Document Types Go to the detail screen for ZA## (trade fair##order): Enter the De/ive1y Type: ZL##. Caution: Make sure that you are definitely in the Details screen for sales order type ZA##.

Task 3: In copy control, define the permitted combination of sales document type and delivery type. I.

In Customizing, check which order types can be delivered using delivery type ZL##. Answer: In the IMG: Logistics Execution -t Shipping-> Copying Control -t Specijj> Copy Control for Deliveries Position: Delivery type ZL## You see that delivery type ZL## as the target document has both the trade fair order ZA## and standard order OR assigned to it.

Task 4: The system automatically determines the item categories of the delivery. What does the system take into account when it determines the item categmy in the delivery? I.

Distinguish between items that already come from the sales order. Answer: The key for the item category in the respective order item is copied as the key for the delivery item category.

2.

Distinguish between items that were added to the delivery. Answer: Here, an item category search must first he executed in the delivery; the following influencing factors play a role: Delivery type, item category group from the material master and, if requied, usage. In the IMG: Logistics Execution-> Shipping-> Deliveries-> Define Item Category Determination in Deliveries


2009


763~


3.

TSCM60

In Customizing, find out which item category the system proposes when you create an additional item with material from the item categ01y group NORM in the delivery type ZL##.

Answer: In the IMG: Logistics Execution--) Shipping--) Deliveries--) Define Item Category Determination in Deliveries Position: Delivery type: ZL## Item category group NORM The system proposes the item category DLN.

Task 5: In addition to your own delivery type ZL##, you want to use your own item. category ZA## (trade fair item ##) for orders and deliveries. I.

To do this, copy the sales document item category TAN and all dependent entries.

a)

Create new item category: In the IMG: Sales am/ Distribution-> Sales-> Sales Documents---> Sales Document Item-> Define Item Categories Position: hem careg01y: TAN

Select the row.

Edit-> Copy as... : Item categ01y: Trade fair item ## (ZA##)

Confirm the dialog box concerning the relevance of the entry for copying control and save the new entry.



2009

TSCMSO


2.

After the sales document item category has been created, check whether a corresponding delivery item category was generated and whether the entries in copy control are complete. a)

Check dependent entries: In the IMG: Logistics Execution---> Shipping---> Deliveries---> Define Item Categories for Deliveries Check whether item category ZA## exists. In the IMG: Logistics Execution---: Shipping---> Copying Control-: Specijj1 Copy Control for Deliveries Position: Delivery type: ZL## SalesDocTjpe: ZA##

Select this entry and, in the dialog structure, choose: Item Check whether the entry ZA## exists. 3.

To use item category ZA## in orders with order type ZA##, you have to adjust the sales category assignment in Sales and Distribution. Change the assignment for item category group NORM only, without an "Item category of the higher level Item". a)

Change item category assignments: In the IMG: Sales anti Distribution---> Sales---> Sales Documents---> Sales Document Item - t Assign Item Categories Position SalesDocTjpe: ZA## Item categ01y group: NORM

Replace the default entry TAN with ZA##. 4.

Overdelivery should not be allowed for the new delivery item category. a)

Change a delivery item category: In the IMG: Logistics Execution---> Silipping---> Deliveries---> Define Item Categories for Deliveries You see the detailed screen for item category ZA##: Use the input help (F4) in the Check Overdelive1y field to choose: Situation rejected with an e1-ror message.


-2-00_9_______________________ ©_2_0_09__ S_A_P_A_G_._A_II-ri-gh_t_s-re_s_e~--ed-.--------------~7~6~5~

TSCM60


Task 6: Now check your Customizing settings. I.

Create an order using the order type trade fair## order (ZA##). Sold-to party:

T-L64A##


##-4-1

Req. de/ive1y date:

TomOITOW

Material:

T-AU2##

Quantity:

12

Which item categol)' was found for the item? Answer: Logistics ---> Sales ami Distribution

--->

Sales---> Order ---> Creute

Item Categol)': (ZA##) Deliver the order. What is the deli vel)· type of the outbound de live!)·? Answer: In the sales document: Sules Document---> Deliver In the outbound delivery: He{l{/er ___, Administrution tab: The deli vel)' type should be ZL##. 3.

Change the delivel)' quantity of the item to 15. With what message does the system react? Answer: The system outputs an error message because overdeliveries are

not allowed. 4.

Add another item to the outbound delivery. To do this, use material T-AU3##. What is the item categol)' of this item? Answer: Enter an additional item with material T-AU3##. The system should determine the item category DLN.

5.

Save the outbound deli vel)'. What is the number of the outbound delivery? Answer: The number has to lie within the number range 20000000 to

24999999.

~766


2009

TSCM60

e . .


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Give an overview of the standard delive1y types Explain delivery control at header and item level Describe item category determination in outbound deliveries

2009


767~

TSCM60

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: Give an overview of the standard delivery types Explain delivery control at header and item level Describe item category detennination in outbound deliveries

~768


2009

Unit 3 The Goods Issue Process Based on the Delivery Unit Overview This unit introduces you to the prerequisites for preparing, creating, and processing outbound deliveries. The firsi lesson discusses the prerequisites that are required in the order to do this. The second lesson deals with the creation and processing of delivery documents.

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: Explain the determination of the outbound delivery plant Describe shipping point detennination Define route determination Configure the transportation scheduling and use the route schedule function. Create outbound deliveries using collective processing Define picking location detennination Define the door and staging zones and determine them in the outbound delivery Change and add to outbound deliveries Monitor shipping activities within the goods issue process

Unit Contents Lesson: Prerequisites for Creating Outbound Deliveries .................. 770 Exercise 36: Basic Processes and Functions for Outbound Delivery 779 Exercise 37: Application Example ....................................... 787 Lesson: Creating and Processing Outbound Deliveries ................... 792 Exercise 38: Creating and Processing Outbound Deliveries ......... 801

-20_0_9______________________©_c_2_0_09--SA_P __A_G___ A_II_ri-gh-ts--re_s_eN_e_d__--------------~7~6~9~

TSCM60

Unit 23: The Goods Issue Process Based on the Delivery

Lesson: Prerequisites for Creating Outbound Deliveries Lesson Overview This lesson discusses the basic functions of shipping. These functions are central to order processing but also provide important information for shipping. In particular, this concerns the outbound delivery plant determination, the shipping point determination, the route determination, the scheduling and the route schedule.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain the determination of the outbound delivery plant Describe shipping point determination Define route determination Configure the transportation scheduling and use the route schedule function.

Business Example You take the following into account when you configure the SAP system: Depending on the business process, you must determine ditTerent shipping points and routes. Different shipping activities require different levels of processing. These periods must be taken into account when determining shipping and transportation scheduling. For regular outbound deliveries, consider using SAP route schedules. "

Shipping Point ',

• Monitoring of shipping due date • Creating the delivery

1

Warehouse

Shipping docs

Packing

Picking

Figure 262: The Shipping Process

~770


2009

TSCM60

lesson: Prerequisites for Creating Outbound Deliveries

Shipping activities follow sales activities. The ECC system supports the following functions within 3hipping processing: Monitoring of deadlines for reference documents due for shipping (for example, customer orders and purchase orders) Creation and processing of outbound deliveries Monitoring of goods availability Monitoring of the capacity situation in the warehouse Support for picking (with a link to the Warehouse Management System) Packing of the delivery Printing and distribution of shipping documents Processing of goods issue Controlling through overviews of: Deliveries currently in progress Activities still to be performed Possible bottlenecks The deliveries in the shipping department that have already been posted for goods issue can form the basis for creating a worklist for billing.

e .

0

.

Customer~material

Goods recipient

information Customer

Material Plcint

2387

1400-100 1000

Standard order

23874876

Sold...f:o party Ship-to party

Customer

4876

Plant

1100

Standard order Sold-to party

Shlp..to party

23874876

Materials Material Material Material Plant

1400-100 1400-200 1400-300 1200

Standard order Sold-to party Ship-to party

'"-

2006~ 2007

Item Material Quantity

Figure 263: Outbound Delivery Plant Determination

The outbound delivery plant for each order item is defined in the order. The system can automatically determine the outbound delivery plant. The determination logic is coded and you can use only the user exit ~·source Determination" to change it.

I) i: {,

t )'

.('.-\

2009

r~lc..,,l c:~ ·{ 'l

t-)

(eel/

•··"-'j{C•

p;;'-'lf. -k;C © 2009 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

771~


TSCM60

If the system locates a customer material information master record and an outbound delivery plant is defined there, this plant is proposed with the highest priority for the order item. If no customer information master record exists or if no plant is maintained there, the system determines the outbound delivery plant from the ship-to parry master record. If no plant is maintained in the ship-tp party master record either, the system accesses the material master record. Shipping conditions

Order

item

Figure 264: Shipping Point Determination

The responsible shipping point is determined for each order item. The system automatically proposes a shipping point that you can change within given limits. The shipping point depends on the following criteria: The delivering plant that is determined for each order item (from the customer-material info record, the ship-to party record, or the material master record) The shipping requirements (for example, express) contained in the "Shipping Conditions" field The required loading equipment contained in the "Loading Group" field in the material master The shipping condition is proposed from the sales document type if a shipping condition has been assigned to it. If not, the shipping condition is proposed from the master record of the sold-to party.

~772


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Prerequisites for Creating Outbound Deliveries

An outbound delivery is always issued from one shipping point only. The shipping point cannot be changed in the outbound delivery. When an order is processed for delivery by the shipping point, the system only copies into the outbound delivery those order items that are defined for this shipping point. Order items with different shipping points are therefore not copied into the same outbound delivery.

e

.. .

Shipping condition

Transportation Transportation group zone {GR)

I

Figure 265: Route Determination Route determination is carried out in the order item and depends on: The country and the departure zone of the shipping point (assigned in Customizing) The shipping condition of the order, The transportation group assigned to the material The country and the transportation zone of the ship-to party (assigned in the customer master record) In the order item, you can manually overwrite the route that is determined. You can redetermine the route in the outbound delivery based on the weight (weight group). The configuration of the delivery type determines whether the route is redetennined .

.If"'·" .. o

/.).(

-c:u·~

1/-c

"' . ;_~iT 'f -fir'' ;:.::c l r

7

J <-"'

~ -,~.:.~.:. \

,'\

-20_0_9_______________________ ©_2_0_09__S_A_P_A_G___A_II_ri-gh_t_s-re_s_e-~-ed-.--------------~7~7~3~

TSCM60


1m

'

;

'\!;AN>

The earlier date is the creation date used for the

Figure 266: Backward Scheduling

When you create an order, the system can determine the required material availability date based on the delivery date requested by the customer. The goods to be delivered must be available for shipping at this point in time. Scheduling takes into account the following times: Transit time: Time required to ship an outbound delivery to the ship-to party Loading time: Time required for loading the goods.

Pick/pack time: Time required for picking, packing, and so on Transportation lead time: Time required for organizing the transportation. The loadingtim" and pick/pack time come from the shiQRing_]J<>i!lt; the~~ time and the ·transportationpi(mning time come frc-m the route.

-

~774

·---------

~---


--

2009

TSCM60


Figure 267: Forward Scheduling

First, the system performs backward scheduling in the order. If this results in a date in the past, the system automatically performs forward scheduling, which confirms a new delivery date. The same happens if the material is not available at the material availability date. When you create an outbound delivery you can carry out forward scheduling again. This is generally done when the material availability date determined in the order falls in the past at the time that the outbound delivery is created ("delay" when creating the outbound order). You can specify for each delivery type whether rescheduling should take place.

2009


775~

TSCM60


Shipping pt

working times

Shipping pt working times

L I

In hours

r

In hours

------

I

Shipping pt j work in_~times

In hours

Factory calendar route

In days

r

Shipping pt In days _}- factory

In days

calendar

L Shipping pt ! factory

_ _ _ __]

calendar

I Shipping pt In days rfactory ·----..J calendar In days

Figure 268: Precise and Daily Scheduling

In precise scheduling, the system calculates and displays the results of scheduling down to the minute. In daily scheduling, the system uses days, hours, and minutes for calculation, but only displays the resulting date. You can determine which scheduling logic the system should use for each shipping point. If you have maintained the working times of the shipping point, the system performs precise scheduling. The working hours of a shipping point consist of a calendar (which must agree with the factory calendar stored for the shipping point) and a shift sequence. The shift sequence defines the shifts for each week day, and the shifts define the times for starting and finishing work. In precise scheduling, pick/pack and loading times are specified in hours and minutes. The working times of the shipping point are taken into account during scheduling. The route is used to determine the transportation planning lead time. Precise scheduling uses the working times of the shipping point; daily scheduling uses the factory calendar of the shipping point. The route is also used to determine the transit time. Both types of scheduling use the factory calendar of the route to determine when the route is used.

~776


2009

TSCM60


~

V:ljil

@ lkoll!e:' R
1Siii6':t;;'p~@?i' ·:;'0'·i ~;»~ 'Custom~r. 3.11 (Kiel}':~~ C~sto,.,er3.87

(Bremen)

Customer 415

(Hamb~rg)

llti ~-~-r-itfy:-;!:{:iif\'::;:-::::

::<-,-~;:t:s;J:;Hf!lli!

® ' '

@)

s· h9u": z C~i>!omer 4.15 2. hp~(~·(i; Customer 311 2 hours · C~stom~r387

Figure 269: Route Schedules

You can use a route schedule to organize outbound deliveries from a particular

shipping point to different ship-to parties (for example, customer or subsidiary companies) that occur regularly in the same sequence for a certain route. Route schedules can also be used as selection criteria for the individual steps in shipping processing. For example, you could pick all the deliveries that belong to the same route schedule together. You can use the delivery monitor to fonn a group

of deliveries. The route schedule generally contains: A route A weekday as the departure date, along with a departure time A list of ship-to parties (optional:) An itinerary. You can use route schedules in sales orders. stock transfer orders. and outbound deliveries. The system determines them automatically.

''!k- In Customizing, you define whether a route schedule should be assigned for each shipping point, order type, purchasing document type (and delivering plant), and delivery type. Details about the route schedule are provided inS~.

2009


777~


~778


TSCMGO

2009

TSCM60


Exercise 36: Basic Processes and Functions for Outbound Delivery Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: Configure the settings for determining the relevant shipping point and route.

Business Example Up to now, all of your deliveries have been processed by shipping point XO##. Now you want to ensure that materials that must be refrigerated are automatically processed by your newly-created shipping point for refrigerated goods.

Task 1:

I.

Up to now, all your deliveries have been processed by shipping point XO##. Find the table for determining the shipping point in Customizing. Which table entry has been used in the orders so far to determine the shipping point?

2.

You have decided to make the processing of refrigerated goods recognizable by the selection of an appropriate loading group. Your shipping point for refrigerated goods YO## is to process deliveries for order items with loading group 0004. Set up shipping point determination so that the shipping point for refrigerated goods is proposed when the following combination occurs. Also allow shipping point XO## as an alternative: Shipping. condition

Loading group

Plant

50+##

0004

1200

Former shipping

Shipping poinr

point

YO##

XO##


-20_0_9______________________©_c_2_0_09--SA_P __A_G___ A_II-rig_h_ts--re-se_N_e_d__--------------~7~7~9n~

TSCM60


Task 2: Routes are used in various ways, depending on requirements. For simple delivery processing, you do not need to maintain stages for routes. 1.

2.

3.

Supplement route Cool## with the following entries:

7i·ansportation lead time:

I day

7i·ansportation lead time (hours):

I hour

Maintain an new entry for route determination in the order. The system should determine the route Cool## in the following situation:

Shipping point:

YO##

Customer:

T-L64A##

Shipping condition:

50+##

Transportation group:

0007-

Deliveries with a weight of less than kg are sent with a special transportation service provider. For this reason, you need to execute another route determination in the delivery in order to take into account the weight group. Maintain an new entry for route determination in the delivery.

Shipping point:

YO##

Customer:

T-L64A##

Shipping condition

Transportation group

Weight group

Actual route

50+##

0007

0001

R00115

No more entries are necessary. The route from the order is retained for other combinations of shipping condition, transportation group, and weight group. 4.

Check whether a new route detennination was executed for delivery type

ZL##.


~780


2009

TSCM60


Task 3: In Customizing, check the scheduling for your shipping point for refi·igeroted goods YO##.

2009

I.

Does the shipping point use daily or precise scheduling? How do you know?

2.

Configure precise scheduling for shipping point YO## by assigning Working Hours Germany 2 Shifts.

3.

The pick/pack time mid loading time each take two and a half hours. Define these times for the shipping point.


781~

TSCMGO


Solution 36: Basic Processes and Functions for Outbound Delivery Task 1: I.

Up to now, all your deliveries have been processed by shipping point XO##. Find the table for determining the shipping point in Customizing. Which table entry has been used in the orders so far to determine the shipping point?

Answer: In the IMG: Logistics Execution -->Shipping-> Basic Shipping Functions--). Shipping Point·anrl Goods Receiving Point Determination --).Assign shipping points Shipping condition: 50+##( determined from customer master) Loading group: 0001 (determined from the material master) Plant: 1200 (determined from customer master) Shipping point: XO## 2.

You have decided to make the processing of refrigerated goods recognizable by the selection of an appropriate loading group. Your shipping point for refrigerated goods Y()## is to process deliveries for order items with loading group 0004. Set up shipping point determination so that the shipping point for refrigerated goods is proposed when the following combination occurs. Also allow shipping point XO## as an alternative:

Shipping. condition

Loading group

Plant

Shipping point

Former shipping point

50+##

0004

1200

YO##

XO##

a)

In the IMG: Logistics Execution-> Shipping--> Basic Shipping Functions --). Shipping Point anti Gooi/s Receiving Point Determination--). Assign shipping points: Choose "New entries", and enter the following data:

Shipping. condition

Loading group

Plant

Shipping point

Former shipping point

50+##

0004

1200

YO##

XO## Continued on next page

~782


2009

TSCM60


Task 2: Routes are used in various ways, depending on requirements. For simple delivery processing, you do not need to maintain stages for routes. I.

Supplement route Cool## with the following entries: Transportation lead time:

I day

71-ansportation lead time (hours):

I hour

a)

Times in the route: In the IMG: Logistics Execution---> Shipping---> Basic Shipping Functions---> Routes---> Define Routes---> Define Routes ami Stages Position: Route: Cool## You can enter the transportation lead times directly in the route overview (columns Ii'ansLdTm. and Tr.Lead Time Hr) or select the route and choose Goto --->Details

2.

Transportation lead time:

I day

Transportation lead time (hours):

I hour

Maintain an new entry for route determination in the order. The system should determine the route Cool## in the following situation:


-20_0_9______________________© __2_00_9_S_A_P__A_G_._A_Il-rig_h_ts--re-se_N_e_d-.--------------~77.8~3~~


TSCM60

Shipping point:

YO##

Customer:

T-L64A##

Shipping condition:

50+##

Transpor/aiion group:

0007

a)

In the IMG: Logistics Execution--> Shipping--> Basic Shipping Routes ----t Route Determination ~ Maintain Route Determination Functions~

Position:

Shipping point:

YO##

Customer:

T-L64A##

Select this entry and, from the dialog structure, choose Route determination without weight group (order).: Choose New entries

Shipping condition:

50+##

Transportation group:

0007

Proposed route:

Cool##

Save your data. 3.

Deliveries with a weight of less than I kg are sent with a special transportation service provider. For this reason, you need to execute another

route determination in the delivery in order to take into account the weight group. Maintain an new entry for route determination in the delivery.

Shipping point:

YO##

Customer:

T-L64A##

Shipping condition


Weight group

Actual route

50+##

0007

0001

R00115


~784


2009

TSCM60


No more entries are necessary. The route from the order is retained for other combinations of shipping condition, transportation group, and weight group. a)

In the IMG: Logistics Execution--> Shipping--> Basic Shipping

Functions--)- Routes; Route Determination -+Maintain Route Detennination Position: Shipping point:

YO##

Customer:

T-L64A##

Select this entry and, from the dialog structure, choose Route determination with weight group (de/ive1y). Choose "New entries

4.

Shipping condition

50+##


0007

Weight group

0001

Actual route

ROOIIS

Check whether a new route determination was executed for delivery type ZL##. a)

In the IMG: Logistics Execution--> Shipping--> Basic Shipping Functions--> Routes --t Route Determination -->Define New Route Determination by Deli>'elJ' Type Check the entry for delivery type ZL## in the column RD.

Task 3: In Customizing, check the scheduling for your shipping point for reji-igerated goods YO##. I.

Does the shipping point use daily or precise scheduling? How do you know? Answer: In the IMG: Logistics Execution--> Shipping--> Basic Shipping

Functions--> Scheduling--> Delivery Scheduling and Tramportation Scheduling--> Define Scheduling by Shipping Point: Detail screen for shipping point YO##: Daily scheduling is used, because the Working times field is blank.


-20_0_9______________________©_c_2_0_09--SA_P __A_G___ A_II_ri-gh-ts__ re_s_eN_e_d__--------------~77.8~5~


2.

TSCM60

Configure precise scheduling for shipping point YO## by assigning Working Hours Germany 2 Shifts. a)

In the IMG: Logistics Execution---> Shipping---> Basic Shipping Functions---> Scheduling---> Delivery Scheduling ami Transportation Scheduling---> Define Scheduling by Shipping Point

Detail screen for shipping point YO##: In the Working times field, use the possible entries pushbutton to select: Working time- Germany- Two shifts 3.

The pick/pack time and loading lime each take two and a half hours. Define these times for the shipping point. a)

Loading time- working hours: 2:30 Pick/pack time- working hours: 2:30

~786


2009

TSCMSO


Exercise 37: Application Example Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. you will be able to: Test the settings using a practical example.

Business Example Once you have made the corresponding settings, you want to test whether the system really does determine the new shipping point for "Refrigerated" orders

Task: Test the settings you have made in Customizing for orders to be processed by your shipping point for refrigerated goods, and check that you get the results you expect. I.

Create a trade fair## order (ZA##): Sold-to pm·ty:

T-L64A##


##-5-1

Req. delive1y date:

day after tomorrow

Material:

T-AU4##

Quantity:

15


2009


787~


2.

Which shipping point was determined in the item?

3.

Which route was determined in the item?

4.

Can the required delivery date be kept?

5.

Check the dates and times that were generated.

TSCMSO

Delivery date: - - - - - - - - - - - - - Goods issue: - - - - - - - - - - - - - Loading date: - - - - - - - - - - - - Material avail. date: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 7J·ansportation planning: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

~788


2009

TSCM60


Solution 37: Application Example Task: Test the settings you have made in Customizing for orders to be processed by your shipping point for refrigerated goods, and check that you get the results you expect. I.

Create a trade fair## order (ZA##):

Sold-to party:

T-L64A##


##-5-1

Req. de/ive1y date:

day after tomorrow

Material:

T-AU4##

Quantity:

1-5

a)

Create trade fair## order: Logistics~

Sales and Distribution---+ Sales---+ Order--)- Create

Order type: Trade fair##order 2.

Which shipping point was determined in the item? Answer: Choose the shipping overview (choose the "Shipping tab"): Shipping point: YO##

3.

Which route was determined in the item? Answer: Stay in the shipping overview. Route: Cool##

4.

Can the required delivery date be kept? Answer: Select the item, and then choose: Goto--> Item-> Schedule Lines (or: Button:" Schedule Lines") In this case, the system has not generated a further schedule. The required delivery date can therefore be confinned as deadline for the delivery.

5.

Check the dates and times that were generated.

Delive1y date: - - - - - - - - - - - - Goods issue: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Loading d a t e : - - - - - - - - - - - - Material avail. date: - - - - - - - - - - - - -


-2-00_9_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _©_c_2_0_09_S_A_P_A_G___A_II_ri-gh_t_s-re_s_eN-ed-.-------~7~8nn9~


TSCM60

Transportation planning: - - - - - - - - - - - - -

a)

Select the item, and then choose: Goto---> Item---> Schedule Lines (or: Button:" Schedule Lines")

Branch to the"Shipping" detail screen of the schedule line (Choose "Shipping")

~790


2009


TSCM60

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Explain the determination of the outbound delivery plant Describe shipping point determination Define route determination

Configure the transportation scheduling and use the route schedule function.

2009


791~


TSCM60

Lesson: Creating and Processing Outbound Deliveries Lesson Overview This Jesson provides an overview of the options for creating outbound delivery documents. You will also be shown how to adapt processing of delivery due lists to the meet the requirements of your company. Determination of the picking location and the door and staging areas, changing and adding to the outbound deliveries, and the delivery monitor will also be discussed.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Create outbound deliveries using collective processing Define picking location determination Define the door and staging zones and determine them in the outbound delivery Change and add to outbound deliveries Monitor shipping activities within the goods issue process

Business Example You take the following into account when you configure the SAP system: Outbound deliveries are created using collective processing, which groups together sales orders with identical shipping criteria. The documents required for the shipping process are created based on the delivery document.

~792


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Creating and Processing Outbound Deliveries

~

i~, ·~\ihW"'

• !11~nual creation !'f ~a.

Collective processing, of delivery; documents'

"l~lJ single document\

I

~

C=J Figure 270: Options for Creating Outbound Deliveries

You can create an outbound delivery manually with or without reference to a particular order. However, if you create a delivery manually, you cannot deliver purchase orders or other requests. If you use collective processing (delivery list), you can deliver goods for all types of shipping documents. In this case. the system automatically creates multiple outbound deliveries. This can take place online or in the background (overnight, for instance).

e ~

.

Date

Ship~

point

Order

Out.dei.D 80001235

1257-1322 ........... • 15th May

1000

1461-

Scenario: Sales orders

Out.deL

~

80001236

Log

Shipping point 1000 To: 15.

Figure 271: Delivery Due List

2009


793~

TSCM60


The delivery due list is a worklist of all operations requiring deliveries. You use different criteria to select the documents to be delivered using collective processing. Then, the system automatically creates the outbound deliveries. If the shipping criteria (splitting criteria) are the same, the system combines the documents to form one outbound delivery as required (order combination). Alternatively, the system may split an operation into several outbound deliveries. You can model the different business processes for deliveries by using delivery scenarios. When you process the delivery due list, you just need to choose a scenario.

Delivery of Orders

j

Select orders only

Select purchase orders only

Selection by, for example: • Shipping point • ShipMto party • Delivery prioritiy ·Material Delivery qty manually changeable

Selection by, for example: • Purchasing doc • Supplying Plant • Receiving plant • Material

'l''

'

\~

,£, Sales, Order Items ,

Figure 272: Examples of Delivery Scenarios

~--------------~

~

' \

\

i

~ ,stockTransPoq:orders

A delivery scenario models a business process for delivering the goods for orders that are due to ship. For example, a delivery scenario could let you complete deliveries for SD orders on an item-by-item basis. The delivery scenarios are already defined in SAP ECC. The requirements resulting from the delivery process are modeled using user roles (also called list profiles). They enable you to fine-tune your processing of the delivery due list. They let you control the scope of selection, the display of the delivery due list, the type of delivery, and so on. In the standard system, a user role is assigned to each delivery scenario. You can maintain the user roles in Customizing. If users always or frequently work with the same scenario, they can configure it to meet their personal requirements and use it as their default scenario (user-specific delivery scenario). The following parameters and values have to be defined for this:

~794


2009

TSCMGO


Parameter ID:

Parameter value:

LE_VLIO_SZENARIO

VLIO

LE_ VLI 0_PROFIL

Key for list profile

or LE_VLIO_USER_VARIANT

Variant name

@ '

.

Figure 273: Selecting and Displaying the Delivery Due List The different criteria for selecting documents due for delivery are displayed on tabstrips. The number oftabstrips and the selection criteria differ according to delivery scenario and user role. Users can define variants in their user-specific scenarios and thus create user-specific selection criteria. After you have made your selection. the system displays a list of all documents due for delivery that correspond to your selection criteria. The settings in the user role also affect how the list is displayed. Within the list, there are many SAP List Viewer functions available, such as sort, sum, and filter. From the list, you can create deliveries online or in the background and branch to the relevant documents. You can also change the display of the list while you are using it by accessing display variants.

2009

© 2009 SAP AG. All rights reserved,

795~

TSCM60


Order M1

10 PC Stor. loc.

I

Picking storage location determination

Outbound delivery LF\~ M110 ST Stor. Joe. 0001

Figure 274: Determining the Picking Location

If no storage location for picking is specified in the order item, the system detennines the storage location when it creates the outbound delivery and copies it into the delivery item. Otherwise, the storage location entered in the order item is used in the outbound delivery. The system determines the picking location based on a rule defined in the delivery type. The following rules are shipped in the standard system:

''f

MALA: The picking location is determined based on the shipping point, the de1tvering plant, and the material's storage condition defined in the material master.

RETA and MARA: These rules are mainly used in trade scenarios. You can also use the customer exit in SAP enhancement V02V0002 to implement storage location dete;:;n;;;;;tion~: ./ . · .. ·

7 r(~

fv;-:. 1.;; ..)€'

The picking location search

is activated for each delivery item category.

~·

L'a', ·he [).vfi ·'V2

P1c

U?

~796

(u.'J

J-t.-ce7(7 en

tdch ,·"--" ~\C~· r:::t -~


2009

TSCM60


e .

.

Storage location for goods recipient

Storage location for route schedule

Delivery

z :"Determination of do'ot Bnd~~ii11 '< ~)\ X' Staging ar~i>)'~~~
Storage location for goods recipient storage condition

Item

Storage location for route schedule storage condition

Determination of sta'girlg Area

Figure 275: Determination of Door and Staging Area Door or staging area determination can take place at the delivery header level, depending on the goods recipient or the route schedule. For each delivery type, you can specify the critieria used in the determination. Staging area determination can also take place at the delivery item level if the storage conditions (material master) are also taken into account.

TF:a<' Note that di!f."~ent stag[~g areas at the delivery item level lead to a transfer order ·· •I

split because the staging area is a header field in the transfer order. You can use user exits at the delivery header level (SAP enhancement V02V0003) and delivery item level (SAP enhancement V02V0004) to implement your own determination.

.....:.)

.~:.' /·4)/')

.~

' '-"-'"") , f-··~c

---:'> j_.c.Ci.-'

w'A-\ _.:'>

'{jD ~{'> ,,_,;_ Cl G • ( cfy J)tf:, ·"' tu.,c_fe•,q( .\?f'("Ji')~ kv-ti

t· \•!.J,~ J

2009

(<(•l_(.lf' ..(? cf

-

7"


797~

TSCM60


\' '- w,)('i Order 638_8 Item 10 Item 20

M-01 M-07

10 PC 35 PC

Order 6412 Item 10

Item 30

R-71

Item 40

R'BS

R-71

17 PC

Figure 276: Changing and Adding to thl> Outbound Delivery You can change or add to delivery documents after they have been saved. However, information such as ship-to parties and shipping points can no longer be changed once you have created the outbound delivery. For example, you could add items to the outbound delivery. These items may refer to other orders (~,!'!!!.,r. order function). The same split criteria apply to the additional orders as to the combination of orders during collective processing. You can also add items to the outbound delivery without r5'Jerring_t~an order. For this item, the system determines an item type using the usual rules (see unit Controlling Elements of the Delivery).

[

·.o. -.~.u.tbouilC!-silip!iiniil notification I ......... Lf'IVA ........

"

't ·shi;,;,;~;;-~;cie;s:.\a&_'_i -~~~·-··· ·-~---···---·---~--"

Figure 277: Output in Shipping

~798


2009

TSCM60


An output is a communication tool that supports the exchange of information between you and your partners. Output can be sent from different objects (for example, an outbound delivery, a group of outbound deliveries, or a handling unit). For example: The delivery note and the packing list are created on the basis of the outbound delivery, and the freight list on the basis of a group of outbound deliveries. You can make output determination dependent upon different criteria. Here the condition technique provides you with flexible control options. With this technique, you transmit the features of the output: for example, How the output is sent (for example, printout, fax, ED!) When the output is created (send time) To whom the output is sent (partner/partner role) For print output: To which printer the output was sent In the outbound delivery, there is a distinction between header and item output. Header output refers to the entire document (for example, delivery note); item output can be created for each document item (for example, inspection certificate). For handling units, you can print, for example, labels or appendices. Sample forms are provided for output types in the standard system. You can adapt these to suit your own, company-specific requirements.

Delivery list

< Goods issue)

': , I.:oading

1

''

Transportation planning•

Figure 278: Outbound Delivery Monitor

-20_0_9______________________©_c_2_0_09--SA __ P_A_G_._A_II-ri-gh-ts--re_s_e~--ed-.--------------~7~9~9~

TSCM60


The outbound delivery monitor displays all deliveries that are still to be processed or that have been processed. There are numerous criteria for selecting the required documents. The system displays a list of the selected outbound deliveries, and you can perform subsequent functions from this list. This includes processing output types for shipping, such as the delivery note. You can also call up information in the delivery environment. You can define user-specific variants (selection variants or display variants) for selecting and displaying documents. You can also use the outbound delivery monitor to execute important follow-on functions in collective processing in the background (for example, the creation of transfer orders for picking, or the posting of goods issue). You can use the inbound delivery monitor to monitor and execute inbound · delivery activities in the same way.

j\\t-0 Lc~
·-"' L

&

.. .---:-;, C'(t.--1 (~-c·u A_c.l

~800

--) (; i

lc'"'J \'


2009

TSCM60


Exercise 38: Creating and Processing Outbound Deliveries Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: Define additional staging areas and set up door and staging area determination, Create several outbound deliveries at the same time using collective processing, Describe the criteria for order combination or delivery split, Check the settings for determination of the picking location, Display lists of outbound deliveries being processed.

Business Example Prior to goods issue. picked deliveries are to be stored temporarily on a customer-dependent basis in different staging areas in the goods issue area. They are then sent from specific doors. You only create a single outbound delivery specifically for a particular sales order in exceptional circumstances. For your daily operations, you automate your

processes and deliver matching orders together. To do this, you work with the worklist for shipping, which is called the deliYery list. When you commence the picking process, you should know from which storage location the goods are to be taken. For automatic storage location determination, both the physical storage criteria and material requirements for storage conditions play a role. During shipping processing, you often need an overview of the outbound deliveries that have been created. You also use lists and worklists for different shipping activities, such as picking, loading, or posting goods issue.

Task 1: Determination of Staging Area All deliveries for ship-to party T-L64A## are to be placed in one area in the goods issue area and are to leave your warehouse from one door. I.

In warehouse number 012, create a new staging area area## (50+11#) and assign door A I to it.

2.

Set up determination for the newly created staging area for warehouse number 012 and ship-to party T-L64A##.

Conthwed on next page

2009


801 ri!E.""

TSCM60


Task 2: Delivery Due List 1.

In the shipping point that processes "standard"' operations, XO##, you work with the delivery list to create outbound deliveries for sales orders. You now want to create outbound deliveries for all orders that are due to be shipped this week (from the start of the week until today). Since you want to fully deliver sales orders only, choose the scenario Sales orders for collective processing. On the selection screen, make the necessary entries to select the orders you want to deliver.

2.

Now select all the proposed orders and choose Create de/ive1y in background.

3.

Display the log. How many deliveries were created? Give a reason for the result.

4.

You now want to look at the log for this collective processing run. but you have already left the transaction. Go to the log and make the selection using your user name.

T:vpe o_f"collective run:

L

Started by:

SCM6JO-##

Task 3: Determining the Picking Location I.

When you defined the shipping point for refrigerated goods YO##, you used the copy function and copied the entries into dependent tables. This also affected the settings for determining the picking location. These settings were already maintained for the copy source {shipping point XO##). Check that the same storage location is determined both for shipping point XO## as well as for shipping point YO##. Check the following combinations for determining the storage location:


~802


2009

TSCM60


Shipping point

Plant

Storage

Storage location

condition YO##

1200

Blank

YO##

1200

01

YO##

1200

02

Task 4: Outbound Delivery Monitor I.

You want to display all outbound deliveries that were created this week in your shipping point XO##. Create a list of outbound deliveries in the outbound delivery monitor. Make your selection using your shipping point XO## and the delivery creation date (start of this week until today).

2.

Sort the Jist by delivery date in descending order.

3.

Send the list to another group in the class. Display incoming mails: Office Documents

2009

-->

Workplace

-->


Inbox

-->

Unread

803~

TSCM60


Solution 38: Creating and Processing Outbound Deliveries Task 1: Determination of Staging Area All deliveries for ship-to party T-L64A## are to be placed in one area in the goods issue area and are to leave your warehouse from one door. I.

In warehouse number 012, create a new staging area area## (50+##) and assign door A I to it. a)

Determine staging area and doors: Create new staging area: In the IMG: Logistic Execution-> Shipping-> Picking-> Le1m WM -+Define Material Staging Areas Choose New entries Warehouse number:

012

Staging area:

50+##

Sraging Area Text:

Zone##

Door:

AI

Sm·e. 2.

Set up determination for the newly created staging area for warehouse number 012 and ship-to party T-L64A##. a)

Set up determination of staging area: In the IMG: Logistic Execution-> Shipping-> Picking-> Determine Door am/ Mat.Staging Areas-> Determine by Ship-To Party

Choose New entries. Warehouse number:

012

Customer:

T-L64A##

Staging area:

50+##

Hint: You only need to enter a door here if a different door is to be determined to the door already assigned to the material staging area.


~804


2009

TSCM60


Task 2: Delivery Due List I.

In the shipping point that processes "standard" operations, XO##, you work with the delivery list to create outbound deliveries for sales orders. You now want to create outbound deliveries for all orders that are due to be shipped this week (from the start of the week until today). Since you want to fully deliver sales orders only, choose the scenario Sales orders for collective processing.

On the selection screen, make the necessary entries to select the orders you want to deliver. a)

Processing the collective run using the sales orders scenario:

Logistics--> Logistics Execution --> Outbound Process--> Goods Issue for Outbound Delivery--> Outbound Delivery--> Create--> Collective Processing of Documents for Shipment-> Sales Orders b)

On the selection screen, make the necessary entries to select the orders you want to deliver. Shipping Point:

XO##

De/ive1y Crearion Dare::

Start of the week until today

Execute 2.

Now select all the proposed orders and choose Creare de/ive1y in background.

a) 3.

Choose Ne·w entries

Display the log. How many deliveries were created? Give a reason for the result. Answer: Choose Log for De/ive1y Creation The system created at least two outbound deliveries. Reason: Not all order items had the same split criteria. The orders have different ship-to parties.

4.

You now want to look at the log for this collective processing run, but you have already left the transaction. Go to the log and make the selection using your user name.

Colitinued on next page

-20_0_9_______________________ ©_2_0_09__S_A_P_A_G___A_II_ri-gh-ts--re_s_eN--ed-.--------------~8~Q~5~

TSCMSO


Type of collective run:

L

Started by:

SCM610-##

a)

Logistics~

Logistics Execution~ Outbound Process -1- Goods Issue for Outbound Delivery -> Outbound Delivery-> Lists am/ Logs -> Collective Processing Log Type of collective run:

L

Started by:

SCM610-##

-1-

Execute

Task 3: Determining the Picking Location 1.

When you defined the shipping point for refrigerated goods YO##. you used the copy function and copied the entries into dependent tables. This also affected the settings for determining the picking location. These settings were already maintained for the copy source (shipping point XO##). Check that the same storage location is determined both for shipping point XO## as well as for shipping point YO##. Check the following combinations for determining the storage location:

Shipping point

Plant

Storage condilion

YO##

1200

Blank

YO##

1200

01

YO##

1200

02

a)

Storage location

In the IMG: Logistics Execution -> Shipping-> Picking-> Determine Picking Location -1- Assign Picking Locations: Shipping point YO##

Shipping point

Plant

Storage condition

Storage location

YO##

1200

Blank

0001

YO##

1200

01

0001

YO##

1200

02

0001


~806


2009

TSCM60


Task 4: Outbound Delivery Monitor I.

You want to display all outbound deliveries that were created this week in your shipping point XO##. Create a list of outbound deliveries in the outbound delivery monitor. Make your selection using your shipping point XO## and the delivery creation date (start of this week until today). a)

Delivery monitor: Outbound delivery list: Logistics--> Logistics Execution --> Outbound Process--> Goods Issue for Outbound Delivery--> Outbound Delivery --> Lists am/ Logs--> Outbound Delivery Monitor. Choose List Outbound Deliveries. Choose Execute.

2.

S01t the list by delivery date in descending order. a)

3.

Position the cursor on the Delivery date column and choose Sort in Descending Order.

Send the list to another group in the class. Display incoming mails: Qffice

-->

Workplace

-->

Inbox

-->

Unread

Documents a)

List __, Send. .. Enter SCM6 I 0-## as the recipient and choose the recipient type: SAP user name.

Choose Send

-20_0_9_______________________ ©_2_0_09__S_A_P_A_G___A_II_ri-gh_t_s-re_s_e~--ed-.--------------~8~0~7~


TSCM60

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Create outbound deliveries using collective processing Define picking location determination Define the door and staging zones and determine them in the outbound delivery Change and add to outbound deliveries Monitor shipping activities within the goods issue process

~808


2009

TSCMGO

8

. .

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: Explain the determination of the outbound delivery plant Describe shipping point determination Define route determination Configure the transportation scheduling and use the route schedule function. Create outbound deliveries using collective processing Define picking location determination Define the door and staging zones and determine them in the outbound delivery Change and add to outbound deliveries Monitor shipping activities within the goods issue process

2009


809~

TSCM60

Unit Summary

~810


2009

ol..efu-AiA.i,"3 -/4 p!o,,~ , (o.r,f 149M q/r, e-o/ iA 7 /\..JL

par

-.Jk

'

.Jiu!

~ru (}"""/ ck.e-cl<.

Ci
•,

ivL•if~·:1','(

/>1

1>

Unit Processes and Functions Based on the Delivery Unit Overview The delivery document is the platform on which all shipping activities are planned, executed and monitored. This unit offers an overview of the processes and functions that can be executed as part of delivery processing.

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: Describe the picking process using transfer orders, Create transfer orders manually and using collective processing Confirm transfer orders Define the term "packaging materials". Describe the process for multi-level packing in Sales and Distribution Create packing instructions and detennination records for automatic packing

Make the necessary settings for detennining permitted packaging material Explain the different follow-on processes for packaging material Post the goods issue

Describe the effect that the goods issue posting has on Sales and Distribution, Materials f\.1anagement, and Financial Accounting Cancel the goods issue posting Explain how to link Quality Management with the shipping process. Explain how batches can be specified in the outbound delivery Demonstrate serial number assignment in the outbound delivery Use pricing in the outbound delivery Split an existing delivery into several smaller deliveries, Understand the process of the proof of delivery.

Unit Contents Lesson: Picking Outbound Deliveries ........................................ 813

2009


811~

Unit 24: Processes and Functions Based on the Delivery

TSCMSO

Exercise 39: Picking of Outbound Deliveries ........................... 823 Lesson: Packing Processes ................................................... 837 Exercise 40: Packing ....................................................... 847 Lesson: Goods Issue ........................................................... 856 Exercise 41: The Goods Issue Posting and Its Effects ................ 863 Exercise 42: Canceling the Goods Issue ................................ 869 Lesson: Special Functions for Processing Deliveries ...................... 873

~812


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Picking Outbound Deliveries

Lesson: Picking Outbound Deliveries Lesson Overview This lesson discusses picking in the SAP system. Picking is modeled in the SAP system using transfer orders. Therefore, this lesson focuses on creating and

processing these documents. In this context, you will also learn about Lean WM, its functions, and usage.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe the picking process using transfer orders, Create transfer orders manually and using collective processing Confirm transfer orders

Business Example You take the following into- account when you configure the SAP system: In your company, you have a fixed storage bin from which the materials are picked. You need fo be able to print several outbound deliveries on one pick list, to enable simpler picking

Figure 279: Picking Picking is the process of preparing goods for delivery to the customer with special attention paid to dates, quantity, and quality.

-20_0_9_______________________ ©_2_0_09__ S_A_P_A_G_.-A-II-ri-gh_t_s-~-s-eN--ed-.--------------~8~1~3~

TSCM60


A setting in the delivery item category determines whether an item is relevant for picking. Often, picking takes place using the printout of a picking list. SAP recommends that you use the Warehouse Management transfer order functions. For this purpose, you do not need to implement the complete WM system; Lean WM is sufficient. Using Lean Warehouse Management means using a small part of the functions provided by the Warehouse Management component. ~-

With the help of output control for the outbound delivery, you can also transmit data to a subsystem that is implemented for the picking process. In the standard configuration of the system, the prerequisite for posting goods issue is that picking-relevant items are completely picked. This means that the delivery quantity and the pick quantity in the outbound delivery must be the same.

e

.

.

Transfer Order

= ---

!Iiiii!!lliii!N l:lllltil

.:

=..::::::!:::=.-

Figure 280: Picking Process Usjng Warehouse Management/Lean Warehouse Management

To use WM in picking (either full WM or Lean WM). you create a transfer order (TO). The transfer order is a document with which the goods movements within a warehouse complex can be initiated and monitored. You create one or several

transfer orders on the basis of the items to be picked using WM. Afterwards, you print out the transfer order. This step can be executed automatically by the system.

~814


2009

TSCM60


Instead of printing the transfer order as a picking list, you can transfer the data in the transfer order to an external system using portable data capture or to a warehouse control unit. By confirming the transfer order, you verifY the quantities removed from the warehouse. If you are working with a confirmation requirement, you must perform this step separately. If there is no confirmation requirement, the system automatically confirms the quantities when you create the transfer order. Then, you can post the goods issue. This completes the shipping process.

Delivery quantity

Pick quantity

Figure 281: The Transfer Order

A transfer order is an instruction to move materials from a source storage bin to a destination storage bin withi;:;;~~;~el;;;~;se complex. Transport orders include the following information. Material number Quantity to be moved Source and destination storage bin When you create the transfer order, the system automatically copies the delivery quantity as the picking quantity from the outbound delivery to the transfer order. The picking quantity in the outbound delivery is entered automatically v.hen you create the transfer order. In Lean WM, the picking quantity is initially the same as the delivery quantity.

2009


815~

TSCMGO


Material A

Material A - - +

Storage bin A01-10-01

10 PC


2 PC


1 PC

Storage bin FIX-MAT A

20 PC

Figure 282: WM versus Lean Warehouse Management

If you have a warehouse with random storage, you need to use the WM system with full functionality. Since a material can be stored in different storage bins or even several storage bins at the same time, you must manage the storage bins in the system.

The Lean Warehouse Management does not manage the storage bins and is therefore more suitable for fixed bin storage. In a fixed bin storage area, a particular material is always in the same storage bin. To print the storage bin in the picking document, you simply have to maintain the respective data in the material master in the view "Storage 1". Maintenance of further warehouse data and the Warehouse Management views is not required. Some of the WM functions not included in Lean WM are: Storage sections Reserve storage bins Strategies for putaway and picking Replenishment Inventory at storage-bin level This considerably reduces the time needed for imple.mentation.

~816


2009

TSCM60


Example: Implementation of Lean WM in a Fixed Bin Warehouse

Goods issue

Figure 283: Modeling the Warehouse Structure in Lean WM Possible model of the warehouse structure of a fixed bin in the SAP system when using Lean WM. For Lean WM, you need at least one warehouse number and at least one storage type from which picking takes place. You also need one storage type in which goods are stored (for example, picking storage type as source storage type, shipping zone as destination storage type). In the picking storage area, you can have storage bins grouped together from the point of view of stock removal (for example, to distribute the workload evenly). Picking areas can be defined for each warehouse number and storage type. In addition to the picking area, there are other organizational units in the warehouse. These are the staging areas and the doors. They are defined in the outbound delivery or determined by the system and they can also be printed out on the picking documents. iv:.-(' -~0

·r rp:-_:t< You f3flfl activate Lean WM in Customizing at the warehouse number level. You assign a warehouse number to a combination of plant and storage type. In this way, the organizational units in the warehouse are linked to Inventory Management. Also, through this assignment, a status for WM activities is assigned to the respective items in the outbound delivery.

2009


817~

TSCM60


Options for creating TOs

Options for printing TOs

Figure 284: Creating and Printing Transfer Orders

There are several ways of creating a transfer order (TO). They differ only in the degree of automation involved. In individual cases, you can create the transfer order as a follow-on function from wiihin the delivery. You can also create transfer orders explicitly. To do thfs, create the transfer order either with reference to a specific outbound delivery, or use the delivery monitor to create transfer orders for several deliveries at the same time. The "automatic/direct TO" procedure is suitable if you want to have the transfer order created automatically from each outbound delivery, without manual involvement or effort. Using the collective processing procedure, you can group several outbound deliveries together for the purpose of creating the transfer orders. In WM, you have the following options for printing using a print code: Single print: One page for each TO item (for example, item-by-item processing in the warehouse) Combined print: One list for the entire transfer order (also called "combined list") Pick list: One list for several transfer orders that were created in collective processing (also known as a "combined pick list")

~818


2009

TSCMSO


Automatic TO creation

Job

RLAUTA20 8/ground Program

Outbound Deliver Transaction

Transaction: Output from deliveries

Direct

TO creation Immediately

Direct processing for delivery creation

Figure 285: Automatic/Direct Transfer Orders

If you do not want to issue the items of several outbound deliveries in one picking list, we recommend the automatic or direct creation of transfer orders. You initiate this processing type through the output control of the outbound delivery. With the condition technique, you can have the system determine output type 'VMTA at the header level of the ombound delivery when the delivery is being created. The prerequisite for this is that at least one item of the outbound delivery is relevant for WM. The combination "Delivery type/Shipping point" (first access) or "Delivery type" (second access) is responsible for determining the output in the standard system. The processing of output type WMTA triggers the creation of the transfer order. Depending on the send time of output type WMTA, you can have different processing types: Automatic transfer order creation: Time 1-3 (processing later) In this case. the output is either processed via a selection program in the background or manually using the transaction "Output from deliveries", which can also be planned in the background. During automatic transfer order creation, the output process is independent of outbound delivery creation. Direct transfer order creation: Time 4 (Processing Immediately} Here, processing is initiated immediately after outbound delivery creation.

2009


819~

TSCM60


Outbound Delivery Monitor

-

Del481

Group 23

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Pick list Ref. no. 23

Blo Mat. Pes

M-o4

·~·

5

FlX-2 R-11

2

FJX-1

3

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

~-

Figure 286: Collective Processing in the Outbound Delivery Monitor

To optimize the picking process, you can also create a picking list for several outbound deliveries. This list is then sorted, for example, by storage bin or materiaL depending on the settings in Customizing. This simplifies to a considerable degree the actual search work for the picker in the warehouse. The prerequisite for creating the picking list is that the transfer orders have not already been created individually. Use the collective processing procedure to create these picking lists: First. from the outbound delivery monitor. select the outbound deliveries and create a group for them. Then, create the transfer orders with reference to the group. This creates a transfer order for each outbound delivery assigned to the group. Depending on the settings for print control, the picking list is printed automatically by the system or manually by the picker who calls up this function.

~820


2009

TSCM60


i.m ,-.'
Print TO IDoc

Create new TO for difference

No Yes

Yes

Figure 287: Differences in Picking Using Warehouse Management

In picking, differences may occur between the quantity actually removed and the delivery quantity. However, you can only post a goods issue if the picking quantity and delivery quantity are the same. One option is to copy the picking quantity as the delivery quantity and perform a partial deliver~·. In the order, the status is set to partially delivered, and a new delivery is created for the remaining items. Altematively, you can choose subsequent picking. In this case, you create a new transfer order for the difference.

I Confirmation

I

Figure 288: Confirming Transfer Orders

2009


821~

TSCM60


When you create the transfer order, the system sets the delivery quantity as the picking quantity and the picking status is set to C (~ fully picked). If you wish to have the system record that the picking procedure is complete, you can set up the confirmation requirement. You must confirm the transfer order and therefore also the picked quantities before the goods issue is posted. If you have organized your warehouse so that picking causes changes to the outbound delivery in only a limited number of cases, and the confirmation takes place on time, you can limit this step to the deliveries to be changed and also work without the confirmation requirement.

During confirmation, it is possible to report differences in quantities. You can record the cause for the difference in the s?'stem by entering a difference indicator. As soon as confirmation is complete, the status of the WM activities is set to 'C', regardless of the confirmed quantity. Only the pick quantity affects the picking status. In Customizing, you define the confirmation requirement for each storage type. It is sufficient if you set either "stock removal" (picking) in the source storage type or "stock placement" (putaway) in the destination storage type as requiring confirmation.

/).;?A.-!{'

~822

k-fo:z:,fi·'9

(c·~f) ,dr:c ·1

Oe~"•

&,,-...'11 r ~-' r:J

~ve.x;f

/1uu.o

Cof/~ve

fro

CJL.'-'3

(c·,

. t r.~. . {t:~,.-

1f'o·'' r

z_r

;.~

[I\


:.::fl

•

ovefl.a-. '

Wli /JcfMT

2009

TSCM60


Exercise 39: Picking of Outbound Deliveries Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: Use the WM system for picking in fixed bin storage areas (Lean WM), Locate the most important Customizing settings for Lean WM.

Business Example You have a warehouse in which the materials are always located at the same storage bin (fixed bin storage). For your picking activities, you need picking lists, which contain the items for picking and their storage location. In your shipping points, you pick for several deliveries at the same time to reduce the time employees spend finding and fetching items. To do this, you use collective processing to create the transfer orders. In your shipping points, the goods cannot leave your company without confirmation about the quantities found in the warehouse.

Task 1: Picking Using Lean WM You want to process activities quickly in your shipping point for refrigerated goods YIR#I. Therefore, when you create the outbound delivery, you immediately generate a list (combined print) of the materials and quantities to be picked. The goods in the warehouse are confirmed on the basis of this list. I.

Create a trade fair ## order:

Sold-to party:

T-L64B##

Purchase order number: :

##-6-1

Req. delive1y date:

Today

Material:

T-AU.t##

Quantity:

100

Order nzonber:

2.

Create the outbound delivery for the order in shipping point YO##, and on the Picking or Status tab, display the picking status and the WM status (before you save the delivery). Picking status:


2009


823~

TSCM60


Status WM act.: 3.

Save the outbound delivery and create the transfer order in the same workstep. This initiates the printing of the Jist required for picking.

Hint: To do this, use the menu path Subsequentfimctions-+ Create transfer order from the delivery screen. In the dialog box that appears, choose Save to save the outbound delivery. Enter the following in addition to the default data:

Warehouse number: 012 Foreground/background processing: Background To confirm. choose Enter. 4.

Look at the document flow of the outbound delivery. What is the overall processing status of the transfer order?

5.

Explain this status.

6.

From the document flow screen, display the transfer order. Has the transfer order already been printed and con finned?

TO printed: yes no Confirmation: yes no 7.

Branch to the Jist of your spool orders and display the generated list on the screen. Note down the number of the transfer order: - - - - - - - -


~824


2009

TSCMGO


8.

Proceed to the picking overview screen of the outbound delivery. What are the two status values now? Picking status: Status WM act:

9.

The picker returns from the warehouse and gives you the list. There are no changes on the list with respect to the quantities. According to your internal procedures, this list is your confirmation you that the picker found the required quantity in the warehouse and removed it from the shelf. Therefore, confirm the transfer order in background processing. TO number: Detennined in step 7 above. Warehouse number:" 012 Foregrozmd1bockground processing: Background

To confirm, choose Enter. Hint: You can execute the workstep for entering the TO number manually by copying it from the pick list. It is possible to automate this by scanning the bar code on the list.

I 0.

Now look a! the two status entries in the outbound delivery. Picking status: ____________ Status WM act: - - - - - - - - - - -

II.

How is the confirmation step documented in the document flow for the outbound delivery?

Task 2: In shipping point XO##, execute picking for several outbound deliveries at the same time. To do this, print out the items to be picked on a combined pick list. I.

Using the outbound delivery monitor, select the outbound deliveries for picking in shipping point XO##.


2009


825 t:!!!"

TSCM60


2.

Shipping point:

XO##

Pick date:

current week

Warehouse number:

012

For the selected outbound deliveries, form a group with reference to WM. Group type:

K

Description:

Picking Group##

Warehouse nzrmber

012

Number of the group 3.

Now start collective processing by creating transfer orders for the group you have just created.

Hint: To obtain a combined pick list, you must create the transfer orders using the transaction "Create transfer order: Collective Processing". If you want to create the transfer orders from the outbound delivery monitor, choose "TO for Group" to start the collective processing.

or use the SAP Easy Access Menu to call the transaction "Collective Processing". 4.

Branch to the list of your spool orders and display the pick list you just generated on the screen.

5.

In one of the processed outbound deliveries, the required quantity was not found in the warehouse. Confirm the transfer orders for the group number. Warehouse number:

012

Group: :

see task 2

Foreground/background processing:

Foreground

First confirm the respective item by entering the actual quantity in the foreground. Position the cursor on the item, choose Confirm item .foreground and enter both the actual quantity and the difference quantity. Afterwards, confirm the remaining quantity in one step by choosing Confirm rem. qty.


~826


2009

TSCM60


Task 3: To be able to use the WM system (either in complete form or as Lean WM) during picking, you must have already set up the warehouse structure in Customizing in an earlier step.

,&. I.

Caution: Do not change the settings in Customizing. Display them only!

What is the highest organizational unit in the WM system? Where do you define this in Customizing?

2.

Where in Customizing do you activate the WM system?

3.

Since you have fixed bin storage, it is not necessary to have stock management at bin level beyond the requirements of standard Inventory Management. As a result, you do not need a WM system with complete functionality. It is sufficient to have Lean WM, which also simplifies the implementation effort involved. Name the two places in Customizing where you define that you want to work with Lean WM instead of full WM.

-20_0_9______________________©_c_2_00_9_S_A_P__A_G_._A_II-rig_h_ts--re-se-~-e-d-.--------------~8~2~7~~


TSCMGO

Solution 39: Picking of Outbound Deliveries Task 1: Picking Using Lean WM You want to process activities quickly in your shipping point for refrigerated goods YO##. Therefore, when you create the outbound delivery, you immediately generate a list (combined print) of the materials and quantities to be picked. The goods in the warehouse are confirmed on the basis of this list. 1.

Create a trade fair ## order:

Sold-to party:

T-L64B##


##-6-1

Req. delive1y date:

Today

Material:

T-AU4##

Quantity:

100

Order monber:

a)

Logistics--> Sales anti Distribution--> Sales--> Ortler--> Create Order type: Fair##-ordcr

2.

Create the outbound delivery for the order in shipping point YO##, and on the Picking or Status tab, display the picking status and the WM status (before you save the delivery). Picking status:


~828


2009

TSCM60


Status WM act.: a)

Logistics--+ Logistics Execution --+ Outbound Process--+ Goods Issue for Outbound Delivery --> Outbound Delivery --> Create--> Single Document--> With Reference to Sttles Order

Shipping point:

YO##

Selection date:

Today's date

Order: :

Number of the order you just created

Go to the Picking or Status tab. Picking status: A Not yet picked Status WM act.: A WM transfer order required 3.

Save the outbound delivery and create the transfer order in the same workstep. This initiates the printing of the list required for picking.

Hint: To do this, use the menu path Subsequentfimctions--> Create transfer order from the delivery screen. In the dialog box that appears, choose Save to save the outbound delivery. Enter the following in addition to the default data:

Warehouse number: 012 Foreground/background processing: Background To confirm, choose Enter. a)

Subsequentfimctions--> Create transfer order In the dialog box that appears, choose Yes to save the outbound delivery.

Warehouse number: 012 Foreground/background processing: Background To confirm, choose Enter.

4.

Look at the document flow of the outbound delivery. What is the overall processing status of the transfer order?

Answer:


2009


829~

TSCM60


5.

Explain this status. Answer: Document flow of the outbound delivery: Logistics---> Logistics Execution---> Outbound Process---> Goods Issue for Outbound Delivery---> Outbound Delivery ---+ Display

Environment--? Document flow Overall processing status: Open Reason: The transfer order has not yet been confirmed. 6.

From the document flow screen, display the transfer order. Has the transfer order already been printed and confirmed? TO printed: yes no Confirmation: yes no

a)

In the document flow, position the cursor on the line for the transfer order and choose Display document. Call up the display ofthe header fields by choosing Goto---> Header. TO printed: yes (The "TO printed" indicator is selected.) Confirmation: no (The "Confirmation" indicator is not selected.)

7.

Branch to the list of your spool orders and display the generated list on the screen. Note down the number of the transfer order: ________ a)

System---> Services---> Output control

Use the default settings on the selection screen. Choose Execute. Select the entry and choose Display content. Note down the number of the transfer order. 8.

Proceed to the picking overview screen of the outbound delivery. What are the two status values now? Picking status:


~830


2009

TSCM60


Status WM act: a)

Logistics - t Logistics Execution ~ Outbound Process - t Goods Issue for Outbound Delivery-> Outbound Delivery-> Display

Picking stallls: C (fully picked) Status WM act.: B (ex. open transfer order item) 9.

The picker returns from the warehouse and gives you the list. There are no changes on the list with respect to the quantities. According to your internal procedures, this list is your confirmation you that the picker found the required quantity in the warehouse and removed it from the shelf. Therefore, confirm the transfer order in background processing.

TO number: Determined in step 7 above. Warehouse number: 012 Foreground/background processing: Background To confirm, choose Enter. Hint: You can execute the workstep for entering the TO number manually by copying it from the pick list. It is possible to automate this by scanning the bar code on the list. a)

Logistics - t Logistics Execution --)' Outbound Process - t Goods Issue for Outbound Delivery-> Picking-> Confirm Transfer Order ->Single Document-> In One Step TO number: Determined in step 7 above.

rvarehouse number: 012 Foreground/background processing: Background To confirm, choose Enter.

I 0.

Now look at the two status entries in the outbound delivery.

Picking status: ____________ Status WM act: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ a)

Logistics --1- Logistics Execution --> Outbound Process__,. Goods Issue for Outbound Delivery-> Outbound Delivery-> Displ
-20_0_9_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _©_c_2_0_09_S_A_P_A_G_._A_II-ri-gh_t_s-re_s_eN-ed-.-------~8~3~1 ~

TSCM60


II.

How is the confirmation step documented in the document flow for the outbound delivery? Answer: Logistics-+ Logistics Execution -+ Outbound Process-+ Goods Issue for Outbound Delivery-+ Outbound Delivery-+ Disp/11y Environment~ Document flow The transfer order now has the overall processing status "Completed".

Task 2: In shipping point XO##, execute picking for several outbound deliveries at the same time. To do this, print out the items to be picked on a combined pick list. I.

Using the outbound delivety monitor, select the outbound deliveries for picking in shipping point XO##. Shipping point:

XO##

Pick date:

current \Veek

Warehouse number:

012

a)

Logistics-+ Logistics Execution -+ Outbound Process-+ Goods Issue for Outbound Delivery-+ Picking-+ Cre11te Transfer Order-+ Viii Outbound Delivery Monitor Shipping point:

XO##

Pick date:

current week

Warehouse mtmber:

012

~Execute

2.

For the selected outbound deliveries, form a group with reference to WM.


~832


2009

TSCM60


Group type:

K

Description:

Picking Group##

Warehouse number

012

Number of the group a)

Select the outbound deliveries found by the system, and then choose:

Subsequent Functions-> Group-> Create with WM Reference

3.

Group type:

K

Description:

Picking Group##

Warehouse number

012

Now start collective processing by creating transfer orders for the group you have just created.

Hint: To obtain a combined pick list, you must create the transfer orders using the transaction "Create transfer order: Collective Processing". If you want to create the transfer orders from the outbound delivery monitor, choose ··TO for Group" to start the collective processing. or use the SAP Easy Access Menu to call the transaction ''Collective Processing~'.

a)

Logistics-> Logistics Execution -> Outbound Process-> Goods Issue for Outbound Delivery-> Picking_, Create Tramfer Order ~ Collective Processing Warehouse number:

012

Group: :

see task 2

Reference document t;pe

L


Background

-+

Start collective processing


2009


833~

TSCM60


4.

Branch to the list of your spool orders and display the pick list you just generated on the screen.

a)

System--> Services--> Output control Use the default settings on the selection screen. Choose Execute. Select the entry and choose Display content.

5.

In one of the processed outbound deliveries, the required quantity was not found in the warehouse. Confirm the transfer orders for the group number.

Warehouse number:

012

Group: :

see task 2


Foreground

First confirm the respective item by entering the actual quantity in the foreground. Position the cursor on the item, choose Confirm item foreground and enter both the actual quantity and the difference quantity. Afterwards, confirm the remaining quantity in one step by choosing Confirm rem.

qty.

a)

Logistics--)> Logistics Execution--)> Outbound Process--)> Goods Issue for Outbound Delivery-> Picking-> Confirm Transfer Order --)> Collective Processing 1Varehouse number:

012

Group: :

sec task 2

Foreground/background

Foreground

processing: --)>

Execute

Position the cursor on an item and choose Confirm item in foreground (menu: Transfer order-> Confirm in foreground) In the screen that appears, enter the actual and difference quantity. Con finn the warning message that appears by choosing Emer.

To confirm the remaining items in one step, choose Confirm remaining items (menu: Transfer order--)> Confirm remaining items)


~834


2009

TSCM60


Task 3: To be able to use the WM system (either in complete form or as Lean WM) during picking, you must have already set up the warehouse structure in Customizing in an earlier step.

,& l.

Caution: Do not change the settings in Customizing. Display them only! What is the highest organizational unit in the WM system? Where do you define this in Customizing? Answer: Warehouse number

In the IMG: Ente1prise Structure---> Definition---> Logistics Execution---> Define, copy, delete, check warehouse number 2.

Where in Customizing do you activate the WM ·system? Answer: In the IMG: Logistics Execution----:; Assignment-....) Logistics Execution --'~-Assign warehouse number to plant/storage location

When you have assigned a warehouse number, the WM system is active for the relevant combination of plant and storage location; that is, picking takes place on the basis of a transfer order. 3.

Since you have fixed bin storage, it is not necessary to have stock management at bin level beyond the requirements of standard Inventory Management. As a result. you do not need a WM system with complete functionality. It is sufficient to have Lean WM, which also simplifies the implementation effort involved. Name the two places in Customizing where you define that you want to work with Lean WM instead of full WM. Answer: In the IMG: Logistics Execution---> Shipping---> Picking---> Lean JVM -4 Define control parameters antlm1mher ranges for warehouse number Choose Define control parameters and number ranges for warehouse number. The field "Lean WM" is active for the warehouse number 012

In the IMG: Logistics Execution---> Shipping-> Picking-> Lean WM-> Control "Plant/Storage Location/Warehouse No." Assignnzent For plant 1200, storage location 0001, and warehouse number 012, the "Degree of activation Warehouse Mgmt" field contains "1" (Lean WM is active).

2009


83513!!"


TSCM60

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Describe the picking process using transfer orders, Create transfer orders manually and using collective processing Confirm transfer orders

~836


2009

S(Cf/.J_O('l...

TSCM60

Lesson: Packing Processes

Lesson: Packing Processes Lesson Overview This lesson discusses the packing functionality for Shipping in the SAP system. It provides an overview of this functionality, the data that has to be maintained in this context, and takes a look at Customizing for Packing.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Define the term "packaging

materials~',

Describe the process for multi-level packing in Sales and Distribution Create packing instructions and determination records for automatic packing Make the necessary settings for determining permitted packaging material Explain the different follow-on processes for packaging material

Business Example Your company must pack certain materials into cartons before goods issue. These cartons are then placed on pallets before being shipped. Individual materials have to be packed in specific cartons. You need a special label for each package. You also want to create a packing list for the entire outbound delivery. You bill the customer for special cartons. You use returnable packaging processing for the pallets.

Figure 289: Packaging Materials

2009


837~

TSCM60


Packaging materials are materials that can be used to pack or transport goods. To store packing information for an outbound deli\'ery in the system, you must first specify a packaging material. You must create material master records for the different packaging materials. You can use material type ~p for these materials in the standard system. In the material master, you define special data such as paeking weight and the volume permitted for each shipping material. You can also activate these fields for different material types.

Handling unit 2000000045

Figure 290: Handling Unit Selected items from an outbound delivery can be packed in an individual packaging type called a handling unit. The handling unit is assigned a unique sequential number from a predefined number range. The handling unit header contains information about the packaging material used in packing. The overview screen of the handling unit displays the quantities ofthe delivery items or other handling units. You can change or enhance the data proposed from the material master record of the packaging material to include additional information, such as a pallet number.

r:!i.!!'

838


2009

TSCM60


Outbound

delivery

Figure 291: Packing Functions

Packing is the process of assigning delivery items to packaging materials. This produces handling units, which can then in turn be packed in additional packing materials.

This creates new handling units. You can use as many levels as required (multilevel packing). You can also unpack items from handling units, as well as emptying and deleting the handling units themselves. In Customizing, you specify whether each delivery item category is relevant for packing. The settings are: packing allowed (default), packing not allowed, packing mandatory. The packing status is updated for each item in the outbound delivery (example: partially packed I completely packed). As standard, two output types are set up for printing: packing Jist (at delivery level) Shipping label (at handling unit level) You can also define your own output types. Using the delivery item category. for items v.ith batch split. ;.ou can specifY if the main item (with the accumulated quantity ofthe batch split items) or the individual batch split items are to be packed. If the individual batch split items are packed, you can identify in which handling unit a specific batch is contained.

2009


839~


TSCM60

Figure 292: Packing in the Sales and Distribution Process

The packing function is available: In orders (as packing proposals) In the inbound delivery In the outbound delivery In the shipment document The packing proposal in the order can be copied to the outbound delivery. You control this at the header level in the copy control table for deliveries. You can make packing in the outbound delivery subject to certain conditions. To do this, you need to make settings in Customizing (standard setting: packing cannot be carried out when the delivery has been blocked by the credit check). You can change packing in the outbound delivery as long as you have not posted the goods issue. Packing in the outbound delivery is copied to the shipment. You can then choose to pack all the deliveries together. You can use user exits to specify rules for automatic packing during the creation of outbound deliveries. The resulting proposal contains the packaging materials and the contents of each handling unit. You activate automatic packing for each delivery type separately.

.De~..
~840

Pac,.Ci,] j' G0fn f. .

'{> ~u;(j

; 'I I:' I').


2009

TSCM60


Figure 293: Packaging Material Types and Material Grouping for Packaging Materials

Similar packaging materials are grouped together in packaging material types. You can define controls in Customizing for each packaging material type. You can use these. for example, to specify the output determination procedure for output from handling units (such as shipping labels). The material grouping for packaging materials is used to group together materials that have similar packing requirements (for example, materials requiring the same packaging materials).

e

.

Material to be packed

Packaging Materials

.

::-,>"-~~t~'f,i~ij}r?'QPin~ for:<<_-,

'\.·

pa~c~~_Q_in_Q hl~te_r_i_a1s:_ soo_1_ ~ '-'.-, -_-, ,_ Carg· o ..--

.. ·...·.... ··...................

,

-,-:

, "

B~f,ri~allowed r>~~k~~~;;~;;.,~w~~~~

a

·:M~tl.- 9rp. -~_Itck/~atL:_ S~_Q_J_ -:---:-- _-_·-:, ---p~~k,::'&~ti.J~~:)~oo2';;<

Figure 294: Proposed Packaging Materials

t>. o-
2009

Po..u~j" Lt-lf'Li..e,-cJ~

•


841~


TSCMSO

You can display the allowed packaging materials for a material to be packed. The packaging materials are proposed from the table "Allowed packaging materials for each material group" which you maintain in Customizing. The system checks whether the packaging material being used for packing is allowed. However, if the field Material Group: Packaging Materials has not been maintained in the material master, this material can be packed in any packaging material - depending on the weight and volume check.

0

Packing Instructions

...

~r:::

0

Temporary storage

0

Lid

~~

6pieces~

··J:J·· ••

4 pieces

0

Mixed storage

iii

Packing material, rounding rules, minimum quantities and so on

Figure 295: Packing Instructions

Packing instructions consist of: Packaging Materials Materials to be packed Text items Subordinate packing instructions Rules concerning rounding, minimum quantities, and so on Definition of a check profile And so on

~842


2009

TSCM60


Figure 296: Packing Instructions (2)

Packing instructions can be used as packing proposals for online processing or as packing rules for automatic packing. Packing instruction determination is carried out using the condition technique, for which you must define a corresponding procedure and condition types. Three standard access sequences are provided for you to use when maintaining condition types. Automatic packing can be implemented using either packing instructions and/or a customer enhancement ("packing sessions").

2009


843~


TSCM60

-

i_fm;;;":z,. .*\;;pA/

Figure 297: Packing Station

Deliveries and handling units can be packed using a packing station. You can connect a keyboard scanner and scales to the packing station computer to enable rapid and precise data entry. You can also print shipping labels at the packing station to label handling units immediately. Each packing station can be controlled individual!~: using the terminal 10, and can therefore be used to carry out different processes. Employees use this new functions to enter the packaging materials actually used in the packing process.

~844


2009

TSCM60


Outbound delivery 80000637

0 10

Material1

20

Pallet

100 Pc

II

5 Pc

0

The system generates an item

for packaging material - - - Item category group in packaging materials

Figure 298: Subsequent Processing for Packaging Materials

You may need to manage stock for packaging materials. To enable you to do this, the system can generate a separate item in the outbound delivery for each packaging material.

To automatically generate items for packaging materials:

You must set item category determination in Customizing. In this context, table entries with PACK usage are relevant. The delivering plant must be detennined using the plant determination rule in the packaging material type or must be entered manually. You can bill the customer for the packaging materials, or you can use relllrnable packaging materials that are not billed. In the former case, you must create the packaging materials in the material master record with item category group VERP. The item category determination procedure in the standard system determines item category DLN. These items can then be copied to the billing document. If you use returnable packaging materials, you must create them in the material master record with item category group LEIH (item category TAL is determined). When goods issue is posted, th~ materials are transferred to special stock for the customer (or a special stock partner; for example, the forwarding agent). These items will not be copied to the billing document. Note: In subsequent processing of returnable packaging, use order type returnable packaging pickup (LA) then returns delivery (RE). Or, ifthe packaging is kept by the customer, order type returnable packaging issue (LN) then billing.

2009


845~


~846


TSCM60

2009

TSCM60


Exercise 40: Packing Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. you will be able to: Pack delivery items using several steps, Analyze the prerequisites for inventory management of shipping material.

Business Example Most of your computer accessory parts are already packaged in production. In shipping, you then pack them again in larger containers such as cartons, according to the number of pieces required. The cartons are placed on pallets which you can then load into a container. You ke~p an inventory for special cartons and pallets. You charge the customer for the special cartons, and use returnable packaging processing for pallets.

Task 1: I.

Create a standard order: Sold-to party:

T-L64B##


##-8-1

Req. delive!J' date:

Tomorrow

Material:

T-AU2##

Quantity:

120

Order number: _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 2.

Create the delivery for the order in shipping point XO## and pack the item in such a way that the hard disks already packed into cartons in production are grouped together into larger cartons. Afterwards, define how these larger cartons are to be placed onto a pallet.

3.

Pack 40 pieces each of material T-AU2## into material T-ZS4## (packaging material). Use the function that automatically creates a new handl!ng unit and packs it as soon as the current one is filled with the selected quantity of 40 pieces. /:)

Hint: In the Partial qty field, enter the required quantity (40 pieces).


2009


847~

TSCM60


4.

In the second step, "pack" all the handling units that have been created to one piece of material, T -ZSS## (pallet as packaging material). To do this, select the Pack HUs tab page.

Task 2: Return to the overview screen of the outbound delivery. The system has created new delivery items for the packaging material. 1.

Which options do you now have? !. ___________________________________

2. ______________________________ 3. ____________________________________ 2.

Which settings are required in Customizing so that these items are created automatically? !. _________________________________

2. _________________________________ 3.

Save the outbound delivery. Delivery number: - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Task 3: Create a packing list that lists the hierarchy for packing, and the packaging materials and handling units involved. I.

In the above delivery, enter output type PLOO with the default values that appear when you choose Enter. For the output type, choose Communication

method: Logical destination: LPOI Save the delivery. 2.

Create the packing list from the shipping menu by choosing Outb. Delive1y Delive1y output:

Owput type:

PLOO

Shipping point:

XO##


~848


2009

TSCM60


Display the packing list on the screen before you start processing.

Hint: You can automate the determination and creation processes for the picking list using the output controller. The path described in this exercise is the procedure for manual entry of the output type as you would use it in a practical situation when you want to create - in an exceptional case - a particular output.

-20_0_9_____________________©_2_0_0_9_S_A_P_A_G_.-AI-I-rig_h_ts-r-es-e-~-e-d.---------------8~4n9~

TSCM60


Solution 40: Packing Task 1: I.

Create a standard order:

Sold-to party:

T-L64B##


##-8-1

Req. de/ive1y date:

Tomorrow

Material:

T-AU2##

Quantity:

120

Order number: _ _ _ _ _ _ __

a)

Logistics---+ Sales ant! Distribution---+ Sales---+ Order---+ Create

Order Type: Standard order 2.

Create the delivery for the order in shipping point XO## and pack the item in such a way that the hard disks already packed into cartons in production are grouped together into larger cartons. Afterwards, define how these larger cartons are to be placed onto a pallet. a)

Logistics---+ Logistics Execution

---+

Outbound Process---+ Goods

Issue for Outbound Delivery-> Outbound Delivery Single Document-> With Reference to Sales Order

->

Create

->

Shipping point:

XO##

Selection dote:

Today's date

Order:

Number of the order you just created


W"

850


2009

TSCM60


3.

Pack 40 pieces each of material T-AU2## into material T-ZS4## (packaging material). Use the function that automatically creates a new handling unit and packs it as soon as the current one is filled with the selected quantity of 40 pieces.

£;J a)

Hint: In the Partial qty field, enter the required quantity (40 pieces). Choose Edit--+ Pack. Enter material T-ZS4## as the Packaging Material, and choose Enter. Now the system has assigned a handling unit number. Select the entire line by choosing the button in the left margin. Under Material to Be Packed, enter 40 pieces in the Partial Quantity field. Also select the entire l_ine. ~

Now choose the ~ Per Part. Quantity pushbutton to perform the packing (the full description is: New HU for Partial Qty ofMaterial). The system fills the carton. first with 40 pieces, and then it creates two further handling units, and also fills these with 40 pieces each. 4.

In the second step, "pack" all the handling units that have been created to one piece of material, T-ZSS## (pallet as packaging material). To do this, select the Pack HUs tab page. a)

To pack the handling units, switch to the Pack HUs tab page. Create a new HU by entering the material T-ZS5llll as the packaging materia/under All existing HUs (available for packing) and choose Enter. The new HU is then also listed under All HUs that can be packed. Under All existing HUs (available.for packing). select the row with the packaging material T- ZS5llll and under All HUs that can be packed the 3 handling units with the packaging material T-ZS4llll .

...,-Choose the

<'ill Pack pushbutton.

Now you have three cartons on the pallet.

Task 2: Return to the overview screen of the outbound delivery. The system has created new delivery items for the packaging material. · I.

Which options do you now have? !. _______________________________

2. __________________________________ Continued on next page

-20_0_9______________________© __2_0_09_S_A_P__A_G___ A_II_rig_h_ts__ ffi_se_N_e_d__--------------~8~5~1A~

TSCM60


3. -------------------------------------------a) Choose Back. 1. Inventory management of packaging material (with corresponding update of the stock when the goods issue is posted)

2. Billing of issued packaging material to the customer 3. Processing returnable packaging for the packaging material issued

2.

Which settings are required in Customizing so that these items are created automatically? 1. ___________________________________________

2. ___________________________________ a)

1. The item search table must be maintained for the respective delivery type, the item category group of the packaging material, and the usage PACK. In the IMG: Logistics Execution~ Shipping__, Item Category Determination in Deliveries

Deliveries~

Define

2. The system must know from which plant the packaging material is to be taken. The rule for plant determination is defined at the level of the packaging material type. In the IMG: Logistics Execution __,Shipping_, Packing__, Define Packaging Material Types Choose a detail screen- for packaging material type V040, for example ("Plant determination" field). 3.

Save the outbound delivery. Delivery number: ____________

a)

Task 3: Create a packing list that lists the hierarchy for packing, and the packaging materials and handling units involved. I.

In the above delivery, enter output type PLOO with the default values that appear when you choose Enter. For the output type, choose Communication method:

Logical destination: LPOI


~852


2009

TSCM60


Save the delivery. a)

Logistics -4 Logistics Execution --)- Outbound Process-+ Goods Issue for Outbound Delivery-> Outbound Delivery-> Change-> Single Document.

Enter the delivery number of the above outbound delivery and choose Enter. Extras-> Delivery Output-> Header

In an empty line, enter PLOO in the "Output type" field. Choose Enter. In this way, certain default settings are copied from the definition of the output type. For the output type, choose HComJnuuication metlwtf': (Beforehand,

position the cursor on the respective output

lin~.)

Logical destination: LPOI (In your company system, this description is your own printer description). Choose Goto

->

Back.

Save the outbound delivery. 2.

Create the packing list from the shipping menu by choosing Owb. Delive1y Delivery output: Output type:

PLOO

Shipping point:

XO##

·Continued on next page

-20_0_9_______________________ ©_2_0_09__S_A_P_A_G_._A_II_ri-gh_t_s-re_s_eN--ed-.--------------~8~5~3~

TSCM60


Display the packing list on the screen before you start processing.

Hint: You can automate the determination and creation processes for the picking list using the output controller. The path described in this exercise is the procedure for manual entry of the output type as you would use it in a practical situation when you want to create - in an exceptional case - a particular output. a)

Logistics--. Logistics Execution--> Outbound Process--> Goods Issue for Outbound Delivery--> Outbound Delivery--> Change--. Individual Document Outbound deliVeiJ'--> Issue delivery output Display packing list before processing: Select the line with the output type PLOO and choose "Print preview". Return to the output list and choose" Print". Alternatively:

Logistics--)- Logistics Execution --)- Outbound Process--)- Goods Issue for Outhountl Delivery --)- Communication/Printing ~ Outbound Delivery Output Output type:

PLOO

Sorting

01

Processing mode

I

Shipping point:

XO##

Delivery:

Delivery number obtained above

Choose "Execute".

Select the entry and choose Print preview. Return to the list and choose "Process".

E!'!"

854


2009

TSCM60


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Define the term "packaging materials", Describe the process for multi-level packing in Sales and Distribution Create packing instructions and determination records for automatic packing Make the necessary settings for determining permitted packaging material Explain the different follow-on processes for packaging material

2009


855~


TSCM60

Lesson: Goods Issue Lesson Overview This lesson describes the goods issue process. When the goods issue is posted, the shipping process is complete.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Post the goods issue Describe the effect that the goods issue posting has on Sales and Distribution, Materials Management, and Financial Accounting Cancel the goods issue posting Explain how to link Quality Management with the shipping process.

Business Example When the goods leave the plant, the shipping process is complete. The stocks are adjusted in terms of quantity and value. You can now create the billing document. 1fa goods issue is posted accidentally, you should have the option to cancel it. Some materials are subject to a quality check. You can only post the goods issue if the material passes the quality check.

~856


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Goods Issue

Delivery 80003714 Goods issue

Figure 299: Goods Issue

Posting goods issue for an outbound delivery completes shipping activities. Posting goods issue requires that all mandatory shipping activities have been performed. For example, if you are working with picking relevance and continnation requirement, these steps must first be completed. Goods issue can be posted by changing a single outbound delivery. Alternatively. you can use the collective processing function in order to select all deliveries for which goods issue is due to be posted, and then post the goods issue tor them. You can also use the outbound delive•·y monitor to do this. You can also post the goods issue when the transfer order is confirmed. When you process a single outbound delivery, you can specifY the actual goods issue date without changing the planned date. A dialog box appears in which you can enter the actual goods issue date, and then post goods issue for this date. The corresponding goods issue document is then posted with the actual goods issue date. If no explicit specifications are made for the goods issue date, the current date is taken as the goods issue date. Goods issue applies to the entire outbound delivery.

Any errors are logged when, for example, data such as the batch or serial number is missing or when picking has not been carried out fully for the items. In these cases, goods issue is not posted.

2009


857~


;·

WA"

TSCM60

.

;

"""'" ;. 'GaOi:ls Issue.

Figure 300: Effect of Goods Issue Posting

After the goods issue has been posted, there is limited scope for changing the outbound delivery. In particular. no changes can be made to the quantities. At this point in processing, the delivery document has to reflect the actual physical delivery. Goods issue Reduces inventory stock Posts the value change to the stock accounts in inventory accounting

Reduces delivery requirements Enters status information in the outbound delivery Is stored in the document flow Creates a work list for billing To carry out billing before goods issue using the "Create billing document" transaction, you can make the appropriate settings in copy control in Customizing.

~858


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Goods Issue

Example Goods issue

Reset

goods movement Status

f)r-------, Goods issue

Billing Document

Figure 301: Canceling Goods Issue

If goods issue for an outbound delivery is canceled, the goods issue posting is reset. The system copies the quantities and values from the original goods issue document and carries out an inventory posting based on these quantities and values with a reversed +/-sign. If you cancel goods issue. this affects the entire outbound delivery. The cancellation document created during cancellation is entered in the document flow for the outbound delivery. After goods issue has been canceled, the goods movement status of the outbound delivery is reset to "Not yet started". This allows you to further process the outbound delivery as usual. The delivery requirements are also recreated. Canceling goods issue comprises two steps if the outbound delivery has been fully or partially billed. In this case you must first cancel the billing document. Then you can cancel goods issue. For each movement type in Inventory Management, you must define a reversal movement type in Customizing. No additional settings are required for the movement types used for goods issue posting in the standard system.

2009


859~


TSCM60

Figure 302: Selecting Outbound Deliveries for Cancellation On the selection screen, you can select one or more outbound deliveries for which you want to cancel the goods issue posting. In addition to the outbound delivery number, you can enter the shipping point, the route, the goods issue date, a group of outbound deliveries and the shipment number as selection criteria. On the list of the outbound deliveries selected, you can specifY a date other than the current date for each delivery, provided that it does not come before the goods issue date. By double-clicking on a list entry, you can directly branch to the outbound delivel)' itself. The system generates a log of the cancellations and any errors that might occur.

~860


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Goods Issue

~.

·~ ,"Kv+JJY'

Figure 303: QM in Shipping

The Quality Management (QM) component supports Sales and Distribution with quality inspections for goods issues (for example, packing inspections). You specify in the Quality Management view of the material master if a quality inspection is to be carried out for the materiaL When the outbound delivery is created in SD, QM automatically creates an inspection lot for the delivery items that are relevant for inspection. The inspection lot tells the quality assurance department that the goods need to be inspected. The result of the inspection can be stored in the system in different ways. If the goods are damaged. defect records can be entered. Measured values or evaluation codes are stored as characteristic values. You plan the type and procedure used by the inspection in the QM master data. The usage decision represents the completion of a QM inspection. This is where the inspected goods are either accepted for further use or are rejected. This is called "accepting" or "rejecting" an inspection lot. Depending on the customer, or on the customer and the material together, you can specifY if the inspection log must be accepted before goods issue can be posted. If it must not be accepted, the quality assurance depa1tment can submit the inspection results after goods issue posting. You initiate printing of a certificate of quality from output control of the outbound delivery at item leveL This function is primarily used for materials that are handled in batches.

2009


861~


~862


TSCM60

2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Goods Issue

Exercise 41: The Goods Issue Posting and Its Effects Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: Post the goods issue, Describe some of the effects of the goods issue posting.

Business Example Now that goods have left your warehouse, you want to update the stock accordingly. Since you are handling valuated goods, the quantity stock change also results in value update postings in financial accounting.

Task: In shipping point XM#, post goods issue for all the outbound deliveries that need to be posted up to and including today. I.

Use the collective processing function and note down one of the delivery numbers.

What is the value of the goods movement status for this outbound deli\ery'!

2.

Display the material document of the goods issue for the delivery number you noted down by calling up the document flow for the outbound delivery. Branch to the display of the accounting document.

3.

In this particular outbound delivery, some of the goods were damaged during loading and therefore not shipped with the delivery. Try to change the quantity for the first item in the outbound delivery. How does the goods issue posting affect the changeability of the delivery?

4.

Try to post goods issue for the outbound delivery from the exercise for the lesson '"Packing Processes" (Exercise 2-3). Which prerequisites must be fulfilled before you can post the goods issue for this outbound delivery? I.


2009


863~


TSCM60

2.

~864


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Goods Issue

Solution 41: The Goods Issue Posting and Its Effects Task: In shipping point XO##, post goods issue for all the outbound deliveries that need to be posted up to and including today. I.

Use the collective processing function and note down one of the delivery numbers.

What is the value of the goods movement status for this outbound delivery?

a)

Post goods issue using collective processing: Logistics--+ Logistics Execution--+ Outbound Process--+ Goods Issue for Outbound Delivery--+ Posr Goods Issue--+ Collective Processing via Outbound De/ive1y Monitor Shipping point: XO## Planned goods movement date: End of this week Choose "Execute".

At least one delivery ready for goods issue is displayed. Select all lines by choosing "Select all" and then choose "Post Gl". Note down one of the delivery numbers. Goods movement status:

Logistics----? Logistics Execution ----? Outbound Process----? Goods Issue for Outbound Delivery--+ Outbound Delivery--+ Display: Enter the delivery number you noted down, and from the outbound delivery choose Header----? Processing.

The goods movement status for the delivery is C (=Completed). 2.

Display the material document of the goods issue for the delivery number you noted down by calling up the document flow for the outbound delivery.


-20_0_9______________________©_c_2_0_09__ S_A_P_A_G_._A_II_ri-gh_t_s_re_s_eN--ed-.--------------~8~6~5~

TSCMGO


Branch to the display of the accounting document. a)

Display the material document for the goods issue: Environment~

Document flow

In the document flow, position the cursor on the line for the goods issue and choose "Display document".

Display the accounting document: In the material document, choose "Accounting documents". In the following dialog-box, double-click on the line "Accounting document". 3.

In this particular outbound delivery, some of the goods were damaged during loading and therefore not shipped with the delivery. Try to change the quantity for the first item in the outbound delivery. How does the goods issue posting affect the changeability of the delive1y?

a)

T1y to change the delivery quantity in the outbound delivery: Logistics~

Logistics Execution ~ Outbound Process~ Goods Issue for Outbound Delivery-> Outbound Delivery-+ Clumge-+ Individual Document How does posting goods issue affects the changeability of the outbound delivery?

Most ofthe fields in the delivery can no longer be changed after the goods issue has been posted, palticularly the quantities. 4.

Try to post goods issue for the outbound delhery from the exercise for the lesson "Packing Processes" (Exercise 2-3). Which prerequisites must be fulfilled before you can post the goods issue for this outbound delivery? I.


~866


2009

TSCMSO

Lesson: Goods Issue

2. a)

Posting goods issue for outbound delivery from task 2-3, lesson "Packing Processes":

Logistics --7 Logistics Execution --)- Outbound Process---? Goods Issue for Outbound Delivery---> Outbound Delivery---> Change Enter the delivery number and choose

'~Post

goods issue".

Posting the goods issue is not possible for this delive1y because certain processing steps have not yet been executed. Prerequisites for posting goods issue: I. Picking must be complete for the delivery; that is, the delivery quantity and the pick quantity must be the same. 2. Since the current system setting has confinnation requirement, the WM transfer order- which still needs to be generated - must also be confirmed.

2009


867~


TSCM60

~ 0 8~6'-8~----------------©~o~2-0-09~S-A~P-A_G_._A_II_r_ig_h_ts_r_e-se_N_e_d-.------------------------2-0--09

TSCM60

Lesson: Goods Issue

Exercise 42: Canceling the Goods Issue Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. you will be able to: Cancel the goods issue posting for outbound deliveries.

Business Example In one of the outbound deliveries for which goods issue has already been posted, some goods were damaged during loading. These goods were consequently not shipped with the delivery. You therefore need to cancel the goods issue posting.

Task: Cancel the goods issue for the outbound delivery that is noted in task I of the exercise for the lesson "The Goods Issue Posting and Its Effects" I.

Cancel the goods issue for the outbound delivery that is noted in task I of the exercise for the lesson "The Goods Issue Posting and Its Effects"

2.

Now reduce the pick quantity in the first delivery item by one piece and change the delivery quantity accordingly.

3.

Post the goods issue for this delivery again .

.!

Display the entire process in the document flow. Branch to the material document for cancellation and into the relevant accounting document. Use the symbols, quantities, and values to check that you really have canceled the goods issue posting.

-20_0_9______________________©_o_2_00_9__ SA_P__A_G___ A_II_rig_h_ts--re_s_e~-.-d-.--------------~8~6~9n~

TSCM60


Solution 42: Canceling the Goods Issue Task: Cancel the goods issue for the outbound delivery that is noted in task I of the exercise for the lesson "The Goods Issue Posting and Its Effects" 1.

Cancel the goods issue for the outbound delivery that is noted in task I ofthe exercise for the lesson "The Goods Issue Posting and Its Effects" a)

Cancel goods issue: Logistics---> Logistics Execution---> Outbound Process---> Goods Issue for Outbound Delivery---> Post Goods Issue---> Cancellation/Reversal

Enter the delivery number and choose "Execute". In the list, select the line and choose"Cancel/reverse". 2.

Now reduce the pick quantity in the first delivery item by one piece and change the delivery quantity accordingly. a)

Change the pick and delivery quantity: Logistics---> Logistics Execution---> Outbound Process---> Goods Issue for Outbound Delivery ---> Outbound Delivery---> Change---> Indivitlua/ Document

Choose the Picking tab. Picking quantity:

-1

Delivery qty:

-1

You can also choose Edit-> Copy picked quantity as delivery quantity. 3.

Post the goods issue for this delivery again. a)

Post goods issue: In the "picking tab" of the outbound delivery, choose "Post goods issue".

4.

Display the entire process in the document flow.


~870


2009

Lesson: Goods Issue

TSCM60

Branch to the material document for cancellation and into the relevant accounting document. Use the symbols, quantities, and values to check that you really have canceled the goods issue posting. a)

Display the entire process in the document flow:

Logistics - t Logistics Execution ~ Outbountl Process - t Goods Issue for Outbound Delivery--> Outbound Delive1y--> Display Environment--+ Document flow Material document for cancellation and related accounting document: In the document flow, position the cursor on the line for the goods issue and choose ~~Display document". In the material document, choose "Accounting documents". In the following dialog-box, double-click on the line "Accounting document".

2009


871~


TSCM60

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Post the goods issue Describe the effect that the goods issue posting has on Sales and Distribution, Materials Management, and Financial Accounting Cancel the goods issue posting Explain how to link Quality Management with the shipping process.

~872


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Special Functions for Processing Deliveries

Lesson: Special Functions for Processing Deliveries Lesson Overview This unit provides an overview of further functions that can be executed in

conjunction with outbound deliveries. In particular, handling shipping processes using batches and serial numbers will be explained. In addition, this chapter provides information about using conditions in the outbound delivery, the "Subsequent Delivery Split" and the proof of delivery.

'.m ·-

">v:y,Y

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain how batches can be specified in the outbound delivery Demonstrate serial number assignment in the outbound delivery Use pricing in the outbound delivery Split an existing delivery into several smaller deliveries, Understand the process of the proof of delivery.

Business Example In your company, batches have to be used for certain materials. You need

to specify from which batch the material was selected by the time of the outbound delivery. Other materials have serial numbers, which you also need to record at the time of outbound delivery and enter in the system. It is often necessary to record shipping costs, such as packing and postage costs, in the delivery document. During loading, if you notice that a delivery does not fit into a truck, you have to split it into several smaller deliveries. You have arranged with some of your customers that they confirm the receipt of the delivery. You only create the billing document when you have received this confirmation.

2009


873~

TSCM60


Qua~

Order Item 10

Material Mat1 100L

Batch

LJ

Outbound delivery

Item

Material

10

Mat1

~

Quantity

Item

100L

10

Mat 1

900001 900002

Mat 1 Mat 1

Figure 304: Batches

You can specifY a batch in the relevant detail screen for materials handled in batches (whether or not a material is handled in batches is indicated in the material master record in the

'~Storage

1" and u''Purchasing" screens). \Vhen

delivering a sales order, this batch is copied to the outbound delivery. You cannot change it there. !fa batch has not been specified in the sales order, you can enter one in the "picking overview" screen of the outbound delivery. You must specifY a batch before goods are issued.

You have to use the batch split function if the delivery quantities of an item are to be taken from different batches. You can carry out batch splits as follows: Manually in the batch split screen of the delivery item Using automatic batch determination when creating the outbound delivery (this function must first be activated in the delivery item category) Through manually triggered batch determination in the batch split screen In Warehouse Management SAP course

~874

~CM5.!/5

covers batch management in detail.


2009

TSCM60


Ship-to party Goods Issue

---.

D

Outbound delivery 51 02.02.

Maintain serial number Material

lP-103

Display no.

15

Serial number Item

Material

Quantity

10

P-103

SPC

401 402 403 404 405

.

Figure 305: Serial numbers You can assign a unique serial number to each material. This allows you to monitor goods movement for individual materials; for example, when selling materials to a customer. Using serial numbers you can also manage the maintenance of individual materials more easily in the system, if equipment master records exist for these materials. To use serial numbers, enter serial number profiles in the master record for

the relevant materials. Serial numbers are usually specified in the delivery item. However. you can also define them in the order. You can also have the serial numbers assigned automatically by the system. You must specify ail serial numbers before posting goods issue.

Order

-• Price

• Price

;:~:-~U-~C~arge~i ,;~\~_dJ~c;Ou~ts:>:--<' ,::;_ -NetVatue; ,,

,

-

_-, ,,,n','

, -,

-

• _surch_a_rg~s/ disc__ountS__,_-__,

?~~~tk~eg,~os(~ __,...-" =~~~;~~Jco~t~

-_•:_ra~

• Postage

~Cost

•, Tax • C'ost

Figure 306: Pricing in the Outbound Delivery

2009


875~


TSCM60

The outbound delivery may contain shipping-related conditions, such as shipping or freight costs (if you are not using the Transportation module). You can enter the condition values manually or determine them using the SD pricing condition technique. You can print the conditions on the delivery note as well as transfer them in the billing document, but you cannot transfer them from the preceding documents to the outbound delivery. To implement the conditions, use the standard Customizing settings for pricing (condition type definition, maintaining the pricing procedure). Assign the pricing procedure to the delivery type.

Figure 307: Splitting an Existing Delivery

You can split an existing delivery into several smaller deliveries, which is useful if, for exat;;pi'e, there is not enough room in your truck to hold the entire delivery. To do this, you can call up a list and select the outbound delivery items, partial quantities of items, or handling units that are to be taken out of existing deliveries. When you split a delivery, you create one or more new deliveries, called "results", and the "remainder". ..,....--=,_,.._

When you call the delivery split, specifY a splitpr0file to determine' the "type" of split. The split profiles contain control parameters. They are defined in Customizing, and assigned to delivery types.

~876


2009

TSCM60


_,

Carrier

liiJ.t,~J

.;li!,L;Iil-

rr

Inbound delivery

0

Freight forwarding notification

4. I,

Shipping confirmation

Customer - - - - - - - ...ve. "·· d...o.r.... i

-·,00·-II ~.::,:::~ YI;V;~iii·····

is~rvice ag~~~~

.

Warehouse

DELVRY02/DELVRY03 Figure 308: Delivery Interface Communication Scenarios

If business partners are involved in the shipping process, or some functions are performed by non-SAP systems, you need to exchange information with these other parties. Normally, electronic data interchange (ED!) messages are used for extemal communication, and Application Link Enabling (ALE) messages are used for internal communication. The delivery interface groups together all ED! and ALE messages that refer to the delivery. They are all based on the same !Doc (DELVRY02 (4.6A), DELVRY03 (4.6B)). DELVRY02 and DELVRY03 are data structures that consist of segments and contain the fields for the delivery and other fields relevant for shipping, such as route and batch characteristics (see the Appendix for more information). Output control of the delivery at header level triggers the filling of the !Doc fields. The system provides appropriate message types for the communication scenarios represented in the standard system.

2009


877~


e'

TSCM60

Outbound delivery Ship-to Party Route Item

Mat.

K1

Storage location

10

M-03

20

M-01

..

0001

Figure 309: Log of Incomplete Items When you call up the log of incomplete items. the system checks if the data in the outbound delivery is complete. From the generated list, you can branch directly to the screen for maintaining the incomplete fields. You can call the log of incomplete items from delivery processing, or select incomplete delivery documents using a special report. This creates a worklist of documents requiring processing. In the outbound delivery, the system can check completeness at both header and item leveL In Customizing, you can control which fields, if not entered, cause an outbound delivery to be incomplete and which effects this has on follow-on activities such as picking, packing, goods issue, and billing (for example, packing may be not allowed if the volume in the item is missing). The selection of the fields that cause a delivery to be incomplete depends on the delivery type and the delivery item category. In addition, you can set partner functions and texts as "Required" by using the corresponding Customizing functions. If specifications for a required partner function are missing in the document or if a required text does not exist, a note is entered in the log of incomplete items.

~878


2009

TSCM60


Delivery note No.: 80001297

Sold-to party: K1 tt~m

1CI

Matf!fial Quantity M1 20

Delivery nOte No.: 80001297

• Checks the differences

Sold-to' party: K1 Item

10

M.'lluial

Ml

Shipping Point

• Confirms the POD

Quanl~y

18'19

POD is transferred

• Adjusts values and quantities if necessary

by IDoc

Invoice No.: 9000 2154

Item 1D

Milttri~l

M1

Figure 310: Proof of delivery (POD)

Proof of delivery (POD) is essentially designed to support the process of only creating an invoice once the customer has confirmed the arrival of the materials. After receiving the goods, the ship-to party transfers the proof of delivery by !Doc to the R/3 System and thereby confirms the quantities for the whole delivery. In most cases for which there are no discrepancies of quantity. this involves no extra effort, because verification and confirmation are automated using the !Doc. If differences are reported, the de!ivety cannot automatically be confirmed. In this case. you must continue processing manually.

You can use worklists for processing documents in conjunction with POD- the "Outbound deliveries for POD worklist" and the "Subsequent processing for POD" worklist. The system creates the billing document based on the correct (verified) quantity. Creating the billing document via the billing due list is blocked until proof of delivery has been confirmed.

JIP'>

~

Before you can use the proof of delivery function, you need to define which delivery item categories are relevant for the POD process. You also need to define rea~£11S for deviation, and in the customer master you are using for the POD process, specify POD relevance. You can analyze deviation quantities and reasons for deviation (where, when, and why do the deviations occur?).

2009


879~

TSCM60


,-····-····-~-----~--:"l

'l

Material substitution ,

·-·-~"~-~···~~-----·-.........:.":)

Credit and risk management Texts

Export controls ---~--~---,

r.............. --~~.e<:k........

Dangerous goods

l

_j ;,-----G;oup

-----l

of--.

l. __"_Ut~?_llfl~~~j>.<':f~'?_

1

-·

Figure 311: More Functions in the Outbound Delivery Both when creating and processing deliveries, you can access numerous other

functions, which the system can perform either automatically or on request

~880


2009


TSCM60

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Explain how batches can be specified in the outbound delivery

Demonstrate serial number assignment in the outbound delivery Use pricing in the outbound delivery Split an existing delivery into several smaller deliveries, Understand the process of the proof of delivery.

-20_0_9______________________©_c_2_0_09__S_A_P_A_G_._A_II-ri-gh_t_s_re_s_eN--ed-.--------------~8~8n.41

~

TSCM60

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: Describe the picking process using transfer orders, Create transfer orders manually and using collective processing Confirm transfer orders Define the term "packaging materials", Describe the process for multi-level packing in Sales and Distribution Create packing instructions and detennination records for automatic packing Make the necessary settings for detennining permitted packaging material Explain the different follow-on processes for packaging material •

Post the goods issue Describe the effect that the goods issue posting has on Sales and Distribution, Materials Management, and Financial Accounting Cancel the goods issue posting Explain how to link Quality Management with the shipping process. Explain how batches can be specified in the outbound delivery Demonstrate serial number assignment in the outbound delivery Use pricing in the outbound delivery Split an existing delivery into several smaller deliveries, Understand the process of the proof of delivery.

~882


2009

r-

Unit Navigation Unit Overview This unit provides an overview of how to use the system, as well as navigation options within the system.

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: Log on to the system successfully List and use the elements of an SAP GUI screen Log off successfully from the system Create favorites Start the functions of SAP systems in different ways Describe the standard menus System and Help Use various options for personalizing the SAP system Use the basic Fl help functions Use the F4 help Call up the information provided by the online documentation

Unit Contents Lesson: Logon and Screen Design ........................................... 884 Exercise 43: Logon and Screen Design ................................. 891 Lesson: Selecting Functions and Personalizations ........................ 894 Exercise 44: Selecting Functions and Personalizations ............... 903 Lesson: Help Options .......................................................... 908 Exercise 45: Help Options ....................................... : .. ...... 913

2009


883~

TSCM60

Unit 25: Navigation

Lesson: Logon and Screen Design Lesson Overview In this lesson, you will learn how to log on to the system and learn the meaning of the different screen elements of the SAP G Ul.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Log on to the system successfully List and use the elements of an SAP GUI screen Log off successfully from the system

Business Example You want to know how a user logs on to an SAP system and what uses the various SAP GUI screen elements have.

Logging on to the System The presentation interface, the SAP Graphical User Inteiface (SAP GUJ), enables the user to interact with the SAP system and enter or display data. The SAP GUI is the standard access for almost every SAP solution. Specially configured front-end programs can be used to access certain SAP systems. This means that the SAP Business Information Warehouse (SAP BW) for example, has Business Explorer (BEx) as a specific front-end. The SAP GUJ implements the graphical user interface using the functions provided by the relevant presentation environment. SAP GUI is based on the Windows Style Guide and is available for several platforms, providing the same functions for each. If you learned to use SAP GUIon one platfonn, you can use the system on another platform exactly the same as before, with the exception of a few small platform-specific GUI attributes. The following types of SAP GUJ are available: SAP GUI for the Windows environment •

SAP GU!for the Java environment SAP GU!for HTML

For the sake of simplicity, further descriptions refer to the SAP GU! for the Windows environment. The SAP GU!program connects the computer (desktop or laptop) with a particular SAP system. SAP provides an additional program for logging on to an SAP system: SAP Logon. ·

~884


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Logon and Screen Design

Figure 312: SAP Logon

After starting SAP Logon you will see a list of SAP systems from which you select the system you want to log on to. This list originates from a file on the frontend: saplogon.ini. This file is typically preconfigured centrally and made available to end users. The SAP Logon program enables a '"logon load distribution·· of the resources made available by the selected system when you log on.

Figure 313: Logon Screen of an SAP System

Once you have started the logon process for a system, you must enter, among other things, your user and password on the logon screen of the selected system. You also have the option of specifYing a particular client and a logon language when you log on; the client is usually already filled appropriately. If you use single sign-on (SSO), you do not have to make these entries.

2009


885~

TSCM60

Unit 25: Navigation

User User data is stored in the system according to client. For example, you can log on to client I 00 in your system, but not have a user for client 200. The data for a user within a client is also known as the "user master record". Password The first time you log on to the system, you will receive an initial password from your system administrator. During your first logon, you must specify your own individual password. After this, you use this password every time you log on. (In the event that your company operates a different procedure, contact your system administrator.) On the logon screen, you can use the New Password button to change your password up to once a day.

Client As a rule, the client represents a company in an SAP system. This means that in an SAP system with several clients, several companies can be represented at the same time. The client has an equivalent as a key field in the tables of the database used by the SAP system. After you log on to a client, you can access data for that client only. Clients represent business-independent entities. Language When you log on, you can select one of the logon languages that the system supports. Installed SAP systems can support many languages, which always include at least English and one other selected language. The number of installed languages determine which languages are supported by your system. You can log on to an SAP system more than once with a user. Note however, that multiple logons are logged as of SAP Rl3 Release 4.6. This is for security and licensing reasons. For a second logon and each additional logon with the same user ID, an information message appears, suggesting three options: Terminate this logon. Continue with this logon without ending any other logons to the system. This will be logged in the system. Continue with this logon and end any other logons in the system. If you want to use additional processing windows, you can work in several sessions (processing window of the SAP system) simultaneously wiihin one logon. With the system parameter, your system administrator can specify how many sessions are possible for one logon to an SAP system.

Hint: This parameter rdisp/max_alt_modes can be set to values between one and nine; six windows is the standard setting. The parameter cannot be user-specific, but rather it is valid for all users in the system.

~886


2009

TSCM60


The system administrator can insert additional text on the logon screen. See SAP Note 205487 for details. Hint: SAP Notes provide further information about particular functions or provide corrections for known errors in SAP products. You can access SAP Notes through the SAP Service Marketplace on the Internet (for example) by using a valid user and password: http://service.sap.com/notes After logging on successfully, you will reach the initial screen of the SAP system, the SAP Easy Access screen.

Screen layout The SAP Easy Access screen is the standard initial screen in SAP systems. In the left screen area, you will see a tree hierarchy diagram of ihe menus available in the SAP system and in the right screen area, you can display a logo. This logo is made available centrally by your system administration, and cannot be set by the individual users.

Figure 314: SAP Easy Access

For details about the configuration of the logo on the SAP Easy Access screen (assuming you have the corresponding authorization), choose Extras --> Administration information. Note that the screen is defined in the system and is transported to the desktop or laptop computer at every logon. The data is compressed when transferred, however the initial logo should be no larger than 20 KB. You can also prevent the system from opening this screen, either by selecting "Low Speed Connection" in the SAP Logon program (see SAP Note 161 053) or by choosing Extras --> Sellings.

2009


887~

Unit 25: Navigation

TSCM60

You will see a typical screen layout (with different elements) if you choose System User Profile---> Own Data and then select the tab page Defaults. Then you will see this screen, which is specific to your user:

--->

Figure 315: Maintain User Profile

~ ~8~8~8,----------------©--20_0_9_S_A_P_A_G_._A_I_Ir-ig_h_ts-r-es-e-~-e-d-.----------------------2-00--9

TSCM60


An SAP screen contains screen elements such as:

command field: You can select applications directly by entering the transaction code in the command field. You can determine the transaction code of an application either in the overview tree of the SAP Easy Access screen, in the status bar (see below) of the application, or when you are in the respective application under System ->Status. The command field can be displayed or hidden. Menu Bar: The menu bar is the upper line of each screen in the SAP system. The menus displayed here are dependent on the patiicular application currently in use. Standard Toolbar: The buttons on the standard tool bar are available on every SAP screen layout. The buttons that cannot be used, depending on the application, are grayed out. If you hover the pointer over a button for a moment, a small flag called a Quick-Info appears with the Aame or meaning of the respective button. You can also see the corresponding function key setting. Title Bar: The title bar names the function that is currently displayed. Application Toolbar: Here you can see the buttons that can be used in the current application. Checkboxes: Checkboxes allow you to select several options from a group of fields. Radio Buttons: You can only select one option at a time. Tab I Tab Page: Tabs combine multiple entry screens of an application on one screen. You access individual tab pages by clicking on the page title. Status Bar: The status bar shows information about the current system status; for example, warnings and errors. Here you can also display the transaction code of your current application using the corresponding display selection. Other screen elements include input fields and buttons.

Log Off You can log off from any screen of the SAP system. You have various options for doing so, such as: From the menu bar, choose System

->

Log Off

If you have only opened one session choose Q) from the system tool bar or

Eil from the top right of the menu list.

2009


889~

TSCM60

Unit 25: Navigation

~890


2009

TSCM60


Exercise 43: Logon and Screen Design Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. you will be able to: To Jearn how to Jog on to an SAP system

Business Example You want to work in an SAP system.

Task: Logging on to the System and Initial Tasks Log on to the training system and carry out some basic exercises in the system. The menu paths refer to the SAP standard menu. l.

Start the SAP Logon program and choose the entry for the SAP system specified by your instructor. Choose the Logon pushbutton. Enter the client, user name, initial password, and the logon language specified by the instructor. When you Jog on for the first time, enter a new password of your choice twice in the window that appears.

2.

What is the maximum number of parallel sessions (windows of the SAP system) that you can open using System--> Create session? What is the name of the function you reach if you choose Tools__, ----t ]!.,Janitor ----t System .AionNoring---+ User Overvielv? \Vhat transaction code could you use to call this transaction instead of the menu?

Administration

2009


891~

TSCMSO

Unit 25: Navigation

Solution 43: Logon and Screen Design Task: Logging on to the System and Initial Tasks Log on to the training system and carry out some basic exercises in the system. The menu paths refer to the SAP standard menu. I.

Start the SAP Logon program and choose the entry for the SAP system specified by your instructor. Choose the Logon pushbutton. Enter the client, user name, initial password, and the logon language specified by the instructor. When you log on for the first time, enter a new password of your choice twice in the window that appears. a)

2.

Follow the instructions in the exercise.

What is the maximum number of parallel sessions (windows of the SAP system) that you can open using System--> Create session? a)

Depending on the relevant system parameter setting, you can open between 2 and 6 sessions. This training system allows you to open up to 6 sessions.

3.

What is the name of the function you reach if you choose Tools-> Administration

-7

iHonitor - 7 System i\rfonitoring

-7

User Overview? What

transaction code could you use to call this transaction instead of the menu? a)

The function is called User List (see the entry in the title bar). You can find the relevant transaction code using System

-)>

Status; in this case,

the code is SM04. You can also choose to display the transaction code for an active transaction in the status bar.

~892


2009

TSCM60

~~


Lesson Summary

'.~ '\;k>>P

You should now be able to: Log on to the system successfully List and use the elements of an SAP GUI screen Log off successfully from the system

Related Information For more information, see the online documentation under Help--> SAP Librmy--> Introduction to the SAP System.

2009


893~

TSCM60

Unit 25: Navigation

Lesson: Selecting Functions and Personalizations Lesson Overview In this lesson, you will Jearn the difference between the SAP menu, the role-based user menu, and favorites. After this, various ways of selecting functions in SAP systems will be discussed.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Create favorites Start the functions of SAP systems in different ways Describe the standard menus System and Help Use various options for personalizing the SAP system

Business Example You want to know how the navigation area is structured in an SAP system and how you can start functions in an SAP system.

SAP Menu, User Menu, Favorites After you have logged on, you can use the overview tree structure on the left hand side of the screen (iVavigation Area) for selecting functions. This structure is divided into Favorites and SAP Menu, or Favorites and Role-Based ser Menu. The entries in the favorites area are created by the user. The entries in the SAP menu or in the user menu are specified centrally by the system administrator.

~894


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Selecting Functions and Personalizations

Figure 316: List of Favorites and Role-Based User Menu

User Menu and Favorites The user menu is a menu that contains a limited selection of task-specific functions. It represents the working environment of a user. It can consist of transactions. reports, and Internet addresses. The user menu is created by the system administrator in the context of roles for user groups. When a user is assigned to a role, he/she can work with their respective user menu and the authorizations linked to it in the SAP system. Depending on the system settings, you can switch between a role-based user menu and an SAP menu. To do so, from the menu bar on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Menu -> SAP Menu or Menu

~

User Jvfenu.

You can also use the functions in the favorites area located next to the SAP menu or the user menu. The favorites list is empty to start with, but can be changed individually by each end user; the data in the favorites list is then visible only for this user. In addition to transactions, the end user can store links to Internet addresses and data from their front-end computer as favorites. An improved structure can be achieved by organizing the favorites into separate folders. You can also change the names of favorites and delete favorites from the list.

2009


895~

Unit 25: Navigation

"f-i(l I

TSCMSO

You have various options for editing favorites. Generally, you can edit the favorites on the SAP Easy Access screen under the menu Favorites. The various options are shown in the example "Add transaction from the SAP menu to the favorites list". (With the exception of the last variant, it is always assumed that the menu tree is open until the desired transaction.) Use Drag & Drop to drag the transaction to the favorites list. Select the transaction, and from the menu bar, choose Favorites-> Add. Click the transaction with the right mouse button and choose Add to favorites from the context menu. Select the transaction and choose &l.4dd to favorites from the application tool bar. From the menu bar, choose Favorites ----+Insert Transaction and enter the transaction code of the transaction. Because the data for the favorites is stored within the SAP system, another collection of favorites is available to each user in different systems. It is, however, simple to copy complete favorites menus from one SAP system to another by downloading and uploading. The downloaded favorites menus are stored for further processing in the front-end PC.

"System" and "Help" Menus Both the System and Help menus are available on every screen of an SAP system in the same layout.

Se~uforel>jtd

2*dl>l;loly

o..n spcolroquHI• ~~·

S!J<><1mouagt ~.m

..

Figure 317: Menus System and Help

~896


2009

TSCM60


From the System menu, you can access many different system functions. This menu also includes functions that you can reach only from this menu. You can choose System ~ Log off to end your session, and choose System -+ Status to receive information about your system and the function that is currently being executed, including the relevant transaction code. From the Help menu, you have access to the online documentation. You can also display the "release infos" and configure the standard settings of your F4 help. However, here you will mostly use the context-sensitive link to the online documentation section that is relevant for your current work. The context-sensitive

help is also called "application help". The "SAP Libra1y" is used for accessing the online documentation.

Choose Functions In SAP systems, you can navigate in many ways: By entering transaction codes in the command field By using the menu bar By using the favorites or the user menu or SAP menu

-20_0_9_______________________ ©_2_0_09__S_A_P_A_G___A_II_ri-gh_t_s-re_s_e_N-ed-.--------------~8~9~7~

TSCM60

Unit 25: Navigation

Figure 318: Navigating

Hint: To navigate in the system with the keyboard, use the following buttons:

TAB: Use the TAB key to go from one field element to the next within a field group Ctrl +TAB: Use this to go from one field group to rhe first element of the next field group Ctrl + /: Use this to go directly to the command field To reach the menus in the menu bar, use the ALT key plus the underlined letter in the menu you want to select from orAl t and cursor navigation via the arrow keys. For more shortcuts, use Customizing of local layout (Alt+FJ2)---> SAP GUI help.

~898


2009

TSCM60


If the command field is ready for input, you can use the Fl field help (icon on screen or function key Fl on keyboard) to display possible entries for this field. The following entries are possible:

In to end the current transaction /nXXXX to start transaction XXXX from another transaction. Without the /n prefix, you can start transaction XXXX only from the SAP Easy Access. /o to display a list of your own sessions. /oXXXX to start transaction XXXX from another transaction in a new session.

/nend to log off a session with a confirmation prompt. /ncx to end a logon session without a confirmation prompt. /i to delete the current active session. You can find the transaction code XXXX for an application either in the overview menu on the SAP Easy Access screen, in the status bar, or in the respective application under System ->Status. Note: As an exception, do not use the F4 help on the command field to see the input help. The F4 help of the command field only lists the last 15 different entries in the command field. This list can be found in the registry on the user's computer and is valid for all sessions (independently of the system used). Note: By entering search_ sap_menu or search_user_menu in the command field, you can search the SAP standard menu or your user menu respectively for any string or transaction code. As a result, you will see a list of all hits that show how you can reach the functions found via the menu or the transaction code.

Personalization of the User Interface The system provides you with a range of personalization options. Among other things. you can:

influence the appearance of the SAP Easy Access initial screen. adjust the Local Layout preset user-specific parameters

2009


899~

TSCM60

Unit 25: Navigation

Figure 319: Two personalization options

SAP Easy Access Settings To make settings for SAP Easy Access, choose Extras--+ Settings. A dialog box is displayed in which you can determine whether: the favorites appear before or after the menu a menu is displayed at all in addition to the favorites the technical names (transaction codes) of the menu entries in the navigation area appear the start logo is visible on the right hand side of the screen

Customizing of local layout You can find the Customizing of local layout option with the following pushbutton from the system toolbar:

Figure ·320: Customizing of local layout

B.9."

900


2009

TSCM60


Using the Cuslomizing of Local Layou/ pushbutton opens a context menu that you can use to select various functions. For example, this allows you to use Sel Color in Syslem ... to select a different color scheme for your GUJ, or to use New Design. .. to define a new color scheme. Via Cuslomizing of Local Layout-> Oplions... , you can, among other things, do the following: determine the speed at which the quick info is displayed and specifY which messages (success message, warning message, error message) are to be

displayed in a dialog box on the Oplions tab page. intluence the cursor behavior on the Cursor tab page. manage the input history on the Local Dala tab page. When it has been activated, the input history builds up a small database in the frontend containing the last x entries for input fields in transactions. You can specifY the value for "x" yourself. These entries are offered to you as input help for the fields that have been declared accordingly. The input history has a certain delay that you can minimize under Options... -->Local data --)>

Hist01y--)> Immediately.

determine on the Experl tab page that in addition to the description, the key of an entry is displayed in dropdown lists, and whether the entries are sorted ;'!~

according to keys or descriptions. (You can recognize a dropdown list by .,;;.i on the right hand side in the input field.)

Hint: For more information about these settings, see the SAP

documentation: Getting Started----? Customizing the Display Options.

Prepopulating Parameters You can make personal presettings under System --> User Profile--> Own Data. You can do this on the Address, Defaults, and Parameters tab pages.

Hint: You can prepopulate frequently-used input fields with default values using parameters. A prerequisite for this, however, is that a parameter ID has been assigned to the relevant input field. To find a parameter ID, place the cursor in the input field to be prepopulated, select

I;s

the Fl help, and then choose Technicalhiformation. A dialog box will then open up, showing the relevant parameter ID under Field data (provided that a parameter ID has been assigned to the field). You take this parameter ID (for example, "BUK") for the company code and assign the desired value to it in your user presettings on the Paramelers tab page. In consequence, all fields whose parameter ID references BUK will be prepopulated with the value you specified.

2009


901 W,'

TSCM60

Unit 25: Navigation

~902


2009

TSCM60


Exercise 44: Selecting Functions and Personalizations Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: Calling functions in various ways and navigating in the system using simple personalization options in the SAP system.

Business Example None

Task 1 : Different Ways to Access User Overview Determine who is logged on to the training system. I.

Start the transaction that displays the user who is logged on. To do so, follow the path from the SAP standard menu Tools ->Administration -> Monit(Jr-> System Monitoring--)- User Overview.

2.

Determine the transaction code of the transaction.

3.

Leave the user overview with either F3 or the@ Back button. Then enter sm04 in the command field and confirm your entry using Enter to execute the transaction. This takes you directly to the user overview.

Task 2: Some Entries in the Command Field What entries can be made in the command field? I.

Start this exercise on the SAP Easy Access screen. Enter the following entries in the command field, one after the other, without returning to the SAP Easy Access screen, and note your observations. You do not need to make any entries on the results screen other than /nend. Choose No. Entry

Result

su3

sm04 /nsm04 /nend


2009


903~

TSCM60

Unit 25: Navigation

Task 3: Easy Personalization Options Display the transaction code in the menu as well as in the status line.

~904

I.

On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extras -> Settings and activate the display of technical names in the menu. Then test this setting by choosing Tools~ Administration ~Monitor~ System Monitoring. You can now take transaction code SM04 for the User Overview directly from the menu.

2.

Call the user overview and display the transaction code of the transaction in the status line.


2009


TSCM60

Solution 44: Selecting Functions and Personalizations Task 1: Different Ways to Access User Overview Determine who is Jogged on to the training system. I.

Start the transaction that displays the user who is logged on. To do so, follow the path from the SAP standard menu Tools--> Administration--> Monitor--> System Monitoring--> User Overview. a)

2.

3.

Solution unnecessary because it is explained in task.

Determine the transaction code of the transaction. a)

Choose System--> Status ... . This is transaction code SM04.

b)

Close the dialog box.

Leave the user overview with either F3 or the 'iJBack button. Then enter sm04 in the command field and confirm your entry using Enter to execute the transaction. This takes you directly to the user overview. a)


Task 2: Some Entries in the Command Field What entries can be made in the command field? I.

Start this exercise on the SAP Easy Access screen. Enter the following entries in the command field, one after the other, without returning to the SAP Easy Access screen, and note your observations. You do not need to make any entries on the results screen other than /nend. Choose No.


2009


905~

TSCMSO

Unit 25: Navigation

Entry

Result

su3

sm04 /nsm04 /nend a)

Entry

Result

su3

Calling the function Maintain User Profile

sm04

Unsuccessful start of User Overview. A transaction can be started directly (without the prefix /n) only from the SAP Easy Access screen.

/nsm04

Successful start of User List. In first ends the current transaction and then starts the specified transaction.

/nend

A message asks if you want to log off. You can now leave the system. Choose No.

Task 3: Easy Personalization Options Display the transaction code in the menu as well as in the status line. I.

On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Extras --> Settings and activate the display of technical names in the menu. Then test this setting by choosing Tools ----+AdministraTion----+ /l.fonitor----+ s._vsTem A1onitoring. You can now

take transaction code SM04 for the User Overview directly from the menu. a)

2.


Call the user overview and display the transaction code of the transaction in the status line. a)

In the status line, use the pushbutton for choosing the display options and choose Transaction. From now on, the associated transaction code

will also be displayed in the status line for each transaction called.

W'

906


2009


TSCMSO

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Create favorites Start the functions of SAP systems in different ways Describe the standard menus System and Help Use various options for personalizing the SAP system

Related Information Online documentation Extended help for SAP Easy Access. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Help--> Application Help.

2009


907~

TSCM60

Unit 25: Navigation

Lesson: Help Options Lesson Overview This lesson familiarizes you with the help options available to you with the function keys Fl and F4.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Use the basic Fl help functions Use the F4 help Call up the information provided by the online documentation

Business Example You want to collect further information about field> that are ready to accept input, such as the significance of the field and which values can be entered.

Field Help (F1 Help) The Fl key provides you with explanations of fields, menus, functions, and system messages. The field help also provides access to technical information on The relevant field. There you will also find the parameter ID, for example, which you can use to prepopulate input fields.

W9os


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Help Options

Indicates whether spool requests are printed immediately. Select this fJekl to print your spool requests Immediately.

Leave the field blank to retain spool requests h the spool system until they are released. To release these spool requests for prfltilg, you can use system-> services-> OUtput conllol/er.

Figure 321: Field Help (F1 Help) The dialog box of the Pe1:(ormance Assistant provides you with more push buttons that you can use to access further data on the selected field. In addition to the link to the context-sensitive Application Help, another important help route is the link to the Tee/mica/ Information. Here you get further intormation such as the parameter ID assigned to the field. Note: It may be necessary to first activate the Performance Assistant from the menu path Help---. Settings---. Fl Help.

Input Help (F4 Help) By pressing the F4 key, you get information on possible input values. Instead of pressing F4, you can click the pushbutton directly to the right of a selected field to invoke the input help for that field. If fields are populated with a "checkmark.. symbol, you can only proceed in the relevant application after entering a permitted value (required/mandatory input). Hint: Many fields of an application can be designated as required(mandatory) or optional-entry fields, suppressed, or populated invisibly with unalterable pre-set values

2009


909 W,'"

TSCM60

Unit 25: Navigation

, ,;~~;Y:: _f)efauks- '

:,:~~~~

'i

<: /,,,/_,:-:-,>;: io~,~~~;.e;

Figure 322: Input Help (F4 Help)

The input help offers a list of possible entries for a field. lfthere are many possible entries, an additional selection screen is "inserted". In the case of a very long result list, the input help shows only the number of entries specified by the user under Help-> Settings on the F4 Help tab page. The default value for this is 500.

SAP Library (Online Documentation) The SAP Library is a valuable aid in getting to know system functions. It affords access to the online documentation. The information stored there not only describes the use of system functions but also explains system architecture concepts, gives examples of sensible configurations of a wide variety of processes, and warns you of possible user errors and their consequences. In addition, the online documentation often contains tips and tricks to facilitate and accelerate your everyday work in the system.

~910


2009

TSCM60


Figure 323: The SAP Library

Hint: You can also access the SAP Library on the Internet. Call up website http://help.sap.com. Once you have invoked the SAP Library, you can access the documentation of all products in different SAP releases with a full-text search facility (per solution).

2009


911~

TSCM60

Unit 25: Navigation

~912


2009

TSCM60


Exercise 45: Help Options Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: Use the Fl help and the F4 help

Business Example You wish to obtain further information about a field on your screen.

Task: : Use of the F1 and F4 Help Functions Test the Fl and F4 help within transaction SU3.

2009

I.

Call Maintain your own user data either from the system menu or with transaction code SU3. From within user data maintenance, invoke the Fl help for various input fields. Find the parameter 1D for the Logon Language field via Technica/!nformalion. To do so, use the display in the Perfonnance Assistant.

2.

Call the F4 help for the Logon Language field. Which language key stands for "'Ukrainian"?


913~

TSCM60

Unit 25: Navigation

Solution 45: Help Options Task: : Use of the F1 and F4 Help Functions Test the Fl and F4 help within transaction SU3. I.

Call Maintain your own user data either from the system menu or with transaction code SU3. From within user data maintenance, invoke the Fl help for various input fields. Find the parameter ID for the Logon Language field via Technical Information. To do so, use the display in the Performance Assistant. a)

Start transaction SU3 by, for example, entering the transaction code in the Command Field.

b)

Choose the Defaults tab.

c)

Select the Logon language field and choose®, with the quick-info text Help (FI). Pe1jormance Assistant is opened.

d)

To display the Technical Information, choose~ Technical Information. The Parameter ID for the Logon language field is SPR.

7

Call the F4 help for the Logon Language field. Which language key stands for "Ukrainian''? a)

Select the Logon language field and choose F4 Key. The language key for Ukrainian is UK.

~914


2009

TSCM60


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Use the basic Fl help functions Use the F4 help Call up the information provided by the online documentation

Related Information For more information, see http://help.sap.com.

2009


915~

TSCM60

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: Log on to the system successfully List and use the elements of an SAP GUI screen Log off successfully from the system Create favorites Start the functions of SAP systems in different ways Describe the standard menus System and Help Use various options for personalizing the SAP system Use the basic Fl help functions Use the F4 help Call up the information provided by the online documentation

~916


2009

TSCM60

Test Your Knowledge

Test Your Knowledge I.

You can work in only one window (session) in an SAP system. Determine whether this statement is true or false.

2.

o

True

o

False

Which statements apply to a client in an SAP system? Choose the correct answer(s).

o

3.

0

A B

0

c

0

D

A A A A

client forms a completely independent business unit. client has its own database. client corresponds with a customer. client can represent an entire company.

The following entries in the command field prompt the system to do something useful: Choose the correct answer(s).

o o

B

/nend /nex

0

c

?SM04

0

D

/nsm04

0

E F

from the SAP Easy Access screen: SM04 from the SAP Easy Access screen: search_ sap_menu

0

4.

A

The following personalization options are available to you in the SAP GU!. Choose the correct answer(s).

o

2009

0

A B

0

c

0

D

0

E

0

F

You can change the font size to a certain extent in the SAP GU!. You can vary the size of input fields. You can have system messages displayed in a dialog box. Each user can include a screen of his or her own in SAP Easy Access. You can suppress the display of pictures in the SAP GUI. You can user a personal input history on your frontend.


917~

Test Your Knowledge

5.

TSCM60

You can use the Fl key to ... Choose the correct answer(s).

o D

A B

D

c

D D

6.

Obtain an explanation of the meaning/significance of a field View a list of possible entries Change your user data (such as the logon language) Exit the current session Obtain technical details relating to a field

D E

You use the F4 key to ... Choose the correct answer(s).

o o o D

D

7.

A B C D E

Open a new session Obtain technical details relating to a program Call up the SAP Library Obtain a Jist of possible entries for an input field Generate a print request for the current screen

The context-sensitive SAP Library is also available to you via the Fl key. Determine whether this statement is true or false.

o o

~918

True False


2009

TSCM60

e .

..

Test Your Knowledge

Answers I.

You can work in only one window (session) in an SAP system. Answer: False With just one logon, it is possible to work simultaneously in up to 6 windows (sessions).

2.

Which statements apply to a client in an SAP system? Answer: A, D The data from all clients of an SAP system lies in a common database. However, this data is also completely separate, so that different companies can also be managed and controlled in different clients. A client is not a "customer'· in an SAP system.

3.

The following entries in the command field prompt the system to do something useful:

Answer: A, B, D, E, F You can enter transaction codes directly in the SAP Easy Access screen. From other screens in the system. you must first enter /n. /nend and /nex are different ways for logging off. ?SM04 is not a recognized entry. search_ sap_menu is a pennitted entry, which creates a search template for entries in the SAP menu. 4.

The following personalization options are available to you in the SAP GUI. Answer: A, C, E, F

Numerous personalization options are available with the menu option Extras, the pushbutton Customizing of local layout, and from the status line and Help --> Sellings.... End users cannot influence the size of input fields, however. It is also not possible to include a screen of your own in SAP Easy Access using the SAP GUI. 5.

You can use the Fl key to ... Answer: A, E The Fl help provides field documentation and technical information about the field.

2009


919~

Test Your Knowledge

6.

TSCMGO

You use the F4 key to ... Answer: D The F4 key provides a list of possible entries for a selected field.

7.

The context-sensitive SAP Library is also available to you via the Fl key. Answer: True You can call up the context-sensitive help with the Application Help button in the F I help window.

~920


2009

nit Appendix Unit Overview This unit provides some additional information that is mainly technical. The content of this unit is not part of the standard course.

G .

.

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: Table structures in sales and distribution Matchcode objects Authorization objects Control delivery blocks Set up group master contracts

Set up cancellation rules for contracts.

Unit Contents Lesson: Appendix: Additional Technical Information ....................... 922 Lesson: Appendix: Additional Topics ......................................... 941

2009


921~

TSCM60

Unit 26: Appendix

Lesson: Appendix: Additional Technical Information Lesson Overview The Jesson contains additional technical information and is not part of the standard course.

e ..

Lesson Objectives After completing this Jesson, you will be able to:

'

Table structures in sales and distribution Matchcode objects Authorization objects

Business Example

e '

'

KNA1

l

!

I KNVK I

KNW

B

I KNVA I l KNVD

!

l

KNVI

KN

B

Figure 324: Table Structure for Customers - SD View

These tables contain the following information:

~922

KNAI:

Customer master, general information

KNVK:

Contact person

KNVV:

Customer master, sales area

KNVA:

Unloading points

KNV!:

Tax indicators

KNVP:

Partner functions


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Appendix: Additional Technical Information

KNVD:

Documents

KNVL:

Licenses

KNVS:

Shipping data

Logical database for customer master: DD F:

Customer database

KNVH Figure 325: Table Structure for Customer Hierarchies

This table contains customer hierarchies. You create customer hierarchy nodes as customer master data.

•.~.ii..D'+'c.. ~ xk>>,n-'

MC~ MCHA

II

MARD

I

r·

I MCHB I Figure 326: Table Structure for Materials


2009

MARA:

General material data

MAKT:

Short texts

MARM:

Conversion factors


923~

TSCM60

Unit 26: Appendix

MVKE:

Sales data (for each sales organization and distribution channel)

MLAN:

Sales data (for each country)

MAEX:

Export licenses

MARC:

Plant data

MBEW:

Valuation data

MLGN:

Warehouse management inventory data

MLGT:

Warehouse management inventory type data

MVER:

Consumption data

MAPR:

Pointers for forecast data

MARD:

Storage location data

MCHI:

Cross-plant batches

MCHA:

Batches

MCHB:

Batch stocks

Logical databank for material master: CKM:

Material master

MSM:

Material master

KNMTK

KNMT Figure 327: Table Structure for Customer- Material Information These tables contain the following information:

~924


2009

TSCM60


KNMTK:

Header table

for increased performance KNMT:

MAST

I

Data table

8828 -E T

T

T

T

TPST

I

I

STKO

STAS

STPO

'

Figure 328: Table Structure for Bills of Material


2009

MAST

Material assignment to BOM

EQST

Equipment assignment to BOM

KDST

Sales order assignment to BOM

DOST

Document assignment to BOM

STST

Standard object assignment to BOM

TPST

Functional location assignment to BOM

STKO

BOM header data

STZU

Time-independent STL data

STAS

BOM item selection

STPO

BOM item data

STPU

Subitem data


925~

TSCM60

Unit 26: Appendix

lvf3~)ll/NAsT·I

I §ADR I

I.

STXL

I

Figure 329: Table Structure for Sales Activities These tables contain the following information: VBUK:

Header status and administrative data

VBKA

Sales activity

VBUV:

Incompleteness log

VBPA:

SD document: Partner

SADR:

Address

VBFA:

SD document flow

NAST:

Output

STXH:

Texts: Header

STXL:

Texts: Lines

Logical database: AK V:

~926

Sales documents


2009

TSCM60


I I I I

VBUK

VBAK

VBKD

Header status

Header

Business person

VMVA Matchcode

STXH/STXL Texts

NAST OUtput

PP status

JSTO

I

I

VEDA

I

Contract

1

I I

I

I I

I

I I

I1 Incompleteness VBUV I

VEPA Partner

VAKPA

Partner index

VBFA Flow

r

1 1

Figure 330: Sales Document Tables - Header

These tables contain the following information: VBUK:

Header status and administrative data

VBAK:

Sales document: Header data

VBKD:

Sales document: Business data

VAKPA:

Partner index

VEDA:

Contract

VBPA:

Partner

VBUV:

Incompleteness log

YBFA:

SD document flow

VMVA:

Match codes

STXH:

Texts: !-leader

STXL:

Texts: Lines

NAST:

Output

JSTO:

PP status

-20_0_9______________________©_c_2_00_9_S_A_P__A_G_._A_II-rig_h_ts--re-se_N_e_d-.--------------~9~2~7~~

TSCM60

Unit 26: Appendix

. .

VBUP

VBAP

VBKD

Status

Item

Business person

VAPMA

VEDA

Material index

Contract

:::;1

VEPVG

VBLB Forecast

Shipping index

delivery schedules

VMVA

VBEP

VBBEIS

Matchcode

Settings

Requirements

STXH/STXL

'11

Texts

'11

Variants

Output

Technical objects

CO object

Services

NAST

KONV Conditions

=r =r =r

,---"'vsf.cu::;v--''11 Incompleteness

,---,VB"='Fc;-A--''lJ

Row VBPA Partner

.---J"'s"'ro=----''11

=r

PP status

Figure 331: Sales Document Tables - Item


~928

VBUP:

Item status

VBAP:

Sales document: Item data

VBKD:

Sales document: Business data

VEBA:

Contract

VBLB:

Forecast delivery schedules

VBEP:

Sales document: Schedule line

VBBE:

Individual requirements

VBBS:

Summarized requirements

VBUV:

Incompleteness log

VBFA:

SD document flow

VBPA:

Partner

JSTO:

PP status

NAST:

Output

STXH:

Texts: Header

STXL:

Texts: Lines

KONV:

Conditions


2009

TSCM60


,f.iiF-1."'' '\\

VBKOF

~ ~?#})?'<'

I I

VBKPA

I

VAPMA

VAKPA

I

VLPMA

VLKPA

I

VRPMA

VAKGU ·~

VRKPA VMVA VMVL VEPVG VBFA VKDFS

:I

VMCF VMCR VBSG

Figure 332: Index Tables

VBKOF:

SD index:

Open sales activities for partner functions

VBKPA:

SD index:

Sales activities for partner functions

VAKPA:

SD index:

Sales orders for partner functions

VLKPA:

SD index:

Deliveries- Partner functions

VRKPA:

SD index:

Billing documents- Partner functions

VAPMA:

SD index:

Order items - Material

VLPMA:

SD index:

Billing document items

VRPMA:

SD index:

Material ranking item - Material

VAKGU:

SD index:

Validity of inquiries and quotations

VEPVG:

Shipping due index:

VKDFS:

SD index:

VBFA:

SD document flow

VMYA:

Matchcode object:

Sales documents

VMVL:

Matchcode object:

Deliveries

VMCF:

Matchcode object:

Billing documents

YlviCR:

Matchcode object:

Invoice lists

VBSG:

Matchcode object:

SD document groups

Billing trigger

-20_0_9------------------------©--20_0_9_S_A_P__A_G_.-A-II-r-ig-ht_s_r-es-e-~-e-d-.----------------~9~2~9~

TSCM60

Unit 26: Appendix

Figure 333: Customer Matchcodes

All fields used as search terms to access a table are contained in a matchcode object. Tables whose keys you use for searches are called primary tables. Tables added to the matchcode object and whose fields can be used to set up search tenns are called secondary tables. Several matchcode !D's can exist for a matchcode object. The matchcode ID determines which fields are used for setting up a search term Matchcode IDs used operatively in the SAP system are known as system rnatchcodes. They cannot be changed.

~930


2009

TSCM60


Figure 334: Contact Partners - Matchcodes

All fields used as search terms to access a table are contained in a matchcode object. Tables whose keys you use for searches are called primary tables. Tables added to the matchcode object and whose fields can be used to set up search terms are called secondary tables. Several matchcode !D's can exist for a matchcode object. The matchcode ID detennines which fields are used for setting up a search term Matchcode IDs used operatively in the SAP system are known as system matchcodes. They cannot be changed. Maintain matchcode objects and IDs in the Data Dictionary.

2009


931~

Unit 26: Appendix

TSCM60

Figure 335: Material Matchcodes

All fields used as search terms to access a table are contained in a matchcode object. Tables whose keys you use for searches are called primary tables. Tables added to the matchcode object and whose fields can be used to set up search tem1s are called secondary tables. Several matchcode !D's can exist for a matchcode object. The matchcode lD determines which fields are used for setting up a search term Matchcode IDs used operatively in the SAP system are known as system matchcodes. They cannot be changed. Maintain match code objects and IDs in the Data Dictionary.

W'"

932


2009

TSCM60


Figure 336: Bill of Material Matchcodes

All fields used as search tenns to access a table are contained in a matchcode object. Tables whose keys you use for searches are called primary tables. Tables added to the matchcode object and whose fields can be used to set up search terms are called secondary tables. Several matchcode !D's can exist for a matchcode object. The matchcode lD determines which fields are used for setting up a search term Matchcode IDs used operatively in the SAP system are known as system matchcodes. They cannot be changed. Maintain matchcode objects and IDs in the Data Dictionary.

2009


933~

TSCM60

Unit 26: Appendix

Figure 337: Sales Activity Matchcodes

All fields used as search terms to access a table are contained in a matchcode object. Tables whose keys you use for searches are called primary tables. Tables added to the matchcode object and whose fields can be used to set up search terms are called secondary tables. Several matchcode !D's can exist for a matchcode object. The matchcode 10 determines which fields are used for setting up a search term Matchcode IDs used operatively in the SAP system are known as system matchcodes. They cannot be changed. Maintain matchcode objects and IDs in the Data Dictionary.

~934


2009

TSCM60


Figure 338: Sales Order Matchcodes

All fields used as search terms to access a table are contained in a matchcode object. Tables whose keys you use for searches are called primary tables. Tables added to the matchcode object and whose fields can be used to set up search terms are called secondary tables. Several matchcode !D's can exist for a matchcode object. The matchcode ID determines which fields are used for setting up a search term Matchcode IDs used operatively in the SAP system are known as system matchcodes. They cannot be changed. Maintain matchcode objects and IDs in the Data Dictionary.

2009

© 2009 SAP AG. All rights reseJVed.

935~

TSCM60

Unit 26: Appendix

Customer master

~

Authorization group

?

Sales area.

. ·•· .r-···.··1111""1

-'Bil't

Field groups Figure 339: Authorization Objects -Customer Masters

The authorization group is a four-character, alphanumeric field that you maintain in the customer master.

You maintain authorization objects for the customer master from the Sales view (sales area and authorization group) in the Sales and Distribution authorization class. You can combine as many fields from the customer master as required using field groups. You can define these groups in the 'Logistics general' chapter in the !MG. You maintain the authorization object itself, however, in the Accounting class. Here you will find additional authorization objects for the customer master from the Accounting

view~

for example company code authorization.

For detailed information on authorization objects, see the node on authorization management in the Sales and Distribution section of the !MG.

~936


2009

TSCM60


Material master

~-

----------------~'

r._•··~--

Company code

---P-Ia-nt_ _ _

j

Sales organization-


Figure 340: Authorization Objects - Material Masters You maintain the authorization objects for the material master under Materials Management--> Master data. For detailed instructions on authorization objects, see the Implementation Guide.

Bill of materials

~

8 8--

Authorization group

Bill of materials

categ~ ~

Collective changes

Plant

~t[tl 't3 i

BOM usage

I

Change without change number

Figure 341: Authorization Objects- Bills of Materials The authorization group is a four-character. alphanumeric field that you maintain in the BOM header. You maintain authorization objects for bills of materials in the authorization class for Production Planning.

2009


937~

TSCM60

Unit 26: Appendix

e '

.

Sales activities

Activity types and organizational units

?s

Employ"? partner in sales actJv1ty

·

~4t ~~...I ';"~

-----~§?-'!

Figure 342: Authorization Objects -Sales Activities

There is exactly one authorization object per sales activity that contains both the sales activity type as well as the following organizational units: Sales organization, Distribution Channel, Division, Sales Office and Sales Group. You can maintain the authorization objects tor the CAS sales activity in the Sales and Distribution authorization class. A particular enhancement for maintenance of authorization objects is available in the Sales Support area. Even if an authorization object has no authorization, you can still grant maintenance or display authorization to certain employees for individual transactions. In Customizing, assign the special function for the personnel partner type and the permitted activity to the sales activity. If an employee is stored as a pat1ner with this specified role in the sales activity, he or she can then implement the activities defined here. In this way you can define, for example, that the Key Account Manager displays all the customer sales activities, for which he or she is maintained as the responsible employee. This is possible even though the employee does not have authorization for processing documents in the corresponding organizational units.

Hint: You can make the assignment between employee and partner number in the personal master data. Here you can assign an SAP User ID to a personnel number.

~938


2009


TSCM60

1. Sales document types

2. Sales organization

Figure 343: Authorization Objects ·Sales Document Types

There are two authorization objects for sales document types: I. 2.

Sales document type and actions (create, change, display). Sales organization, distribution channel, division. actions

Maintain authoriz~tion objects for sales document types in the authorization class for Sales and Distribution.

2009


939 f:'S"'

TSCM60

Unit 26: Appendix

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Table structures in sales and distribution Matchcode objects Authorization objects

~940


2009

TSCM60

Lesson: Appendix: Additional Topics

Lesson: Appendix: Additional Topics Lesson Overview This lesson looks at a few additional topics in the area of delivery blocks and contracts.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Control delivery blocks Set up group master contracts Set up cancellation rules for contracts.

Business Example

e

.

.

Figure 344: Delivery Block Delivery blocks are used to remove certain procedures from the normal business process for certain reasons (such as political instability, insufficient stock, payment difficulties) and prevent any further automatic processing. This means that the process stops until the employee responsible can clarify the situation and decide on what to do, at which point he or she can deactivate the delivery block manually. You can define delivery blocks in sales documents at header, item, or schedule line level. The block at item level represents a default value for the schedule line(s) of that item.

2009


941~

TSCM60

Unit 26: Appendix

You can also set delivery blocks directly in sales document types or schedule line categories. When you create sales documents, the corresponding blocks are then set automatically at header or schedule line level. Customizing the blocking reasons in shipping (transactions OVLS, OVLX) controls the effect of the delivery blocks. At header level, you can control whether the blocking reason prevents you from creating a delivery at all or whether certain steps in the sales process are blocked. The delivery of sales documents that are blocked at header level is only prevented when the blocking reason is assigned to the delivery type in Customizing (transaction OVLX). If no assignment is defined, the delivery may be created. The blocking reason then has different effects on the various steps in the sales process. The settings in transaction OVLS determine which individual steps are affected: (Block: Sales Order/ Picking/ Requirement/ Goods Issue/ Print/ Delivery Due). In contrast, a block set at the schedule line level always blocks that schedule line for delivel)', regardless of the controls described above.

Figure 345: Cancellation

Contracts are frequently extended beyond the original contract duration if one of the contract partners has not cancelled it beforehand. Example: The contract begins on April 01. On October 01, the customer gives notice to cancel for November 01. However, because the contract cannot be cancelled before the end of its first year, the system issues a warning. You should accept the next possible cancellation date or enter a different one manually. For processing the cancellation of regularly extended contracts, you can define a cancellation procedure that contains one or more cancellation rules. The cancellation procedure can be stored in the contract profile and therefore controlled as a default value in new contracts.

~942


2009

TSCM60


e . .

Figure 346: Customizing for Cancellations

You can define cancellation rules to meet your requirements. They contain the date rule for detennining the cancellation date, cancellation notice period and the validity period for the rule. Example: In the example above, the customer can cancel the contract within one week. Within this period, he or she can cancel it on a daily basis (that is, at any point in the week). Another cancellation rule could detennine that the cancellation has to take place annually with a notice period of three months before the next cancellation date.

2009


943~

TSCM60

Unit 26: Appendix

Master contract

Contract 2334 Customer: Smith lllc,-=-1 P;lris

I

Contract 2376 Customer: Sm1t1l 8f!rlin

2334

!nc:~-1

Contract 2378

2376

--

Customer:,Srni!h !nc.

NeVtYodt ~aterial

V
M5 1 PC 2:30 USD

Figure 347: Grouping Contracts

In companies that use a substantial number of contracts for their business, several contracts will often be subject to the same business requirements. You can store these requirements in a master contract and link it to lower-level contracts. The master contract contains general conditions that are valid for all the lower-level contracts that refer to it. This ensures that the general data in all the lower-level contracts is consistent. In the standard system, sales document type GK is set up as the master contract. The group contract only contains header data. It therefore contains no items. You can use fields from tables in the document header (VBAK), business data (VBKD), partner data (VBPA), contract data (VEDA) and the data from the billing plan header (FPLA). The group master contract displays a list of all links to lower-level contracts. From this list you can then get to the individual lower-level contracts. If you activate the "Update lower-level contract" field in Customizing for master contracts, any changes in your master contract are immediately copied into the lower-level contracts. This triggers a workflow that accesses all the individual lower-level contracts. If any errors occur, the person who changed the master contract receives a workitem for manual processing.

F.

944


2009

TSCM60


Lower-Level Contract

Customer: Smith Inc. 1'./l'lln

Procedure: SDGK

Cfi1CC

Validity: Group

II

Header fields are copied

contract:

according to the referencing procedure

Figure 348: Grouping Contracts - Lower-Level Contracts

The lower-level contract is a standard document that contains a reference to the master contract.

When you enter the document number in the master contract field, a link is created to the lower-level contract. The link means that the system copies all the relevant fields (set in Customizing) from the master contract to the current !ower-level contract. You can control which fields and contract types are permitted for the link in the referencing requirements. Each time an entry is confirmed, the system checks the reference between the master and lower-level contracts with the rules defined in Customizing for the individual fields.

Figure 349: Referencing Requirements

2009


945~

TSCM60

Unit 26: Appendix

Customizing for master contracts takes place in two steps: I.

2.

Define which contract types are permitted as lower-level contracts for the master contract. For example, you can configure the settings so that only maintenance contracts can link to master contract MC. Define and configure all the fields needed for the reference in the referencing procedure. For each field, choose one of the three following rules:

Rule A - Unique field The link is only possible if the fields in the master and lower-level contracts are identical.

Rule B- Copying field The system copies the values in these fields from the master contract to the lower-level field. Different values in the lower-level contract are not permitted.

Rule C- Default field These fields are only copied from the master contract to the referenced lower-level fields if the data agreed before the master contract was changed. They can be overwritten in the lower-level contract. You can activate a message for each field in the referencing procedure that informs you in the lower-level contract of any changes caused by changes in the master contract. In Customizing for contracts, you can activate the function "Message: Master contractu.

~946


2009

TSCM60


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Control delivery blocks Set up group master contracts

Set up cancellation rules for contracts.

-20_0_9______________________©_c_2_0_09__ S_A_P_A_G_._A_II-ri-gh_t_s_re_s_e~--ed-.--------------~9~4~7~

TSCM60

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: Table structures in sales and distribution Matchcode objects Authorization objects Control delivery blocks Set up group master contracts Set up cancellation rules for contracts.

~948


2009

TSCM60

Course Summary

Course Summary You should now be able to: Maintain the key master data in Sales and Distribution, and name and define the required business structures Work with the various documents in Sales and Distribution. Describe the points of contact between Sales and Distribution and the areas of materials management, production (for example, assembly order), and financial accounting Perform analyses for the Sales and Distribution processes Integrate sales in the Sales and Distribution process chain Configure Customizing so that it represents your specific sales requirements Describe the position of shipping within the supply chain Execute the various functions within shipping processing Adapt the system to your requirements for shipping processing

2009


949~

TSCM60

Course Summary

~950


2009

Appendix 1

Delivery Interface and Communication Scenarios

Figure 350: Structure of the DELVRY03 Delivery Interface

The DELVRY02 delivery interface consists of different segments containing information from the delivery header, the delivery item, and the shipping units. DELVRY02 (Release 4.6A) has more segments than DELVRYOl (Release 4.0), which contain dangerous goods data at header and item level. DELVRY03 (Release 4.6B) also contains segments for the external release number, data on the express delivery company, tracking data, and the repacking of shipping units.

2009


951~

. TSCM60

Appendix 1:

POD

Warehouse verification Shipping confirmation

Warehouse order Shipping crder

Figure 351: Communication Scenarios

The delivery interface groups the ALE and ED! outputs with reference to the delivery. In this case, EDI messages are generally used for external communication and ALE message for internal communication. The following messages are defined in the standard system: Sending a shipping notification (DESADV, outbound ED!) Informing the forwarding agent (CARNOT, outbound ED!) Shipping order to warehousing contractor (SHPORD, outbound ED!) Shipping confirmation from service agent (Sl-IPCON, inbound ED!) Warehouse order to internal warehouse (WHSORD, outbound ALE) Warehouse verification from internal warehouse (WHSCON, inbound ALE) Proof of delivery (STPPOD, outbound, ED!) Proof of delivery (STPPOD, inbound, ED!)

~952


2009

Appendix 2 Menu Paths

Menu Paths Frequently-Used Menu Paths Activities

Menu Path

Application: Master data

Logistics -7 Logistics Execution

Display sold-to party

-7

--+

Master Data

Partner--+ Customer--+ Display--+ Sales and Distriblllion .· Total

Display material

-> Materia/-> Material-> Display-> Display Current Status

Display master records for output

-> Output-> Shipping/Handing Units/Groups-> Display

Define routes

---t

Route determination

--).Transportation--+ Routes--+ Route Determination or use the JMG (see below)

Define route schedules

---+

Activities

Menu Path

Transportation--+ Routes --+Define Routes or use the IMG (see be/ow)

Transportation

--+

Routes --+ Route Schedule

Application:

2009

Sales order processing

Logistics--+ Sales anti Distribution --+Sales

Create/change/display order

->

Display document flow

->

Order -> Create/Change/Display

Order -> Change/Display -> Display Document Flow


953~

TSCMGO


Menu Path

Activities Application: Shipping processing

Logistics--) Logistics Execution --)- lnbountl Process---> Goods Receipt for Inbound Delivery

Create/change/display inbound delivery

--->Inbound Delive1y---> Create/Change/Display

Display Jist of inbound deliveries

--->Inbound Delive1y---> Lists---> Inbound Delive1y Monitor -l- List Inbound Deliveries

Packing inbound deliveries

--->Pack---> Inbound Delivery

Create transfer order

Putaway---> Create Ti·ansfer Order---> For Inbound Delive1y

Confirm the transfer order

Putaway---> Confirm Transfer Order---> Single Document --) In One Step

Post goods receipt

---> Pos1 Goods Receipt Document

Activities

Menu Path

--->

--->

Inb. Deli1'ery lndh:

Application: Shipping processing

Logistics~

Create/change/display outbound delivery

--->

Create outbound deliveries using collective processing

--->Inbound Delivery·---> Lists --->Inbound Delirery Monitor -l- List Inbound Deliveries

Display collective processing Jog

--->Pack---> Inbound Delive1y

Display document flow

Pwmvay-> Create Ti·ansfer Order---> For Inbound Delive1y

List of outbound deliveries

Putaway ---> Confirm Transfer Order -> Single Document ---> In One Step

Create output from deliveries Display change

Logistics Execution ~ Outbound Process---> Goods Issue for Outbound Delivery Inbound Delive1y ---> Create/Change/Display

->

-l-

Communication/Printing--) .....

--->Ow bound Delive1y-> Lists and Logs---> Changes

documents

~954


2009

TSCM60


Select incomplete outbound deliveries

---> Outbound De/ive1y ---> Lists and Logs ---> Incomplete Outbound Deliveries

Create single transfer order

Document

Picking in collective processing (combined picking)

(1) --->Picking---> Create Transfer Order---> Via Outbound Delive1y Monitor (2) ---> Picking---> Create Ti·ansfer Order~ Collective Processing

Activities

Menu Path

--->

Picking ---> Create Transfer Order ---> Single

Application: Shipping processing

Logistics ----*Logistics Execution ---+ Outbountl Process---> Goods Issue for Outbound Delivery

Confirm transfer order

---> Picking ---> Confirm Ti·ansfer Order ---> Single Document ---> In One Step

Confirm transfer orders for group

--->Picking---> Confirm Transfer Order---> Via Ow bound De/ive1y Monitor or---> Collective Processing

2009

Pack outbound delivery

Pack---> Outbound De/ive1y

Create output from shipping units

---+

Group outbound deliveries for loading

--..Loading - Louding Group _,. Crea!e---+ Ha Outbound Ddivery i\-/onilor

Create freight list

---+

Post single goods issue

-+ Post Goods Issue DocwneJit

Post goods issue using collective processing

--->Post Goods Issue---> Collective Processing Via Outbound De/ive1y Monitor

Cancel goods issue posting

--->

Post Goods Issue ---> Cancellation/Reversal

Proof of delivery

~

Proof of De lively ---> ..•

Communication/Printing ---t Handling Unit

Output

Communication/Printing---+ Loading Output ---+

Outbound Delive1:v Single


955~

TSCM60


Menu Path

Activities Application: Handling units

Logistics---+ Central Functions---+ Handling Unit Management

Display handling units

---+Handling Unit Monitor or---+ Display Handling Units --)> •••

Create/change/display packing instructions Activities

Master Data Packing Instruction Create/Change/Display

--l-

--)>

--)>

Menu Path

Customizing: Initial Screen

Define organizational units

Tools ---+ Customizing ---+ JMG ---+ Execute Project ---+Display SAP Reference JMG --l-

Enterprise Structure

--l-

Definition

Maintain plant

---+Logistics- General---+ Define Plant ....

Maintain storage location

--l- Materials Management--)> Maintain Storage Location

Maintain shipping point

---+Logistics Execution---+ Define Shipping Point, ...

Maintain warehouse number

LogiStics E\:ecurion Numbe1: ...

Activities

Menu Path

--)>

--)>

De;l'ne fVOrehouse

Customizing: Initial Screen

Tools--)> Customizing--)> JMG--)> Execute Project Display SAP Reference JMG

---+

Allocate organizational units

--)>

Enterprise Structure

--l-

Assignment

Shipping point- Plant

---+Logistics Execution---+ Assign Shipping Point to Plant

Warehouse number plant/storage location

Logistics R-recution --l- Assign Warehouse Number to Plant/Storage Location

Activities

Menu Path

--)>

+Customizing: Initial Screen

~956

Tools--)> Customizing--)> JMG--)> Execute Project ---+Display SAP Reference JMG


2009

TSCM60


Sales

->Sales ami Distribution ->Sales

Maintain sales document types

--)-Sales Documents---+ Sales Document Header---+ Define sales document types

Maintain item category

-+ Sales Documents -+ Sales Document Item Define item categories

---+

Assign item categories

---+ Sales Documents ---+ Sales Document Item Assign Item Categories

---+

Maintain schedule line categories

->

Activities

Menu Path

Sales Documents -> Schedule Lines Schedule Line Categories

->

Define

Shipping: System modifications

---+ Logistics Execution ---+Shipping---+ System Modifications

Control system messages

---+

Activities

Menu Path

Spec(fj' Characteristics for

~)ystem

Afessuges

Shipping: Basic functions

--t Logistics Execution Shipping Functions

Maintain shipping conditions

->

Maintain loading groups

-+ Shipping Point and Goods Receiving Point Determination ---+Define Loading Groups

Maintain shipping point determination

->

Maintain routes and stages

->

Maintain route

---+

-+

Shipping

---+

Basic

Shipping Point and Goods Receiving Point Determination-> Define Shipping Conditions

Shipping Point and Goods Receiving Point Determination ->Assign Shipping Points

Routes Stages

->

Define Routes -> Define Routes and

determination

Routes---+ Route Determination ---+Maintain Route Determination --)-

Set up scheduling

->

Maintain route schedule determination

-7

Scheduling -> Delivery Scheduling and Transportation Scheduling -> ... Routes--)- Route Schedule Determination

-20_0_9_______________________ ©_2_0_09__ S_A_P_A_G___A_II_ri-gh_t_s_re_s_e_~-ed-.--------------~9~5"'7~

TSCM60


Activities

Menu Path

Shipping: Deliveries

--)-Logistics Execution--)- Shipping--)- Deliveries

Maintain delivery types

-. Define delive1y t;pes

Maintain item categories for deliveries

-> D~fine

Maintain item category determination

-> Define Item Categ01y Determination in Deliveries

Set up number ranges

->Define Number Ranges for Deliveries

Item Categcries for Deliveries

Defining confirmation of ->Defining Confirmacion of Inbound Delive1y inbound delivery Set up delivery split by warehouse number

->Define Split Criteria for Deliveries-. Delive1y Split by Warehouse Number

Set up POD-relevance

->

Activities

Menu Path

Proof of Delive1y-> Set POD-Relevance Depending on Delivery Item Categ01y

Shipping: Deliveries

--)-Logistics Execution --)- Shipping____,. Copying Control

Copy control for deliveries

->

Activities

Menu Path

Copy Comrol for Deliveries

Shipping:

~958

Picking

--)-Logistics Execution--)- Shipping--)- Picking

Set up picking relevance

--)-Define relevant item categories

Controlling the warehouse number

--)- Lean WM--+ Define Control Parameters and Number Ranges for Warehouse No.

Maintain storage types

->

Lean WM-> Define Storage Type

Maintain movement types

->

Lean WM-> Define Movement Types

Maintain difference indicator

->

Lean WM-> Define Difference Indicators

Set up WM print control

->Lean WM-> Define Print Control

WM - Inventory Management interface

->

Lean WM-> Invenr01y Management Inte1:{ace


2009

TSCM60


Control warehouse number assignment

Lean WM -> Control "Plant/Storage Location/Warehouse No. 11 Assignment

Maintain doors

->

Lean WM-> Define Doors

Maintain staging areas

->

Lean WM-> Define Material Staging Areas

Maintain picking areas

->

Lean WM-> Define Picking Areas

Maintain rule for storage location determination

Determine Picking Location -> Define Rules for Picking Location Delermination

Maintain storage conditions

--->

->

->

Determine Picking Location ->Define Storage Conditions

Maintain storage location ---> Determine Picking Location --->Assign Picking determination Locations Activities

Menu Path

Shipping: Logistics Execution ---+Shipping__,. Packing

Packing

---+

Set up packing celevance

--->Packing Control by Item Categ01y

Maintain packaging material type

--->Define Packaging Material Tjpes

Define material group for ->Define Material Group for Packaging Material packaging material --->Define Allowed Packaging Materials Assign packaging material types to material group for packaging material

-20_0_9_______________________ ©_2_0_09__ S_A_P_A_G_._A_II-ri-gh_t_s-re_s_e~--ed-.--------------~9~5~9~

TSCM60


~960


2009

Index A

0

Application help, 909 Application Tool bar, 889

own data, 888

8

Parameter ID, 90 I, 908 performance assistant, 909 Personalization, 899

buttons, 889

c checkboxes, 889 Client, 886 command field, 899 Command field, 889 Command Field, 889 Customizing, 909 Customizing of local layout, 901

F Favorites, 895 Field Help, 908 , see field help

H

R Radio Buttons, 889

s -SAP Easy Access, 887 SAP GUI, 884 SAP Logon, 884 SAP Note, 887 search_sap_menu. 899 search_user_menu, 899 session, 886 Standard Toolbar, 889 Status Bar, 889 system menu, 896

help menu, 896

T

I

tab, 889 Tab page, 889 technical information, 909 Title Bar, 889 Transaction code, 889

Input fields, 889 input help, 909 , see input help input history, 90 I

u

M Mandatory entry, 909 Menu Bar, 889 multiple logon, 886

2009

p

user master record, 886 user menu, 895


961~

TSCM60

Index

~962


2009

Feedback SAP AG has made every effort in the preparation of this course to ensure the accuracy and completeness of the materials. If you have any corrections or suggestions for improvement, please record them in the appropriate place in the course evaluation.

2009


963~

Participant Handbook TSCM60 Order Fulfillment I SAP ERP -Sales and Services An SAP course -use it to learn, reference it for work

Recommend Documents